AUTODESK REVIT BUILDING 8.

1
®

Metric Tutorial

August 2005

Copyright © 2005 Autodesk, Inc.
All Rights Reserved
This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. AUTODESK, INC., MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS, AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS. IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC., BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF PURCHASE OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN. Autodesk, Inc., reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state cation, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.

Autodesk Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: 3D Props, 3D Studio, 3D Studio MAX, 3D Studio VIZ, 3DSurfer, ActiveShapes, ActiveShapes (logo), Actrix, ADI, AEC Authority (logo), AEC-X, Animator Pro, Animator Studio, ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Map, Autodesk, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk (logo), Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk University (logo), Autodesk View, Autodesk WalkThrough, Autodesk World, AutoLISP, AutoSketch, Biped, bringing information down to earth, CAD Overlay, Character Studio, Cinepak, Cinepak (logo), Codec Central, Combustion, Design Your World, Design Your World (logo), Discreet, EditDV, Education by Design, gmax, Heidi, HOOPS, Hyperwire, i-drop, Inside Track, Kinetix, MaterialSpec, Mechanical Desktop, NAAUG, ObjectARX, PeopleTracker, Physique, Planix, Powered with Autodesk Technology (logo), RadioRay, Revit, Softdesk, Texture Universe, The AEC Authority, The Auto Architect, VISION, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual TugBoat, Visual LISP, Volo, WHIP!, and WHIP! (logo). The following are trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: 3ds max, AutoCAD Architectural Desktop, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT Learning Assistance, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk Map, Autodesk Streamline, AutoSnap, AutoTrack, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, Buzzsaw.com, Cinestream, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Content Explorer, Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignProf, DesignServer, Design Web Format, DWF, DWG Linking, DXF, Extending the Design Team, GDX Driver, gmax (logo), gmax ready (logo),Heads-up Design, IntroDV, jobnet, ObjectDBX, onscreen onair online, Plans & Specs, Plasma, PolarSnap, ProjectPoint, Reactor, Real-time Roto, Render Queue, Visual Bridge, Visual Syllabus, and Where Design Connects.

Autodesk Canada Inc. Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk Canada Inc. in the USA and/or Canada, and/or other countries: discreet, fire, flame, flint, flint RT, frost, glass, inferno, MountStone, riot, river, smoke, sparks, stone, stream, vapour, wire. The following are trademarks of Autodesk Canada Inc., in the USA, Canada, and/or other countries: backburner, backdraft, Multi-Master Editing.

Third Party Trademarks
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.

Third Party Software Program Credits
ACIS Copyright © 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright © 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Copyright © 1997 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. International CorrectSpell ™ Spelling Correction System © 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield ™ 3.0. Copyright © 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE ® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE ® and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc. © Pantone, Inc., 2002 Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of color data and/or software which are licensed to Autodesk, Inc., to distribute for use only in combination with certain Autodesk software products. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright © 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN © RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC © RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin." Typefaces from the Bitstream ® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust © 1996. All rights reserved.

GOVERNMENT USE
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts ............................................................................................... 1
Understanding the Basics ................................................................................................................................. 2 Navigating the Revit Building User Interface ............................................................................................. 4

Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .................................................................................. 11
Creating Your First Building Model ............................................................................................................... 12 Creating and Modifying the Exterior Walls of the West Wing ................................................................ 12 Adding the Interior Walls of the West Wing ............................................................................................ 24 Dimensioning the Building Model ........................................................................................................... 32 Adding Doors and Windows ..................................................................................................................... 41 Adding Floors and Floor Openings ........................................................................................................... 58 Adding a Roof and Ceiling ........................................................................................................................ 74 Adding Multi-Level Stairs .......................................................................................................................... 80 Creating the East Wing and Passageway .................................................................................................. 87 Scheduling the Building Model .............................................................................................................. 100 Rendering the Building Model ................................................................................................................ 104 Documenting the Building Model .......................................................................................................... 106

Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings .......................................................................... 113
Modifying System Settings ........................................................................................................................... 114 Modifying General System Options ........................................................................................................ 114 Specifying File Locations ......................................................................................................................... 115 Specifying Spelling Options .................................................................................................................... 117 Modifying Snap Settings ......................................................................................................................... 118 Modifying Project Settings ........................................................................................................................... 120 Creating and Applying Materials ............................................................................................................ 120 Creating and Applying Fill Patterns ........................................................................................................ 123 Controlling Object Styles ........................................................................................................................ 125 Modifying Line Patterns and Styles ........................................................................................................ 128 Modifying Annotations ........................................................................................................................... 131 Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options ........................ 133 Modifying Project Browser Organization ............................................................................................... 134 Creating an Office Template ........................................................................................................................ 136 Choosing the Base Template ................................................................................................................... 137 Modifying Project Settings ...................................................................................................................... 137 Loading and Modifying Families and Groups ........................................................................................ 142 Modifying Views and View Templates ................................................................................................... 144 Modifying Render Scene Settings ........................................................................................................... 147 Modifying Import/Export Settings .......................................................................................................... 148 Setting up Shared and Project Parameters .............................................................................................. 149 Creating Named Print Settings ............................................................................................................... 151

Chapter 4 Ceilings ............................................................................................................................... 153
Creating Ceilings .......................................................................................................................................... 154 Creating Automatic Ceilings ................................................................................................................... 154 Creating Compound Ceilings ................................................................................................................. 156

Chapter 5 Openings ............................................................................................................................ 159
Cutting Roof Openings ................................................................................................................................ 160 Cutting a Dormer Opening in a Roof ..................................................................................................... 160 Creating a Perpendicular Roof Opening ................................................................................................. 164

Contents | i

Creating a Vertical Roof Opening ........................................................................................................... 167 Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings ................................................................................................... 170 Cutting an Opening in a Floor ............................................................................................................... 170 Cutting an Opening in a Ceiling ............................................................................................................ 173 Cutting an Opening Using the Shaft Tool .............................................................................................. 174

Chapter 6 Railings ............................................................................................................................... 177
Creating Railings .......................................................................................................................................... 178 Creating the Railing Layout .................................................................................................................... 178 Adjusting Railing Parameters .................................................................................................................. 180

Chapter 7 Roofs ................................................................................................................................... 185
Creating Roofs .............................................................................................................................................. 186 Creating an Extruded Roof ...................................................................................................................... 186 Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint ................................................................................................. 190 Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint ............................................................... 192 Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint .................................................................................................... 194 Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint ................................................................................................... 197 Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof ...................................................................................................... 199 Aligning Roof Eaves ................................................................................................................................ 201 Creating a Mansard Roof ........................................................................................................................ 202 Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits ............................................................................................................ 204 Creating Roof Fascia ................................................................................................................................ 204 Creating Gutters ...................................................................................................................................... 205 Creating Soffits ........................................................................................................................................ 206

Chapter 8 Stairs .................................................................................................................................. 209
Creating Stairs .............................................................................................................................................. 210 Creating the Main Lobby Stair Run ........................................................................................................ 210 Modifying the Main Lobby Stair Run ..................................................................................................... 215 Creating the Second Floor Lobby Side Stairs .......................................................................................... 221 Creating the Level 2 Landing Railings .................................................................................................... 224 Creating the Emergency Exit Stair Run .................................................................................................. 231 Creating a Semi-circular Exterior Stair Run ............................................................................................ 236 Working with the Stair Calculator .......................................................................................................... 241

Chapter 9 Walls .................................................................................................................................. 247
Creating Walls .............................................................................................................................................. 248 Sketching Walls ....................................................................................................................................... 248 Working with Compound Walls ............................................................................................................ 258 Working with Vertically Compound Walls ............................................................................................ 266 Joining Walls to Floors ............................................................................................................................ 276 Working with Foundation Walls ............................................................................................................ 278 Working with Wall Wraps ...................................................................................................................... 281 Assigning Wall Bottom and Top Attachments ....................................................................................... 283

Chapter 10 Curtain Systems ................................................................................................................ 287
Flat Curtain System ...................................................................................................................................... 288 Creating an Entrance .............................................................................................................................. 288 Adding Mullions to the Curtain System  ................................................................................................ 296 Curved Curtain System ................................................................................................................................ 299 Adding a Curved Curtain System  .......................................................................................................... 299 Adding a Custom Curtain Panel ............................................................................................................. 301 Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel  ...................................................................................... 304 Additional Curtain Systems ......................................................................................................................... 307 Sloped Glazings  ...................................................................................................................................... 307 Storefront System  ................................................................................................................................... 308 Curtain System by Lines  ........................................................................................................................ 311

Chapter 11 Creating Drawings ............................................................................................................ 315
Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project ........................................................................................................... 316 Creating a Drawing Sheet ....................................................................................................................... 316 Adding a Sheet to the Project .................................................................................................................. 323 Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet .......................................................................................... 324

ii | Contents

Creating New Views to Add to Sheets ..................................................................................................... 326 Using Legends .............................................................................................................................................. 333 Creating a Symbol Legend ...................................................................................................................... 333 Creating a Wall Type Legend .................................................................................................................. 335 Using a Legend View to Match Types ..................................................................................................... 337 Using Revision Tracking ............................................................................................................................... 339 Setting Up a Revision Table .................................................................................................................... 339 Sketching Revision Clouds ...................................................................................................................... 340 Tagging Revision Clouds ......................................................................................................................... 341 Working with Revisions .......................................................................................................................... 342

Chapter 12 Detailing ............................................................................................................................. 345
Creating a Detail from a Building Model ..................................................................................................... 346 Creating a Callout View .......................................................................................................................... 346 Detailing the View .................................................................................................................................. 350 Adding Detail Lines ................................................................................................................................. 356 Adding a Vapor Barrier and Insulation ................................................................................................... 359 Adding Break Lines ................................................................................................................................. 360 Adding Text Notes ................................................................................................................................... 363 Changing Component Order and Visibility Settings in Detail Views ......................................................... 364 Changing Detail Component Order in a Detail View ............................................................................ 364 Changing Visibility Settings in a Detail View ........................................................................................ 366 Creating a Drafted Detail ............................................................................................................................. 369 Creating a Drafting View ........................................................................................................................ 369 Creating a Detail in the Drafting View ................................................................................................... 369 Importing a Detail into a Drafting View ................................................................................................. 376 Creating a Reference Callout .................................................................................................................. 379

Chapter 13 Scheduling ......................................................................................................................... 381
Creating Type and Instance Schedules ........................................................................................................ 382 Creating a Window Schedule .................................................................................................................. 382 Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams ..................................................................................................... 385 Creating a Room Schedule ...................................................................................................................... 385 Creating a Room Color Diagram ............................................................................................................ 394 Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes ....................................................................................................... 396 Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions ..................................................................... 396 Scheduling Shared Parameters ..................................................................................................................... 401 Creating a Multi-Category Schedule ....................................................................................................... 401 Using Formulas and Filters in Schedules ...................................................................................................... 406 Creating a Level-Based Door Schedule with a Filter ............................................................................... 406 Creating a Wall Schedule with Filters and a Formula ............................................................................ 408 Scheduling Project Parameters ..................................................................................................................... 409 Creating a Room Schedule with Project Parameters ............................................................................... 410 Exporting Project Information with ODBC ................................................................................................. 411 Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access ............................................................................ 411

Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning ......................................................................................... 413
Setting the Base Elevation of a Project ......................................................................................................... 414 Setting the Base Elevation of a House ..................................................................................................... 414 Dimensioning ............................................................................................................................................... 416 Creating Dimensions .............................................................................................................................. 417 Controlling Witness Line Location ........................................................................................................ 422 Modifying Dimension Properties ............................................................................................................ 425 Working with Alignments and Constraints ........................................................................................... 426 Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions ......................................................................................... 432 Annotating ................................................................................................................................................... 434 Creating Angular Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 434 Sequentially Tagging Rooms ................................................................................................................... 435 Tagging Doors and Windows .................................................................................................................. 437

Chapter 15 Viewing .............................................................................................................................. 441
Viewing a Building Model ............................................................................................................................ 442 Exploring the Building Model ................................................................................................................ 442 Creating a Perspective View with a Camera ........................................................................................... 445

Contents | iii

Creating a Section View .......................................................................................................................... 451 Creating Elevation Views ........................................................................................................................ 453 Controlling Fill Pattern Colors ..................................................................................................................... 455 Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material ..................................................................................... 455 Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type ................................................................... 457 Creating a View Plan Region ........................................................................................................................ 459 Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan ................................................................................................... 459

Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .............................................................. 463
Rendering an Exterior View ......................................................................................................................... 464 Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model ....................................................................... 464 Adding Trees to the Site .......................................................................................................................... 468 Creating a Perspective View .................................................................................................................... 470 Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View ............................................................................................. 473 Rendering an Interior View .......................................................................................................................... 476 Adding RPC People ................................................................................................................................. 476 Creating the Interior Perspective View ................................................................................................... 478 Creating a New Render Scene ................................................................................................................. 481 Defining Daylights and Rendering the View .......................................................................................... 482 Creating and Recording Walkthroughs ....................................................................................................... 484 Creating a Walkthrough ......................................................................................................................... 484 Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position ........................................................................ 487 Recording the Walkthrough ................................................................................................................... 489

Chapter 17 Presentation Views ........................................................................................................... 491
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique ............................................................................................... 492 Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique .............................................................................................. 492 Using Advanced Model Graphics ............................................................................................................ 494 Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet ............................................................................................................ 496 Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique .............................................................................................. 499 Preparing the Elevation View for the Analytique ................................................................................... 500 Adding a Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet .......................................................... 502 Adding Section Views to the Analytique ..................................................................................................... 504 Preparing a Section View for the Analytique .......................................................................................... 505 Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View ............................................................................... 509 Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique ............................................................................... 510 Working with a Presentation View Template ......................................................................................... 514 Working in a Callout Analytique ............................................................................................................ 517 Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes .................................................................................................. 524 Creating Cutaway Isometric Views ......................................................................................................... 525 Creating Cutaway Perspective Views ...................................................................................................... 531 Annotating the Analytique ..................................................................................................................... 536

Chapter 18 About Families and the Family Editor ........................................................................... 539
Using Families and the Family Editor .......................................................................................................... 540 Introduction to Families ......................................................................................................................... 540 Introduction to the Family Editor .......................................................................................................... 542

Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .................................................................. 545
Creating a Door Family ................................................................................................................................ 546 Drawing the Door Plan View Components ............................................................................................ 546 Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry ................................................................................................. 550 Assigning Materials to the Door Components ....................................................................................... 553 Defining New Door Types ....................................................................................................................... 556 Creating a Window Family .......................................................................................................................... 558 Specifying the New Window Parameters ................................................................................................ 559 Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry ........................................................................................ 560 Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry ........................................................................................... 566 Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry .......................................................................................... 569 Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry ..................................................................................... 574 Assigning Materials to the Window Components ................................................................................. 584 Defining New Window Types ................................................................................................................. 587 Creating a Furniture Family ......................................................................................................................... 591 Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters ......................................................................................... 592

iv | Contents

Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry .................................................................................................... 597 Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry ..................................................................................... 600 Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry ..................................................................................................... 609 Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry .................................................................................................... 614 Defining New Furniture Types ................................................................................................................ 617 Creating a Baluster Family ........................................................................................................................... 619 Drawing a Baluster .................................................................................................................................. 619 Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run .............................................................................................. 621 Creating Profile Families .............................................................................................................................. 623 Drawing a Sweep Profile .......................................................................................................................... 623 Drawing a Rail Profile ............................................................................................................................. 624 Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile ................................................................................................................ 624 Drawing a Reveal Profile ......................................................................................................................... 625 Drawing a Host Sweep Profile ................................................................................................................. 626 Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path ................................................................................................... 627 Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls .................................................................................................. 629 Creating a Room Tag .................................................................................................................................... 631 Specifying Room Tag Parameters ............................................................................................................ 631 Creating an Annotation Symbol .................................................................................................................. 633 Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol ............................................................................ 633 Adding the New North Arrow to a Project ............................................................................................. 636 Creating a Titleblock Family ........................................................................................................................ 636 Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet ............................................................................................... 637 Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock .............................................................................................. 640 Adding the Titleblock to a New Project .................................................................................................. 649 Creating In-Place Families ............................................................................................................................ 650 Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family ............................................................................................... 651 Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family .......................................................................................... 658

Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques ................................................................. 661
Planning a Parametric Component Family .................................................................................................. 662 Determining Component Needs ............................................................................................................. 662 Selecting the Family Template ................................................................................................................ 663 Creating the Component Skeleton .............................................................................................................. 665 Adding Reference Planes ......................................................................................................................... 666 Adding Dimensions and Constraints ...................................................................................................... 671 Creating New Length Parameters ........................................................................................................... 674 Flexing the Component Model ............................................................................................................... 678 Adding Solid Geometry ................................................................................................................................ 680 Creating Solid Extrusions ........................................................................................................................ 680 Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry ............................................................................................ 682 Creating Additional Solid Geometry ...................................................................................................... 685 Testing the Family in a Project ..................................................................................................................... 693 Loading a Family into a Project .............................................................................................................. 693 Testing a Family Instance in a Project .................................................................................................... 694 Working with Nested Subcomponents ........................................................................................................ 697 Adding a Nested Component ................................................................................................................. 698 Creating Formula-controlled Parameters ................................................................................................ 702 Arraying Nested Subcomponents ............................................................................................................ 706 Reloading a Family into a Project ........................................................................................................... 711 Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters ..................................................................................... 712 Creating and Applying Subcategories ..................................................................................................... 713 Creating Material Parameters .................................................................................................................. 717 Controlling Component Visibility ............................................................................................................... 719 Assigning Detail Level and View Controls .............................................................................................. 719 Creating Component Types ......................................................................................................................... 722 Creating Multiple Component Types ..................................................................................................... 722 Creating Conditional Formulas .............................................................................................................. 723

Chapter 21 Area Analysis ..................................................................................................................... 725
Using Area Analysis Tools ............................................................................................................................ 726 Creating Area Schemes and Plans ........................................................................................................... 726 Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans ................................................................................. 732

Contents | v

Chapter 22 Massing ............................................................................................................................... 735
Using Massing Tools ..................................................................................................................................... 736 Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model ...................................................................................... 736 Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model .......................................................... 741 Using Mass Family Files in a Project  ........................................................................................................... 743 Creating New Mass Family Types  .......................................................................................................... 743 Loading and Placing New Mass Families ................................................................................................ 744 Joining Mass Elements ............................................................................................................................ 747 Using Mass Elements with Design Options ................................................................................................. 750 Mass Elements in Design Options .......................................................................................................... 750 Creating Building Components from Mass Elements ................................................................................. 752 Creating Walls by Picking Faces ............................................................................................................. 753 Creating Floors by Picking Faces ............................................................................................................. 755 Creating Roofs by Picking Faces .............................................................................................................. 759 Creating Curtain Systems  ...................................................................................................................... 761 Editing Elements Created from Massings ............................................................................................... 763 Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility ............................................................................................................ 768

Chapter 23 Site ..................................................................................................................................... 771
Using Site Tools ............................................................................................................................................ 772 Creating a Toposurface ........................................................................................................................... 772 Adding Property Lines ............................................................................................................................. 777 Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings ...................................................................................... 781 Creating Topographic Subregions ........................................................................................................... 783 Grading the Toposurface ......................................................................................................................... 788 Adding a Building Pad ............................................................................................................................ 793 Adding Site Components ........................................................................................................................ 795 Tagging Site and Parking Components .................................................................................................. 798 Creating Parking Space Schedules ........................................................................................................... 799

Chapter 24 Grouping ............................................................................................................................ 801
Creating Groups ........................................................................................................................................... 802 Creating a Group ..................................................................................................................................... 802 Placing a Group ....................................................................................................................................... 803 Modifying a Group .................................................................................................................................. 804 Creating Nested Groups ............................................................................................................................... 805 Creating a Nested Group ......................................................................................................................... 806 Modifying a Nested Group ...................................................................................................................... 807 Working with Groups .................................................................................................................................. 809 Duplicating a Group ............................................................................................................................... 809 Creating a Detail Group .......................................................................................................................... 812 Using Attached Detail Groups ................................................................................................................ 813 Saving and Loading Groups .................................................................................................................... 815 Automatically Creating a Group ............................................................................................................. 816

Chapter 25 Structural .......................................................................................................................... 819
Adding Structural Walls ............................................................................................................................... 820 Importing a DWG for Use as an Underlay .............................................................................................. 820 Sketching Structural Walls ...................................................................................................................... 821 Dimensioning and Modifying Walls ...................................................................................................... 830 Adding Structural Columns and Beams ....................................................................................................... 833 Adding Structural Columns .................................................................................................................... 834 Adding Structural Beams and Girders ..................................................................................................... 838 Adding Joists and Purlins ........................................................................................................................ 848 Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels .................................................................................................. 854 Defining New Levels ............................................................................................................................... 855 Duplicating the Existing Design ............................................................................................................. 856 Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation ......................................................................................................... 858 Creating a Framing Elevation ................................................................................................................. 858 Adding Structural Braces ......................................................................................................................... 860

Chapter 26 Sharing Projects ................................................................................................................ 865
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................... 866

vi | Contents

Using Worksharing in a Project ................................................................................................................... 866 Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals .......................................................................................... 866 Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets ................................................................................... 869 Working Individually with Worksets ..................................................................................................... 873 Using Worksets with Multiple Users ....................................................................................................... 876 Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users ......................................................................... 881

Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options .................................................................................. 885
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project ............................................................................................ 886 Creating the Structural Design Options ................................................................................................. 886 Creating the Roof System Design Options ............................................................................................. 896 Managing Design Options ...................................................................................................................... 903

Chapter 28 Project Phasing ................................................................................................................. 909
Using Phasing ............................................................................................................................................... 910 Phasing Your Model ................................................................................................................................ 910 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags ............................................................................................................. 915

Chapter 29 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates ....................................................... 919
Linking Building Models .............................................................................................................................. 920 Linking Building Models from Different Project Files ............................................................................ 920 Repositioning Linked Building Models ................................................................................................... 928 Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility ........................................................................................ 931 Managing Linked Building Models ......................................................................................................... 933 Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models ........................................................................................... 935 Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates ................................................................................................... 935 Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates ........................................................................................ 937 Scheduling Components of Linked Files ................................................................................................ 941 Working with a Linked Building Model ................................................................................................. 943 Managing Shared Locations .................................................................................................................... 944

Contents | vii

viii | Contents

Understanding the Concepts

1

In this tutorial, you learn the fundamental concepts of Revit Building. You learn how Revit Building works, the terms used when working with the product, and how to navigate the user interface.

In the lesson that follows, you learn many of the important features in Revit Building that contribute to a user-friendly design environment, enhanced productivity, and faster construction documents. You begin with the fundamental concepts that Revit Building is built upon. You learn the terminology, the hierarchy of elements, and how to navigate the user interface.

1

Understanding the Basics
In this lesson, you learn what Revit Building is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work.

What is Autodesk Revit Building?
The Revit Building platform for building information modeling is a design and documentation system that supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modeling (BIM) delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it. In the Revit Building model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit Building collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The Revit Building parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.

What is meant by parametric?
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Building provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This concept is important because it is this capability that delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Building: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit Building coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships:

The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If you move the partition, the door retains this relationship to the partition. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the floor or roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

How does Autodesk Revit Building keep things updated?
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modeling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something, Revit Building immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit Building uses two key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler
Revit Building uses five software element classes: host, component, annotation, view, and datum. This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit Building elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit Building. Hosts include walls, floors, roofs, and ceilings. Components include windows, doors, and furniture. Annotations are 2D, view-specific elements that help you produce your documentation. Views are dynamic representations of the model and are always up-to-date. Datums are reference elements that help you put your building together. In Revit Building, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning two walls, for example.

Understanding Autodesk Revit Building terms
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Building are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. However, there are some terms that are unique to Revit Building, and understanding them is crucial to understanding the software. This section defines the basic terms used in Revit Building. The first term you need to know is "project." In Revit Building, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. The project file contains all the information for your building design,

2 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

from geometry to construction data. This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the design. By using a single project file, Revit Building makes it easy for you to alter your design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Another important term to understand is "level". Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, floors, and ceilings. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building; for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan tiled next to it.

When creating your project, you add Revit Building parametric building elements to the design. All elements are considered categories. Revit Building classifies elements by model component elements and annotation elements. A model component element, such as a door, desk, or roof, represents the actual 3D geometry of the building. An annotation building element, such as a door tag, elevation symbol, or room tag, helps document the model. Families are classes of elements in a category that group elements with a common set of parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example, six-panel colonial doors could be considered one family, although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Most families are component family files, which means you can load them into your project and create them from family templates. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. Other families are called system families. These families, which include walls, dimensions, ceilings, roofs, floors, and levels, are not available for loading or creating as separate files. Revit Building predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example, the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system; however, you can create different types of walls with different compositions. System families can be transferred between projects. Each family can have different types. A type can be a specific size of a family, such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. A type can also be a style, such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. A family can have several types. For example, a table could come in several different sizes. Each different size would be a new type within the same family. Instances are the actual items that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).

Understanding the Basics | 3

Autodesk Revit Building terms

Navigating the Revit Building User Interface
One of the advantages of Revit Building is its ease of use, specifically its clear user interface. The Revit Building window is arranged to make navigation easy. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled, making it easy to understand what each button represents. Revit Building uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions, learning Revit Building is much easier. In the following illustration, the user interface is labeled. In the steps that follow, you navigate and become familiar with the user interface.

Start a new project
1 On the Standard toolbar, click .

This creates a new project based on the default template.

4 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

The Title Bar
2 Place your cursor at the top of the user interface and notice the Title Bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open.

By default, new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. In addition, the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template that the project is based on.

The Menu Bar
3 On the View menu, click Zoom.

The Menu Bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File, Edit, and View. You can choose commands by placing the cursor over the menu name and clicking. You then click the command name to run the command. Many of the commands also have shortcut keys to speed up the design process. These shortcut keys are listed next to the command on the menu. TIP For example, the shortcut key for Zoom To Fit is ZX. While working in the drawing area, you simply type the required keystrokes to run the command. Another timesaving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. A context menu appears with a list of all available commands. The context menu changes depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected.

The Toolbar
4 On the Window menu, click Toolbar.

There are six toolbars across the top of the window just beneath the Menu Bar. The buttons on the toolbar represent some of the more common commands. You can control the visibility of the six toolbars and turn the toolbar text labels on or off within the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar.

The Options Bar
5 On the Modelling menu, click Wall. Notice the bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options.

Understanding the Basics | 5

The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. 6 On the Modelling menu, click Door. Notice the design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. On the left side of the Options Bar, notice a door type is specified.

The Type Selector
7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors.

The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. If you select the Door tool, the Type Selector displays a list of doors available within the project. The list of components in the Type Selector is identical to the components listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category.

8 On the Modelling menu, click Wall.

6 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

9 In the Type Selector, notice the list of walls that are available. You use the Type Selector in two ways. First, you can select a component type before you add it to the building model. For example, if you intend to add a door, the door type active in the Type Selector is the door type that is added when you insert it into the building model. You can also use the Type Selector to change a component type after it has been added to the building model. Within the drawing area, you can select any component and then change the type from the Type Selector.

The Design Bar
10 On the Window menu, click Design Bars. The Show Design Bars dialog box is displayed.

The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface, immediately below the Type Selector. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar, containing buttons grouped by function. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog box. 11 Click OK. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu.
■ ■ ■ ■

Basics tab—includes commands for creating most basic building model components. View tab—commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab—all the commands to create model elements Drafting tab—commands for both adding annotation symbols and creating the sheet details for the project construction documents Rendering tab—commands for creating rendered 3D images Site tab—commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab—commands for executing conceptual massing commands Area Analysis tab—commands for making area schemes and plans Structural tab—commands for adding structural components to your project Construction tab—includes commands for creating construction industry information

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

To access the commands within a tab, click the tab, and the respective commands are displayed on the Design Bar. TIP You can turn the visibility of each tab on and off by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the context menu.

Understanding the Basics | 7

The Project Browser
12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. In the Project Browser, select Views (all).

You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views, schedules, sheets, reports, families, and groups of your current project. You can right-click in the browser to add, delete, and rename views, families, and groups. The browser is conveniently organized by view type (floor plans, elevations, 3D), family category (doors, walls, windows), and group name. You can expand or compress the browser list by clicking the + or sign next to the name. To open a view, double-click the name. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area, making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. The browser is also dockable, so you can position it wherever you want by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. 13 In the Type Selector, scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser.

8 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

14 On the Settings menu, click Browser Organization. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for both views and sheets. After you create a browser organization scheme, you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog box, click Cancel.

The Status Bar
16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. The cursor is displayed as a pencil. 17 Place your cursor near the center of the drawing area. Do not click.

Understanding the Basics | 9

You can use this tri-pane. Elevations: Elevation: Elevation 5. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. notice that the name of the preselected component is Views: Elevation: West. you can use the Status Bar and the Tab key to toggle between components and select the desired component. Make sure you place the cursor over the arrow portion of the symbol. When you place the cursor over a component. You can also press SHIFT+F1. it highlights and the status bar displays the component name. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. In the Status Bar. press F1 to get the topic associated with the window. Windows: From any window. It highlights when the cursor is over it. and the topic specific to the dialog box opens. You can access Help in the following ways: ■ Dialog Boxes: Dialog boxes include Help buttons. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. and notice that the preselected component switches to the main elevation symbol. You can turn the Status Bar visibility on or off from the Window menu. Tool Tips: To see Tool Tips. use the Tab key to alternate between nearby components. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. Be sure to have the Standard toolbar displayed. and then click on a specific menu command or command button for Help. When attempting to select a specific component in a complex or crowded view. click . There are several tools that help you find information. The Status Bar also provides information. click Modify. the main symbol and the elevation directional arrows. Context-sensitive help is also available to provide instant help on any menu command. find a keyword on the Index tab." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. In this case. Toolbar: From the Toolbar. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Building Help window. TIP When attempting to select a specific component in a crowded or detailed view.In the bottom left corner of the window. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the Tool Tip displays. 10 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . 20 Press TAB. notice the Status Bar provides information regarding what you should do next. in conjunction with Tooltips. Autodesk Revit Building Help 21 On the Help menu. If there is no Help button displayed. Click the Help button. The elevation symbol consists of two parts. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. press F1 to get help on that dialog box. TIP You can control the level of Tool Tip assistance from the Settings ➤ Options menu. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Building session. regarding selected components within a view. click Autodesk Revit Help. 18 On the Design Bar.

You should understand the user interface. For learning purposes. For training purposes. floors. This tutorial is designed to teach concepts as well as methods. the design process might differ in a real-world scenario. Because the design process in Revit Building is extremely flexible. review the tutorial. all views and schedules instantly update. Understanding the Concepts. you can normally use various means to accomplish identical tasks. As you make design changes throughout this tutorial. and then add the passageway between them. doors. stairs. 11 . this tutorial uses a diversity of methods whenever possible. The building model you create consists of an east wing and a west wing joined by a curtain wall passageway.mirror it to create the east wing.Creating Your First Building Model 2 This tutorial is designed to familiarize you with the basic concepts and methods of creating a building model using Autodesk Revit Building. If you have not already done so. common terms. before proceeding further. and a roof .including all windows. you create the shell of the west wing . and fundamental concepts before creating your first building model. Therefore. While creating your first building information model. you learn about the Revit Building parametric capabilities and ease of use.

After sketching the walls. modify. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and then add the passageway between them. you create a new wall type with multiple wall sweeps and reveals. you sketch the exterior walls of the west wing. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. If you sketch the walls with the top constraint specifying a height. You can add and modify levels at any time during the design process. at a later time. click Level. and double-click North. stairs. You then apply the new wall type to the existing walls. expand Views (all). click the Training Files icon. you begin with a project file based on a simple template to which you add several new levels. In this exercise. ceilings. click Open. 12 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . you add and modify doors and windows. Creating and Modifying the Exterior Walls of the West Wing In this exercise. you render the model and document the project by adding schedules and views to sheets. Minor modifications have been made for training purposes. and apply new wall types. After adding dimensions. Finally.rvt located in the Metric folder. Add new levels 1 In the Project Browser. As you design the walls.Creating Your First Building Model In this lesson. Open m_First_Project. you create. and a roof. You then sketch the exterior and interior walls of the west wing. Using the mirror tool. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. reassign the top constraint to a specific level. you use the west wing to create the east wing. When you create walls. you can. expand Elevations. You then add sketched components such as floors. you can assign the wall height to a level or a specific value. you define the levels first so that you can set the top constraint when you first create the walls. NOTE The dataset for this tutorial was created using the default template. Notice that Level 1 and Level 2 are already defined.

click Modify. You can also use the ESC key to accomplish this. Verify that Make Plan View is selected 4 Move the cursor over Level 2 and notice the prospective new level displays above it. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In this view.3 On the Options Bar. this indicates that you can select and edit the values. This means that if you drag the control to resize the datum extent. the datum is in model extent mode. ■ ■ Enter 4000 mm for Offset. 8 Select Level 4. it terminates the command in progress. With the 3D designation. This means that changes to the extents are applied only to the active view. The left and right extents of the new level are aligned and locked to the levels below. notice the following: ■ There is a control titled 3D that displays at the ends of the datum. ■ ■ 6 Click Level 3 to add Level 4. When you select Level 4. it toggles to 2D. Creating Your First Building Model | 13 . the level name and height value displays with the color blue. provided those datums also have the 3D model extent control. the extents of the other level lines adopt the same change. If you click the 3D control. This means that if you move the extents of one level line. When you click Modify. This allows you to create a new level by picking an existing line and applying an offset. notice that a floor plan and ceiling plan have been created for Level 3. ■ Select . 5 Click Level 2 to create level 3 at the designated offset above it. it changes the extent of that datum in all other parallel views. 9 Click directly on the Level 4 text. In the Project Browser.

TIP The Level 4 ceiling plan view has also been renamed to Roof. This process reduces the amount of repetitive work and ensures consistency between each wing. and then designing the passageway to connect the two. You can use the zoom tools located on the View menu. North. and a curtain glass passageway connecting the two wings. In the steps that follow. West. In such a case. because the east wing is a mirror image of the west wing. tool on the toolbar. However. you create the exterior walls of only the west wing. or scroll the 10 Enter Roof and press ENTER. Sketch the exterior walls 13 This building model consists of an east wing. notice that the name of the Level 4 floor plan is changed to Roof. 11 Click Yes to rename corresponding views. Theoretically. the floor plan would resemble the following illustration. you could begin the model by simply sketching the exterior walls and then continuing the design process from that point. In this view. double-click Level 1. right-click in the drawing area and use the zoom tools on the context menu. which define the East. 14 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . there are four elevation symbols. you can take advantage of the parametric capabilities of Revit Building by designing the majority of the west wing. 14 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. a west wing. and South elevation views. use the wheel on your mouse.TIP You may need to zoom in to accomplish this. mirroring it to create the east wing. 12 In the Project Browser.

16 In the drawing area. click Wall. NOTE The far clip plane for the East. The name of the elevation view is displayed in a tooltip or in the status bar at the bottom of the drawing window. A solid line with two drag handles displays on the West elevation symbol. This means that each view is infinite. Later in this tutorial. 17 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click the Elevation: West symbol. The drag handles control the left and right clip planes of the elevation view. you use this command to modify the view. West. North. Do not click the symbol. select Basic Wall: Exterior .15 Move the cursor over the left elevation symbol and then over the elevation arrow. and South elevation views are inactive. do not turn on the far clip planes at this time. Make sure you click the arrow and not the round part of the symbol. You can activate the far clip plane in the element properties dialog box of each respective view. Creating Your First Building Model | 15 . 18 In the Type Selector.Brick on CMU. For training purposes. TIP You can turn off the visibility of the elevation symbols by using the Visibility/Graphics command found on the View menu.

Move the cursor down and to the right until the rectangle is 12. click . Click the arrows a second time to return the exterior face to the outside of the rectangle. click Modify. ■ 20 Sketch the rectangle by clicking the upper left corner to specify the rectangle starting point.19 In the Options Bar. You can click the temporary dimension value and modify it. Also notice the dimension that displays. Select the drawing tool.000 mm long. specify the following options: ■ ■ Specify Roof for Height. and flip arrows display on the exterior face of the wall. you can flip the wall orientation. and use the directional arrows on your keyboard to move them into position as shown above. The selected wall is red. This is a temporary dimension. select the four walls by dragging a selection box around them. By clicking the arrows. Verify that Wall Centerline is selected for Loc Line. as shown. . make sure you sketch the rectangle just to the right of the west elevation symbol. 23 Click the arrows once to set the exterior face of the wall on the inside of the rectangle. 24 On the View toolbar. TIP If necessary. you can control the default witness line location for temporary dimensions and save the settings to the project. Because the west wing is later mirrored to the right. and click to complete the rectangle. TIP From the Settings ➤ Temporary Dimensions menu. vertical wall of the rectangle.000 mm wide and 24. Temporary dimensions are primarily sketching aids. 21 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 16 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 22 Select the left.

you can use these handles to modify the height or depth of the wall. You do not need to enter 12000 mm. For example. The blue dots at the base of the wall are drag handles that allow you to modify the length of the wall. TIP When entering a value. you do not need to type the metric suffix.25 Select the 24000 mm wall on the right. Notice that temporary dimensions also display in 3D views. In addition. 27 Click the temporary dimension value and reset the rectangle width to 12000 mm. 26 Drag the wall to the right as shown and release the mouse button when the width of the rectangle is approximately double the original size. you can enter 12000 and press ENTER. notice the shape handles (arrows) on top and bottom of the wall. Creating Your First Building Model | 17 .

it is displayed as solid fill. as shown. This is the shortcut key for Zoom to Fit. 33 On the View Control Bar. click the Model Graphics Style control.28 Right-click in the empty space of the drawing area and. including the brick surface pattern displays. and click Shading with Edges. 18 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Notice the material settings. 30 On the Design Bar. and click Hidden Line. click Zoom in Region. When a surface pattern becomes too dense. 32 On the keyboard. 29 Draw a region around the corner. Notice the wall remains selected. enter ZF. click the Model Graphics Style control. Notice that the brick surface pattern becomes solid fill after you zoom to fit. 31 On the View Control Bar located at the bottom-left corner of the frame. click Modify. The brick surface pattern displays.

In the steps that follow. you cannot modify them within this dialog box. If your intent is to modify only the structure of the selected component. Although you can scroll through the list of type parameters. only the wall that you selected would change.Create and apply new wall type 34 Select the 24000 mm wall on the right as shown. However. If you change an instance parameter. you should click Duplicate to create a new component type. if you wanted to modify the wall structure. you would click Edit/New to access the type parameters. The lower half of the dialog box contains the instance parameters. You can then make changes to the type parameters without inadvertently modifying the components of the original type. In the upper half of the dialog box. which control all components of the same type. which control the selected component or components. it has no effect on components that are not selected. For example. click . and then apply it to the remaining walls. 35 On the Options Bar. you can see the list of type parameters. For example. Creating Your First Building Model | 19 . The Element Properties dialog box displays the parameters of the selected component. if you changed the Top Offset of the wall. you create a new wall type. you add horizontal sweeps of soldier course brick to the wall structure. modify it. any changes made to the type parameters would be applied to all components of the same type. You could then make changes to the wall structure as needed. To accomplish this.

and click OK. 37 In the Type Properties dialog box. under the Value column for Structure. enter 13500 for Sample Height. Exterior . 20 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .36 In the Element Properties dialog box. Therefore. you must create a new wall type before altering the wall structure. enter the new wall name.Brick on CMU with Soldier Course. 41 In the lower left corner of the Edit Assembly dialog box. click Duplicate. The sample height is the height of the wall in the preview pane. 39 In the Type Properties dialog box. 40 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. but you should specify a value high enough to allow you to create the desired wall structure. The sample height does not determine the height of any walls in the project. click Edit/New. click Edit. For training purposes. the original wall type must remain unchanged. You can specify the sample height to any value you want. click Preview. 38 In the Name dialog box.

Verify that Exterior is selected for Side.Brick Soldier Course. Verify that Base is selected for From. Enter 4000 mm for Distance. 48 Draw a region around the soldier course. click Sweeps. Click inside the Material field. Notice the vertical structure tools are now active. and click OK.Notice that the vertical structure tools are inactive.0 mm for Offset. Enter -50. the corresponding layer is highlighted in the preview area. 44 In the Wall Sweeps dialog box. When you select a layer. click Add. select Section: Modify type attributes. This is because the preview is displaying a plan view. select layer 9. 47 Right-click in the preview area and click Zoom in Region from the context menu. Make sure the offset is a negative number. In the Materials dialog box. ■ ■ ■ ■ 46 Click OK. This should be the interior finish layer. under Name. make the following modifications: ■ ■ Select M_Wall Sweep-Brick Soldier Course: 2 Bricks for Profile. select Masonry . 42 Under the preview pane. 43 Under Modify Vertical Structure. Creating Your First Building Model | 21 . 49 Under Layers. 45 In the Wall Sweeps dialog box. for View.

56 Specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select M_Reveal-Brick Course: 2 Bricks for Profile. click Reveals. Enter 8000 mm for Distance.Brick Soldier Course for Material. Verify that Base is selected for From. and click OK. 52 For the second wall sweep. Select Masonry . Verify that the Offset is zero. click Sweeps. under Modify Vertical Structure. 22 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Select Flip. 53 Click OK. 55 In the Reveals dialog box. Enter 4000 mm for Distance. Add reveals 54 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. 58 Click Add. Verify that Exterior is selected for Side.Add a second sweep 50 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. click Add. Make sure it is a negative number. Enter -50 mm for Offset. modify the settings as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select M_Wall Sweep-Brick Soldier Course: 2 Bricks for Profile. click Add. Verify that Base is selected for From. Verify that Exterior is selected for Side. 51 In the Wall Sweeps dialog box. 57 Click Apply.

59 Specify the parameters for the second reveal: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select M_Reveal-Brick Course: 2 Bricks for Profile. 62 In the Type Properties dialog box. click OK. Verify that the Offset is zero. click Zoom  ➤ Zoom in Region and draw a zoom region around the corner that includes one of the sweeps and a reveal. You can also use the thin lines tool to temporarily apply thin lines globally to all views. 60 Click OK. Verify that Exterior is selected for Side. Select Flip. Creating Your First Building Model | 23 . 65 On the View menu. 66 On the View toolbar. click Modify. click . Notice some of the line weights in this view are rather heavy. Verify that Base is selected for From. click OK. 63 In the Element Properties dialog box. Enter 8000 mm for Distance. This can be affected by the view scale for this particular view. click OK. 61 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. 64 On the Design Bar.

Brick on CMU with Soldier Course. 69 On the View toolbar. TIP To select multiple components. and click Shading with Edges. Notice that. click .Notice thin lines are applied to all the linework in this view. When finished. the corners of the sweeps and reveals wrap automatically. you add the interior walls of the west wing. This is the shortcut key for Zoom to Fit. click the Model Graphics Style control. They do not have sweeps or reveals. 75 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. 72 On the Design Bar. 74 Navigate to your preferred directory. choose Basic Wall: Exterior . Also notice the button remains activated. and click Save. click Save As. Adding the Interior Walls of the West Wing In this exercise. the interior walls resemble the following illustration. click Modify. after the new wall type is applied. 67 On the View Control Bar. Exterior . 70 Select the three walls that are still the original wall type. This turns off thin lines globally. 68 Enter ZF. 73 On the File menu. name the file m_First_Project-in_progress. This indicates that thin lines will continue to be applied globally to the project. 71 In the Type Selector. 24 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . press and hold the CTRL key while you select each component. Adding the Interior Walls of the West Wing.Brick on CMU.

double-click Level 1. .Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Creating Your First Building Model | 25 . place the cursor over the north wall. ■ 5 Using the following illustration as a guide. m_First_Project-in_progress. select Basic Wall: Interior . 3 In the Type Selector. and click. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Verify that Wall Centerline is selected for Loc Line. specify the following: ■ ■ Verify that Level 2 is selected for Height. Sketch the main corridor 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.135mm Partition (2-hr). under Views (all). 6 Move the cursor down. 4 In the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. Select the Line sketching tool. and click when it intersects the centerline of the south exterior wall. click Wall. 5000 mm from the centerline of the west exterior wall.

10 Select both interior walls using one of the following three methods: ■ ■ Select one of the interior walls. 26 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . and click when it intersects the centerline of the south exterior wall. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.7 Move the cursor over the north exterior wall and 2500 mm to the right of the wall you added in the previous step. If you zoom into the model. and select the second interior wall. Draw a crossing pick from the upper-right to the lower-left that crosses both interior walls. press and hold CTRL. the snap values decrease. TIP The temporary dimension snap values are dependent on your zoom settings. ■ Draw a pick box from the upper-left to lower-right that includes both interior walls in their entirety. Click to specify the wall start point. click Modify. 8 Move the cursor down.

On the Settings menu. This places both interior walls 4750 mm from the centerline of the closest exterior wall. 16 Add four horizontal interior walls stretching from the centerline of the left exterior wall to the centerline of the left wall of the corridor.After the walls are selected. click Activate Dimensions. and under Colors. 15 In the Type Selector. TIP You can change the selection color by modifying the system settings. and enter 4750 mm. specify the selection color. as shown. 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Add remaining interior walls 14 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click the Graphics tab. Notice that temporary dimensions do not display automatically when multiple components are selected. click Modify. Creating Your First Building Model | 27 . select Basic Wall: Interior .79mm Partition (1-hr). click a temporary dimension value. they display as red. 11 On the Options Bar. 12 Using the following illustration as a guide. Each wall should be 4800 mm from the previous wall. select Options. This allows you to analyze their location in relationship to each other and modify the location of both walls at the same time. click Wall. The temporary dimensions are displayed for both walls.

The dimension lines have been provided for training purposes. modify temporary dimension values to obtain exact placement.17 Add five horizontal interior walls stretching from the centerline of the right wall of the corridor to the centerline of the right exterior wall. as shown. 18 Add the final four interior walls in each corner of the right side of the building model. Dimension lines have been added for training purposes. If necessary. Use the dimensions shown in the following illustration when adding the walls. 28 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .

This places the view in thin lines mode. 20 Enter ZR. NOTE If the Tools toolbar is not available. 21 Sketch a zoom region around the upper-right quadrant of the building model. click the tool a second time to turn thin lines mode off. This is the shortcut key for Zoom in Region. click .Use split tool to modify walls 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 24 Click to split the wall. you can click on the View toolbar. there is no immediate and obvious indication of the split location. As you move the cursor over the wall. a thin line appears at the tip of the cursor. 22 On the Tools toolbar. Creating Your First Building Model | 29 . TIP If the lines within the floor plan display too thick. you can activate it by opening the Windows menu and clicking Toolbar  ➤ Tools. This line represents where the underlying object is to be split. place the cursor over the intersection of the right wall of the corridor and the short horizontal wall that intersects it as shown. When you are finished splitting the walls. click Modify. and you can now split walls and lines. click Modify. 25 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 23 In the drawing area. In the above illustration and callout. The cursor displays as a cutting tool. notice the exact placement of the cursor and the location of the proposed wall split. After splitting the wall.

split the right corridor wall. click . zoom in to the bottom right corner of the building model. 27 On the Standard toolbar. 29 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.26 Select the short wall segment that you split from the right wall of the corridor. 30 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . This is the shortcut key for Zoom To Fit. click Modify. 30 Enter ZF. 28 Using the same techniques learned in previous steps. and delete the segment.

click 36 On the View toolbar. click . 34 Press ESC to end the Split command. 31 On the Tools toolbar. the inner segment is deleted automatically. select Delete Inner Segment. NOTE Arrows have been added at the location of the two splits. 37 Press and hold SHIFT and spin the building model by dragging one of the corners in any direction. click . Zoom in as necessary. . Creating Your First Building Model | 31 . 32 On the Options Bar. 35 On the View toolbar. Notice the interior walls that you added and split.There are two remaining splits to make. This tool allow you to spin the model in any direction. 33 Using the following illustration as a guide. split the right wall of the corridor at the intersection of the two center horizontal interior walls. After the second split.

the dimension value displays in blue and can be modified directly by clicking the value. 5 On the Options Bar. under Views (all). click Save. Level 1 . Dimensioning the Building Model In this exercise. and components that require dimensioning. you add a multi-segmented dimension string to modify the witness lines. 39 Proceed to the next exercise. select Linear Dimension Style: Diagonal . In that case. ■ ■ For Prefer. Dimensioning the Building Model. and click OK.38 On the File menu. A permanent dimension is considered modifiable when one or more of the components that it references is selected for modification. select Wall centerlines. enter Level 1 . should be open. 6 In the Type Selector. 3 In the Rename View dialog box. and click Duplicate.5mm Arial.Dimensioned and Annotated. When you duplicate a view. Add a dimension line between two walls 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Permanent dimensions can appear in two different states: modifiable and non-modifiable. 2 In the Project Browser. the dimension value is displayed at its true size and is not selectable for modification. You begin by adding a simple dimension between two walls. The floor plan. select Individual References. under Floor Plans. and in the context menu.2. you constrain the building model using equality and locking constraints. you add dimension lines to the building model. In the final section of this exercise.Dimensioned and Annotated. click Rename. 32 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . it opens automatically in the Project Browser. m_First_Project-in_progress. Next. The dimension styles available in the Type Selector are dependent on the type of dimension selected on the Options Bar. options. For Pick. under Floor Plans. right-click Copy of Level 1. When geometry is selected for modification. specify the following dimension parameters: ■ Click . Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. ready for modification. If the geometry referenced by a permanent dimension is not selected for modification. You create a dimension by selecting the dimension type. click Dimension. both permanent dimensions and temporary dimensions display.rvt. Create and rename copy of Level 1 1 In the Project Browser. This is the aligned dimension option. right-click Level 1.

10 On the Design Bar. 8 Move the cursor over the right exterior wall as shown. move the cursor over the left exterior wall as shown. Creating Your First Building Model | 33 . Click in the empty space of the drawing area to place the dimension line. click to select it. 9 Move the cursor just above the north wall. When a dashed line is displayed on the wall centerline. When a dashed line displays on the wall centerline. click to select it.7 In the drawing area. click Modify.

change it to 15000. and press ENTER. change it to 4750. the value is not available for modification. 13 Place the cursor over the blue control in the center of the left witness line. 16 Click the permanent dimension value. These controls allow you to modify and constrain the dimension. This means you can modify the value by clicking it. Notice that the dimension value is not blue. Information is displayed in a tooltip. When you select a component referenced by a dimension witness line. and press ENTER. the dimension value displays as modifiable. Notice the dimension value turns blue. 17 Click the temporary dimension value. and draw a zoom region around the north exterior wall and dimension line. Notice that the dimension line and value displays as red. Controls display on the value. 34 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . This is one of the ways in which a permanent dimension differs from a temporary dimension. indicating that the control moves the witness line.11 Enter the keyboard shortcut ZR for Zoom In Region. This behavior is similar to the witness line control on temporary dimensions. Notice that a temporary dimension also displays. on each witness line. 12 Select the dimension line. or in the status bar of the drawing window. The control at the bottom of each witness line controls the gap between the end of the witness line and the component it references. Notice the selected wall moved to the left. 14 Click the control once and the witness line moves to the interior face of the wall. In its current state. 15 Select the vertical exterior wall on the left. Click the control a second time and the witness line moves to the exterior face. and a blue padlock displays. Click it a third time to return the witness line to the wall centerline.

In the Auto Dimension Options dialog box. and click to place the dimension as shown. select Entire Walls. Add a multi-segmented dimension 20 Using one of the zoom methods learned previously. click Modify. 23 Select the left. Click Options. and click OK. move the cursor to the left. select Intersecting Walls.18 Place the cursor over the dimension symbol located beneath the temporary dimension value. 21 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. For Pick. click Dimension. exterior wall. Click the symbol to make the temporary dimension permanent. 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Wall centerlines. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Prefer. Creating Your First Building Model | 35 . zoom out until you can see the entire building model. vertical.

Modify witness lines 25 Select the multi-segmented dimension you added in the previous steps. right-click the blue control on the witness line second from the top. NOTE Make sure you right-click the blue control and not the dimension line.24 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 26 Using the following illustration as a guide. and click Delete Witness Line. 36 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click Modify.

it provides a different set of options on the context menu. click Edit Witness Lines. and in the context menu.27 Right-click the dimension line. 28 Select the centerline of the interior wall where you previously deleted the witness line. Creating Your First Building Model | 37 . WARNING Do not right-click a witness line.

38 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .29 After selecting the wall. or press ESC on the keyboard. click in the empty space of the drawing area to complete the editing process. Create constraints 30 Select the second interior wall from the top to the left of the corridor. NOTE There are two alternative ways of ending the dimension edit process: You can click Modify on the Design Bar.

Notice that the dimension values become modifiable on each side of the witness line that refers to the selected wall. Creating Your First Building Model | 39 . 31 Drag the wall downward until the distance between it and the wall below it is approximately 2400 mm.

32 Select the multi-segmented dimension line. Lock symbols offer the opportunity to constrain the building model by locking a dimension value or an alignment. Notice that the dimension value for the locked segment remains unchanged as you move the wall. 40 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 34 Select the same wall you moved previously and drag it upward approximately 1200 mm as shown. The relationship between these components is constrained. 36 Click the lock symbol on the 2400 mm segment to remove the constraint between the two walls. if you move one component. 33 Click the lock on the 2400 mm segment of the dimension. the other moves with it and maintains the locked dimension value. You can turn the lock on and off by clicking the lock symbol. This dimension does not need to be precise. Notice a lock displays for each segment. 35 Select the multi-segmented dimension.

you load multiple new door types and add them to the building model. Adding Doors and Windows. Notice that each segment is now equally spaced and the dimension values display EQ. 38 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans.Notice an EQ symbol displays with a slash through it. 41 On the File menu. under Other. In the final section of the exercise. you use the Paste Aligned tool to copy the Level 1 windows to Levels 2 and 3. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Doors and Windows In this exercise. select Value for Equality Display. double-click Level 1. This is an equality constraint that makes all dimension segments equal. You then add windows and use the mirror and array tools to save time and ensure consistency. You begin by adding single flush doors. click . 37 Click the equality constraint to activate it. select Save. Creating Your First Building Model | 41 . you add doors and windows to the building model. Notice that each segment displays an equal value. Next. under Views (all). 40 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 39 In the Element Properties dialog box.

42 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . When you add a door. the door resides on a level line. the initial opening is based on the wall face from which the cursor approaches. This is the mechanical room. however. 4 Approach the same corridor wall from inside the room. Add single flush doors to the building model 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm. 2 In the Type Selector. 3 In the north side of the building model. This is most evident when you add a door in an elevation or 3D view. Doors are wall-hosted families and can only be added to a wall. A door symbol displays when the cursor is over the wall. You can offset the door from the level.Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. you can flip the door opening immediately after placing it.rvt. doors snap automatically to the closest available level. Regardless of the initial placement. m_First_Project-in_progress. place the cursor over the right corridor for the room shown in the following illustration. Do not click at this time. click Door. In addition.

When you are finished. Notice the blue controls that display. 6 Click to add the door with the opening inside the room.5 Press the Spacebar once to flip the door hand. Do not be concerned with exact placement. use the flip controls to adjust the opening. The precise dimensions are not important. Creating Your First Building Model | 43 . 8 Click the temporary dimension value between the door centerline and the lower horizontal wall. 7 Click each control to familiarize yourself with how the door controls work. return the door to the position shown in the following illustration. 9 Add an additional door of the same type to the small room above door number 1 as shown. and modify temporary dimensions as shown. These control the door opening direction and the hand of the door (left or right). Press the Spacebar a second time. You can use this to flip from left to right hand opening. specify a value of 600 mm. After you add door number 2. and press ENTER.

to zoom to fit. 11 On the Design Bar. click Load. click Training Files. 16 Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Doors folder. 17 Press and hold CTRL. 44 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . and set the temporary dimensions. ZF. Load and apply new door types 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Door. Flip the door.rfa.rfa extension. 15 In the left pane of the Open dialog box.10 Zoom in to the bottom right corner of the building model and add a door of the same type to the room as shown. as shown. 14 On the Options Bar. Notice that a preview image of the selected door displays in the upper right corner of the dialog box. click Modify. 12 Enter the keyboard shortcut. and select M_Double-Glass 2. All Revit Building families have an . and select M_Double-Flush.rfa.

Creating Your First Building Model | 45 . select M_Single-Flush Vision: 0915 x 2134mm. 18 Press and hold CTRL.You can load multiple families at the same time.rfa. 21 Starting in the room in the upper left corner. 20 In the Type Selector. 19 Click Open to load all three door families into the project. 22 In the Type Selector. add a door to each of the five rooms to the left of the corridor. When more than one family is selected. a preview image does not display. These door families are now available in the Type Selector drop-down list. The distance between the door centerline and nearest wall centerline should be 600mm. Each door should open into the room. select M_Single-Flush Vision: 0864 x 2032mm. TIP Zoom in and out as necessary. and select M_Single-Flush Vision. as shown.

25 Add the final M_Single-Flush Vision: 0915 x 2134mm door in the center of the building model and to the right of the corridor as shown. 27 Add a door to the right exterior wall opposite of door number 1. select M_Double-Flush: 1730 x 2134mm. 46 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .23 Zoom in around the upper-right corner of the building model and add doors 9 and 10 as shown. 24 Zoom in around the lower-right corner of the building model and add doors 11 and 12 as shown. 26 In the Type Selector. The arrow has been added for training purposes. This is door number 13 in the following illustration. This is door number 14 in the following illustration.

32 Expand the Walls category. select Visibility/Graphics. under Elevations.Add a door in elevation view 28 In the Project Browser. If your view displays solid fill. 31 Click the Model Categories tab. under Views (all). 29 Zoom around the building model and level heads. 30 On the View menu. and clear Surface Pattern. Although there is no technical reason you cannot add a door in this view. Creating Your First Building Model | 47 . it would be easier if the visibility of the wall surface pattern was turned off. NOTE The display of a surface pattern is zoom dependent. zoom in until the brick pattern displays. double-click North. Notice that the brick surface pattern displays as you zoom into this view. and scroll down to Walls.

Notice that the double doors on the north wall display without a tag. and down to Level 1. When adding a door. Tag a door in plan view 38 In the Project Browser. it has two basic requirements: it must be hosted by a wall and it must be associated with a level. click Door. under Floor Plans. as shown. double-click Level 1. Changes to Visibility/Graphics are applied only to the open view. 48 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .33 Click OK. the wall surface pattern will remain visible in all other views. 37 Add a double-glass door centered on Level 1. 35 In the Type Selector. 34 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In this case. select M_Double-Glass 2: 1830 x 2134mm. then Level 2. Notice the door snaps to each level. NOTE The temporary dimensions refer to interior walls. 36 Move the cursor over the wall at Level 3. You can apply an offset if required.

42 Zoom in to the lower exterior wall. clear Leader. click Door. click Tag. 44 In the Type Selector. 40 On the Options Bar. as shown. verify that M_Double-Glass 2: 1830 x 2134mm is selected. click the double doors to add a tag. NOTE Because the default door tag was not designed to display in an elevation view. 45 Add the final door centered on the lower exterior wall.Components are tagged in the view in which they are placed. 39 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. This should be door number 15. 41 On the upper exterior wall. a tag did not display when you added the door in the North elevation view. Creating Your First Building Model | 49 . the Type Selector and Options Bar remember the last settings used for that component. 43 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. TIP For each component type.

select M_Andersen 400 C35: C35. The window exterior is placed on the wall face closest to the cursor. 50 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Like doors. the window displays at the cursor. 53 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click 48 On the View toolbar. Add windows to the building model 51 In the Project Browser.46 On the Design Bar. 50 On the File menu. . 52 Zoom in on the upper exterior wall. double-click Level 1. click Window. click Modify. just like doors. 47 On the View toolbar. you can flip the window after placement. click . click Save. 54 In the Type Selector. and notice the doors you added. As you move the cursor over a wall. 49 Spin the model. Windows are wall-hosted components. under Floor Plans.

61 On the Options Bar. 58 On the View toolbar. The designer can also create a window with few modifiable parameters. The list of parameters can vary depending on the window family design. Creating Your First Building Model | 51 . and select it. IMPORTANT  If necessary. as shown. click . and reload it into the project. You can load and assign tags that display the specific information you need in the format you prefer. click to place it as shown. click the temporary dimension value and specify the correct distance. 55 Move the cursor over the exterior face of the left side of the upper exterior wall. click . elevation. 62 In the Element Properties dialog box. 66 Add two C35 windows to the right of the exterior double door. 65 Zoom out so you can see the right side of the upper exterior wall. and visibility. go to Help. modify it. Notice the list of instance parameters available for modification. There should be a 1950 mm distance between the centerlines of the two windows. In this project.You can add windows in plan. If you want to modify a window in a specific way but an instance or type parameter is not available to accomplish the task. click Cancel. When you add a window in a plan view. click Window. click Modify. 63 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 59 Zoom around the window. the window is using a type tag that displays the window type number rather than the window mark. 57 On the Design Bar. 60 Make sure the distance between the window centerline and the left wall centerline is 1400 mm. For more information on creating and loading annotation tags. you can edit the family in place or open the window in the family editor. 64 Add a window to the right of the existing window as shown. the default head or sill height is used to set the initial height of the window. the designer creates the instance and type parameters that control geometry. 56 When the window displays at the tip of the cursor. and 3D views. In the family editor. materials.

indicating that the midpoint of that component is ready to be selected. click Modify. click to select it. 69 Select one of the windows on the upper exterior wall. The copy option is selected by default. 70 On the Edit menu. click . and select the three remaining windows.67 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Mirror. 73 When the triangular midpoint symbol displays on the exterior face of the wall. 71 On the Options Bar. 72 Place the cursor over the middle of the exterior face of the right exterior wall. You also have the option to mirror a copy rather than the selected component(s). When you mirror a component or components. the selected windows are to be mirrored across a horizontal axis residing on the midpoint of the east exterior wall. press and hold CTRL. you can pick or draw the mirror axis. and click to set the mirror axis. In this case. Mirror the windows 68 Zoom out until the building model fits within the view. and make sure Copy is selected. A tooltip is displayed. 74 Move the cursor to the left. 52 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .

You tag the windows later in the exercise. 76 On the Design Bar. Notice that the mirrored windows are not tagged.The windows are mirrored immediately after you specify the mirror axis. Creating Your First Building Model | 53 . click Window. at the dimensions shown. Add and array windows 75 Zoom in to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. 77 Add two windows to the left exterior wall.

54 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Select Constrain. You first click a point to specify the array start point. Rather than manually add the rest of the windows on the left exterior wall. 80 Select the two windows that you just added on the left exterior wall.78 On the Design Bar. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that is selected for a linear array. you can use the array tool to finish the job. Enter 5 for Number. it is an ideal situation to use an array. For Move To. click Modify. You then move the array to the second or last location. 82 On the Options Bar. select 2nd. and click to set the array end point. click Array. Clear Group And Associate. and click to set the array start point. 83 Move the cursor over the intersection of the left exterior wall and the intersecting interior wall shown below. Because all of the rooms on this side of the building model are equally spaced. 79 Zoom out in the upper left corner so you can see the two rooms with doors 4 and 5. 81 On the Edit menu. Creating an array is a three-step process.

86 On the bottom-right side of the building model. add the final window to the right exterior wall and centered in the second room from the bottom. as shown. Because the rooms on the left side of the building model are of equal size. and click the similar intersection shown below to set the array end point. If you make a mistake placing the array. click Window. Add remaining level 1 window 85 On the Design Bar. NOTE It is extremely important to make sure the new array is centered between the walls of the next room. undo the step and try again.84 Move the cursor down until the arrayed window group is centered in the room below the starting point. any misplacement has a multiplier effect as the array continues down the wall. Notice the arrayed windows are not tagged. Creating Your First Building Model | 55 .

90 Spin the model. on the View toolbar. . and notice the windows you added.87 If you are still using Thin Lines mode. Rather than use the same methods to add similar windows to levels 2 and 3. click . drag a selection box around the entire building model. turn it off by clicking 88 On the View toolbar. click 89 On the View toolbar. 92 In the 3D Drawing area. click Modify. you can use the paste-align tool to accomplish the same goal significantly faster. Paste align windows to Levels 2 and 3 91 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 56 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .

This selects every component in the building model. such as equality constraints. 103 In the Project Browser. The spacing can be manipulated using some of the dimensioning tools you learned earlier. Don’t be concerned with precise placement or spacing between the windows and doors. the window snaps to the default sill height which displays as a green dashed line. clear Tag on Placement. 96 On the Edit menu. In this view. click Window. click Modify. select Level 3. Notice that when you add a window in elevation view. click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name. 97 In the Select Levels dialog box. 101 On the Options Bar. select Level 2. 100 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 99 In the Project Browser. 104 On the Design Bar. under Elevations. The spacing will be modified in a later dataset. 102 Add a C35 window in the center of Level 2 and Level 3 as shown below. double-click South. double-click North. click Window. under Elevations. clear walls and doors from the selection. 105 Add C35 windows to the center of Levels 2 and 3 as you did in the previous steps. notice the wall surface pattern displays. and click OK. notice that windows need to be added above the double doors on the north and south walls. After the windows are added to Level 2 and Level 3. click . click Copy to Clipboard. This leaves only the windows selected within the 3D view. 94 In the Filter dialog box. 98 On the Design Bar. 93 On the Options Bar. This is because the changes you made to the Visibility/Graphics of the North elevation view were applied only to that view. Creating Your First Building Model | 57 . 95 On the Edit menu. press and hold CTRL.

under Floor Plans. roofs. 109 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. You can also select or draw lines. and ceilings are examples of sketched components. 107 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. the respective layers interact according to the functional assignment within the Edit Assembly dialog box. When sketching these components. When walls intersect a floor. and click OK. Adding Floors and Floor Openings. click . . and all require their borders to be sketched. 58 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . You add a more complex floor type to levels 2 and 3. or ceiling. m_First_Project-in_progress. where three openings are required for the stairs and elevators. click Tag All Not Tagged. you can select walls to define the border of the component. In this exercise. each of these components can have a compound structure.rvt. Add a floor slab to Level 1 1 On the View toolbar. Notice that all the windows in the view are tagged. 110 On the File menu. Like walls. you add floors and floor openings to the building model. click 2 On the View toolbar. You also add elevators and plumbing components to the building model. 108 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. roof. click Save.106 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Floors. 3 Spin the model and observe that floors are needed throughout the building model. you begin by adding a floor slab Level 1. 111 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click Level 1. select Window Tags. Adding Floors and Floor Openings In this exercise.

8 Click the upper exterior wall. Notice the floor on Level 1 that extends to the exterior face of the walls. you must either finish or quit in order to access other design modes. The Design Bar now has only one tab. clear Extend into wall (to core). click Floor. 12 Select Concrete . When in sketch mode. and click OK. You can click the flip arrows to move the floor boundary to either the interior or exterior face of a wall. double-click Level 1. 7 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 10 Select the three remaining exterior walls. click Floor Properties.300mm for Type. 9 If the magenta line is not on the exterior face of the north exterior wall. Sketch. click . click the flip arrows to flip the line. A magenta line displays with flip arrows.4 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 6 On the Design Bar. You are in sketch mode. In addition. click Finish Sketch. 11 On the Design Bar. 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating Your First Building Model | 59 . 14 On the View toolbar. verify that Pick Walls is selected. the building model becomes unavailable for modification until you finish the floor sketch.

Add a floor to Level 2 15 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. click Floor. 18 Place the cursor over the upper exterior wall and. In this view. click to select it. verify that Extend into wall (to core) is selected. 17 On the Options Bar. You can use TAB to select a chain of walls or lines at any time. 19 Zoom in to the upper exterior wall. the interior walls on Level 1 display as an underlay. The windows are not tagged because you did not add them within this view. 60 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. double-click Level 2. press TAB. Notice the location of the magenta line. When the chain of walls highlights. when it highlights under the cursor.

After you add these components. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. as shown. 24 Click Finish Sketch. 25 Click Yes to attach the wall tops to the floor. 22 On the Design Bar. 21 Use the flip arrows to place the magenta line on the exterior face of the core. 27 On the View toolbar. 32 In the Type Selector. These elevators are wall-hosted components. you add elevators and plumbing components on Level 1. Creating Your First Building Model | 61 . click Floor Properties. This occurs because the structural layers of the floor must cut through the interior finish layer of the wall in order to extend to the wall core. move the elevator into position. the walls remain attached. To do this. and click OK. click Component. indicating that they are not attached to the floor. Next.20 Click the flip arrows. 23 Select Beam and Block 200mm for Type. Add elevators and bathroom components 30 In the Project Browser. position the cursor on the wall. Attaching the walls ensures that if you change the floor elevation. select M_Elevator Center: 2032mm x 1295mm. click 28 On the View toolbar. A message displays asking if you want the walls that go up to this floor to attach to it. 33 Add two elevators in the center room on the right side of the building model. The interior walls of the building model are displayed in red. 29 Spin the model and observe the new floor on Level 2. The line chain flips to each face of the core rather than the interior and exterior wall face. . A message displays asking if you want to join geometry and cut the overlapping volume out of the walls. click . and click to place it. 31 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you paste-align the level 1 interior walls and components to level 2 before adding the level 3 floor. 26 Click Yes to join geometry and cut out the overlapping volume.

TIP After adding the elevators. 38 Add the sink to the center of the room. 36 On the Design Bar. toggle the temporary dimension witness line to the interior face of the adjacent wall. select each one. click Modify. 62 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 34 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and specify the dimension 1150 mm as shown above. click Component. 35 Zoom in to the upper right corner of the building model. 37 In the Type Selector. as shown. select M_Pedestal Sink-3D: Pedestal Sink.

TIP Although you can manually rotate the component. When rotating. Creating Your First Building Model | 63 . click Rotate. when rotating the component. Rotating an object requires two clicks. when you sketch a wall. The component will rotate to the value. an angular value displays that responds to keyboard entries. establish the direction of the rotation. Listening dimensions react to cursor movements and keyboard entries. The first click specifies the rotation start point. 41 On the Edit menu. you can type the wall length and press Enter rather than setting the wall end point. 43 Move the cursor 90 degrees to the left and click to set the rotation end point. 42 Place the cursor directly above the sink and click to set the rotation start point as shown. you can use the listening dimension to accurately rotate the component. enter 90 on the keyboard and press Enter. the second click specifies the rotation end point. 40 Select the sink. In this case.39 On the Design Bar. For example. click Modify.

44 Drag the sink until it snaps to the center of the left wall face. click Component. 48 Use the same procedure to add a toilet and sink in the similar room at the lower right corner of the building model. 64 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . select M_Toilet-Commercial-Wall-3D: 480mm Seat Height. 46 In the Type Selector. 45 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 47 Add the toilet on the right wall. as shown.

click Modify. doors. click Copy to Clipboard. (Do not include the exterior walls in the selection. 51 Draw a crossing pick box beginning inside the upper-right corner of the building model and extending to the inside of the lower-left corner. and click OK. In addition. clear Door Tags.Before adding the final floor. and click Zoom To Fit. right-click. Creating Your First Building Model | 65 . doors. and plumbing fixtures can be paste aligned to Levels 2 and 3. elevators. Paste align interior walls 49 In an empty space within the drawing area. click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name.) This captures all the internal walls. you must add the openings for the stairwells and the elevators. the interior walls. 52 On the Options Bar. 55 On the Edit menu. 53 In the Filter dialog box. Depending on the exact placement of the windows you added in the north and south elevation views. and components. 50 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 56 Select Level 2. click . 54 On the Edit menu. a message might be displayed stating that the new walls conflict with an existing insert.

In the steps that follow. Ignore the warning and proceed with the next step. 61 On the View toolbar. it is most likely because the center window intersects the corridor wall on Levels 2 and 3. or ceiling in which you want the opening. The message disappears once you click in the drawing area. You can drag the window or use the arrow keys on your keyboard to nudge the window to a location that does not conflict with the interior wall. you can continue working and the warning dialog box closes automatically. you are prompted to select the floor. it is often a good idea to create a view that makes the selection process more precise. zoom in to the upper exterior wall and notice that the center window conflicts with the left wall of the corridor. roof. you add floor openings to accommodate the elevators and stairs. If you received this error. If you know the source of the problem. 58 If you received the conflict message. When you add a model opening. . 59 Correct the problem by moving the window away from the corridor wall. double-click Level 2. under Floor Plans. 66 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Therefore. 60 Check the lower exterior wall for the same problem and correct it. click 62 On the View toolbar. click . 57 In the Project Browser. 63 Spin the model so you can see the interior walls and components on level 2. if necessary. you can click the controls on the side of the dialog box.These conflict warnings alert you to problems in your layout. For more information regarding the warning.

under Floor Plans. Adding a section is a two-click process. double-click Level 1. click Section. drag the clip planes of the view so that you capture only the building model and set the depth just past the bathroom wall. 70 Using the shape handles.Create a section view 64 In the Project Browser. as shown. After you add the section. The first click specifies the section head. Creating Your First Building Model | 67 . 68 Click the section line. move the cursor down and click just below the south exterior wall. you can flip the view direction and modify the extents of the view. click to set the start point. 66 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and the second click specifies the section tail. and click Zoom To Fit. 67 Place the cursor over the upper right corner of the building model. 65 Right-click in the empty space of the drawing area. 69 Click the flip arrows to change the direction of the view towards the interior.

72 Double-click the section head. 74 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. This view offers easy accessibility to all floors as well as the stairwells on the left and right. Create a floor opening 73 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Similarly. and click OK. floor. select Pick a roof. just as the level heads do in an elevation view. The section head is displayed in blue. select it. when it highlights. click Opening. 68 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . the section heads are linked directly to the view so when you double-click the section head. or ceiling and cut vertically.71 On the Design Bar. the referenced view opens. click Modify. 75 Place the cursor over the level 2 floor and.

click Lines. 79 On the Options Bar. 80 Draw a rectangle that snaps to the interior wall faces of the stairwell as shown below. 77 Zoom around the stairwell in the lower right corner. the sketch lines have been enhanced for training purposes. select the rectangle drawing tool. 78 On the Design Bar. these constraints ensure that the opening adapts to any changes in the associated walls. In the following illustration. Creating Your First Building Model | 69 .Because you must be in a view parallel to the screen in order to edit a sketch. Notice the locking constraints that display. the Go to View dialog box displays and offers you a selection of views to choose from. When locked. 81 Click each of the four padlocks to lock them. and click Open View. select Floor Plan: Level 2. 76 In the Go to View dialog box.

or ceiling and cut vertically. floor. Add a second opening 84 On the Design Bar. click Opening. and click OK. 83 In the Project Browser.NOTE Although the opening could account for the stair landings at this point. select the rectangle drawing tool. 70 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . select Pick a roof. 82 On the Design Bar. 87 In the Go to View dialog box. 90 On the Options Bar. 88 Zoom to the stairwell in the upper right corner. it is often easier to add the stairs first and then modify the opening precisely to the location of the stairs. 92 Click Finish Sketch. 89 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. click Lines. 85 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. double-click Section 1. 86 Place the cursor over the level 2 floor and when it highlights. select Floor Plan: Level 2. 91 Draw a rectangle that snaps to the interior wall faces of the stairwell and lock the lines as shown. under Sections (Building Section). The modification of the opening is done for you in a dataset used later in this tutorial. select it. and click Open View.

101 Draw a rectangle that snaps to the interior wall faces of the elevator shaft and lock the lines as shown. 103 On the View toolbar. and click Open View. You have completed the three openings required for this level. Creating Your First Building Model | 71 . 94 On the Design Bar. click Lines. click Opening. After adding a floor to Level 3. and click OK. 105 Spin the model so that you can see the vertical penetrations on level 2. 97 In the Go to View dialog box. select it. 95 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. when it highlights. 102 Click Finish Sketch. select Pick a roof. 98 Zoom in to the elevators. select the rectangle drawing tool. click . 99 On the Design Bar. 96 Place the cursor over the level 2 floor and. 100 On the Options Bar.Add an opening for the elevators 93 In the Project Browser. or ceiling and cut vertically. double-click Section 1. you paste align these openings rather than sketch them again. floor. under Sections (Building Section). select Floor Plan: Level 2. click 104 On the View toolbar. .

double-click Section 1. click . 111 On the Design Bar.Add a floor to Level 3 106 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 108 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 109 On the Options Bar. 113 Click Yes to join geometry and cut volume. 118 On the Edit menu. and click OK. verify that Extend into wall (to core) is selected. when the wall highlights under the cursor. 120 Select Level 3 and click OK. Make sure you do not select Floors. The floor type you assigned to Level 2 is used for Level 3. 115 Draw a pick box around Level 2 so that you capture the three openings you created previously. Copy floor openings to Level 3 114 In the Project Browser. click to select it. 72 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . clear everything except Floors (Floor opening cut). 117 In the Filter dialog box. 110 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls and. double-click Level 3. and. press TAB. click Copy to Clipboard. 116 On the Options Bar. under Sections (Building Sections). 112 Click Yes to attach the walls to the bottom of the floor. under Views (all). 119 On the Edit menu. when the chain of walls highlights. and click Zoom To Fit. 107 Right-click. click Floor. click Finish Sketch. click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name.

doors. click Modify. Do not include the exterior walls. 125 Draw a crossing pick box beginning just inside the upper right corner and extending to the lower left corner. and components to Level 3. The vertical penetrations extend through Levels 2 and 3. under Views (all). Creating Your First Building Model | 73 . double-click Level 2. under Floor Plans. 124 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The only remaining task in this exercise is to paste-align the Level 2 interior walls.121 On the View toolbar. and click Zoom To Fit. 123 Right-click. click . Paste-align components to Level 3 122 In the Project Browser.

Adding a Roof and Ceiling In this exercise. 131 On the View toolbar. clear Floors and Floors (Floor opening cut). click . 74 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 127 In the Filter dialog box. Adding a Roof and Ceiling. If you accidently select a component that does not belong in the selection set. 133 Proceed to the next exercise. 129 On the Edit menu. this removes it from the selection set. Reposition one or both of the windows that may be intersecting the corridor wall.TIP If you miss a component. you add a gable roof and ceiling to the west wing of the building model. click Copy to Clipboard. click OK and go to the Level 3 floor plan. 126 On the Options Bar. click Save. 128 On the Edit menu. 130 Select Level 3 and click OK. click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name. NOTE If you receive a warning that a conflict exists with an insert. and click OK. hold the SHIFT key down and select the component. 132 On the File menu. click . hold the CTRL key down and select it.

double-click Roof. and verify that Overhang is 600 mm. Both are sketched components and require you to define the border of the component. 8 Select the upper exterior wall and the lower exterior wall. 3 On the Design Bar. m_First_Project-in_progress. under Floor Plans. If the sketch lines are on the interior side of the exterior walls. 5 Select the left exterior wall so that the sketch line is left of the wall. click Roof  ➤ Roof by Footprint. 7 On the Options Bar. Verify that Extend to wall core is clear. select Defines slope. under Views (all).Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise.rvt. 6 Select the right exterior wall so that the sketch line is right of the wall. clear Defines slope. Add a gable roof to the building model 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating a footprint roof is very similar to creating a floor. 4 On the Options Bar. click the flip arrows to move the lines outside of the exterior walls. Creating Your First Building Model | 75 . click Pick Walls.

14 Spin and zoom the building model until it resembles the following illustration.Timber for Type. 12 On the View toolbar. 76 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click Finish Roof. 16 Press TAB to preselect the chain of exterior walls. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box.9 On the Design Bar. Notice the exterior walls are not connected to the roof. click Roof Properties. . select Warm Roof . click 13 On the View toolbar. 15 Move the cursor over the gable end wall until it is preselected. click . 11 On the Design Bar. and click OK.

19 On the Options Bar. select Top. 18 On the Options Bar. 21 On the Design Bar.17 Click to select the entire chain of exterior walls. The exterior walls attach to the roof. for Top/Base. Notice the drag handle on the roof ridge. The exterior wall chain displays as solid red. click Modify. 20 Select the roof. for Attach Wall. Modify the roof 22 Select the roof. Creating Your First Building Model | 77 . 23 Drag the roof ridge control upward to a point where the pitch is approximately doubled. select Attach.

double-click Level 3. under Views (all). Notice the exterior walls adjust to the new roof pitch. select Compound Ceiling: 600 x 600mm grid. click inside the room to add a ceiling as shown. Using the sketch method. under Ceiling Plans. the ceiling is normally outside the view range and is not visible after you add it. you select a ceiling type from the Type Selector. 29 In the Type Selector. 78 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 26 On the Edit menu.24 Release the drag handle at the new position. 28 On the Modeling tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. TIP Although you can add a ceiling in a floor plan view. click Undo Move. ■ In this case. There are two methods to create a ceiling: ■ Using Auto Ceiling. 25 On the Design Bar. and then click inside highlighted rooms to add a ceiling. 30 In the upper-left corner of the building model. Add a ceiling to Level 3 27 In the Project Browser. you will use the auto ceiling method. This returns the roof to its original position. click Ceiling. you can sketch the perimeter of a ceiling using the same pick and draw techniques learned when you added the floors and roof.

as shown. select Compound Ceiling: 600 x 1200mm grid. Creating Your First Building Model | 79 .31 Add a ceiling of the same type in the remaining rooms on the left side of the corridor and in both bathrooms. 33 Click within the main corridor and each stairwell to add a ceiling in each. 32 In the Type Selector.

Rather than repetitively creating the same stairs on each level and in each stairwell. double-click the section head. and click OK.34 In the Type Selector. and from the context menu. you modify the original stairwell to be a multistory stair and mirror a copy to the other stairwell. 80 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . enter 3900 mm for Height Offset From Level. and select Shading with Edges. select Compound Ceiling: Plain. 35 Add a ceiling to the three remaining rooms on the right side of the corridor. 40 In the Element Properties dialog box. 36 On the Design Bar. 38 On the View Control Bar. Adding Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. you begin by creating a set of stairs from Level 1 to Level 2. click Save. 39 Right-click the ceiling over the elevator shaft on Level 3. click Modify. under Constraints. 41 On the File menu. click the Model Graphics Style control. Adding Multi-Level Stairs. 37 In the drawing area. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. click Properties.

and use the temporary dimensions to specify the values shown in the following image. click Lines. m_First_Project-in_progress. Creating Your First Building Model | 81 . double-click Level 1. 5 Add the three lines as shown.Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. In the steps that follow. the permanent dimension lines have been added as a training aid and the section line has been hidden temporarily. you first add temporary model lines that provide an underlay to trace over. Add stairs between Level 1 and 2 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Type Selector. In order to sketch the stairs accurately. you create a set of U-shaped stairs similar to those in the following illustration. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 2 Zoom in to the stairwell in the lower right corner of the building model. under Views (all).rvt. In the image below. under Floor Plans. select Wide Lines.

for example: 550 mm. You are in sketch mode. 7 Sketch the first half of the run by clicking on the bottom endpoint of the right vertical line. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Stairs. not to the centerline.NOTE It is important to dimension the lines to the interior face of the walls. By default. The dimensions have been predetermined. 8 Sketch the second half of the run by clicking on the top endpoint of the left vertical line. and then specify the value. In the steps that follow. and then clicking the top endpoint of the same line. the Run tool is active. you sketch the stair run and trace the run over the two vertical lines. 82 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Click on the temporary dimension witness line control until it moves to the interior face of the wall. and then clicking the bottom endpoint of the same line.

The stair run is complete. click Finish Sketch. 11 On the Design Bar. and click OK. select 900mm Pipe. click Railings Type. 10 In the Railings Type dialog box. Specify railing type 9 On the Design Bar. Creating Your First Building Model | 83 .

12 Select the stairs. click the Hide/Isolate control. 84 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 15 Delete the three model lines. 14 Select the three model lines. This makes the model lines more apparent. 16 On the View Control Bar. and select Hide Object. 13 On the View Control Bar.Notice that the model lines still display. and select Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. click the Hide/Isolate control.

click . under Sections (Building Section). Modify stairs 18 Select the stairs. under Views (all). under Constraints. select Level 3 for Multistory Top Level. 20 In the Element Properties dialog box. as needed. Use TAB or zoom in. double-click Section 1. Creating Your First Building Model | 85 . 21 On the Design Bar. IMPORTANT Be careful not to select the railings. click Modify.17 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 19 On the Options Bar.

Copy west stairs to east stairwell 22 Select the stairs created in the previous steps. click to specify the start point of the mirror axis.NOTE At this time. This is done in the next exercise using a new dataset. click . The cursor now snaps only to midpoints. 86 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . as shown. 26 Place the cursor over the center of bottom edge of the Level 1 floor. click Mirror. and select Copy. you could modify the floor openings to accommodate the stair landings. SM. When the midpoint symbol and tooltip displays. Do not select the railings. and click to set the mirror axis endpoint. 24 On the Options Bar. 27 Move the cursor upward and perpendicular to the floor. 25 Enter the keyboard shortcut. 23 On the Edit menu.

You add a curtain wall passageway between the wings with a suspended walkway between each of the upper floors.28 On the Design Bar. 29 On the View toolbar. click Save. Creating Your First Building Model | 87 . you create the east wing of the building model by mirroring the west wing. a new dataset is supplied with the building model saved at this point. click Close. Creating the East Wing and Passageway. click 30 On the File menu. NOTE Beginning with the next exercise. click Modify. Creating the East Wing and Passageway In this exercise. . 31 On the File menu. It has been modified slightly for training purposes. 32 Proceed to the next exercise.

This dataset is essentially the same dataset you saved at the end of the last exercise. expand 3D Views. Open the m_First_Project-West_Wing. 3 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. If necessary. You use this plane later as the mirror axis. 88 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . under Views (all). 4 Draw a pick box around the entire building model. Stair railings on Level 3 were added. click Open. click the Training Files icon. zoom out before making the selection. Floor openings were modified to create stair landings. and double-click 3D Southwest Isometric. The following modifications have been made: ■ ■ ■ ■ Wall inserts on the north and south walls were evenly spaced. Additional 3D views were added. 2 Draw a vertical reference plane 12000 mm from the exterior face of the right exterior wall as shown. NOTE It is important to capture every component within this building model.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Mirror the west wing 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt file located in the Metric folder. click Ref Plane.

The entire model displays as selected. double-click Level 1. click Mirror. 9 Select the vertical reference plane you added previously. Creating Your First Building Model | 89 . 8 On the Options Bar. and select the section line to add it to the selection set. IMPORTANT Components selected in one view remain selected when you switch views. under Floor Plans. click and verify that Copy is selected. 5 In the Project Browser. 6 Press and hold CTRL. 7 On the Edit menu.

select Roof for Height. as shown. 21 Sketch the two curtain walls between the wings. If necessary. click 15 On the View toolbar. click . 19 In the Type Selector.After you specify the mirror axis. click Modify on the Design Bar. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click the flip arrows to ensure the exterior face of the curtain wall is facing the outside. click Delete. 14 On the View toolbar. The new components are numbered sequentially. 13 On the Edit menu. click Wall. 11 If necessary. Notice that the new wing is a mirror image of the original. In addition. zoom out to see both wings of the building model. notice that a new section view exists in the Project Browser. 16 Spin and zoom the building model until it resembles the following illustration. 10 After the mirrored copy displays. under Floor Plans. 90 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . double-click Level 1. a progress bar displays on the status bar as the mirrored copy is generated. select Curtain Wall: Exterior Glazing. Add the passageway walls between wings 17 In the Project Browser. 12 Select the reference plane. . 20 On the Options Bar.

click . 23 On the Tools menu. When splitting the wall. 26 Using the same technique. split the same exterior wall at the intersection of the exterior face of the wall hosting door 13 as shown. click Split Walls and Lines. as shown below. 24 On the Options Bar. select Delete Inner Segment. Creating Your First Building Model | 91 . zoom into the intersection and make sure you split the wall where it intersects the exterior face of the elevator shaft wall.Split and delete exterior wall faces of each wing 22 On the View toolbar. 25 Split the face of the exterior brick wall at the intersection with the curtain wall.

28 Zoom in to the intersection of the passageway and the exterior wall of the right wing. you can use the Align tool to clean up the intersection. TIP If the split does not line up perfectly with the intersecting wall.27 Enter ZF to Zoom to Fit. click Split Walls and Lines. 30 On the Options Bar. 29 On the Tools menu. 92 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Notice the segment between the splits has been deleted. verify that Delete Inner Segment is selected.

under Floor Plans. to turn off thin lines mode. double-click Level 1. click Floor. click 34 On the View toolbar. Creating Your First Building Model | 93 . 38 On the Options Bar. 35 In the Project Browser. and clear Extend into wall (to core). click . 39 Select both curtain walls so that the floor offset is on the exterior side of each wall. 37 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Add a floor to the Level 1 passageway 36 Adjust your zoom settings until you can see the perimeter of the entire passageway.31 Using the technique learned previously. 32 On the Design Bar. 33 On the View toolbar. Arrows refer to each split location. click Modify. enter 150 for Offset. split the face of the exterior brick wall at the similar intersections shown below.

Add walkway to Level 2 49 In the Project Browser. click Lines. 42 Select the edge of the floor on both the west and east wings. 43 On the Tools menu. the sketch should be a single closed loop as shown. under Floor Plans. click and Lock. When sketching. click Floor. and then select the center of the top horizontal line. 51 On the Design Bar. dimensions have been added for training purposes. NOTE In the following image. The general rule is that you should click the section of the line that you wish to keep. click Trim/Extend. 46 On the Design Bar. In the following illustration. . 41 On the Options Bar. click Floor Properties.40 On the Design Bar. 50 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. there are two general rules that must be applied: You must have a closed loop and there cannot be intersecting lines. the sketch line weight has been increased for training purposes. 47 Select Concrete 300mm for Type. 44 Select the center of the left vertical line. and click OK. double-click Level 2. click Lines. 53 Sketch a rectangle with the vertical lines attached to the level 2 floor of each wing and each horizontal line 1500 mm from the inner face of the curtain wall. click the rectangle drawing tool. 48 Click Finish Sketch. When finished. 94 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . notice the overlapping intersections that must be cleaned up before the sketch can be finished. 52 On the Options Bar. 45 Continue cleaning up the intersections using this method. In this case.

select 1100mm for Type. 60 Select the line at the top edge of the walkway so that the sketch line is offset inside the walkway. If necessary.54 On the Design Bar. 59 On the Options Bar. and specify an offset of 50 mm. Creating Your First Building Model | 95 . 61 On the Options Bar. If they do. and click OK. TIP Make sure the line intersections do not overlap. 65 On the Design Bar. use the trim tool to make the sketch a single line. click Finish Sketch. and click OK. 58 On the Design Bar. click Lines. you can use the SPACEBAR to toggle the offset. 62 Draw two short lines to close the gap between the walkway and where it intersects each wing. click Floor Properties. zoom in when selecting the walkway edge to make sure the offset is correct. click Railing Properties. 55 Select Beam and Block 200mm for Type. 66 Select the railing. 56 Click Finish Sketch. Add railings to Level 2 walkway 57 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. TIP When sketching. click and . click . 64 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Railing. 63 On the Design Bar. as shown.

click Section. however. select both railings and the walkway on Level 2.67 On the Edit menu. It should be noted that the reason both railings weren’t sketched at the same time is because a railing sketch has to be a single. and click to set the mirror axis. and modify the direction and shape handles. TIP Press and hold CTRL while making multiple selections. For the next mouse click. 73 On the Design Bar. 68 On the Options Bar. 96 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click Mirror. Add a new section view 71 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. it is faster to mirror it. click and Copy. continuous line. only midpoints will be snapped to. 72 Add a section view to the center of the passageway. 70 Click at the midpoint of the walkway for the mirror axis start point. as shown. 74 Double-click the section head you created in the previous step. move the cursor to the right. 69 Enter SM. click Modify. You could create another railing on the other side of the walkway. 75 In the section view.

check Defines slope. under Floor Plans. 77 On the Edit menu.76 On the Edit menu. If necessary. select Level 3. click . double-click Roof. and click OK. 81 Using the zoom commands. The only remaining task is to add a roof to the passageway. click Roof  ➤ Roof by Footprint. zoom in until you can see the railings and walkways. 83 On the Options Bar. 82 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 79 On the View toolbar. and verify that Overhang is 600 mm. click Copy to Clipboard. 78 In the Select Levels dialog box. Add roof to passageway 80 In the Project Browser. click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name. Creating Your First Building Model | 97 . 84 Select each curtain wall so that the offset is outside the curtain wall as shown. adjust the view so you can see the entire passageway.

89 Using the techniques you learned earlier. Exact dimensions are not important. as shown. 98 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .85 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 91 On the View toolbar. 86 On the Options Bar. click Trim/Extend. as shown. click Finish Roof. 88 On the Tools menu. clear Defines slope. click . 87 Sketch two vertical lines that intersect the horizontal lines. click the center of each roof line to clean up each corner. 90 On the Design Bar.

you select the edge of the roof or wall that you want it joined to. For training purposes. Join the roofs 92 On the View Control Bar. Second. you select the edge of the passageway roof. and click Hidden Line. click Join/Unjoin Roof. and then the outer edge of the corresponding wing roof. The two roofs are joined. you click the edge of the roof that you want to join. 94 Click the left edge of the passageway roof. Joining a roof is a two-click procedure. 95 Click the outer edge of the main roof. First.Notice that the passageway roof needs to be joined to each wing. click the Model Graphics Style control. Creating Your First Building Model | 99 . In this case. it is easier to demonstrate the roof joins in hidden line mode. 93 On the Tools menu.

97 Spin the model so that you have access to the unjoined end of the passageway roof and the east wing roof. Finally. 100 On the View Control Bar.rvt 100 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click the Model Graphics Style control. 102 Navigate to your preferred directory. 103 Proceed to the next exercise. click .96 On the View toolbar. click Join/Unjoin Roof.rvt. After creating the schedule. First Project-Dual Wings-in progress. Scheduling the Building Model. Scheduling the Building Model In this exercise. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. The initial schedule contains all doors in the building model. name the file First Project-Dual Wings-in progress. 98 On the Tools menu. click Save As. you create and modify a door schedule. you duplicate the schedule twice. 101 On the File menu. and select Shading with Edges. you modify it to filter by level. and change the filtering so each level has a unique door schedule. 99 Join the passageway roof and the roof of the other wing using the same technique learned in the previous steps. and click Save. rename each schedule.

You can add custom fields and make them either type or instance parameters. select Mark and click Move up until it displays at the top of the list. 10 Move Cost below Hardware. Select Common for Discipline. Under Parameter Data. Select Instance. select Doors for category. 5 Click Add Parameter. click Schedule/Quantities. select Family and Type under Available Fields. TIP You can also double-click an available field to add it to the scheduled fields. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. 4 From the Available Fields list. enter Hardware for Name. select Project parameter. Select Other for Group parameter under. 8 Under Scheduled fields (in order). 2 In the New Schedule dialog box. and click Add. right-click on the Design Bar and click View. Creating Your First Building Model | 101 . on the Fields tab. TIP If the View tab is not visible. 9 Move Hardware so that it is directly below Family and Type. 7 Click OK. 6 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. and click OK. add the following as scheduled fields: ■ ■ ■ Level Mark Cost Notice that there is not an available field for Hardware.Create a door schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Select Text for Type.

and under Field Formatting. 17 Under Fields. Modifications to the schedule appearance display only when the schedule is added to a sheet. Therefore. 15 Select Mark for Then by. select Level. select Hidden field. 19 Under Fields. 24 Select Bold for Header text. 14 At the bottom of the tab. You can hide this field because you are sorting and grouping by level. 102 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 26 In the door schedule. the column is redundant. select Header and select Footer. select Grand totals and select Itemize every instance. select Family and Type. 21 Under Fields. 23 Click the Appearance tab. On the schedule. 20 Select Right for Alignment. Door Type will display as the column heading rather than Family and Type. 12 Select Level for Sort by. 22 Under Field formatting. 13 Under Sort by. 18 Enter Door Type for Heading. select Cost.11 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 25 Click OK. select the column grip between Door Type and Hardware and move the grip to the right until the door types display in their entirety. select Calculate totals. 16 Click the Formatting tab. The door schedule displays.

enter 500. 33 In the Rename View dialog box. and click Properties. Because you created the hardware parameter as an instance parameter.TIP In this view. and click OK. any changes made to column size are not retained when the schedule is added to a sheet. However. 34 Repeat the process to rename the remaining copies to Door Schedule-Level 2 and Door Schedule-Level 3. under Other. You now have a separate schedule for each level. This is because for this door type. each door is allowed a different value. Duplicate and filter door schedules 30 In the Project Browser. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. and click Duplicate. right-click Door Schedule. and press ENTER. right-click Door Schedule-Level 1. right-click Door Schedule. 28 Click OK. Cost is a type parameter. Creating Your First Building Model | 103 . specify Level equals Level 1 for Filter by. 32 In the Project Browser. expand Schedules/Quantities. and click Rename. 29 Click in the Hardware field for door mark number 1. click Edit for the Filter value. A message displays indicating that this change must be applied to all elements of the same type. Modify the schedule 27 Click in the Cost field for door mark number 1. and press ENTER. under Schedules/Quantities. 31 Repeat the previous step to create a second copy of the door schedule. 35 In the Project Browser. and click OK. enter Door Schedule-Level 1. 36 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter Brass. under Schedules/Quantities. each schedule still lists all the doors for each level.

click OK.rvt. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. double-click each door schedule. Rendering the Building Model. 40 In the Project Browser. 39 Repeat the previous four steps for Door Schedule Level 2 and Door Schedule Level 3. 104 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click Settings. Under Type. Create the exterior scene 1 On the View toolbar. After rendering. Rendering the Building Model In this exercise. modify the settings. select Exterior. Enter Exterior Scene for Name. 4 Click OK. Filter each schedule by their respective level. 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. you create an exterior scene. 41 On the File menu. you capture the image and save it within the project. click Save.38 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Schedules/Quantities. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog box. First Project-Dual Wings-in progress. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ Select New. Notice that the information is now filtered for each level. and then render a 3D view using that scene. click .

under Scene Settings. G. 16 Spin the building model until it resembles the following illustration. This is a white background color. click . 15 On the View toolbar. This is the background color for the scene. under Scene Settings. under Background Color. The raytrace process begins and a progress bar displays on the status bar.Specify scene settings 5 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. A color bar displays. 6 In the Environment dialog box. select Solid Color. 18 Drag a box around the building model as shown. 14 Click OK. 10 Click OK. When the rendering process is complete. click Region Raytrace. Creating Your First Building Model | 105 . clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. the building model should resemble the following illustration. 9 Specify a value of 250 for the R. 13 Under Raytrace Settings. and select Blurry Reflections and Blurry Transparency. click Environment. click OK. click the Bars tab. 7 Click the color bar. select Good for Quality. and B settings. 17 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 8 In the Color Picker dialog box. 11 In the Environment dialog box. 12 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box.

rvt 106 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . expand Renderings. An expandable branch called Renderings is added to the Project Browser. you add two sheets with titleblocks to the project. and double-click {3D}. 21 In the Project Browser. First Project-Dual Wings-in progress.19 On the Design Bar. click Save. 20 On the Design Bar. click Capture Rendering. Documenting the Building Model In this exercise. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. you add a rendered view and an elevation view. In the next exercise. click Display Model. 22 On the File menu. This is the captured rendering from the previous steps. you add this to a sheet. You add a floor plan and schedule to the first sheet. 23 Proceed to the final exercise. Documenting the Building Model. On the second sheet.

9 Click Owner. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. The creator of this titleblock family did not want this text to be modifiable in the project environment. click Metric Library. enter your name. click OK to use the loaded titleblock. Titleblocks are a family just like any other component. 4 Double-click the Titleblocks folder. 7 Try to select the logo in the upper right corner. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. You can create a titleblock family and load it into the project or navigate to it from this dialog box. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Load. The blue text is text that you can modify. You are prompted to select a titleblock. 8 Select the titleblock and zoom in to the lower right corner. click Sheet.Add a sheet and titleblock to the project 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The titleblocks that are listed are loaded into the project. and press ENTER. The text is not selectable by design. Creating Your First Building Model | 107 . Notice that several titleblocks are installed with the software. 5 Click Cancel.

The Scale is blank and is filled in when a view is added to the titleblock. select Floor Plan: Level 1.10 On the Settings menu. the label displays As Indicated. 15 Move the cursor to the center of the titleblock and click. and click OK. If you add views of different scales. referring the reader to the view titles. 11 Enter First Building Model for Project Name. and click Add View to Sheet. the next sheet and titleblock will be A102. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 108 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 14 In the Views dialog box. click Add View. In this case. Titleblock numbering is sequential and automatic. click Project Information. Notice that your name is displayed for Client Name. Add a view to the titleblock 12 Zoom out until you can see the entire sheet.

click Activate View. and on the context menu. 24 Adjust the view title length by dragging the shape handles under the extents of the view. 25 Drag the view to the lower left corner of the titleblock as shown. Relocate the view title 22 Drag the view title under the view. 18 On the View menu. Notice the elevation symbols display. Creating Your First Building Model | 109 . You can work on the building model within this view.16 On the Design Bar. you activated the view specifically to turn off the elevation symbol visibility. 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. Notice drag handles display on the ends of the view title. click Visibility/Graphics. clear Elevations. click Modify. 17 Right-click the view. 20 Under Visibility. However. 21 Right-click the view. click Deactivate View. and on the context menu. 23 Select the view. and click OK. The titleblock becomes an underlay and the view becomes active.

27 Zoom out until the titleblock fits within the drawing area. 28 In the Project Browser. under Schedules/Quantities. 110 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .26 Zoom in to the lower right corner. drag Door Schedule-Level 1 onto the upper right corner of the titleblock. Notice that the scale value has updated.

31 Zoom out and move the schedule into the upper right corner of the titleblock. adjust each column width so no text wrapping occurs. Creating Your First Building Model | 111 .29 Zoom in to the top of the schedule. 30 Using the column drag handles.

under Renderings. the schedule breaks in half. You can adjust the lengths of each section after the break. If necessary. notice the z symbol in the center edge. You have completed your first building model. If you click this. 112 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . drag {3D} to the upper right corner of the new titleblock. 36 On the File menu. 33 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box.TIP When the schedule is selected. click OK to use the default titleblock. Because these two views have different view scales. modify the location and width of the view titles. 34 In the Project Browser. 37 On the File menu. Add various views to a second sheet 32 On the View tab of the Design Bar. drag North to the lower left corner of sheet A102. click Sheet. 35 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevations). the Scale label displays As Indicated. click Close. click Save.

113 . you modify the system environment. In the second lesson. you create an office template. which is independent of the project settings. In the first lesson. you modify project settings to control the appearance of the components and subcomponents within that project. you learn how to modify your Autodesk Revit Building working environment.Modifying Project and System Settings 3 In this tutorial. Finally. and set it as your default template.

5 On the File menu. click Options. 10 On the Settings menu. 11 In the Options dialog box. click Close to close all open projects. 17 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 2 On the Settings menu. and select the wall. 8 Select m_Tutorial_Default. click Training Files. Set graphics settings 1 On the File menu. under Template file. select yellow. select Invert background color. 4 Under Colors. journal cleanup options. 18 Sketch a simple straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. click Modify.rte in the Metric folder. 114 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . click New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Building project. 12 Under Colors.Modifying System Settings In this lesson. Notice that the drawing area is black. 15 Under Notifications. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. 3 In the Options dialog box. click Options. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. click the Graphics tab. When an error occurs. click OK. and your username when using worksets. and click OK. and click OK. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. and click Open. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Building working environment. notification preferences. the elements causing the error display using this color. specify the following options: ■ ■ Select One hour for Save Reminder interval. 14 Click the General tab. 13 In the Color dialog box. click the Graphics tab. 7 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog box. click Wall. click Browse. you learn how to control the system settings within Revit Building. they are not saved to project or template files. click the value for Selection Color. 9 In the New Project dialog box. 6 In the New Project dialog box. 19 On the Design Bar. selection default options. Select None for Tooltip Assistance. These settings control the graphics. 16 Click OK.

32 On the File menu. 28 On the Settings menu. 23 On the File menu. click Modify. 20 On the Design Bar. Your login name displays by default. click Close. This setting controls only the tooltips that display within the drawing area. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. do not save the changes. you specify your default file locations. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. the family libraries. 25 On the File menu. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. Specifying File Locations. select your preferred Save Reminder interval. Under Username. These settings control location of important Revit Building files such as your default project template. 21 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days).rvt file located in the Metric folder. Select Red for Selection Color. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. 31 Click OK. click the Graphics tab and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Graphics. click Options. click Open. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Building session. 24 When prompted to save. Notice that the system settings apply to this project. Under Journal File Cleanup. 22 Place the cursor over any of the icons on the toolbars. Notice that a tooltip is displayed even though you set Tooltip Assistance to None. the family template files. click Close. 26 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click No. click the Training Files icon. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. If prompted. 27 Open the m_Settings. 30 Click the General tab and make the following changes: ■ ■ ■ Under Notifications. as well as the material and rendering libraries. 29 In the Options dialog box. clear Invert background color.Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. Modifying System Settings | 115 . and select Normal for Tooltip Assistance. Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Building sessions. Journals can be run in order to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files. These files are used primarily in the software support process.

11 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. choose New  ➤ Project. However. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog box. 10 Under Libraries. you can start a new project with that template. Each library path points Revit Building to a folder of families or training files. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. 4 Click Cancel. notice the list of library names. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog box. In the following illustration. Load. Notice that there are industry-specific templates that you can set as your default template. 8 Click Cancel. and you can create new libraries. such as in a large. under Default path for family template files. 7 In the Options dialog box. 5 Under Default path for user files. click . notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog box. click Options. or loading a Revit Building file. This path is set automatically during the installation process. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. click Browse. select the folder to save your files to by default. and Import dialog boxes. Save. and change the name to My Library. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. On the File menu. click Browse. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. centralized. and click the arrow that displays on the right side of the field. architectural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. and click Browse to select a template. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit Building Open. TIP To view a template. 116 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . saving. 2 In the Options dialog box. and click OK. 12 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. You can modify the existing library names and path. click Browse. click the File Locations tab. 3 Under Default template file.Set file locations 1 On the Settings menu. 6 In the Browse for Folder dialog box. When you are opening. under Libraries.

Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. specify the new location here. 24 Under AccuRender resource location. 16 On the File menu. Modifying System Settings | 117 . and select it as the library path. If you work in a large office. 14 Under Library Name. This path is determined during installation. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Building. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Building Open. 20 Click the File Locations tab. templates. 25 Click OK. Load. 21 Under Libraries. 19 On the Settings menu. If you want to relocate this path. click Open. 15 Click until My Library is at the top of the list. select My Library. click Options. 17 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. Notice that Revit Building navigates directly to the library path. This path specifies the location of the AccuRender® texture library. and Import dialog boxes. and click OK. Specify rendering settings 23 Click the Rendering tab. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. 22 Click to delete the library. Save.13 Navigate to C:\My Documents or any other folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Building projects. click My Library. and click OK. click the My Library icon. Specifying Spelling Options. or families. view the current path. 18 Click Cancel. The library icons display in the order that they are listed in the Options dialog box. you may want to set up an office library on a network path in order to increase productivity and maintain office standards.

click OK. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. click Browse. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. click Modify. 118 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. This resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. click OK. click Training Files. 2 In the Options dialog box. 17 Click OK. 18 On the Settings menu.Modify spelling settings 1 On the Settings menu. click Edit. Notice that there is also a building industry dictionary. 12 On the Standard toolbar. 21 Under Personal dictionary. If prompted. enter sheetmtl-Cu. click Options. click Exit. Modify snap increments 1 On the File menu. and then click File  ➤ Exit. click Spelling. click Restore Defaults. 22 In the text editor. click Edit. 2 In the New Project dialog box. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. Modifying Snap Settings. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Edit. you modify snap settings. 19 In the Options dialog box. click OK. 4 Select m_Tutorial_Default. 10 On the File menu.rte in the Metric folder. You can turn snap settings on and off. 20 Under Settings. scroll down the list of building industry terms. work with snapping turned off. click the Spelling tab. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. click Exit. you modify snap increments. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. click Save. 7 On the File menu. 6 On the File menu. 25 On the File menu. 14 Click in the drawing area. 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the Tools menu. 9 In the text editor. and click Open. 5 In the text editor. click Save. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog box. click Close. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. do not save the changes. 3 Under Settings. click New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Building project. click to open a new Revit Building project using the default template. delete sheetmtl-CU. 4 Under Personal dictionary. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 11 In the Options dialog box. 23 On the File menu of the text editor. under Template file. In this exercise. click Text. click Options. 5 In the New Project dialog box. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. click the Spelling tab. 24 In the Options dialog box.

snapping reverts to the system default settings. enter SM and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. These are shortcut keys that you can use at any time when working on the design. Revit Building uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. click Wall. As you zoom in and out within a view. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. click Snaps. For example. click OK. zoom out until it does so. and enter 500 . enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. 7 Under Dimension Snaps. and move the cursor to the right. Modifying System Settings | 119 . 9 In the Snaps dialog box. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. 10 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. A listening dimension refers specifically to the dimension that appears while in the act of sketching. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the context menu. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys such as ZO to zoom out. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. notice the two-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. This dimension reacts to the movement of your cursor and numerical keyboard entries.. This is the increment that you added previously.6 On the Settings menu. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. While sketching. If it does not. If you do not have a wheel button. use the wheel button on your mouse. 8 Under Object Snaps. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. TIP To zoom while in the act of sketching.

26 Proceed to the next lesson. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. save the project file with a unique name. Modifying Project Settings. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. and delete the value 500 . Notice that snapping is once again active. you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu. 120 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . and specify the wall endpoint. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. 21 Move the cursor downward. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety. and object styles. and use it to complete the exercises. 19 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. it defines the appearance of that component in shaded and rendered views. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. Do not set the wall end point. 23 Under Dimension Snaps. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise.Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. lines. 22 On the Settings menu. you create a new material and apply it to a model component. 25 On the File menu. Finally. annotations. and the wall edges. 24 Click OK.. and click Wall. 20 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. and move the cursor to the right. you modify the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings. and do not save the file. You create and modify materials. When you apply a material to a component. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. If you move the cursor along the wall. Using these options. click Modify. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. click Snaps. 18 Enter SM. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 On the Design Bar. fill patterns. Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. 17 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. it will snap to the endpoints. the midpoint. click Close.

rvt located in the Metric folder. you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view.Stone for Name. This list includes all materials required by loaded model components. 4 In the New Material dialog box. This creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point. you begin with a simple building model consisting of brick on CMU exterior walls. you render a region to observe the changes. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Modifying Project Settings | 121 .In the steps that follow. click Open. Notice that there is no Surface Pattern applied to this material. However. and click OK. After you create a new fieldstone material and apply it to the exterior wall face. and select Masonry .Fieldstone. Masonry-Fieldstone. enter Masonry . Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog box. click Materials. all materials that are part of that component family are also loaded into the project. 3 Click Duplicate. this material provides a good foundation for the new material. In the steps that follow. When a model component is loaded into a project. Open m_Settings. click the Training Files icon. This building model has a generic roof and generic floor. nor is there an AccuRender texture applied. Create a new material 1 On the Settings menu. You have created a new material that can be applied to any model component in this project. Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. 2 Scroll down.

9 Select the entry under Image Mapping. 24 In the Materials dialog box. and click OK. 13 In the Save Material As dialog box.75 for X and Y. expand Floor Plans. All of the exterior walls of this project are now Fieldstone on CMU. 12 In the Material Editor dialog box. 8 In the Material Editor dialog box. The upper wall now uses the Fieldstone on CMU AccuRender texture when you render it. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to the Masonry . 11 Under Offset. Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall. and click Edit. click to select a texture. click Edit. click This is the material you created previously. and click OK. Apply the new material 16 In the Project Browser. 21 In the Value field for Structure. 15 Click OK. expand Views (all). and click OK. click the Orientation tab. on the Material menu. . 20 Enter the new wall name. 26 Select the right exterior wall. 14 In the Material Library dialog box. 17 Select the upper exterior wall. 22 Click in the Material field for layer #1. 7 In the Material Library dialog box.Brick.Fieldstone for the name. 19 Click Duplicate. you help prevent the appearance of repetitive patterns within the rendering. 28 In the Type Selector.Fieldstone for Name. By offsetting the X and Y values of the image map. select Masonry . click New  ➤ Use Current Material as Template. and click OK. and select the remaining two unchanged walls. click Edit/New. Before closing the Materials dialog box.Fieldstone material. enter 0. and double-click Level 1. 27 Press CTRL. 122 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . enter Masonry . In the next exercise. 23 On the right side of the Material field. Fieldstone on CMU. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . select user from the list of libraries. 25 Click OK three times. The AccuRender texture Masonry . select Basic Wall: Fieldstone on CMU. notice that the Surface Pattern is still blank. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. click OK. and select Stone82. 10 In the Image Mapping dialog box. click the Maps tab. click OK.Modify material settings 5 Under AccuRender.Fieldstone is now part of your AccuRender User library. 6 Navigate to BMCD2AR3\Bitmap Textures\Stone\. and click .

click Save As. 33 On the File menu. you create a new pattern called Fieldstone and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise. Notice the roof did not render. Modifying Project Settings | 123 . you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to this material. the fieldstone material that you created is displayed. 30 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 32 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. When finished. 34 Navigate to a folder of your preference. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. the rendering process begins. In the following exercise. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns. select Region Raytrace. 31 In the drawing area. This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the fieldstone material was defined. drag a rectangle around the 3D image. This is because a material has not been applied to the roof. In the exercise. right-click the Design Bar. click Display Model. Controlling Object Styles. After you draw the rectangle around the 3D model. and save the file as m_Settings-in progress. you apply a material to default roofs and resolve this. TIP If you want to see the material in greater detail. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns. click . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise.29 On the View Toolbar. click Display Model on the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. and there is no stone pattern applied in this view. Notice that the exterior walls are no longer brick.rvt. click Region Raytrace. Zoom into the model. and click Rendering. and drag a rectangle around the area you want to render. 35 Proceed to the next exercise.

4 Scroll down the list of patterns. 2 On the Settings menu. and double-click East. Notice that a fieldstone pattern is not available.rvt. click Custom.There are two types of fill patterns: model and drafting. 3 Under Pattern Type. 9 Select Fieldstone_Model. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. 7 Under Custom. your training files can be found on C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\Revit Building\Training. Drafting pattern density is fixed. 12 Click OK. click Fill Patterns. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser. expand Elevations.56 for Import scale. such as steel. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 8 Navigate to the training folders installed with your Revit Building software. TIP Typically. and enter . Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. choose Model. The new model pattern is available in the Name list in the Fill Patterns dialog box. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog box. and click Open.pat from the Common folder. and click OK. m_Settings-in progress. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 11 Enter Fieldstone for Name. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. select fldstn. Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the fieldstone wall. click Import. The location of these files can vary depending on the path you set during installation. Apply the fieldstone pattern 13 Select the east exterior wall. 10 Under Custom. 124 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 5 Click New.

Controlling Object Styles You can use Object Styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents. click Modify. 23 Click OK three times.14 On the Options Bar.” You can then change the material in the Object Styles dialog box and apply it to all window types. 26 On the View Toolbar. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. you can set the window frame material to “By Category. Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall. click OK. click to select a fill pattern. and click OK. under Pattern Type.Fieldstone material. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. click Edit. there are often multiple window types within a project. 19 Under Surface Pattern. In the Materials dialog box. 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. Rather than continually modify the type properties of each window type. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . select Model. notice that there is no surface pattern applied to the Masonry . click . The client may not be certain of the exact window frame color to use and may want to see renderings of various options. 21 Select the Fieldstone model pattern. Object Styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. For example. click Save. TIP If the pattern does not display. click . adjust your zoom settings as needed. 22 In the Materials dialog box. 18 On the right side of the Materials field. Object Styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple component types. Controlling Object Styles. 24 On the Design Bar. 20 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. 16 In the Value field for Structure.Fieldstone. click . The east wall of the building displays as solid fill. Modifying Project Settings | 125 . 25 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. click in the Material field for layer #1. click Edit/New. 27 On the File menu.

rvt.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. m_Settings-in progress. 126 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. expand 3D Views. 2 On the keyboard. use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region) and drag a rectangle around the three left windows facing you. Apply object styles 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click 3D Model View.

9 In the Type Properties dialog box. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. click By Category. under Other. . 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. click OK. click Model Graphics Style. 12 On the Options Bar. click . 5 On the Options Bar. 17 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . and select 8 In the Materials dialog box. 11 Zoom out. click the Trim Exterior Material value. and select the circular window on the second level. under Other. . 6 In the Element Properties dialog box. click the Trim Exterior value. click OK. and select 15 In the Materials dialog box. This means that the material is assigned by the Object Styles setting. click Edit/New. click Edit/New. click Modify. Notice the exterior frames of all the windows are now gray. 14 In the Type Properties dialog box.3 On the View Control Bar. click By Category. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box. 18 On the Design Bar. click OK. Modifying Project Settings | 127 . 16 In the Type Properties dialog box. click OK. 4 Select one of the windows. and click Shading with Edges.

NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. select Trim. and click OK twice. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the fascia of the roof. and click in the Material field.Granite for name. 26 On the Settings menu. specify Trim . Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise.19 On the Settings menu. select Trim . 24 In the Materials dialog box. click Include categories from all disciplines in the list above. click . click Object Styles. 25 In the Object Styles dialog box. 22 Under the Windows category. expand Windows. 28 On the View Toolbar. 20 In the Object Styles dialog box.rvt. expand Windows. click Object Styles. Notice that the material is applied to all windows regardless of their type. m_Settings-in progress. You then create a new line style to mark the zoning setback from the property line. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. click Save. Notice that the external window frames are now white. and click OK. 27 Under Category. click OK. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles. 23 On the right side of the Material field. . 128 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 21 Under Category. click 29 On the File menu.White for Trim material.

9 In the Object Styles dialog box. click Line Patterns. 10 Select Red for Line Color. enter Roof Line for Name. click Object Styles. select Roofs. 7 On the View Control Bar. 2 On the Settings menu. The line style is applied to the roof in all views. You can use the Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the roof appearance in a specific view. m_Settings-in progress. now you must apply it. and select Roof Line for Line Pattern. 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 6 Click OK twice. or you can use Object Styles to apply the change to all views. 8 On the Settings menu.Create a new line pattern 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog box. 3 In the Line Patterns dialog box. 11 Click OK. There are two ways to apply the line style to the roof. click New. You have created a new line pattern. and click Hidden Line. click Model Graphics Style. Modifying Project Settings | 129 .rvt. is open with the 3D view active. under Category.

click Object Styles. 14 On the Settings menu. under Modify Subcategories. and select Roofs for Visibility. Notice that the line style displays in this view also. 16 Select Solid for Line Pattern. 17 Click OK. and click Hidden Line. click New. under Category. 18 On the View menu. select Override and specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ Select 5 for Line Weight. 19 Click the Model Categories tab. double-click 3D Model View. 13 On the View Control Bar. Select Blue for Line Color. Select Roof Line for Line Pattern. 130 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . This overrides the appearance of the roof only in the current view. 21 In the Select Line Style dialog box. and select Black for Line Color. under Floor Plans. and click OK. 22 Click OK twice. under 3D Views. double-click Site. click Visibility/Graphics. 20 Click Override for Line Style Projection. Notice the site topography and the property lines. 15 In the Object Styles dialog box.12 In the Project Browser. 24 On the Settings menu. click Line Styles. select Roofs. click Model Graphics Style. 26 Enter Zoning Setback for Name. Create a new line style 23 In the Project Browser. 25 In the Line Styles dialog box.

Notice that the line style has not been applied to the roof in this view because you applied the override to the 3D Model View only. 37 In the Project Browser. 40 Click OK. click . specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Select 2 for Line Weight Projection. 42 On the File menu. and clear Zoning Setback. and click to set the rectangle endpoint. 39 On the Model Categories tab. click Visibility/Graphics. Enter -3000 mm for Offset. 31 In the Options Bar. and clear Zoning Setback. ■ 32 Click the upper-left corner of the property line to begin the rectangle. under Floor Plans. 41 On the View Toolbar. 33 On the View Toolbar. 43 Proceed to the next exercise. 35 On the Model Categories tab. Notice the Zoning Setback lines appear in this view. This turns off the visibility of the Zoning Setback lines only in this view.) Click . double-click Level 1 Annotated. expand Lines. 29 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Save. Modifying Annotations. 38 On the View menu. 34 On the View menu. The -3000mm offset displays inside the property lines. select Zoning Setback. click Visibility/Graphics. Select Double Dash 5/8" for Line Pattern. you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. Modifying Annotations In this exercise. 30 In the Type Selector. specify the following: ■ ■ Click . expand Lines. click Lines. 28 Click OK. click . 36 Click OK. move the cursor to the bottom-right corner of the property lines. Select Red for Line Color. (Make sure you specify a negative value. Modifying Project Settings | 131 . You also load a new window annotation symbol and apply it to show the window instance number rather than the window type number.27 For the Zoning Setback category.

Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 6 In the Format dialog box: ■ ■ Clear Use project settings.Imperial dimension available. you load a new window tag that displays the window instance mark. click the default value for Units Format. navigate to the Annotations/Architectural folder of the Metric Library. click Duplicate. In the Type Selector. Notice that the windows on the east and west walls are tagged. notice the Mark value differs from the window tag value. 5 Under Text. under Category. 17 Click Load. under Floor Plans. In the steps that follow. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Select Feet and fractional inches for Units.rvt.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 14 Click Cancel.Imperial and click OK. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. 11 Select any window in the east or west wall. The window tag used in this project is designed to display the type number. m_Settings-in progress. 4 Enter the name Linear . 15 On the Settings menu. Load a new window tag 10 In the Project Browser. 12 On the Options Bar. 2 On the Settings menu. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. notice that there is a Linear . Notice that there is a window tag loaded and applied to windows. click . scroll down to Windows.Number. and that the tag displays the window type number rather than the window instance number. 7 Click OK twice. 18 In the Open dialog box. Create a new dimension style 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. and select M_Window Tag . 16 In the Tags dialog box. You have created a new dimension style. 3 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Annotations  ➤ Loaded Tags. click Annotations  ➤ Dimensions  ➤ Linear. 132 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Modify. is open with the 3D View active. click Dimension. m_Settings-in progress. double-click Level 1 Annotated.

Under Category. In the first section. 31 On the Design Bar.Number is now the assigned tag. Modifying Project Settings | 133 . dimension values display using this setting. The remaining untagged windows are tagged by instance value. Specifying Units of Measurement. click Tag All Not Tagged. Temporary Dimensions. In the final section. and select the drop-down arrow that displays. you can have multiple views: one displaying window type tags and the other displaying window instance values. notice Window Tags appears twice. This indicates this tag is designed to display the window instance value rather than the type value. 27 Select the Window Tag category with the loaded tag. Specifying Units of Measurement. you modify three settings that have a broad impact on the project. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 28 Under Leader. click the three left-most windows. 20 In the Tags dialog box. M_Window Tag . select M_Window Tag . you specify the project units of measurements.Number as the assigned tag. m_Settings-in progress.Number. you modify the detail level assignments. Each Window Tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. click M_Window Tag .Number. 24 On the Options Bar. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. 29 On the east wall.Number. TIP Using the techniques learned in the previous steps. and click OK. click 33 On the File menu. 26 On the Design Bar. 21 Under Loaded Tags. A window instance tag displays on each selected window. click Modify. clear Leader.In the preview image. scroll to Windows and notice that M_Window Tag . 25 On the left side of the north wall. Notice that both window tag types can coexist within the same view. and Detail Level Options. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 30 In the Type Selector. select one of the window tags that displays the type value. click Save. 22 Click OK. the other displays the instance value. . This tag is used when tagging windows By Category. and Detail Level Options In this exercise. In the second section. 32 On the View Toolbar. Unless overridden. notice that the label displays 1i. verify that Create is clear. Temporary Dimensions. 19 Click Open. click Tag. Notice that you can choose between the two window tag types loaded into this project. Leave M_Window Tag .rvt. you modify the temporary dimension settings.

Open c_Project_Browser. under Length. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags. Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project. click the default value for Format. expand Floor Plans. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. Modifying Project Browser Organization. 6 Click OK. Specify detail levels 10 On the Settings menu. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. 3 In the Format dialog box. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. select 0 decimal places for Rounding. 12 Click OK. Notice the 1 : 50 view scale moved to the Medium column. dimensions use these project settings. select meters squared for Unit suffix. Unless overridden. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click . and click OK. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. select Openings. Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. 8 Under Walls.Set units of measurement 1 On the Settings menu. click Open. under Area. and click OK. select Faces. You do not select a view scale to move it. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. In order to organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. and click OK. 4 In the Project Units dialog box. temporary dimensions now snap to the wall faces and to the door and window openings. When you create a new view and specify its view scale. click Detail Level. 14 On the File menu. and expand 3D Views. In this project. click Project Units. click the Training Files icon. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. 13 On the File menu. expand Views (all). 9 Under Doors and Windows. select To the nearest 100 for Rounding. 5 In the Format dialog box. In this exercise. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. click Save.rvt from the Common folder. you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. Specify temporary dimension properties 7 On the Settings menu. click the default value for Format. In this table. click Close. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction. Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium. 134 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog box. click Temporary Dimensions. 2 In the Project Units dialog box.

8 Select Phase. and click OK. notice that Views are grouped based on Phase. and click Apply.Notice that the views are listed alphabetically. under Sheets. notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines.Phase 1-Structure East Wing . expand both the Architectural and Structural views. 2 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Views tab. click Browser Organization. and notice that each is grouped by discipline. expand Sheets (all). Modifying Project Settings | 135 . and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg . select Discipline. 12 Click the Sheets tab. 6 In the Project Browser. click Browser Organization. 14 In the Project Browser. On the Project Browser. 4 On the Settings menu. Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 On the Settings menu. In the Project Browser.Phase 2-Structure West Wing . expand each sheet set. 13 Select Sheet Prefix. click Browser Organization. 9 In the Browser Organization dialog box. 7 On the Settings menu. expand each view type. and click OK. Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number. select Type/Discipline.Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline. 10 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order.

and view names. Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. When you create new projects. 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. and click OK. 22 On the File menu. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. In this lesson. click the Folders tab. named print settings. You can save Project Browser organization schemes. click Close. If you want to save this file. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. It is mostly conceptual and designed as a road map with options for your consideration. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. expand Complete. Although Revit Building provides many templates to choose from. This lesson is intended to provide you with a blueprint of how to create your office template. you create an office template. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Family and Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. Creating an Office Template In this lesson. and render scenes in a template. dimensions styles. under Views. View Type (Family and Type). you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. The lesson begins with choosing the right base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you would consider in order to make a template unique to your situation. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. and expand both Architectural and Structural. navigate to your preferred directory. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. Proceed to the next lesson. 136 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 21 In the Project Browser. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. levels. and Discipline. click Browser Organization. In the lesson that follows. and click New. 16 Click the Views tab. You can also save these settings in a template file. expand 3D Views. you create a Revit Building template file and set it as your default template. 20 In the Browser Organization dialog box.Create a new browser organization name 15 On the Settings menu. A well designed template will ensure office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. enter a unique file name. 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog box. and click OK. and click OK. Creating an Office Template.

select Project Template. you modify the project settings for your new template. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. drag a zoom region around the level heads. For example. expand Views. 14 Click Open. click Browse. the same rules apply. structural or construction. click Zoom  ➤ Zoom in Region and. Review existing templates 1 On the File menu. 13 Select the default template. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of the structural tools. 2 In the New Project dialog box. expand Elevations. When you create the material. 12 Under Template File. In that case. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. click New  ➤ Project. you can select it now. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project.rte template. 10 On the File menu. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. 7 On the View menu. 11 Under Create New. For example. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects. When you create a new template based on an existing template. If you have additional projects open. Other templates. a group of settings are used to specify the project environment. Other than the default template. close them. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. select Project for Create new. Notice that the construction template is more complex than the default template. 4 Select the Construction-DefaultMetric. 3 Under Template File. click Browse. click New ➤ Project. are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. Creating an Office Template | 137 . you select the starting point for your office template. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. Modifying Project Settings. If you want to use a template other than the default. 6 In the Project Browser. Whenever you create a new project or template. navigate throughout the various views and schedules. 9 On the File menu. 5 Click OK. and double-click North. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. when you create a new project. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. In order to maintain office standards and reduce rework. you can establish the settings that are common to most projects. 8 In the Project Browser.Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. click Close. Notice there are a number of different templates to choose from. in the drawing area. each is modified in a way to make it useful to the applicable industry. for instance. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. and click OK. and click Open. such as the structural template. You should choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work.

create and modify them as needed. During this exercise. or modify existing patterns. 6 Scroll through the list of model and drafting patterns. Specify object styles 9 On the Settings menu. you can do so by going to the Material menu and selecting New. line colors. If there are materials that are commonly used within your office or industry. When you save a new AccuRender material designed to be used in an office template. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. 4 Click OK twice to close the Material Library and Materials dialog boxes. see the previous lesson. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. Observe the materials that are already defined. you can set line weights. 8 Click OK when finished. Create and modify fill patterns 5 On the Settings menu. For more details on modifying these settings. Create and modify materials 1 On the Settings menu. 138 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . weights. RELATED See Modifying System Settings for more information on creating new AccuRender materials. You can also dimension to model pattern lines.In this exercise. If you create or modify new materials. click Object Styles. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization In addition to the list above. and materials for different categories and subcategories of components or imported objects. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. Choose the appropriate option. click Fill Patterns. RELATED See Modifying Project Settings for more information on creating new fill patterns. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles. In the Object Styles dialog box. 7 Create new fill patterns as needed. 3 Under AccuRender. You can do this by setting the AccuRender Texture. You may want to save the material to a library located on a network path. If there are custom AccuRender materials that you want to add to the template. click Materials. Modifying System Settings or refer to the Help documentation. be aware that access to the original material library may be necessary at some point. and move model patterns. specific modifications are not dictated. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. you may want to specify their appearance when rendered. You can align. and create the AccuRender material. there are additional commands under the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. TIP Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. line patterns. 2 Scroll down the Name list. click to access the AccuRender Material Library. rotate.

13 Click the Annotation Objects tab. 17 For existing line categories. 24 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. 21 Click the Model Line Weights tab. line color.TIP When the material of a component is set to by category. such as section lines and dimension lines. 12 If necessary. 14 Modify categories. click Line Patterns. 27 Modify existing line weights as needed. Modify line weights 20 On the Settings menu. You can add and delete view scales. and one for annotation symbol line styles. and create new subcategories as needed. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for six different drawing scales. The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of objects such as walls and windows in perspective views. 18 If necessary. select it. or line pattern as needed. create new line subcategories. 22 Modify existing line weights as needed. 23 Add and delete view scales as needed. 11 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. 28 Click OK. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. and click Edit. such as walls and windows in orthographic views. 32 Add and delete line patterns as needed. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. 10 Click the Model Objects tab. Modify line styles 16 On the Settings menu. 26 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. 25 Modify existing line weights as needed. click Line Styles. and scroll through the list of categories. create new subcategories. Modify line patterns 29 On the Settings menu. 33 Click OK. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. modify the line weight. In the dialog box. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. 30 Scroll through the list of line patterns. 15 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog box. click Line Weights. 31 To modify a line pattern. 19 Click OK. there are three tabs: one for model component line styles. one for perspective model line styles. The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of modeling components. Creating an Office Template | 139 .

click Annotations  ➤ Dimensions  ➤ Angular. click Load. For example. 42 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. select it from this list. click Annotations  ➤ Loaded Tags. Volume. To see the details of a particular style. click Project Units. name the style. 53 Modify the unit settings if necessary. 44 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. 57 Click OK. 49 To load new annotation tags. ■ ■ On the Settings menu. click Duplicate. click Annotations  ➤ Dimensions  ➤ Radial. Modify Dimension Styles 40 On the Settings menu. 54 Click OK. and click OK. tags. 45 Click OK. when you add a door with the tag option selected. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. name the style. On the Settings menu. 52 Under Length. and specify the properties. Linear. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. 36 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. The tag assignments in this dialog box dictate the default tag for each category. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. and choose a decimal symbol. click Format. and dimensions. and Angle settings. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. 56 Specify the Slope option. 46 Repeat the previous five steps for angular and radial dimensions. 50 After you have loaded the necessary tags. 140 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Duplicate. Specify project units 51 On the Settings menu. angular. 35 Select the Type drop-down list. 39 Click OK. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. Modify loaded tags 47 On the Settings menu. and specify the properties. 38 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. In the Tags dialog box. click Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. and radial dimensions are modified separately. The arrowheads configured within this dialog box can be applied to text notes. 55 Repeat the previous two steps for the Area. 37 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. 43 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. the door is tagged using the tag assigned to the Doors category in this dialog box. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. 48 Scroll through the list of loaded tags.Modify arrowheads 34 On the Settings menu. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. click Annotations  ➤ Dimensions  ➤ Linear. To see the details of a particular style. 41 Select the Type drop-down list. select it from this list.

or Edit existing organization types. Although these settings can be saved within a template. However. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. you can save rendered scene settings to a template. you can move view scales from one detail level to another. For example. In such a case.Specify temporary dimensions 58 On the Settings menu. create new browser organization types. click Temporary Dimensions. you may want to modify the browser organization settings within the template. Rename. The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. Specify detail levels 62 On the Settings menu. RELATED For more information on modifying browser organization. click the arrows between columns. In order to organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. 69 Click the Sheets tab. click Detail Level. To move the view scales. 61 Click OK. 60 Under Doors and Windows. In a typical project. The detail level is based on view scale. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. Creating an Office Template | 141 . specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. Rename. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. When you create a new view. 72 Click OK. there are several additional commands that control the project environment. click Browser Organization. 66 In the Browser Organization dialog box. TIP In the drawing area. 70 Delete. These views and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. 64 Click OK. Additional project settings 73 On the Settings menu. 71 If necessary. and move view scales as needed. Modify project browser organization 65 On the Settings menu. or Fine. 68 If necessary. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. 67 Delete. see Modifying Project Browser Organization. create new browser organization types. or Edit existing organization types. NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog box. 63 Review the table. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. click the Views tab. 59 Under Walls. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. Using the arrows between the columns. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. Medium. you may only want to add generically named settings that would be applicable to most projects. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify the grouping and sorting within the Project Browser. If you routinely create the same documentation sets.

Use the instructions in the table below to load. create. Links to associated tutorials are provided. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. you can set the default contour line interval. If necessary. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups. Site Settings If necessary. or add to this selection. select Load. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. You can load any family or group into a template. Make modifications. you could load detail components. you would have to scroll through a lengthy list of windows every time you changed a window within a project. you can move onto the next component type. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. Each command is available on the Settings menu. See Modifying Views and View Templates. For example. or electrical fixtures. Although the options are endless. This could be useful for things such as hardware. you do both. Goal: Load new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog box. If necessary. furniture. titleblocks. there are some important thoughts to consider. 3 To modify. 74 Proceed to the next exercise. notice the list of doors already loaded. In addition. Although this is possible. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. you can create and modify area schemes if there are default settings applicable to most projects. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. See Setting up Shared and Project Parameters. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. 2 In the Type Selector. and electrical fixtures. Obviously. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. if you loaded every window type you could find. and graphic overrides applicable to most projects. you can create scene settings and save them to the template. You may want to modify wall types to add a more diverse selection within the template. or use the Project Browser. phase filters. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. or load a new door type. and in the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Edit/New. Modify door type 142 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . create. In the Element Properties dialog box. you can set up the phases. select from the Options Bar. If necessary. modify. and click OK. It is important to understand that you should not load every conceivable family into a template file. Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views. and the poche depth. click Door. In the steps that follow. However. Depending on the intended use of this template. If you have not completed the previous exercise. Phases Project Phasing Area Settings Area Analysis View Templates This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. For example. You can find additional information in Help. or modify a door.Each of these areas are covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. If this selection is satisfactory. Navigate to the directory containing the door type. do so before starting this exercise. Use the table below as a checklist. This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. See Modifying Render Scene Settings Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings Render Scene If necessary. and make modifications in each area as necessary. the section cut material. and click Open. you should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. you may want to delete. Select it.

You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. 4 Click OK. Notice that each family category is listed. Enter Name. Loading from the library is the quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. click Load from Library. You can also load families and groups from the File menu. and click OK. and click OK. select Edit/New. Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load Group. Creating an Office Template | 143 . and select the titleblock type. Notice that there is a titleblock symbol loaded.) 9 Expand the titleblock. Press ESC twice to return to the template. Modify type properties. Use Project Browser to modify families 7 In the Project Browser. (The titleblock name may vary depending on the template you started with. 8 Expand Annotation Symbols. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types. 6 On the File menu. expand Families.Goal: Create new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog box. Click Duplicate. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify.

see Creating a Titleblock Family. Detail Level. Modifying Views and View Templates. load. or modify any component families or groups as necessary. click 11 Click <<Preview. In this exercise. 2 Select Architectural Plan for Name. View Range. you can apply a view template to any view. To load a titleblock. click View Templates. This titleblock is currently part of the template. you can apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. In addition. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. create. Create and modify view templates 1 On the Settings menu. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. In addition. Discipline. you will first modify view templates. In this exercise. These values represent the starting point for each plan view. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. you created new projects using different templates. You may want to load a titleblock applicable to your office and then delete this titleblock. . 13 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps. right-click the component. click Load. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project/template. Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson. 12 Click OK. To do so. and the visibility settings of categories and subcategories. Notice it has Revit Building in the upper-right corner. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control their initial appearance. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. At any time. 144 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . RELATED For more information.10 On the Options Bar. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. you create the views required for your template. and click Delete.

Rename. Upon the application of the view template. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. 16 On the View menu. ceiling plans. and. If necessary. select Make Plan View. or delete them as needed. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. 17 If you made modifications to the Site Plan template. Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. it will use this view template to set the initial view properties. click Apply. you can rename this view according to your preference. 8 On the View menu. 25 Add the new level within the elevation view. expand Views. and double-click Level 1. 26 Rename and reposition the level as needed. under Elevations. select Site Plan. 22 In the Project Browser. This would result in the Site Plan view template becoming the default template for all new plan views. 14 Select the Architectural Plan template. in the context menu. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. and click OK. click Level from the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 12 In the Project Browser. 13 On the View menu. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. under Floor Plans. Notice the level names. and elevations. In addition. double-click Level 2. the view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. 27 Recreate additional levels as needed. This options means that every time a new plan view is created. click Apply. 15 In the Project Browser. NOTE Do not select Apply automatically to new views of same type. 9 Select the Architectural Plan template. Create and modify views 19 In the Project Browser. click Apply View Template. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the Name drop-down list. or delete this view. expand Floor Plans. double-click Site. 18 If you modified any other view templates. click Apply View Template.By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. and click OK. under Floor Plans. notice that you have the option to rename. review the existing floor plans. Make sure you are still in the South Elevation view. double-click South. open the view from the Project Browser. there is no limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. under Floor Plans. The associated floor plan will use the Architectural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. under Floor Plans. duplicate. duplicate. 23 To add additional levels to the template. and then click OK. and apply the appropriate template. 3 Specify each value according to your needs. 6 Click OK. 24 In the Options Bar. After applying the template. Blue level heads have associated plan views. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. you reduce rework and increase consistency across projects. rename or duplicate the view template and make modifications. 4 If necessary. Black level heads have no associated views. 21 In the Project Browser. You can also duplicate or delete the view. 20 In the Project Browser. review the floor plans. Creating an Office Template | 145 . right-click Level 1. the view is not linked to the template in any way. 11 Click Apply. click Apply View Template.

on the View toolbar. select and order required fields. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. 31 Rename the 3D View. On the Appearance tab. and click OK. You can add schedules to a template. 39 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 36 To save the view. modify settings as needed. and click View Properties. If you have already loaded your office titleblocks into the template. The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views  ➤ 3D Views. 32 To create additional 3D views.Create 3D views 28 To add 3D views to the template. select one. click . click 29 In the Project Browser. assign filters. click Schedule/Quantities. and click OK. You can use this tool. 40 Click OK. and click OK. 35 You can use Orient to a Direction or Orient to a View to set the camera location and target. on the View toolbar. you may want to modify the view properties of any new views. Dynamically Modify View. and modify their properties accordingly. To do so. click Sheet. 41 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template. 30 In the Project Browser. On the Filter tab. select the category type. supply a view name. expand 3D Views. and select Rename. You are prompted to select a titleblock. modify settings as needed. This can save significant time and ensure office standards are maintained. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. Create and modify schedules 37 On the View tab of the Design Bar. go to the View menu. modify settings as needed. click 33 On the View toolbar. click . On the Formatting tab. under 3D Views. 146 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . If necessary. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. right-click {3D}. Add sheets to the template 42 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 38 If you want to add schedules to your template. to orient and save the view. 34 Click the arrow on the right side of the Dynamic View dialog box.

46 Proceed to the next exercise. you could render basic scenes much faster and with greater consistency without the need to spend time modifying these settings. 3 Click OK. ■ Background Image: Lets you map images to your background. Haze: Simulates effects from slight “depth cues” to dense fog. and click OK. and click Rename. Choose from bitmap. and changes the color automatically depending on the sun and sky conditions. a deciduous tree in summer appears in full bloom with leaves. and colors. under Scene Settings. Ground Plane: Adds an infinite plane to your rendering. 45 Create new sheets as needed. select the Clouds option. go to the View menu. 43 Add views to the sheet by selecting Add View from the View tab of the Design Bar. and then click OK. for example. you can install AccuRender by running the install program on the Revit Building CD. ■ Automatic Sky: Treats the background as a sky. 2 Color Gradient: Lets you vary the color between two selected colors. 5 Specify the background color. select the titleblock and delete it. and click New  ➤ Place Titleblock. it is completely bare. and provide a name for the scene. ■ ■ ■ ■ You can also save and load environmental settings. while in winter. choose the appropriate season for plant rendering. select Exterior. Solid Color: Specifies a single color that appears behind your rendering. 10 Under Plant Season. Background images are available from the AccuRender software. Alpha Channel: Lets you use the image's alpha channel (embedded pixel-by-pixel masking information). 2 Under Type. To do so. Create and modify an exterior scene 1 On the Settings menu. 9 Specify the date and time.TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the titleblock. click Render Scene. You can still add views to the sheet. or targa. Clouds: Adds procedurally generated clouds to the background. 44 To rename or renumber the sheet. for example. the relevant tab appears. ■ ■ ■ 6 Specify the Advanced features: TIP As you select options. exterior-default. which is included on the Revit Building CD. tiff. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. right-click the sheet in the Project Browser. settings. To later add a titleblock to a sheet. Different seasons directly affect any AccuRender plants in the view. TIP You can drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. jpeg. select the default titleblock. for example. After the sheet is created. Modifying Render Scene Settings You can create interior and exterior scene settings and save them within the template. if one exists. click Environment. 4 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. if not. Modifying Render Scene Settings. 3 Color Gradient: Lets you vary the color between three selected colors. and a Clouds tab appears. 7 Click OK. By adding a default interior and exterior rendered scene setting to the template. Be sure that you have installed this software. Creating an Office Template | 147 . 8 Under Scene Settings. click Sun. place.

This value is used both for the initial number of steps when you first use the Radiate command and for any subsequent calculation by clicking Continue from the Options Bar. This works on opaque faces only. Increasing the antialiasing level adds considerable rendering time. Best.11 Specify Culling options: ■ Select Back Face Culling to eliminate rendering on model faces that do not face the camera eye. Setting the quality to Better or Best reduces meshing artifacts. Modifying Import/Export Settings. Good. Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 On the File menu. Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise. Select View Culling to eliminate rendering model faces that lie outside the area being raytraced. Good. for example Interior . Radiosity quality affects the relative coarseness of the mesh and the amount of time to process the solution. Better. 17 Click OK when finished. Select Recalc Radiosity Lights to recalculate the shadows cast during the radiosity preprocess. When you import a DWG or DXF file. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. however. Shadows based on the size of the light source are calculated. This is a very time consuming operation but. Higher values cause longer rendering times. when used in conjunction with high antialiasing and soft shadows it can produce very high quality renderings with fewer radiosity artifacts. Select Blurry Transparency to affect the look of material seen behind glass.Default. ■ Select Soft Shadows to produce more realistic shadow edges. Meaningful values are between 0 and 1. Best is the slowest. Medium. ■ ■ ■ Create and modify an interior scene 14 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. and click OK. ■ Set values for Reflection and Transparency bounces. 15 Provide a name for the new interior scene. 16 Repeat the steps you performed when creating an exterior scene. AccuRender always processes transparent faces. Best. Select Blurry Reflections to affect the look of reflections in glass. Better. You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. Draft provides the lowest quality and fastest speed. ■ 12 Specify the Radiosity Settings: ■ Select Quality: Click the Quality drop-down list to choose an option: Draft. Specify the Color Bleeding value: This controls the color saturation of reflected light. such as jaggy shadows or light leaks. These scenes are now part of the template and will provide users with two basic rendering scenes. click Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. the quality also is lower. The number of bounces determines how many levels of reflections or transparencies are permitted. ■ Specify the Solution Goal: This limits the radiosity calculation to a certain number of steps. 148 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . click New. Higher values cause the color of reflected light to more closely approximate the color of the reflecting surface. Antialiasing is a process in which more than one ray is shot for each pixel in an attempt to better resolve the value of the pixel. but provides the highest quality. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN. Back face culling decreases rendering time and space. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. Medium. but also increases the solution time. ■ 13 Specify Raytrace Settings: ■ Select Quality: Click the Quality drop-down list to choose an antialiasing option: Draft. This setting is effective for region raytraces.

you can define additional parameters that are not included in either the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. Modify export layers for DGN 4 On the File menu. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. Modify import line weights 7 On the File menu. When you import a DWG or DXF file. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog. Project Parameters are those parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. The layer names are stored in a text file (either exportlayers. windows. and click Save. When scheduling. Revit Building presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. you could use Shared Parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. name the file. therefore. Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. click Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Building line weight. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer Name and Color ID Cut Layer Name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog.txt for AutoCAD or exportlayersdgn. and so on. and click Save. Creating Named Print Settings. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. In this exercise. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. name the file. Using Shared Parameters. doors. When you create a multi-category schedule. Creating an Office Template | 149 . 5 For each category. and they cannot be used to tag objects (as with Shared Parameters). match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight. detailed instructions are not supplied since each office has a unique set of needs. These settings are retained within the project template. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired.The Export Layers command maps Revit Building categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. you continue the refinement of the template by setting up shared parameters. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. Layer name corresponds to level name for MicroStation. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters. and the creation of multi-category tags and schedules. click Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. for example. select Save As. you normally schedule a single category: rooms. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 For each category. you can skip this exercise and move onto the last exercise of this lesson. select Save As. For example. They cannot be shared with other projects. and they become the set mappings for the project. TIP Color ID in the Export Layers dialog box corresponds to an AutoCAD or MicroStation color ID.txt for MicroStation). it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. project parameters. project parameters. 9 Select Save As. If you are unfamiliar with shared parameters. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. and click Save. see Scheduling Shared Parameters or Scheduling Project Parameters. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Building program installation directory. name the file. Multi-Category Tags employ Shared Parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. and so on. and related multi-category tags and schedules. 8 In the dialog box. You can save these mappings to a text file. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise.

18 Under Type. If this template will be used by multiple people within an office. and choose a shared parameter. 27 Click OK. and select Shared Parameter. and click OK when finished. 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog box. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. If a file already exists. 25 Click OK. 26 Choose whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance or a type parameter. Create and load multi-category tags 29 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. you can begin creating parameter groups. 3 Name and save the file. 16 Under Name. select a parameter value type. 24 Click Select. 6 Create as many groups as needed. The tag is now part of the template. 17 Under Discipline. For each parameter group. and click OK. enter a parameter name. select the tag. 23 To add a shared project parameter. select a parameter discipline type. select a group that you want to add parameters to. 8 Under Parameters. 7 Under Parameter group. Set up project parameters 13 On the Settings menu. 5 Enter the group name. click New. 9 Name the Parameter. you may want to save the file to a network location. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. add required parameters. 21 Click OK.Set up shared parameters 1 On the File menu. and assign which categories this parameter applies to. 28 Add shared project parameters as needed. 14 Click Add. 150 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . you can load them into the template. For information on creating multi-category tags. 22 Add project parameters as needed. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. After the file is named. click Load from Library  ➤ Load Family. under Groups. click New. 10 Click OK. click Add. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. 11 For each parameter group. 30 On the File menu. 31 Navigate to the directory. After you have created the multi-category tags within the Family Editor. or use the Help documentation for assistance. This allows you to name the external parameter file. click Shared Parameters. click Project Parameters. 20 Select the element categories this parameter applies to. 19 Choose whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. select Project parameter. and specify the Type. 2 Click Create. and click Open. you can create a list of parameters.

Your template is complete. click Setup. click Save. Create named print settings 1 On the File menu. 7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer. make minor modifications if necessary. 11 Click OK when finished. and print.rte). click New. Creating Named Print Settings In this exercise. For each printer. 6 Modify the printer settings. 35 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. and click OK. click Setup. select the first printer for which you want to create named settings. 14 Under Save as type. 34 Under Name. 10 Repeat these steps as needed. 15 Name the template. and the percent of actual size. If you need to share this file with others. and create additional settings as needed. By creating named settings within the template. and create new settings for this printer. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template. 37 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. click Print.Create multi-category schedules 32 On the View tab of the Design Bar. paper placement. 33 Select <Multi-Category> for Category. Save the template 12 On the File menu. 2 Under Name. select Template Files (*. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are available within the list of available fields. 3 Under Settings. By going first to the Print command. you should save it to a network path. you need only select a setting. save the file as a template. Depending on your office environment. The only remaining task is to save it. click OK. you may find it beneficial to add named print settings to the template. 38 Proceed to the final exercise. you create named print settings. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF and PDF writer. 36 When you have completed the schedule. and click Save. select a different printer. and make it your default template file. you can select the printer for each set of named settings within the Print Setup dialog box. you can set options such as sheet sizes. You can also create named settings for printing to DWF and to a PDF writer. Creating an Office Template | 151 . 9 In the Print dialog box. click Schedule/Quantities. This is especially true if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. enter a name for the schedule. 4 Click Save As. Creating Named Print Settings. 5 In the New dialog box.

you ensure that office standards are maintained. This can provide a good starting point for a template. 22 Next to Default template file. and click New  ➤ Project. you significantly reduce the amount of repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project. and saved them to a template. select it. and click Open. In addition. 19 Click OK. you could delete the model geometry and save the empty project as a template file. 21 Click the File Locations tab. In addition. If you have a project. and click Open. 152 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 17 Select Browse. Set the template as your default template file 20 On the Settings menu.Use the template 16 To use the template. 24 Click OK. click Options. loaded components. 23 Navigate to the template location. 18 Select the template. and navigate to the location where you saved the template. you modified settings. By investing the time to individualize your template. TIP There are other ways you can create a template. you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. You can also set this template as your default template. click Browse. In this lesson. go to the File menu. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project.

and how to create a compound ceiling. 153 . For more information. You also learn how to change the surface pattern of a ceiling grid. see the online Help. You learn how to add ceilings by selecting room boundaries to automatically place the type of ceiling that you select. You can also create ceilings by sketching them.Ceilings 4 In this tutorial. you learn how to create automatic ceilings in Revit Building.

Creating Ceilings In this lesson. you can change the surface pattern of the ceiling grids. Open c_Ceiling. click Open. You also learn how to create and add a compound ceiling to the building model. select it. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.rvt located in the Common folder. 3 In the Type Selector. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you learn how to add ceilings to an RCP view of a simple building model. 154 | Chapter 4 Ceilings . You add four different types of ceilings. you learn how to create ceilings with the AutoCeiling command. and then change the surface pattern of one of the ceiling grids. Create automatic ceilings 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. After you add ceilings to the model. and double-click Level 1. select Basic Ceiling : 600 x 1200mm grid. 4 Move your cursor into the upper center room and. The ceiling is displayed. when the room boundary highlights. click the Training Files icon. click Ceiling. expand Views (all). expand Ceiling Plans. Creating Automatic Ceilings In this exercise. You can create automatic ceilings in an RCP (reflected ceiling plan) view of the building model.

and click OK. and then click . 6 In the Type Selector. click OK. 9 Select the 600 x 600mm ceiling grid located in the room on the left. Change the ceiling grid surface pattern of room on the left 8 On the Design Bar. The new ceiling material is applied to the ceiling. 13 In the Name dialog box. select Basic Ceiling : 600 x 600mm grid. 14 In the Type Properties dialog box. enter Wood Diagonal Strips 150mm. select Finishes . select it. 7 Select the room on the left and the room on the right. NOTE You select one of the grids or the entire ceiling using the TAB key. click .Wood Diagonal Strips 150mm. under Name. 16 In the Type Properties dialog box.5 Select the lower center room and. click Duplicate. under Materials and Finishes. when the room boundary highlights. click Edit/New. and click OK. 10 On the Options Bar. 15 In the Materials dialog box. click in the Material type parameter Value field. Creating Ceilings | 155 . it displays in the Type Selector. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. click OK.Interior . click Modify. 12 In the Type Properties dialog box. When selected. 17 In the Element Properties dialog box.

The original project units are imperial.18 If you want to save your changes. click the Training Files icon. Creating Compound Ceilings In this exercise. In the steps that follow. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. expand Views (all). expand Ceiling Plans. you change the project to Metric. Close the exercise file without saving your changes. You create a new ceiling type. 156 | Chapter 4 Ceilings . and double-click First Floor. on the File menu. add layers of material to the ceiling type. Open c_Condominium. click Save As.rvt located in the Common folder. and then add the ceiling to the building model. NOTE This common dataset is used in several imperial and metric datasets. click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Create a new ceiling type 1 In the Project Browser. you learn how to create a compound ceiling.

17 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Edit/New. under Layers. specify Millimeters for units. click Duplicate. 11 In the Name dialog box. click Preview to display the current layers.Furring. 9 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . Creating Ceilings | 157 . click OK. under Material. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. 15 Define the five layers as follows and in the following order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Layer 1: Core Boundary Layer 2: Structure [1]. 7 In the Type Selector. select Compound Ceiling: Ceiling 1. enter 12 mm 16 Click OK. under Thickness. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click OK. select Finishes .Specify metric project units 2 On the Settings menu. enter Gypsum board on metal furring. 14 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. 3 In the Project Units dialog box. and click OK. click the format button for length. 13 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. under Thickness. click Ceiling. click OK. 12 In the Type Properties dialog box. Add the compound ceiling 19 Move your cursor into the common area of the model and click to insert the Gypsum board on metal furring channels ceiling. 8 On the Options Bar.Interior . click Project Units. select Metal . select Metal . enter 45 mm Layer 3: Structure [1]. 5 In the Project Units dialog box.Cold Rolled Channel. under Thickness. enter 20 mm Layer 4: Core Boundary Layer 5: Structure [1]. under Construction. and click OK. click Edit for the Structure type parameter value.Gypsum Wall Board. under Material. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Insert twice to add two new layers. 4 In the Format dialog box. under Material.

and save the exercise file with a unique name. Close the exercise file without saving your changes. TIP You can use the zoom commands to zoom into the ceiling. 158 | Chapter 4 Ceilings . You can also apply thin lines from the View menu. 22 The compound ceiling is visible in the section view of the first floor. click Save As. and double-click Section 1. 23 If you want to save your changes. 21 On the View Control Bar. and click Fine. expand Sections (Type 1). on the File menu. click the Detail Level control.View the compound ceiling in a section view 20 In the Project Browser under Views (all).

159 . floor. or ceiling. and you can create an opening in a roof specifically for a dormer.Openings 5 You can cut openings through roofs. In the exercises that follow. You can cut vertically through a selected floor. you have the option to cut perpendicularly through the face of a roof. you cut floor and ceiling openings that expose the stairs beneath them. When creating a hosted opening. floors. or ceiling. you create an opening for an existing dormer and cut two openings in the roof in order to visualize the difference between a perpendicular and a vertical cut. roof. In addition. or ceilings using the Opening command.

the view range of a wireframe view was modified to display the entire dormer roof. To use the Opening tool to cut a dormer opening. you create an opening for an existing dormer and cut two openings in the roof in order to visualize the difference between a perpendicular and vertical cut.Cutting Roof Openings In this lesson. View current dormer construction 1 In the current 3D View. the project must have an existing dormer. Open the file m_Cutting_Openings. click Open. and you should create a view where you can see the dormer geometry. you cut an opening in a roof with an existing dormer. In this case. notice the existing dormer. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click the Training Files icon. This allows you to precisely define the borders of the opening. Cutting a Dormer Opening in a Roof In this exercise. 160 | Chapter 5 Openings .rvt located in the Metric folder.

and click OK. This is an interior 3D view. expand Views (all). NOTE If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. 3 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. The view range was modified so the cut plane captured the entire dormer. The camera is located in the attic and is pointing to the dormer interior. expand 3D Views. Create the dormer opening 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Opening. WARNING Do not select the dormer roof. Cutting Roof Openings | 161 . when the edges of the roof highlight. and double-click Attic View. The display is wireframe so each dormer component can be seen and selected when defining the borders of the opening. and click Modelling. and. Select the main roof to be cut. under Views (all). 6 Move the cursor over the main roof. You need to cut an opening in the roof to accommodate the dormer. click to select it. expand Floor Plans.2 In the Project Browser. Notice no opening exists in the roof for the dormer.Dormer. The dormer windows are above the roof so they do not display. select Pick a roof to be cut by a dormer opening. and double-click Roof . right-click the Design Bar. This view has been set up specifically for the dormer.

a bottom face of a floor. 162 | Chapter 5 Openings . a side face of a wall. Sketch lines display along the border between the dormer roof and the selected roof. and. or a model line on the face of the roof to be cut. and select the exterior face of the three walls that define the dormer. select it. when it highlights. 7 Place the cursor over the dormer. an edge of the roof to be cut. Valid boundaries are a joined roof or its bottom face. 8 Zoom in around the dormer.Next. you define the boundary of the dormer opening.

10 Select the lower sketch line. double-click Attic View. Although the overlapping lines are not a problem. The dormer opening in the roof is apparent. under 3D Views. 12 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Project Browser. 11 Drag each control to the corner until it intersects with the vertical sketch line on that side. 13 Zoom out to see the entire plan view. Cutting Roof Openings | 163 . click Modify. and notice the drag controls on each end. 9 On the Design Bar. click Finish Boundary. the gaps in the bottom sketch line need to be closed.Notice the sketch lines overlap in places. and the horizontal line on the bottom dormer wall does not extend to the corners.

rvt located in the Metric folder. click the Training Files icon. NOTE If you want to save this file.15 On the File menu. select Save As from the File menu. click . you create a roof opening that is perpendicular to the roof face. Open the file m_Cutting_Openings. Create a perpendicular opening 1 On the View toolbar. 164 | Chapter 5 Openings . click Open. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. spin the model around so that you can see the side of the roof without the dormer. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Close. 2 Using the spin function. Creating a Perpendicular Roof Opening In this exercise.

3 On the Design Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. and. floor. 8 Sketch a rectangle in the center of the roof. and click OK. 6 Move the cursor over the exterior face of the main roof. and click Modelling. Cutting Roof Openings | 165 . click Modify. The opening on the right is cut vertically. TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. when it highlights. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. which is the side of the roof without a dormer. the opening on the left is cut perpendicular to the face. right-click the Design Bar. or ceiling and cut perpendicular to face. In the following illustration. click . click Opening. 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. select it. select Pick a face of a roof.

select it. 166 | Chapter 5 Openings . and. when it highlights.9 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 10 Place the cursor over the edge of the opening.

Cutting Roof Openings | 167 . NOTE If you want to save this file. dimension it. spin the model around so that you can see the side of the roof without the dormer. Creating a Vertical Roof Opening In this exercise. click Close. . notice the tool displays. 11 On the Options Bar. If you want to modify the shape of the sketch. click the Training Files icon. Create a vertically cut opening 1 On the View toolbar. click . Open the file m_Cutting_Openings. change the shape. you create a roof opening that is cut vertically through the roof. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and click Finish Sketch.The opening is an element independent of the roof. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.rvt located in the Metric folder. click Open. click 12 On the File menu. 2 Using the spin function. and constrain it like any other element. You can move it. select Save As from the File menu.

click Modify. or ceiling and cut vertically. select Pick a roof. click Opening. when it highlights. right-click the Design Bar. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click Modelling. TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. 7 Move the cursor over the main roof. and. 6 Click OK. 168 | Chapter 5 Openings . The opening on the left is cut perpendicular. select it. 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. floor. In the following illustration. the opening on the right is cut vertically through the face.3 On the Design Bar.

and. click .Because the cut is vertical. 8 In the Project Browser. when it highlights. 14 Place the cursor over the edge of the opening. Cutting Roof Openings | 169 . 13 On the View Toolbar. and double-click Roof . click Lines. 12 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. it is easier to sketch the boundary on a plan view. click Finish Sketch. expand Floor Plans. select it.Dormer. 11 Sketch a rectangle in the center of the roof on the side without the dormer. 9 On the Design Bar. click . expand Views (all).

Cut a floor opening 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. expand Sections (Filled Arrow). click the Training Files icon. select Save As from the File menu.rvt located in the Metric folder. In this exercise. Open the file m_Cutting_Openings. dimension it. click Close. change the shape. You can move it. expand Views (all). . click 16 On the File menu. 170 | Chapter 5 Openings . 15 On the Options Bar. NOTE If you want to save this file. If you want to modify the shape of the sketch. The exercises in this lesson must be done sequentially. Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings In this lesson.The opening is an element independent of the roof. and double-click Section 1. and click Finish Sketch. you cut openings in a floor to accommodate a set of stairs that are already in place. click Open. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. and constrain it like any other element. notice the tool. you cut an opening on the second level of a building model to accommodate a set of existing stairs. Cutting an Opening in a Floor In this exercise. you created a roof opening that was cut vertically through the roof.

and the level 1 and 2 lines. click Ref Plane. and the second click specifies the end of the plane. Adding a reference plane is a two-click process. right-click the Design Bar. However. 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. 3 Add a vertical reference plane similar to the following illustration. floor. click Opening. the opening on the right is cut vertically through the face. This is useful when sketching the opening in a plan view. The opening on the left is cut perpendicular to the face. make sure that the plane intersects the fifth stair tread from the bottom. Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings | 171 .Notice that there is not an opening for the stairway in the ceiling or the floor. Before cutting the floor opening. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. In the following illustration. TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. a section view provides an excellent vantage point to select faces or planes to cut. and click Modelling. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. When cutting a floor or ceiling for a stairway. The first click specifies the start point. you add a reference plane to mark the stair head height. The length of the plane does not have to be precise. or ceiling and cut vertically. and click OK. select Pick a roof.

do so now. the stairs. double-click Section 1. click . NOTE The next exercise requires this project in its current state. 9 On the Design Bar. under Sections (Filled Arrow).6 Select the floor on Level 2. Notice the new floor opening. and click Wireframe. 172 | Chapter 5 Openings . 8 On the View Control bar. and click Open View. 13 On the Design Bar. you may close the project with or without saving it. and the reference plane you added previously. click Lines. 12 Sketch a rectangle that borders the interior face of the wall. click Finish Sketch. You are prompted to select a view. 10 On the Options Bar. select Floor Plan: Level 2. under Views (all). 7 In the Go To View dialog box. If you intend to complete the next exercise. 14 In the Project Browser. Otherwise. click Model Graphics Style. 11 Zoom in around the upper right corner where the stairs are located.

click Opening. 5 On the Options Bar. double-click Section 1.Cutting an Opening in a Ceiling In this exercise. right-click the Design Bar. 8 In the Project Browser. the interior face of the wall. select Pick a roof. and click OK. and click Modelling. 2 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. 4 In the Go To View dialog box. under 3D Views. 3 Select the ceiling below level 2. Use the following illustration as a guide. under Sections (Filled Arrow). double-click Level 1 Interior View. under Views (all). under Views (all). and click Open View. 6 Sketch a rectangle that borders the reference plane. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. click . click Finish Sketch. 7 On the Design Bar. or ceiling and cut vertically. 9 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue using the dataset you were using in the previous exercise. Cut a ceiling opening. you cut a ceiling opening for the stairwell. select Reflected Ceiling Plan: Level 1. Notice the new ceiling opening. and the right and lower border of the stairs and floor you added in the previous exercise. floor. Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings | 173 .

The length of the plane does not have to be precise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt located in the Metric folder. and the level 1 and 2 lines. However. Before cutting the opening. you cut an opening through several levels of a building model to accommodate a set of existing stairs and to account for the possibility of extending the stairs up another level. 3 Add a vertical reference plane similar to the following illustration. NOTE If you want to save this file. click Open. make sure that the plane intersects the fifth stair tread from the bottom. Adding a reference plane is a two-click process. Notice that there is not an opening for the stairway in the ceiling or the floor.10 On the File menu. and the second click specifies the end of the plane. 174 | Chapter 5 Openings . you add a reference plane to mark the stair head height. and double-click Section 1. click Close. Open the file m_Cutting_Openings. Cutting an Opening Using the Shaft Tool In this exercise. click Ref Plane. Add a reference plane 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. expand Views (all). click the Training Files icon. however. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you must sketch in a plan view. expand Sections (Filled Arrow). select Save As from the File menu. The first click specifies the start point. When using the shaft tool to cut an opening.

15 On the Design Bar. Entering a value for base offset ensures that the shaft opening does not cut through the floor at level 1. Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings | 175 . If you selected level 2 for the base constraint. 16 In the Project Browser. 10 Zoom in around the upper right corner where the stairs are located. 8 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Lines. and click Modelling. 12 On the Design Bar. and click Open View. click Model Graphics Style. double-click Section 1. This accounts for the possibility of extending the existing stairs up another level. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Constraints. specify the following parameters: ■ Select Level 1 for Base Constraint. click Properties. 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. click Opening. under Sections (Filled Arrow).4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 6 In the Go To View dialog box. TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. click Finish Sketch. 14 Click OK. 7 On the View Control bar. but does cut the ceiling of level 1. and the reference plane you added previously. ■ ■ Select Up to level: Roof for Top Constraint. under Views (all). and click Wireframe. 9 On the Options Bar. the stairs. Enter 3400 for Base Offset. the ceiling of level 1 would remain intact. click . right-click the Design Bar. select Floor Plan: Level 2. select Create shaft opening. 11 Sketch a rectangle that borders the interior face of the wall.

Using the shaft tool. and roof that interferes with the defined volume of the opening.Notice the shaft opening that cuts through several levels. 176 | Chapter 5 Openings . NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. you can cut a single opening through every floor. ceiling.

you learn how to create a railing and customize it using design information for rails. 177 .Railings 6 In this tutorial. balusters. posts. and panels.

you need to load railing components from the library provided in the drawing template. Project is selected under Create new. You also learn how to use a pattern editor to place balusters and posts and how to customize the railing with additional components. M_Post . click New ➤ Project.rfa. 7 On the Options Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. M_Baluster . Make certain that you draw the line from bottom to top because these starting and ending points are used to justify the railing later. such as panels. select Chain. 2 In the New Project dialog box. verify that DefaultMetric. navigate to Metric Library/Balusters. you learn how to create and place a railing using design information such as the shape and finish material of the rails. Before you lay out the railing. and click OK. between the balusters. you create a railing and add components to it. click Railing.rfa.Custom3. Creating the Railing Layout In this exercise.rfa. M_Baluster Panel 1. 8 Draw a 4300 mm vertical line from bottom to top as shown.Creating Railings In this lesson. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family.rte is selected as the Template file from the Metric Templates folder. The railing layout in this exercise is based on these custom components. press the CTRL key. click Lines. and click Open.Square w Ball. Sketch a plan view of two railing lines 5 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select M_Baluster .Newel. 4 In the Open dialog box. and M_Post .rfa. 3 On the File menu. 178 | Chapter 6 Railings . Open five component families 1 On the File menu.Custom4.rfa .

Matte for Name. and click OK. click Railing Properties. 19 In the Materials dialog box. and then do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In row 1. click Edit/New. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. In row 2. enter 300 mm for Height. In row 2. 15 In the Edit Rails dialog box. 18 In the Edit Rails dialog box. click Insert. select Metal .9 Draw a second 4300 mm line at an angle of 37 degrees as shown. Specify the railing parameters 10 On the Design Bar. and then click . TIP You may need to zoom in until the angular dimension increments by a single degree.Paint Finish .Dark Gray. enter Bottom for Name. 13 In the Name dialog box. and then click 17 In the Materials dialog box.Paint Finish . click Duplicate. Matte for Name. . click in the Material field. enter -25 mm for Offset. and click OK. select Metal . and click OK. 12 In the Type Properties dialog box. In row 2. click Edit for Rail Structure. enter Railing with Glass Panel for Name. 14 In the Type Properties dialog box. 16 In row 1. enter Top for Name.Dark Gray. click in the Material field. select M_Rectangular Handrail : 50 x 50 mm for Profile. Creating Railings | 179 . In row 2. in row 2.

in row 1. click Edit for Baluster Placement. Lay out the main baluster pattern 22 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. click Save As and save the exercise file as Training_Railing. 34 On the File menu. 180 | Chapter 6 Railings . click OK. Adjusting Railing Parameters In this exercise.Newel : 150mm for Baluster Family and enter 0 mm for Space. enter 230 mm for Dist. from previous. Enter 380 mm for Dist. Enter 380 mm for Dist. 31 On the Design Bar. 26 Select Beginning for Justify. Select M_Baluster Panel 1: 600mm . 24 In row 3. click Finish Sketch. under Posts. under Construction. you change the pattern of balusters and posts with the pattern editor to show different design options for the railing. 35 Proceed to the next exercise. IMPORTANT Completing this tutorial is required to successfully complete some exercises in the tutorial on Stairs.Custom 3 : 25mm for Baluster Family. 23 In row 2. Select Bottom for Base. 21 In the Type Properties dialog box. select M_Post. from previous.rvt.Square w Ball : 60mm for Baluster Family and enter 50 mm for Top offset. click Shading with Edges. Lay out the post pattern 27 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. 25 In row 4. 28 In row 2.20 In the Edit Rails dialog box. select M_Post . and then click Duplicate. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select M_Baluster . 30 Click OK three times. select M_Post. Adjusting Railing Parameters. under Main pattern. from previous. click . 33 On the View menu.Newel : 150mm for Baluster Family and enter 0 mm for Space. click on row 2. 29 In row 3.Glass for Baluster Family. Select Bottom for Base. A new row is displayed. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Glass Panel for Name. 32 On the Toolbar.

7 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. under Main pattern. View the center justification option 9 On the Options Bar. under Construction. 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. 18 Click OK three times. View the beginning justification option 1 In the Project Browser. click Edit for Baluster Placement. expand Views (all). click Edit/New. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. select End for Justify. under Main pattern. View the end justification option 3 On the Design Bar. under Construction. expand Elevations. Training_Railing. View the spread pattern to fit option 14 On the Options Bar. 5 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Modify and select the railing. click . 17 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. under Construction. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Edit/New. The railing layout reflects the assigned end justification option. select Center for Justify.rvt. click . click Edit for Baluster Placement. Creating Railings | 181 . 4 On the Options Bar. click .Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 12 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. click Edit/New. The railing layout reflects the assigned center justification option. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box. 13 Click OK three times. under Main pattern. 8 Click OK three times. The railing layout reflects the beginning justification option that you assigned in the previous exercise. 2 Zoom in on the left side of the railing. click Edit for Baluster Placement. 16 In the Type Properties dialog box. select Spread Pattern To Fit for Justify. and double-click East.

View the custom baluster with specified spacing excess length fill option 24 On the Options Bar. click Edit/New. click . 21 In the Type Properties dialog box. select M_Baluster . click Edit for Baluster Placement. click . click Edit for Baluster Placement. 23 Click OK three times. 28 Click OK three times. under Main pattern.The railing layout reflects the assigned spread pattern to fit justification option. 27 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. 25 In the Element Properties dialog box. 20 In the Element Properties dialog box. The railing layout reflects the assigned beginning justification and truncated excess length fill options. You cannot assign base top and bottom offset parameters to excess length fill balusters. click Edit/New. View post options 29 On the Options Bar. 182 | Chapter 6 Railings . The railing layout reflects the assigned beginning justification. click Edit for Baluster Placement. 33 Under Posts. 26 In the Type Properties dialog box. and select Truncate Pattern for Excess Length Fill. under Construction. enter 54 degrees for Angle. 22 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. click Edit/New. View the truncate pattern excess length fill option 19 On the Options Bar. under Main pattern. select Truncate Pattern for Excess Length Fill. click . custom baluster excess length fill. click . Observe that the balusters that occur in the excess length fill area extend below the bottom rail. select Angles Greater Than for Corner Posts At. 31 In the Type Properties dialog box.Custom3 : 25mm for Excess Length Fill. 35 On the Toolbar. under Main pattern. select Beginning for Justify. under Construction. 32 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. under Construction. and spacing options. and enter 150 mm for Spacing. 34 Click OK three times.

under Construction. 43 In the Project Browser. enter 0 mm for Dist. The railing layout reflects the assigned distance and justification options. under Elevations. Since the angle is less than 54 degrees. from previous. 39 In the Type Properties dialog box. 37 On the Options Bar. 40 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box.rvt. a corner post does not occur. In row 4.The railing layout reflects the assigned minimum angle limit for the corner post option. 42 Click OK three times. 38 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Main pattern. click . Select Spread Pattern To Fit for Justify. enter 380 mm for Dist. Creating Railings | 183 . click Edit/New. double-click East. Specify the final railing layout 36 On the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ In row 2. click Edit for Baluster Placement. 41 Under Posts. 44 On the File menu. from previous. click Modify and select the railing. click Save As and save the exercise file as Training_Railing. select Each Segment End for Corner Posts At.

184 | Chapter 6 Railings .

Roofs 7 In this tutorial. In addition. and soffits to the roofs that you create. you learn how to add fascia. gutters. 185 . you learn how to create different types of roofs in Autodesk Revit Building.

Creating Roofs In this lesson. You create roofs from footprints and by extrusion: the two roof creation methods in Revit Building. and double-click Level 1. Creating an Extruded Roof In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. Before you can sketch the roof profile. verify that Section: Section1 is selected. 5 In the Go To View dialog box. and mansard roofs. gable. including hip. shed. click Open. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. click the Training Files icon. 1 In the Project Browser. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. expand Floor Plans. Open m_Roofs. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you learn to create several different types of roofs. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. You do not need to create the work plane.rvt located in the Metric folder. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog box. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. 4 Click OK. select Name. 186 | Chapter 7 Roofs . verify Level 3 is selected for Level. 3 In the Work Plane dialog box. expand Views (all).

Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Creating Roofs | 187 . 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. 9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. click Ref Plane.

Next. select Chain. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. 188 | Chapter 7 Roofs . 13 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. sketch the roof profile. The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. click Lines. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane.11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2.

and then select the exterior face of the wall. 18 Select the edge of the roof. press TAB. and double-click Section 1. 17 On the Tools toolbar. click . and select the second wall. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 21 In the Project Browser. click . and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. click Modify. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. press CTRL. expand Views (all).16 On the View toolbar. click to display the model. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. Creating Roofs | 189 . Next. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. 19 On the Tools toolbar. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. The roof should resemble the following illustration. expand Sections (Type 1).

To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends.24 On the Options Bar. click to view the completed breezeway roof in the model. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. click Attach for Top/Base. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. 26 On the View toolbar. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint. 190 | Chapter 7 Roofs . you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise.

rvt. clear Defines slope. 2 In the Go To View dialog box. The Element Properties dialog box is displayed. Creating Roofs | 191 . click . 8 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope. 7 On the Options Bar. 5 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. under Dimensions. 12 On the Design Bar. and enter 600 for Overhang. click Finish Roof. 6 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. 10 Press CTRL. and click Open View. Verify that a dashed green line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. By default. click Modify. m_Roofs. sketch the roof footprint. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. 3 Next. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Pick Walls. On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 13 When you see the informational dialog box. Verify that a dashed green line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. and click OK. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. verify that Floor Plan: Garage Roof is selected. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Next. select both slope definition lines. the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run. verify that Defines slope is selected.

click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. clear Defines slope. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. expand Floor Plans. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. m_Roofs. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint.rvt. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. press TAB. 15 Proceed to the next exercise.14 On the View toolbar. When you complete the roof. 3 On the Options Bar. 192 | Chapter 7 Roofs . expand Views (all). Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and enter 600 for Overhang. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. and then verify that a dashed green line displays to the exterior side of the walls. click to view the gable roof and attached walls in the model. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. click Pick Walls. and double-click Level 3. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney.

8 On the Options Bar. 10 On the View menu. select Defines Slope. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration.6 Click to select all the walls. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. click Finish Roof. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 15 On the Options bar. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. add new slope lines to the roof. select Defines Slope. click Modify. Next. click . 13 On the Options Bar. 9 Using automatic snaps. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. 17 When you see the informational dialog box. Next. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. click Lines. Creating Roofs | 193 . 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. sketch the chimney opening.

click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. Verify that a dashed green line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint. and enter 600 for Overhang. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Pick Walls. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. select Defines slope. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. 194 | Chapter 7 Roofs . 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). m_Roofs. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. expand Floor Plans. 3 On the Options Bar. click to view the new roof in the model.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser.18 On the View toolbar. and double-click Level 2.

6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 11 To trim the first line segment. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. select the left vertical slope definition line. 12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. 7 On the Options Bar. close the roof sketch. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. 9 On the Tools toolbar.Next. click . and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. Creating Roofs | 195 . 8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. 10 On the Options Bar. clear Defines Slope. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. using the following illustration for guidance. click Lines. Next. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. and click . Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof.

and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. and click OK. click Modify. click 17 Click to display the model. 196 | Chapter 7 Roofs . Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. 16 On the View toolbar. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. 22 Using the same method that you used previously. 14 Under Constraints. Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. 21 Click to use the Dynamic View tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. raise the roof 600 mm above the current level. click Finish Roof. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. to use the Dynamic View tool to view the back of the house. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. Next. click Roof Properties. join the two remaining walls to the roof.Next. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. The Element Properties dialog box is displayed. 18 On the Design Bar.

and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. m_Roofs. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 4 On the Options Bar. 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. click Pick Walls. and double-click Level 2. Creating Roofs | 197 . 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. clear Defines Slope. and enter 300 for Overhang. 1 In the Project Browser. click . 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans.rvt.23 On the Tools toolbar.

and click OK. Verify that a green dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls. 11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. Next. select Defines slope. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. 9 On the Options Bar. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. enter 0 for Overhang. 13 On the Options Bar. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select the left vertical roof line. click . you add a slope-defining line. enter -600 for Base Offset From Level. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. 10 To trim the first line segment. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. click Modify. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 19 Click on the View toolbar to display the model. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. 16 Under Constraints. 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope. 6 On the Options Bar. click Roof Properties. 198 | Chapter 7 Roofs . 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. press TAB. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls.5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. 8 On the Tools toolbar. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. and press ENTER.

10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click to activate the roof footprint sketch. click Split Walls and Lines. Creating Roofs | 199 . 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Project Browser.rvt. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. To help locate the position of each split. 9 On the Tools menu. expand Views (all). Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. 2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. expand 3D Views. expand Floor Plans. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. click . 3 On the Options Bar. expand Views (all). you add slope arrows to the shed roof. 7 On the Options Bar. click Ref Plane. and double-click 3D. and enter 600 for Offset. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. m_Roofs. you need to add two reference planes.20 Click to use the Dynamic View tool to rotate the model. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. Before you can add slope arrows. 5 On the View menu. and double-click Level 2.

NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. verify is selected. select Slope for Specify. add two new slope arrows. enter 500 for Rise/1000. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. click Slope Arrow. 11 On the Design Bar. click Modify. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. select both slope arrows. 18 Press CTRL. Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. and click 19 Under Constraints. .15 to add the second slope arrow. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 12 On the Options Bar. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. clear Defines Slope. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next.Next. 200 | Chapter 7 Roofs . ■ 16 Repeat steps 13 . 22 Click on the View toolbar to display the model. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. 14 On the Options Bar. 20 Under Dimensions. and move the cursor to rotate the arrow. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. Aligning Roof Eaves. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. Begin the tail at the right reference plane. and then click OK. click Modify. 15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: ■ Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope.

under Dimensions.rvt. and click OK. Creating Roofs | 201 . 1 In the Project Browser. 12 On the Design Bar. expand Views (all). click to display the model. and double-click Garage Roof. When you sketch a hip roof. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. Next. select a method to align the eaves. 5 On the Options Bar. the adjacent eave heights must align. select Defines Slope. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. The eave lines display with a dimension. on the Options Bar. When aligning eaves. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. click . click . click Align Eaves. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. 6 With the two gable end lines selected. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. enter 800 mm for Rise/1000. 3 On the Options Bar. 4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). m_Roofs. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. When eave heights differ. 10 On the Options Bar. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. 13 On the View toolbar. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. expand Floor Plans. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. click Finish Roof. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. click the Training Files icon. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. under Constraints. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. on the Options Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. click Open. expand Views (all). and double-click North. 202 | Chapter 7 Roofs . expand Elevations. 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. click Save As. Creating a Mansard Roof. click .14 If you want to save your changes. click Modify. Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. on the File menu. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 3 Select the roof and. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. Open m_Mansard_Roof.rvt located in the Metric folder.

10 On the Options Bar. enter 750 mm for Rise/1000. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Roof.6 On the View toolbar. and then select Defines slope. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. and select the remaining three lines. Creating Roofs | 203 . click to display the model with the complete mansard roof. and click OK. 17 On the View toolbar. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). 14 On the Options Bar. click Lines. Next. click . 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. under Dimensions. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. press TAB. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. click to display the model. click . and double-click Level 3. 7 In the Project Browser. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.

rfa. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. 204 | Chapter 7 Roofs . 8 In the Name dialog box.rfa and M_Gutter-Cove. and click Open.rvt located in the Common folder. and click OK. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box. Gutters.18 If you want to save your changes. After you create a roof. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 1 On the File menu. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and open the Roofs folder. Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. Open c_Condominium. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. select M_Fascia-Built-Up. open the Profiles folder. you can easily create its fascia. and soffits in Revit Building. you learn how to create roof fascia. gutters. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. click Save As. and soffits. click Duplicate. 2 In the Open dialog box. click . 5 On the Options Bar. click Load From Library ➤ Load Family. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 6 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Construction. click the Training Files icon. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. on the File menu. open the Metric Library folder. 3 Press CTRL. and Soffits In this lesson. gutters. click Open. and click OK twice. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile. enter Built-up Fascia. Creating Fascia.

12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. Creating Fascia. Gutters. you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. Creating Gutters.11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. Creating Gutters In this exercise. and Soffits | 205 . 13 Proceed to the next exercise.

2 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Type Properties dialog box. Creating Soffits. 10 Click to place the gutter. under Construction. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box. and then click . 3 In the Properties dialog box. click . click in the Value field for Material. 7 Under Materials and Finishes.rvt. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. c_Condominium. 8 In the Materials dialog box. 11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. select Metal-Aluminum for Name. you learn how to place a roof soffit. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 206 | Chapter 7 Roofs . Creating Soffits In this exercise. click Edit/New. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. and click OK three times. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. and click OK.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Duplicate.

4 Select the roof. expand Floor Plans. 6 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Design Bar. Creating Fascia. 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Roof. click Finish Sketch. Gutters. expand 3D Views. Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). c_Condominium. 3 On the Design Bar. click Pick Roofs. and Soffits | 207 .rvt. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. expand Views. and double-click 3D.

on the File menu. 9 If you want to save your changes. 208 | Chapter 7 Roofs . 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Save As. 8 Select the roof.7 On the Tools menu. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and then select the soffit to join them. click Join Geometry.

add railings to your landings. and semi-circular runs of stairs. You learn to create special feature stairs. and work with a stair calculator. u-shaped.Stairs 8 In this tutorial. 209 . you learn how to create and modify straight.

7 Using the following illustration as a guide. expand Floor Plans. select Level 2 for Underlay. 210 | Chapter 8 Stairs . View the first level lobby and second level underlay 1 In the Project Browser. The level where the stairs originate displays as your current working level. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box. and then modify. The level where the stairs end displays as a screened background after you select it as an underlay. click Open. If you add stairs to a drawing in plan view. under Graphics. Draw a straight stair run 5 Zoom in on the entry way. such as treads. specify the start point for the stair run. 2 On the View menu. You learn to work with different stair components. railings from another project. risers and stringers. click the Training Files icon. The outline of the level 2 floors and wall display as an underlay. add. expand Views (all). you can display both of the levels that you are working with. you create and align a straight run of stairs to provide access from the first level to the second level of the building model. and double-click Level 1. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Open the m_Stair_Exercise. Creating the Main Lobby Stair Run In this exercise. 4 Click OK.rvt file located in the Metric folder. you learn how to create runs of typical and special feature stairs with the stairs aligned correctly between the levels in your project. use the Stair Calculator to add a straight run of stairs to your drawing.Creating Stairs In this lesson. click View Properties. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Stairs.

Creating Stairs | 211 .8 Specify the stair run endpoint as shown. click Finish Sketch. 9 On the Design Bar.

The top edge of the stair run is now aligned with the front edge of the second level. 12 Select the front edge of the second level as the alignment line as shown. 13 Select the top edge of the stair run as the entity to align as shown. click . 11 On the Toolbar. 212 | Chapter 8 Stairs .Align the top edge of the stair run with the front edge of the second level 10 Zoom in on the top of the stair run.

Align the stair run centerline with the wall centerline
14 Select the wall centerline as the alignment line as shown. TIP On the Options Bar, click Wall centerlines on the Prefer menu.

15 Select the stair run centerline as the entity to align as shown.

The stair run centerline is now aligned with the wall centerline.

16 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click lobby stair view.

Creating Stairs | 213

Specify new main lobby stair parameters
17 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Sections, and double-click Stair Section. 18 On the View menu, click Thin Lines.

TIP Hold the cursor over the stairs to see the risers and treads. 19 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the stair run. 20 On the Options Bar, click .

21 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 22 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 23 In the Name dialog box, enter Lobby Main Stairs for Name, and click OK.

214 | Chapter 8 Stairs

24 In the Type Properties dialog box, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Treads, enter 255 mm for Minimum Tread Depth. Under Treads, select Stair Nosing - Radius : 20 mm for Nosing Profile. Under Treads, enter 50 mm for Tread Thickness. Under Risers, clear End with Riser. Under Risers, select Straight for Riser Type. Under Risers, enter 20 mm for Riser Thickness. Under Risers, select Extend Tread Under Riser for Riser to Tread Connection. Under Stringers, select Match Level for Trim Stringers at Top. Under Stringers, enter 305 mm for Stringer Height. Under Stringers, enter 65 mm for Stringer Carriage Height. Under Stringers, enter 180 mm for Landing Carriage Height. .

25 Under Materials and Finishes, click in the Value box for Tread Material, and click

26 In the Materials dialog box, select Finishes - Interior - Carpet 1 for Name, and click OK. 27 Click in the Value box for Riser Material, and click .

28 In the Materials dialog box, select Finishes - Interior - Carpet 1 for Name, and click OK. 29 Click in the Value box for Stringer Material, and click .

30 In the Materials dialog box, select Wood - Cherry for Name, and click OK. 31 In the Type Properties dialog box, click OK. Because you specified ending the stair run with a tread instead of a riser, a warning dialog box displays, telling you that the actual number of risers is different from the desired number of risers. 32 Click OK to ignore this warning message. 33 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Dimensions, enter 1220 mm for Width. 34 Click OK.

The stair section reflects the new assigned parameters. 35 On the File menu, click Save As, and save this exercise file as Training_Stairs.rvt. 36 Proceed to the next exercise, Modifying the Main Lobby Stair Run.

Modifying the Main Lobby Stair Run
In this exercise, you use design information about a railing from another project and create special feature stairs with concave stringers from the straight run of stairs you completed in the previous exercise.

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, Training_Stairs.rvt.

Changing the railing type
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click lobby stair view. 2 On the Design Bar, click Modify, press CTRL, and select both railings. 3 In the Type Selector, select Railing : Railing with Glass Panel.

Creating Stairs | 215

NOTE If the panels do not display in the railings, go to the Type Properties of the railing. Click Edit next to the Baluster Placement parameter. If selected, clear the check box for the User Baluster Per Tread on Stairs option. Notice that the railing start post is offset above the level of the floor.

Adjust the railing start post offset
4 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select one of the railings. 5 On the Options Bar, click .

6 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Baluster Placement. 8 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box, under Posts, in row 1, enter -200 mm for Base offset. 9 Click OK three times. 10 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

The railing start post is now at floor level.

Change the stair shape in plan view
11 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 12 Zoom in on the stair run. 13 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the stair run. 14 On the Options Bar, click Edit. 15 Press and hold CTRL, select the left and right stair run boundary lines, and delete them.

216 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Draw the left boundary arc
16 On the Design Bar, click Boundary. 17 On the Options Bar, click .

18 Specify the intersection of the bottom riser and inside wall face as the arc start point as shown.

19 Specify the left end of the top riser as the arc endpoint.

Creating Stairs | 217

20 Specify a point to the left of the stair run for the arc midpoint approximately as shown.

Mirror the left boundary arc
21 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the left boundary arc. 22 On the Toolbar, click .

23 Select the stair run centerline as the mirror axis.

Draw the new first riser
24 On the Design Bar, click Modify, select the first riser and delete it.

218 | Chapter 8 Stairs

25 On the Design Bar, click Riser. 26 On the Options Bar, click .

27 Specify the lower end of the left boundary arc as the arc start point as shown.

28 Specify the lower end of the right boundary arc as the arc endpoint as shown.

29 Specify the intersection of the front wall edge and the stair run centerline as the arc midpoint as shown.

Creating Stairs | 219

30 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

31 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click lobby stair view.

The stair run from the first floor main lobby is now complete. 32 On the File menu, click Save As and save the exercise file as Training_Stairs.rvt. 33 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Second Floor Lobby Side Stairs.

220 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Creating the Second Floor Lobby Side Stairs
In this exercise, you create and align runs of side stairs with railings.

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, Training_Stairs.rvt.

Specify the lobby side stair run parameters
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2.

2 On the View menu, click View Properties. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Graphics, select Level 3 for Underlay, and click OK.

4 Zoom in on the upper left of the lobby area. 5 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Stairs, and then click Stairs Properties. 6 In the Element Properties dialog box, select Lobby Main Stairs for Type, and click Edit/New. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 8 In the Name dialog box, enter Lobby Side Stairs for Name, and click OK. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Risers, select End with Riser. Under Risers, select None for Riser Type. Under Construction, enter -300 mm for Extend Below Base. Under Stringers, select Do not trim for Trim Stringers at Top. Under Stringers, select None for Right Stringer. Under Stringers, select None for Left Stringer. Under Stringers, select 1 for Middle Stringers. Under Stringers, enter 100 mm for Stringer Carriage Height. Under Treads, select Front, Left and Right for Apply Nosing Profile.

10 Click OK. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Dimensions, enter 1220 mm for Width, and click OK.

Creating Stairs | 221

Place the lobby side stair run
12 Specify a point near the left edge of the landing for the stair run start point, and then specify a point to the left for the stair endpoint. NOTE The exact location of the stair run is not critical. You specify its final location in subsequent steps. 13 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Move the stair run into the corner of the level 2 opening
14 Zoom in on the upper left side of the stair run. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify, hold down CTRL, and select the stair run and both railings. 16 On the Toolbar, click .

17 Specify the upper left endpoint of the railing as the move start point as shown.

18 Specify the upper left corner of the level 2 opening as the move endpoint as shown.

The top of the stair run is now positioned in the corner of the level 2 opening.

222 | Chapter 8 Stairs

19 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click {3D}.

Specify a new side stair run railing type
20 On the Design Bar, click Modify, press and hold CTRL, and select both railings. 21 In the Type Selector, select Railing : 900mm Pipe. Notice that both railings are on the outside of the treads. This is because the original stairs that you duplicated, the main lobby stairs, have left and right stringers that hosted the railings. Because the lobby side stairs have only a center stringer, you need to flip the railings so they rest on the stair treads. 22 Select each railing, right-click, and click Flip Orientation.

Mirror the lobby side stair run
23 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 24 On the Design Bar, click Modify, press and hold CTRL, and select the side stair run and both railings. 25 On the Toolbar, click .

26 Specify the main lobby stair run centerline as the mirror axis as shown.

Creating Stairs | 223

The lobby side stair run is mirrored to the right side of the lobby.

27 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click {3D}.

The lobby side stairs and railings are now complete. 28 On the File menu, click Save. 29 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Level 2 Landing Railings.

Creating the Level 2 Landing Railings
In this exercise, you create and modify railings for a landing and then extend the railings from the side stairs in the previous exercise to the railing on the landing.

224 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, Training_Stairs.rvt.

Sketch the left side level 2 landing railing path
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2. 2 Zoom in on the level 2 landing. 3 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the left main stair railing. 4 On the Options Bar, click Edit. 5 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 6 On the Options Bar, select Chain. 7 Click to specify the sketch line start point approximately as shown.

8 Move the cursor down and specify the next sketch point as shown.

9 Move the cursor to the right and specify the sketch endpoint as shown.

Creating Stairs | 225

10 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the left railing sketch line of the main stairs. 11 Select the endpoint of the sketch line for the railing as shown.

12 Drag the arc sketch line endpoint up to the right end of the new horizontal sketch line as shown.

13 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

14 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click Level 2 Landing.

226 | Chapter 8 Stairs

15 Zoom in and on the View toolbar, click

to reorient the view to look as shown.

Create the right side level 2 landing railing
16 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 17 Select the right lobby main stair railing and delete it. 18 Select the left lobby main stair railing. 19 On the Toolbar, click .

20 Specify the lobby main stair centerline as the mirror axis as shown.

The new lobby main stair and level 2 landing railing layout is mirrored to the right side of the stair run.

21 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Level 2 Landing.

Creating Stairs | 227

Extend the lobby side stair railing onto the landing
22 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 23 Zoom in on the left side of the level 2 landing. 24 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the upper lobby side stair railing.

25 On Options Bar, click Edit. 26 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 27 Click to specify the right endpoint of the railing sketch line for the line start point as shown.

28 Move the cursor 440 mm to the right and specify the sketch line endpoint as shown.

228 | Chapter 8 Stairs

29 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 30 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click {3D} and zoom in on the railing extension.

The railing now extends onto the landing.

Modify the railing extension parameters
31 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the extended railing. 32 On the Options Bar, click .

33 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 34 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select No Connector for Tangent Joins. 35 Click OK twice.

Creating Stairs | 229

36 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the extended railing. 37 On the Options Bar, click .

38 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 39 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select Add Vertical/Horizontal Segments for Tangent Joins, and click Edit for Baluster Placement. 40 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box, under Posts, in row 2, select None for Baluster Family. 41 Click OK three times.

42 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the extended railing. 43 On the Options Bar, click Edit. 44 Select the 440 mm railing extension sketch line segment. 45 On the Options Bar, select Custom for Height Correction and enter 170 mm. 46 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

230 | Chapter 8 Stairs

47 On the File menu, click Save. 48 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Emergency Exit Stair Run.

Creating the Emergency Exit Stair Run
In this exercise, you create a u-shaped run of stairs in plan view, and then add a railing and extend the stairs to another level in a three-dimensional (3D) view. When you are adding stairs that turn corners in plan view, it is easier to align the stairs if you mark the edge of the landing with a reference plane first.

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset from the previous exercise, Training_Stairs.rvt.

Draw a reference plane
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom in on the stairwell on the left side of the building.

3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Ref Plane. 4 On the Options Bar, click and enter 528 mm for Offset.

5 Move your cursor over the left edge of the exterior wall and place a vertical reference plane to the left of the exterior wall face as shown.

Creating Stairs | 231

11 In the Type Properties dialog box. enter 255 mm for Minimum Tread Depth. is at 864. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box.Exterior: Precast Concrete Panels for Name. select for Riser Material Value. and then click Edit/New. and click OK. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. 10 In the Name dialog box. Specify the exit stairs parameters 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 15 In the Materials dialog box. 8 Under Dimensions. and click OK. measured from the exterior wall centerline. 20 Move the cursor up 2040 mm and specify the stair run next point as shown. click Stairs.5 mm as indicated by the temporary dimension. select Metal . select Finishes . enter Exit Stairs for Name. Dark Gray Matte for Name. select for Tread Material Value. Draw the exit stairs 19 Click to specify the midpoint of the landing edge as the stair run start point as shown. 16 Under Materials and Finishes.Paint Finish. and then click Stairs Properties. 18 Click OK three times. 13 In the Materials dialog box. select for Stringer Material Value. click Duplicate. and click OK.Paint Finish. Dark Gray Matte for Name. select Metal . enter 915 mm for Width. select 180mm max riser 275mm tread for Type. 14 Under Materials and Finishes. 12 Under Materials and Finishes. 17 In the Materials dialog box.The new reference plane. 232 | Chapter 8 Stairs . under Treads.

21 Move the cursor to the right and specify the intersection of the next-to-last riser line and the reference plane as the stair run next point as shown. Creating Stairs | 233 . 22 Drag the cursor down and specify the intersection of the landing edge and the reference plane as the stair run endpoint as shown. The exit stair run layout is complete.

26 Hold CTRL and select two of the exterior walls of the exit stairwell. and the exit door. View the exit stairs 24 In the Project Browser. 25 Zoom in on the exit stairwell. click Finish Sketch. expand 3D Views. and double-click Exit Stairs. 234 | Chapter 8 Stairs .23 On the Design Bar. expand Views (all).

29 On the Design Bar. and the exit stairs are visible. click . 33 In the Type Properties dialog box. under Construction. 35 Click OK three times. select Railing : 900mm Pipe. Specify a new railing type 28 Zoom in on the stair run. click Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Object. click Edit for Baluster Placement. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. 31 On the Options Bar. in row 2.27 On the View Control Bar.Round1 : 25mm for Baluster Family. select M_Baluster . under Posts. Creating Stairs | 235 . 30 In the Type Selector. and select both railings. The selected objects are hidden. click Modify. hold down CTRL. click Edit/New. 34 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box.

click Modify. Creating a Semi-circular Exterior Stair Run. under Constraints.Add another exit stairs flight 36 On the Design Bar. 40 On the File menu. Turn on the display of the exit stairwell exterior walls and exit door 39 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. select Level 3 for Multistory Top Level. click Save. click . and select the exit stairs. 38 In the Element Properties dialog box. 37 On the Options Bar. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. 236 | Chapter 8 Stairs . click Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. Creating a Semi-circular Exterior Stair Run In this exercise. you create a semi-circular run of stairs and then modify the winders and the railing.

select 9 In the Materials dialog box. enter 0 mm for Nosing Length. select for Monolithic Material Value. Under Risers. expand Views (all). 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. Under Risers. enter 1300 mm for Width. Creating Stairs | 237 . 13 In the Element Properties dialog box under Dimensions. and click OK. select 16 for Desired Number of Risers. and click OK. enter 1 mm for Tread Thickness. click Duplicate. enter Semicircular Stairs for Name.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. enter 200 mm for Maximum Riser Height. 5 In the Type Properties dialog box. select Extend Tread Under Riser for Riser to Tread Connection. Under Stringers. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. Specify the semi-circular stair run parameters 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. 11 In the Materials dialog box.Cast-in-Place Concrete for Name. 16 Click to specify the midpoint of the concrete slab edge as the stair run center point as shown. 15 On the Options Bar. and click Edit/New. and click OK. and then click Stairs Properties. 8 Under Materials and Finishes. Under Risers. enter 200 mm for Landing Carriage Height. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Under Treads. Under Stringers. 2 Zoom in on the exterior concrete pad above the north exterior wall of the building. select Concrete . 6 In the name dialog box. click . for Tread Material Value. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Construction. click Run.rvt. Under Treads. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box. 12 In the Type Properties dialog box.Cast-in-Place Concrete for Name. click Stairs. Training_Stairs. click OK. and double-click Level 1. Draw the semi-circular stair run 14 On the Design Bar. select Monolithic Stairs. TIP You can use the shortcut key SM to snap only to midpoints. select Concrete . enter 300 mm for Stringer Carriage Height. Under Construction. enter 0 mm for Landing Overlap. enter 5 mm for Riser Thickness. select 180mm max riser 275mm tread for Type.

and click to specify the arc end point. 19 Move the cursor counterclockwise until the display indicates that there are 0 risers remaining. 238 | Chapter 8 Stairs . 18 On the keyboard. enter 1310 for Radius as shown. as shown. and press ENTER. The semi-circular stair run is complete.17 Drag the cursor to the right along the slab edge.

expand 3D Views. TIP You may need to select the outer railing and flip its orientation to align it to the pad. Creating Stairs | 239 . Modify the semi-circular stair run parameters 21 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch.20 On the Design Bar. and double-click Exterior Stairs. expand Views (all).

The underside of winder parameter is smooth. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the stair run. 23 On the Options Bar, click .

24 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 25 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select Stepped for Underside of Winder. 26 Click OK twice.

The underside of winder parameter is stepped with no overlap. 27 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the stair run. 28 On the Options Bar, click .

29 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 30 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, enter 300 mm for Landing Overlap. 31 Click OK twice.

240 | Chapter 8 Stairs

The underside of winder parameter is stepped with a 300 mm overlap.

Specify new semi-circular stair run railing parameters
32 On the Design Bar, click Modify, press and hold CTRL, and select both railings. 33 In the Type Selector, select Railing : 900mm Pipe.

34 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save. 35 On the File menu, click Close.

Working with the Stair Calculator
In this exercise, you create two sets of stairs side by side within a new project. The first set of stairs uses the default settings to calculate the slope. The second set of stairs uses the stair calculator to calculate the slope of the stairs. After creating both stairs, you add dimensions to them to see how the tread depth and stair slope adjust based on the changes made in the stair calculator.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤  Project. In the New Project dialog box, under Template File, click Browse. Open the DefaultMetric.rte file located in the Metric Templates folder.

Creating Stairs | 241

Create a set of stairs using the default settings
1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Stairs. 2 On the Design Bar, click Stairs Properties. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box, select Industrial and Assembly for Type, and click OK. 4 In the center of the Level 1 Floor Plan, click to specify the stair run start point, move the cursor vertically upward until the stair risers are complete, and click to specify the end of the stair run.

5 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 6 On the View Toolbar, click .

When you created these stairs, the slope was calculated automatically. In the steps that follow, you create a set of stairs using the stair calculator to define the stair slope.

242 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Create a set of stairs using the stair calculator
7 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Stairs. 9 On the Design Bar, click Stairs Properties. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box, select Industrial and Assembly for Type, and click Edit/New. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 12 In the Name dialog box, enter Industrial and Assembly - Calculated Slope, and click OK. 13 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Calculation Rules. 14 In the Stair Calculator dialog box, select Use Stair Calculator for slope calculation. The Stair Calculator computes actual tread depth using the following Calculation Rule equation: X * Rise + Y * Depth = Z X is the value to multiply the actual riser height indicated by the stair properties; Y is the value to multiply the actual tread depth, and Z is the result that lies within threshold minimum and maximum values range based on either design standards or building codes. 15 Enter 680.0 mm for Z, enter 695.0 mm for Maximum Result for Stair Calculator, and enter 670.0 mm for Minimum Result for Stair Calculator. 16 Click OK. 17 In the Type Properties dialog box, click OK. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 19 To the right of the stairs you created previously, click to specify the stair run start point, and move the cursor vertically upward until the stair risers are complete. NOTE When specifying the stair run starting point, try to align it with the bottom of the stairs you created previously. This allows you to make a better comparison of the slope when you view the stairs together in a 3D view at the end of the exercise.

20 After all the risers have been created, click to specify the stair run end point. 21 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. Notice the stairs created using the stair calculator have a longer run than the first set of stairs you created. 22 On the View menu, click Zoom  ➤  Zoom in Region, and draw a zoom region around both sets of stairs. 23 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 24 On both sets of stairs, add dimensions to the bottom tread and the stair run as shown.

Creating Stairs | 243

25 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 26 Select the right stair run, Industrial and Assembly - Calculated Slope. 27 On the Options Bar, click .

28 In the Element Properties dialog box, notice the Actual Tread Depth is 332.2 mm. Within this project, the project units are set to display length dimension values on screen rounded to the nearest 1 mm. Even more exact dimension values are displayed to the nearest .1 mm where appropriate in the Element Properties dialog box. In this case, the actual tread depth dimension is 332.2 mm; it becomes 332 mm when rounded to the nearest 1 mm in the drawing area. The actual tread depth is determined by using the following Calculation Rule equation derivation: Tread = (Z - X * Riser) / Y Substituting with the current values (X = 2, Y = 1, Z = 680 mm and Riser = 173.9 mm) yields: Tread = (680 - (2 * 173.9))/1 Tread = (680 - 347.8) Tread = 332.2 mm 29 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 30 On the View Toolbar, click 31 On the View Toolbar, click . and spin the model as shown.

244 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Notice the difference between the slope of the two stairs. 32 On the File menu, click Close. You can close the project file without saving your changes. This completes the Working with the Stair Calculator exercise. This also completes the Stairs lesson.

Creating Stairs | 245

246 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Walls

9

247

Creating Walls
In this lesson, you learn about walls. Sketch wall segments, work with compound walls, and create new wall types. Create curtain and foundation walls, join walls to floors, and assign wall top and bottom attachments.

Sketching Walls
In this exercise, you use sketching tools to draw and modify straight and arc wall segments, and then add a floor with an opening.

Draw the first exterior wall segment
1 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project.
■ ■ ■ ■

In the New Project dialog box, under Template file, click Browse. In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog box, click the training files icon. Select the m_Tutorial_Default.rte file located in the Metric folder, and click Open. In the New Project dialog box, click OK.

2 Zoom in on the center of the viewing window. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 4 Specify the wall segment start point, and drag the cursor to the right 2900 mm.

5 Click to specify the wall segment endpoint and select the dimension. 6 Enter 3000 mm for the new horizontal dimension.

7 Press ENTER.

The wall segment length is updated with the new dimension.

Draw the second exterior wall segment
8 Specify the right endpoint of the first wall segment as the second wall segment start point.

9 Drag the cursor down 2100 mm, and click to specify the wall segment endpoint.

Both vertical and horizontal dimensions display.

248 | Chapter 9 Walls

Draw the third and fourth exterior wall segments
10 Specify the lower end of the second wall segment as the third wall segment start point. 11 Press and hold SHIFT, drag the cursor to the right 2400 mm, and click to specify the third wall segment endpoint.

NOTE Hold down SHIFT as you drag the cursor to constrain your drawing direction orthogonally. 12 Specify the right end of the third wall segment as the fourth wall segment start point. 13 Hold down SHIFT, drag the cursor up 2100 mm, and click to specify the fourth wall segment endpoint.

Stretch the fourth exterior wall segment
14 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 15 Select the fourth wall segment and select the upper drag control.

Observe that the first wall segment has an assigned lock icon that references the alignment of the first wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment endpoint. 16 Drag the cursor up to 3600 mm.

Only the fourth wall segment is stretched. 17 Select the drag control again, and drag the cursor down to 2100 mm. 18 Click the first wall segment lock icon to lock the alignment of the first wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment endpoint.

Creating Walls | 249

19 Select the drag control again, and drag the cursor up to 2900 mm.

Observe that the first wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment endpoint maintain their alignment. The second wall segment stretched as well to accommodate the new position of the first wall segment. Locking the alignment ensures that this relationship between wall segments is maintained.

Draw the fifth and sixth exterior wall segments
20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 21 On the Options Bar, select Chain. 22 Specify the upper end of the fourth wall segment as the fifth wall segment start point. 23 Drag the cursor to the right 5500 mm, and click to specify the fifth wall segment endpoint.

24 Drag the cursor down 5500 mm, and click to specify the sixth wall segment endpoint.

250 | Chapter 9 Walls

Draw the seventh, eighth, and ninth exterior wall segments
25 Drag the cursor to the left 7000 mm, and click to specify the seventh wall segment endpoint.

26 Drag the cursor down 2100 mm, and click to specify the eighth wall segment endpoint.

27 Drag the cursor to the left 3900 mm, and click to specify the ninth wall segment endpoint.

Move the eighth wall segment
28 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the eighth wall segment. 29 Drag the cursor to the right until the centerline of the eighth wall segment aligns with the fourth wall segment centerline.

Creating Walls | 251

30 Click the eighth wall segment lock icon to lock the alignment of the eighth wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment centerline. 31 Select the eighth wall segment, and drag the cursor to the right 2100 mm to specify the new wall segment location

Observe that the eighth wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment centerline maintain their alignment. The third, fifth, seventh, and ninth wall segments are stretched as well to accommodate the new position of the eighth wall segment. Locking the alignment ensures that this relationship between wall segments is maintained.

Draw an arc wall segment
32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 33 On the Options Bar, click .

34 Specify the left end of the ninth wall segment as the arc start point.

252 | Chapter 9 Walls

35 Specify the left end of the first wall segment as the arc endpoint. NOTE Do not snap the cursor to 180 degrees.

36 Move the cursor along the preview arc wall, and click to place the arc wall. 37 Select the radius value, and enter 4900 mm.

38 Press ENTER.

Creating Walls | 253

Move wall segments by modifying dimensions
39 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the fourth wall segment. 40 Select the 3200 mm dimension value, and enter 4000.

41 Press ENTER.

254 | Chapter 9 Walls

Both the fourth and eighth wall segments are shifted 800 mm to the right.

Draw a diagonal exterior wall segment
42 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 43 Specify the midpoint of the fifth wall segment as the diagonal wall segment start point.

44 Specify the midpoint of the sixth wall segment as the diagonal wall segment endpoint.

45 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 46 On the Toolbar, click .

47 Select the left side of the fifth wall segment as the first wall segment to trim.

48 Select the diagonal wall segment as the wall segment to trim to. 49 Select the lower side of the sixth wall segment as the next wall segment to trim.

Creating Walls | 255

50 Select the diagonal wall segment as the wall segment to trim to.

Draw a floor by picking walls
51 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Floor, and then click Pick Walls. 52 Place the cursor over one of the walls, press TAB, and click to select the entire chain of walls.

All of the wall segments are highlighted. 53 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Sketch a rectangular floor cutout
54 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Opening. 55 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box, select the first option, and click OK. 56 Place the cursor over the edge of the floor until it highlights, and click.

256 | Chapter 9 Walls

57 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 58 On the Options Bar, click .

59 Using the following illustration as a guide, specify an approximate location for the first corner of the rectangular floor opening.

60 Specify the second corner of the rectangular floor opening, creating a 1800 mm X 3000 mm floor opening.

TIP The cursor snaps to dimension values based on the zoom of the view. To get the rectangle to the exact dimensions, you may need to zoom in. 61 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 62 On the Toolbar, click .

63 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 64 On the Toolbar, click .

65 In the Dynamic View dialog box, select Spin, and then, while holding the left mouse button down, move the cursor in the viewing window to orient the view as shown.

Creating Walls | 257

This completes the Sketching Walls exercise.

Working with Compound Walls
In this exercise, you work with compound walls. Convert generic wall styles to new custom wall styles, add dimensions, edit fill patterns that display in section views, and apply surface patterns.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the m_Gallery.rvt file located in the Metric folder.

Access wall properties
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

2 Zoom in on the upper part of the floor plan. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify. 4 Select the 200 mm exterior wall.

258 | Chapter 9 Walls

do the following: ■ ■ Click in the Function field. select Finishes . select Finishes .GRG (Glass Reinforced Gypsum). and click Down twice. 10 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box. 6 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Edit for Structure. Click OK. and click Up. Add two layers to the new wall type 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. click . Click in the Material field. and in the Materials dialog box. ■ 15 In row 5. click Insert twice.Exterior Insulation and Finish System. Click OK. 13 In row 1. Enter 135 mm for Thickness. 8 In the Name dialog box. click Edit/New. . Enter 50 mm for Thickness. Click in the Material field. Enter 15 mm for Thickness. click Click OK. under Name. click . enter 200 mm Stud Wall for Name. click .EIFS . and in the Materials dialog box. and select Finish 1 [4]. click Duplicate. and select Structure [1]. ■ 14 In row 3. 11 Select row 2. ■ Creating Walls | 259 . under Name. select Wood . 12 Select row 3.Stud Layer. do the following: ■ ■ Click in the Function field. do the following: ■ ■ Click in the Function field. and select Finish 2 [5].Interior . and in the Materials dialog box. under Name.5 On the Options Bar.Exterior . Click in the Material field. under Layers. and click OK.

Specify the view detail level 18 On the View Control Bar. Add a wall centerline dimension 23 Zoom in on the lower part of the floor plan. 260 | Chapter 9 Walls . select Basic Wall : 200 mm Stud Wall. 22 In the Type Selector. 21 Select Generic . expand Walls. 19 Zoom in on the left end of the new 200 mm Stud wall segment. and expand Basic Wall. expand Families.16 Click Preview. and click Select All Instances. The style of the selected walls is updated in the building model. right-click. 17 Click OK three times. 26 Select the upper horizontal wall segment centerline as the first dimension point.200mm. Assign the new wall style to the remaining exterior walls 20 In the Project Browser. 25 On the Options Bar. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. 24 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. select Wall centerlines for Prefer.

Creating Walls | 261 . The vertical wall centerline to centerline dimension displays. 30 Select the upper horizontal wall segment exterior face as the first dimension point. select Wall faces for Prefer.27 Select the lower horizontal wall segment centerline as the second dimension point. Add a wall face dimension 29 On the Options Bar. 28 Specify a point to the left as the dimension location point.

select Faces of core for Prefer. 34 Select the left vertical wall segment exterior core face as the first dimension point.31 Select the lower horizontal wall segment exterior face as the second dimension point. The vertical wall exterior face to exterior face dimension displays. 262 | Chapter 9 Walls . 32 Specify a point to the right as the dimension location point. Add a wall core face dimension 33 On the Options Bar.

Creating Walls | 263 . 36 Specify a point below as the dimension location point.35 Select the right vertical wall segment exterior core face as the second dimension point. The horizontal wall core face to core face dimension displays.

and click OK. click New. 264 | Chapter 9 Walls .25 for Import scale. click Fill Patterns. 39 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. click for Pattern. 38 On the Settings menu. 46 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. 42 In the New Pattern dialog box.Interior . and under Cut Pattern. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sand .Glass Reinforced Gypsum. select revit.pat. 40 In the New Pattern dialog box. Enter 0. Enter Gypsum for Name. click OK. 43 Click OK twice. select Gypsum. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.Create a custom gypsum fill pattern 37 In the Project Browser. 48 Zoom in on the gypsum board representation in the wall section. 50 On the View Control Bar. expand Sections (Callout 1). and click Import. and double-click Callout of Section 3. navigate to \Program Files\Autodesk Revit Building\Data. The new Gypsum pattern is assigned to the gypsum wall board representation in section view. 41 In the Import dialog box. select Custom. 47 In the Materials dialog box.Dense for Import. Assign the new gypsum fill pattern to a wall layer in section view 44 On the Settings menu. Assign a masonry surface pattern in a 3D view 49 In the Project Browser. select Finishes .GRG . expand 3D Views and double-click {3D}. and click Open. click Materials. 45 In the Materials dialog box.

51 On the Settings menu, click Materials. 52 In the Materials dialog box, select Masonry - Concrete Blocks, and under Surface Pattern, click 53 In the Fill Patterns dialog box, select Model for Pattern Type, select Block 8x16, and click OK. 54 In the Materials dialog box, click OK. 55 Select the low circular wall segment. 56 On the Options Bar, click . for Pattern.

57 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 58 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Edit for Structure. 59 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Layers, in row 2, click 60 In the Materials dialog box, select Masonry - Concrete Blocks. 61 Click OK four times. 62 Zoom in on the low wall segment. for Material.

Align a masonry surface pattern in an elevation view
63 In the Project Browser, expand Elevations, and double-click East.

64 Zoom in on the right retaining wall.

Creating Walls | 265

65 Zoom in on the upper left corner of the wall. 66 On the Toolbar, click .

67 Select the building wall edge as the alignment reference.

68 Select the CMU edge as the line to align.

The upper left corner of the CMU pattern is now aligned with the upper left corner of the retaining wall. This completes the Working with Compound Walls exercise.

Working with Vertically Compound Walls
In this exercise, you modify vertically compound walls and create and modify wall layers in sections view.

266 | Chapter 9 Walls

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Townhouse.rvt file located in the Common folder.

Access the exterior wall properties
1 On the Settings menu, click Project Units. 2 In the Project Units dialog box, click the button under Format next to Length. 3 In the Format dialog box, select Millimeters for Units, and click OK. 4 Click OK in the Project Units dialog box. 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the right front exterior wall.

6 On the Options Bar, click

.

7 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 9 If the Preview pane is not displayed on the left side of the Edit Assembly dialog box, click Preview. 10 On the Preview pane, ensure that Section: Modify type attributes is selected for View.

The wall section displays at its default sample height of 6096 mm.

Creating Walls | 267

Assign split regions to the wall section
11 Right-click in the preview window and click Zoom In Region. 12 Zoom in on the bottom of the wall section. 13 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Split Region. 14 Specify a point up 300 mm from the bottom of the wall on Layer 1: Masonry - Brick as the first split point.

15 Specify a point up 300 mm from the first split point on Layer 1: Masonry - Brick as the second split point.

Merge split regions in the wall section
16 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Merge Regions. 17 Select the upper split line as the region to merge.

268 | Chapter 9 Walls

The previously split regions are now merged.

Adjust the split line location
18 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Modify. 19 Select the split line, and click the 300 mm dimension value. 20 Enter 3680 mm.

Creating Walls | 269

21 Press ENTER. 22 Zoom out on the wall section.

The split line now occurs 3680 mm above the bottom of the wall.

Adjust the sample wall height
23 Scroll up to view the top of the wall. 24 Move your cursor over the top of the wall and press TAB until the outer boundary of the wall is highlighted (watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the interface to be sure you are highlighting the outer boundary), and then click to display the lock icon and the 6096 mm dimension value. 25 Click the 6096 mm dimension value, and enter 5500 mm.

270 | Chapter 9 Walls

26 Press ENTER. The sample wall height is now 5500 mm.

Add another split line
27 Zoom in on the existing split line. 28 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Split Region. 29 Specify a point up 240 mm from the existing split line on Layer 1: Masonry - Brick as the new split point.

The new split line now occurs 240 mm above the previous split line.

Creating Walls | 271

Add a new layer to the wall style
30 Under Layers, select row 1, and click Insert. 31 In row 1, select Finish 1 [4] for Function. 32 Select for Material.

33 In the Materials dialog box, under Name, select Masonry Brick - Soldier Course, and click OK. 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Layers, select row 1. 35 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Assign Layers. 36 On the Preview pane, select the 240 mm high region between the split lines as shown. Place the cursor at the bottom of the region to select it.

37 Click OK three times. 38 Zoom in on the front brick wall.

The soldier course displays in the exterior wall.

272 | Chapter 9 Walls

Specify allowance for layer extension
39 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the front brick wall. 40 On the Options Bar, click .

41 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 42 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 43 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, on the Preview pane, zoom in on the bottom of the wall. 44 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Modify. 45 Select the outer boundary of the wall at the masonry brick layer.

46 Click the lock icon to unlock the masonry brick layer for layer extension. 47 Click OK three times.

Modify extended layers
48 In the Project Browser, expand Sections (Callout 1), and double-click Wall Detail. 49 Select the brick wall.

50 Using the drag control at the bottom of the brick wall, drag it down into the concrete wall approximately as shown.

Creating Walls | 273

51 On the Tools menu, click Join Geometry. 52 Select the brick layer of the wall as the first layer to join.

53 Select the concrete foundation wall as the second layer to join.

The concrete foundation wall is cut away to accommodate the brick course.

54 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the brick wall. 55 On the Options Bar, click .

56 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Constraints, enter -150 mm for Base Extension Distance, and click OK.

274 | Chapter 9 Walls

Add a wall sweep
57 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the brick wall. 58 On the Options Bar, click .

59 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 60 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 61 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Sweeps. 62 In the Wall Sweeps dialog box, click Add and do the following:
■ ■

Select Sill : Sill for Profile. In the Material field, click Concrete. Click OK. , and in the Materials dialog box, under Name, select Concrete - Cast-in-Place

■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 3860 mm for Distance. Select Base for From. Select Exterior for Side. Enter -90 mm for Offset.

63 Click OK. 64 On the Preview pane, zoom in on the applied wall sweep in the wall section.

65 Click OK three times. 66 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under 3D Views, double-click 3D perspective. 67 Zoom in on the front wall, and view the sill.

Creating Walls | 275

This completes the Working with Vertically Compound Walls exercise.

Joining Walls to Floors
In this exercise, you work with joining walls and floors in section view.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Floor_wall_joins.rvt file located in the Common folder.

Draw the level 2 50 mmx255 mm wood joist floor
1 On the Settings menu, click Project Units. 2 In the Project Units dialog box, click the button under Format next to Length. 3 In the Format dialog box, select Millimeters for Units, and click OK. 4 Click OK in the Project Units dialog box. 5 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2.

6 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Floor. 7 On the Options Bar, select Extend into wall (to core). 8 For all four walls, select the outer edge of the wall core. Use the flip arrows to toggle the selection. TIP You can select each wall or use the TAB key to select the chain of walls.

276 | Chapter 9 Walls

9 On the Design Bar, click Floor Properties. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box, select Wood Joist 255 mm for Type, and click OK. 11 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 12 When prompted to cut the geometry from the walls, click Yes. 13 In the Project Browser, expand Sections, and double-click Section 1. 14 Zoom in on the wall at Level 2.

The level 2 floor extends into the wall structural layer.

Draw the level 1 50 mmx255 mm wood joist floor
15 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Floor. 17 On the Options Bar, select Extend into wall (to core). 18 Select all four walls on the centerline (click each wall while pressing Ctrl).

19 On the Design Bar, click Floor Properties. 20 In the Element Properties dialog box, verify that the Type is Wood Joist 255mm, and click OK. 21 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 22 When prompted to attach the walls to the bottom of the floor, click Yes. 23 In the Project Browser, expand Sections, and double-click Section 1. 24 Zoom in on the wall at Level 1.

Creating Walls | 277

The foundation wall is trimmed by the level 1 floor. This completes the Joining Walls to Floors exercise.

Working with Foundation Walls
In this exercise, you create and modify concrete foundation walls and footings.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Wall_Functions.rvt file located in the Common folder.

1 On the Settings menu, click Project Units. 2 In the Project Units dialog box, click the button under Format next to Length. 3 In the Format dialog box, select Millimeters for Units, and click OK. 4 Click OK in the Project Units dialog box. 5 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

6 On the View menu, click View Properties. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Graphics, select T.O. Footing for Underlay, and click OK. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 9 In the Type Selector, select Basic Wall : Foundation - 305 mm Concrete. 10 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Select T.O. Footing for Depth. Select Finish Face: Exterior for Loc Line. Select Chain. Enter 305mm for Offset.

11 Specify the outside upper left corner of the building as the first foundation wall segment start point, and then specify the outside lower left corner of the building as the first foundation wall segment endpoint.

278 | Chapter 9 Walls

12 Proceed in a counterclockwise direction and draw the remaining five foundation wall segments. Snap to the outside corners at each foundation wall segment endpoint. 13 In the Project Browser, expand 3D Views, and double-click {3D}.

Create a new 610 mm concrete footing wall type
14 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click T.O. Footing.

Creating Walls | 279

15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 16 In the Type Selector, select Basic Wall : Foundation - 305 mm Concrete. 17 On the Options Bar, click .

18 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 19 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 20 In the Name dialog box, enter Foundation - 610mm Concrete for Name, and click OK. 21 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 22 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Layers, in row 2, enter 610 mm for Thickness.

23 Click OK three times.

Draw the 610 mm concrete footing
24 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Select Unconnected for Depth and enter 305 mm. Select Finish Face: Exterior for Loc Line. Select Chain. Enter 460 mm for Offset.

25 Specify the outside upper left corner of the foundation as the first footing wall segment start point and then specify the outside lower left corner of the foundation as the first footing wall segment endpoint. If a warning about the objects not being visible in the current view is displayed, close the warning dialog.

280 | Chapter 9 Walls

26 Proceed in a counterclockwise direction and draw the remaining five footing wall segments. Snap to the outside corners at each footing wall segment endpoint.

27 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click {3D}.

The concrete foundation walls and footings are now complete. This completes the Working with Foundation Walls exercise.

Working with Wall Wraps
In this exercise, you assign different wall wrap conditions to a window opening.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Wall Functions.rvt file located in the Common folder.

Creating Walls | 281

Assign window wall closure parameters
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom in on one of the level 1 windows.

Neither the interior nor the exterior wall components wrap around the window opening. 3 Select the window. 4 On the Options Bar, click .

5 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select By host for Wall Closure. 7 Click OK twice.

Assign an interior wall wrap parameter
8 Select the wall. 9 On the Options Bar, click .

10 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 12 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Default Wrapping, select Interior for At Inserts. 13 Click OK three times.

The interior metal stud wall with gypsum board now wraps around the window opening.

Assign an exterior wall wrap parameter
14 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the wall. 15 On the Options Bar, click .

16 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 17 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 18 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Default Wrapping, select Exterior for At Inserts. Both would wrap gypsum and brick. Exterior wraps only the brick. 19 Click OK three times.

282 | Chapter 9 Walls

The exterior brick wall now wraps around the window opening. This completes the Working with Wall Wraps exercise.

Assigning Wall Bottom and Top Attachments
In this exercise, you assign wall bottom attachments to a curved floor in 3D view and wall top attachments to reference planes in elevation view.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Attach_Top_Bottom.rvt file located in the Common folder.

Attach wall bottoms to floor surface
1 Select all four wall segments.

2 On the Options Bar, click Attach for Top/Base, and select Base for Attach Wall. 3 Select the floor as the object to attach to.

The walls are projected down to attach to the floor.

Creating Walls | 283

7 Select the first reference plane as the object to attach to. The south wall is projected up to attach to the first reference plane. click Attach for Top/Base. 284 | Chapter 9 Walls . 6 On the Options Bar.Attach wall tops to reference planes 4 In the Project Browser. 5 Select the south wall. expand Elevations. expand Views (all). and select Top for Attach Wall. and double-click South.

9 Select the north wall. 11 Select the second reference plane as the object to attach to. The north wall is projected up to attach to the second reference plane. Creating Walls | 285 . and select Top for Attach Wall. click Attach for Top/Base. 10 On the Options Bar. double-click North.8 In the Project Browser. under Elevations.

expand 3D Views and double-click {3D}. 286 | Chapter 9 Walls .12 In the Project Browser. This completes the Assigning Wall Bottom and Top Attachments exercise. This also completes the Walls lesson.

you select the grid. and mullions. and you can change these elements individually. you need to change the length of the wall. A typical curtain system comprises a wall. curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. You can add curtain systems with the wall command. Unlike windows. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. grid lines. Like windows. 287 . you need to select a panel. and they are not windows. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. To switch panel types. they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. or you can use a specific curtain system command. For example. To change grids.Curtain Systems 10 Curtain systems are not walls. This affects the entire curtain system. to resize the system. panel. Like walls.

and double-click Ground Floor. you create a curtain system using the wall command. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. expand Floor Plans. 5 Start the curtain system where shown. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 4 On the Type Selector. 2 Zoom in on Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor. click Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 288 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model. This floor edge will be the entrance to the building. expand Views (all). Creating an Entrance In this exercise. click Open.rvt file located in the Metric folder. click the Training Files icon.Flat Curtain System In this lesson. click Wall. Open the m_Curtain_Walls. 1 In the Project Browser.

Flat Curtain System | 289 .6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown. 7 Zoom in on the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall.

10 Zoom in on the curtain system you just added. 13 Specify 1200 for Top Offset. click Orient ➤ Northeast. and click OK. Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint. expand 3D Views. The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems. You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. 290 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . 12 Under Constraints.8 In the Project Browser. top and base attachments. and room bounding. 11 Select the curtain system and click . expand Views (all). top constraint. 9 On the View menu. specify Up to level: TOP OF ROOF for Top Constraint. and double-click Southeast Isometric.

and resize the crop boundary as shown. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary. 18 In the Project Browser. Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. and click OK. the curtain system is a single glazed panel. double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view. You are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar.Right now.a. and click Rename. 15 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Curtain Grid. 20 In the drawing area. under Floor Plans. using curtain grids. right-click on the elevation name Elevation 1 . 19 Enter Entrance Elevation. click Elevation. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 22 Place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line. Flat Curtain System | 291 .

31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. SIXTH FLOOR. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. click Copy to Clipboard. 28 On the Edit menu. and click OK.23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid. click Curtain Grid. The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. 27 On the Edit menu. 33 On the Design Bar. Click to place another grid line. Click to create a vertical grid. hold CTRL and select SECOND FLOOR. 29 In the Select Levels dialog box. THIRD FLOOR. This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels. 32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel. click Modify. 24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. FIFTH FLOOR. click Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. and SEVENTH FLOOR. one larger than the other. 292 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . 26 Hold CTRL and select the 3 grid lines you just placed. watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. FOURTH FLOOR. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. click Modify. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 25 On the Design Bar.

37 Click in any white space to exit the editor. Flat Curtain System | 293 . and on the Options Bar. remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step. 35 Select the left vertical grid line. The two segments are removed. you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. 38 Using the same method. The segment line style changes to dashed. and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel. Instead. you add a doorway to the curtain system. You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them. Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view.Next. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line. click Add or Remove Segments. and then select the segment above it. You do not use the Door command.

294 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . Use the following picture as a guide. 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown. You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid. 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays. 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. click Curtain Grid. Do not click between the 1800 mm panels. You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels. 43 Delete the dimensions. 42 Place dimensions as shown. The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. select One Segment. 40 On the Options Bar. and lock them. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions.39 On the Design Bar.

you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones. under Elevations. double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors. double-click Entrance Elevation. 52 On the Type Selector. click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. 55 In the Project Browser. Now.rfa. and click Wireframe. on the new curtain system you added. 51 Select the left 1800 mm panel. 54 On the Design Bar. click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it. 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. and click Open. you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. 50 In the Doors folder. The panel changes to a double door. not as curtain panels. 56 In the Project Browser. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid). click Modify. Flat Curtain System | 295 . They are part of the curtain panel category. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel. To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids. click in any white space to exit the editor. Next. These panels schedule as doors.TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. 57 On the View Control Bar. 49 On the File menu. click . select M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl. This changes the graphics style of the view. click Load From Library ➤ Load Family. Next. under Floor Plans. you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors. Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level.

67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels. The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. click . 60 On the Type Selector. 62 Click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. click Save As. 66 On the View Control Bar. The glazed panels display in blue. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance. 68 On the File menu. Name the file m_rvt8_Curtain_Walls-in_progress. and the solid panels display in white.rvt. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise. you place mullions on curtain panel grids. click System Panel : Solid. 65 On the View Control Bar. click Wireframe for Graphics Style. Thickness specifies the depth of the panel. click Shading with Edges for Graphics Style. 63 Click OK twice to close the Type Properties and Element Properties dialog boxes. 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels. 296 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems .59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. 61 With the panel still selected. and Material specifies the shading and patterning. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall.

there are a few that you do not want. 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click. however. Removing mullions 8 Zoom in on the set of doors. so you remove them next.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 9 Delete the mullions below them. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. 2 On the Options Bar. Flat Curtain System | 297 . click Mullion. You are going to change some mullion joins. Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. select All Empty Segments. because they reduce the doors’ size by their widths. select Grid Line Segment. 6 On the Options Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Entire Grid Line. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors.

The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. click Hidden Line for Graphics Style. 298 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . 11 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors. 12 Click the lower mullion join control. 13 Click the top mullion control. Two mullion join controls display.Changing mullion joins 10 On the View Control Bar.

double-click Ground Floor. you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. 1 In the Project Browser. Finally. 15 In the Project Browser. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system. 7 Enter 1200 for Top Offset. click Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. under Floor Plans. 5 Click . You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. 14 On the Design Bar. click Modify. double-click Southeast Isometric. and click OK. you add a curtain system using the wall command. Curved Curtain System In this lesson. 4 On the Type Selector. Finally. specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR for Top Constraint. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. 16 Save the file. 6 Under Constraints. you can also right-click and select Break at Join from the Join Conditions menu to break the mullion at both joins. 10 Place the second point at the lower right side. 2 Zoom in on the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. 8 On the Options Bar. The curtain wall is sketched as an arc. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. click Wall. Curved Curtain System | 299 . This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system.TIP After selecting the vertical mullion. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 9 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. click . You also create a custom curtain panel for the system.

15 In the Project Browser. and then sixteenths. 300 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level. 14 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. click Curtain Grid. The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed.11 Finish the arc by clicking at the top of the arc. Divide the halves into quarters. eighths. and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids. You are going to use one of these snaps points. you place grids on the system. double-click East. Next. under Elevations. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. 13 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. 16 Zoom in on the cylinder. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

Remember to click from the selection except Curtain Walls. click Modify.300mm.17 On the Design Bar. Using walls as panels 18 Using a selection box. Curved Curtain System | 301 . you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise. Next. select the bottom layer of panels. click Basic Wall: Generic . you change some panels in the system. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system. 19 On the Type Selector. to filter out all other elements 20 Save the file.

click 12 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion. 302 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . under Elevations. 5 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Lines. 7 Start the sketch at the upper lefthand reference line intersection and finish at the lower righthand reference line intersection. 4 On the Design Bar. 9 Select the extrusion. and on the Options Bar. double-click Metric Curtain Wall Panel. . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion.rft. 6 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. click . and click . enter 100 for Depth. 8 On the Design Bar. double-click Exterior. 2 In the Metric templates folder. 10 Under Identity Data. 1 On the File menu. specify Glass for Subcategory. 3 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click Model Lines. and on the Options Bar. click New ➤ Family.

17 Load the Curtain Panel . right-click and select Select Panels along Horizontal Grid from the Select Panels menu. . 24 In the Project Browser. 15 Close the family file by clicking Close on the File menu. 20 On the Type Selector. 16 On the File menu.Pattern. All the panels change to the custom panel you created. All fifth floor panels are selected.Solid. click Modify. double-click FOURTH FLOOR. and then click . All fourth floor panels are selected. 25 Highlight a panel in the arc. 21 Select the curved arc curtain wall. Hold Shift and spin the model so that you can see the The curved curtain system’s structure now matches that of the main part of the building. 14 On the File menu. 23 On the View toolbar. and click Flip Orientation. 18 In the Project Browser. click curved curtain system. 19 Highlight a panel in the arc. right-click and select Select Panels along Horizontal Grid from the Select Panels menu.rfa family.rfa.13 On the Design Bar. select Curtain Panel . Curved Curtain System | 303 . All the panels change to the solid panel. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. under Floor Plans. 26 On the Type Selector.Pattern.Pattern. click System Panel . 22 Right-click. under Floor Plans. and return to your project file. double-click FIFTH FLOOR. click Save As. and save the family as Curtain Panel .

27 Save the file. For vertical mullions. 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel. 7 Specify Mullion for Profile Usage. and select Radius and specify 50 mm for the radius. and click OK. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel. 8 On the Design Bar. you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel. click Mullion. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise. click Family Category and Parameters. 5 In the Metric Templates folder. double-click Metric Profile. under Elevations. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. 6 On the Settings menu. click New ➤ Family. click Lines.The finished arc wall should look like the following picture. click . you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion. 304 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . double-click East. except at the GROUND FLOOR level. enter 8 for Sides.rft. Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 On the File menu. 1 In the Project Browser.

This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays.10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point. 19 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown. Curved Curtain System | 305 . clear Fine. click Detail Component.rfa file from the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Detail Components folder. 12 Select the lines in the octagon. 13 On the Options Bar.detail. 18 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. 17 Open the m_Cylinder Mullion . and click OK. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Visibility. Click again to specify the ending point. click Modify. 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog box. Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location. 15 On the File menu. click the Training Files icon.

26 On the File menu.rfa. under 3D Views. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. 306 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . 34 In the Type Properties dialog box. 39 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. clear Coarse and Medium. click Duplicate.20 On the Design Bar. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 24 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion. and click OK. 40 On the Design Bar. it can be added as a mullion type. 38 On the Options Bar.rfa family. click Modify. and spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 33 Click Edit/New. 27 Load the Cylinder Mullion. click Modify to exit placing mullions. right-click and use Select Mullions on gridline from the Select Mullions menu. 28 In the Project Browser. 30 On the Modelling tab. and click DELETE. under Floor Plans. 25 Close the family file by clicking Close on the File menu. 41 In the Project Browser. select All Empty Segments. select Circular Mullion for Family. so next you remove the unwanted ones. and click OK. 23 On the File menu. 36 Under Construction. After the new profile is loaded. 29 Click . double-click Southeast Isometric. The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view. 37 Click OK twice. 35 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name. and return to the project file. click Save As. click Mullion. 22 In the Family element visibility settings dialog box. You have placed more mullions than you want. specify Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion for Profile. and click Visibility. 31 Click . 42 Highlight a mullion in the arc. 21 Select the detail component.

4 On the Design Bar.43 Save the file. 1 In the Project Browser. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and a ruled curtain system. TIP To chain select all the walls. you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system. and then apply those custom elements to the system. as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. you learned to create a curved curtain system. click Pick Walls. Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. 2 Zoom in on the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E. a storefront system. place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and press TAB. Additional Curtain Systems | 307 . make custom curtain panels and mullions. and you can click to select them all. double-click TOP OF ROOF. In this lesson. Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. select Defines slope. All the inside faces highlight. 5 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans.

7 On the Design Bar. click Roof Properties. 19 Save the file. 14 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 12 On the View Control Bar. click Shaded with Edges for Graphics Style. click Finish Roof. double-click Southeast Isometric. Storefront System In this exercise. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system. click System Family: Sloped Glazing for Family. select Entire Grid Line. click Mullion. 13 Zoom in on the skylight. 16 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. 11 In the Project Browser. and click OK. you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. 10 On the Design Bar. click Hidden Line for Graphics Style. 17 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 9 Under Constraints. 308 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . 15 On the Options Bar. under 3D Views. 18 On the View Control Bar.

Additional Curtain Systems | 309 . 7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and enter 2400. 2 Zoom in on the wall at the eastern-most area of the model. select Unconnected for Height. 6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 5 On the Options Bar. click Wall. 1 In the Project Browser. You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall. This curtain wall cuts the original wall. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 4 On the Type Selector.

This specifies an exact length for the wall. By setting the Angle (Grid 1) value. even if the wall height changes. see the Revit Building help. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall. click Modify. The type parameters under the Pattern heading create the predefined layout. For more information about these curtain wall parameters. and Offset (Grid 1). 13 Click Edit/New to open the Type Properties dialog box. which is specified in the type. Click OK. and the Spacing (Grid 1) is set to 1524 mm. click OK to close the Type Properties dialog box and return to the Element Properties dialog box that displays the instance parameters. you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. and click . 310 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . enter 45 for Angle (Grid 1) and 15 for Angle (Grid 2). and the Spacing (Grid 2) is set to 2400 mm. 14 After you have looked at the Pattern parameters. 12 Select the storefront wall. The Grid 2 counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. The Justification (Grid 1) specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning. Justification (Grid 1). The Number (Grid 1) is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. or end. you find Number (Grid 1). center. You see these same parameters for Grid 2. The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. This means that the panel heights will be exactly at a 2400 mm height. To see how the grid layout is defined. double-click Southeast Isometric. This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. The Layout (Grid 2) is set to Fixed Distance. under 3D Views. Angle (Grid 1). and press ENTER. Under the Pattern heading. the Layout (Grid 1) is set to Maximum Spacing. The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout. you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. The Offset (Grid 1) is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. 11 Zoom in on the new storefront wall. 9 On the Design Bar.8 Click the temporary dimension. 10 In the Project Browser. enter 10200 mm. For this wall.

This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. and select All Empty Segments on the Options Bar. click Mullion. Additional Curtain Systems | 311 . under 3D Views. click Hidden Line for Graphics Style. you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout. 17 Select a curtain grid. 1 In the Project Browser. 18 Save the file. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise. Curtain System by Lines In this exercise. you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. double-click Southeast Isometric. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the View Control Bar. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. In this exercise. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system.16 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

and highlight the thin line. A panel between the 2 lines is created. 7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level. Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the thin line. 8 Select the highlighted line.5 Place the cursor at the bottom edge of the SECOND FLOOR. 312 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . making sure Thin Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted. Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight. 6 Click the highlighted line.

and then eighths. Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. click System Panel : Solid. This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. right-click and use Select Panels along Grid 2 from the Select Panels menu. Finally. In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system. 13 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves. but now that you have created a ruled curtain system. and click . 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. quarters. 10 Click OK to close the Element Properties dialog box. 16 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid. NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system. and define a ruled curtain system. embed a curtain system inside another wall. you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids. Additional Curtain Systems | 313 . click Curtain Grid. quarters. place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves. and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system. you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels. Next. 9 Select the panel. 12 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps.A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall. 17 Save the file. 14 Highlight a top level glazed panel. and then eighths. 15 On the Type Selector.

314 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems .

you learn how to create drawings from a building information model in an Autodesk Revit Building project. which are a type of view in a project.Creating Drawings 11 In this tutorial. you can add different views of the building model directly to the sheet. Sheets are defined by borders. and are accessible from the Project Browser. three-dimensional views. Depending on the type of drawing that you want to create. section. The model views that you can add to sheets include plan. elevation. 315 . and schedules. begin by first creating sheets. To create a printed or plotted set of drawings from the views in your building model. usually contain a title block.

you create a drawing sheet that includes a floor plan of the first level of the building model. 316 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . You also reorient the swing of one of the doors in the floor plan view on the sheet. how to create new views from a building model. adjust the view scale. Open m_Drawing_Exercise located in the Metric folder. The project used in the following exercises is a small office building model. You turn off the visibility of the furniture in the duplicated view to create a floor plan view and rename the original view as the furniture plan. you enter the project information and create a drawing sheet with a title block that displays the project information. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. You begin by duplicating an existing floor plan view that includes furniture. click Open. Next. you learn how to create sheets within an Revit Building project. You then add the floor plan view to the sheet. click the Training Files icon. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Creating a Drawing Sheet In this exercise. how to add views to the sheets. and dimension the exterior walls of the building to complete the floor plan drawing sheet. and observe that the changes are made in the floor and furniture plan views of the building model. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet.Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson.

right-click Level 1. enter Level 1 Furniture. 2 Under Floor Plans. and specialty equipment continue to display in the Level 1 Furniture plan. 12 In the Element Properties dialog box. and specialty equipment in the Level 1 Floor Plan view 6 On the View menu. Turn off visibility for casework. Casework. lighting fixtures. A copy of the Level 1 Floor plan view is displayed in the Project Browser. double-click Level 1 to redisplay the floor plan. and click Duplicate. Casework. expand Views (all). and click OK. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 10 Click OK. and click Rename. and specialty equipment are no longer displayed in the Level 1 floor plan view. The changes in visibility are applied to this view only. 3 Right-click Copy of Level 1. and expand Floor Plans. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box. click the Model Categories tab. 9 Under Visibility. 4 In the Rename View dialog box. click Edit for Project Address. click Visibility/Graphics. furniture. furniture. 8 Select Include categories from all disciplines in the list above. Enter the project information to display in the title block of the drawing sheet 11 On the Settings menu. 5 In the Project Browser. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 317 . click Project Information. furniture.Copy the Level 1 floor plan view to create a Level 1 Furniture plan view 1 In the Project Browser.

18 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. Enter Residence for Project Name. Smith for Client Name. 17 On View tab of the Design Bar. 2005 for Project Issue Date. MA 12345 14 Click OK. 16 Click OK. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. select A0 metric. click Sheet. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. right-click. Enter J. The text fields of the title block on the sheet automatically display the corresponding project information that you entered in step 14. and click OK. 15 Continue to change the remaining type parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 31 March. and click View. Enter 2005-01 for Project Number. Enter Client Approved for Project Status. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. 318 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings .13 In the Edit Text dialog box.

and click Add View to Sheet. and select the title block. 23 Ground Floor Plan is displayed in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. and click OK. View scale is a property of the view. 20 On the Design Bar. 21 When the title block highlights. 25 In the Views dialog box. and you can modify it within the sheet by activating the Level 1 floor plan view and changing its scale. expand Sheets (all). enter Ground Floor Plan for Sheet Name. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A101 . under Identity Data. click Modify.Unnamed. on the Options Bar. and click to place the view in the center of the drawing sheet. 26 Move the cursor to the center of the drawing sheet.NOTE The Project Path parameter in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. The Level 1 floor plan view is displayed on the drawing sheet. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. 19 In the Project Browser. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 319 . select Floor Plan: Level 1. click . click Add View. 24 On the View tab of the Design Bar. but the scale of the view is too small for the drawing sheet.

320 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . click Activate View. under Graphics. If you were to open the Level 1 floor plan view.27 With the view selected. Any changes that you make to it on the sheet while it is active display when you open the Level 1 floor plan view. 31 Select the viewport and from the Type Selector. click Viewport : Title w Line. 28 Right-click the view. The scale of the view on the sheet changes. indicating the view is deactivated. and click View Properties. The border and title block are grayed out. select 1:20 for View Scale. indicating that the Level 1 floor plan View is active and you can modify it. and click OK. and drag the grips that display on the scale to lengthen it. and click View Properties. you would see that the scale of the Level 1 floor plan view is now 1:20. 33 Drag the viewport to the center of the drawing sheet. on the View menu. right-click. click Deactivate View. The border and the title block are no longer grayed out. Center the view on the sheet and reposition the drawing scale 30 On the View menu. 32 Select the viewport. 29 In the Element Properties dialog box.

and select Wall faces for Prefer. This creates aligned dimensions that originate at the wall faces. 35 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click to place the dimension. Reorient the door in the upper exterior wall 39 On the Design Bar. click Dimension.Dimension the exterior walls of the building 34 Right-click on the viewport on the drawing sheet. 40 Click the control arrows until the door swings open to the interior. as shown in the following illustration. and click Activate View. Move the cursor above the north exterior wall. and then select the outer face of the east exterior vertical wall. as shown in the following illustration. and select the door on the north exterior wall (in the upper right corner). Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 321 . ■ 38 Dimension the west exterior wall of the building by selecting the outer faces of the north and south exterior walls and placing the dimension to the left of the west wall. click . 36 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 37 Dimension the north wall of the building: ■ Select the outer face of the west exterior vertical wall.

are specific to the view in which they are created.41 Select the view. Dimensions. 44 Proceed to the next exercise. however. This means that when you reoriented the door swing in the Level 1 floor plan. the change is also made in the Level 1 Furniture plan. When you change the geometry of the building model while the view is activated. and click Deactivate View. double-click Level 1. right-click. 43 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 322 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . the changes are made within the building model and not restricted to the current view. Adding a Sheet to the Project. 42 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. The two dimensions that you added to the view in the previous steps have been added to this view. but the door reflects the change you made to its orientation in the Level 1 floor plan. The dimensions that you added to the Level 1 floor plan view are not displayed. double-click Level 1 Furniture. and the door is updated.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Sheet. and on the Options Bar. click .rvt. In the Project Browser. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 323 . is displayed. Furniture Plan Level 1 is displayed in the title block as the sheet name. m_Drawing_Exercise. the new sheet.Adding a Sheet to the Project In this exercise. you add a new sheet to the project. and click OK. A102 . select A0 metric. add the furniture plan view. and click OK. enter Furniture Plan Level 1 for Sheet Name. Add a new sheet to the project 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. under Identity Data. under Sheets (all). 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. and adjust the scale of the view to create a furniture plan drawing.Furniture Plan Level 1. The sheet is incrementally named A102. 3 Select the title block.

Furniture Plan Level 1. under Floor Plans. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. right-click on the view on sheet A102. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. double-click A102 . 8 In the Project Browser. click the scale value. and click Activate View. verify that M_Floor Lamp 2 : 150 watt Incandescent is displayed. and click to place the view. under Floor Plans. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. 9 Center the cursor in the drawing area of the sheet. and select the lamp next to the lounge chair. and then observe that the changes are also made in the Level 1 Furniture plan. and select 1:20. Change the lamp type in the furniture plan 1 In the drawing area.rvt. You change a lamp type and the length of an interior wall in the furniture plan view on Sheet A102. 324 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . 2 Zoom in on the lower left corner of the building. under Sheets (all). click and drag Level 1 Furniture onto the sheet. m_Drawing_Exercise. 7 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1 Furniture. click Modify. 6 On the View Control Bar. 3 On the Design Bar. 5 Select M_Floor Lamp 1 : 100watt Halogen in the Type Selector to change the lamp type. 4 In the Type Selector. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet In this exercise. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet.Change the scale of the view before you add it to the sheet 5 In the Project Browser.

12 Proceed to the next exercise. The desk. and file cabinet adjacent to the wall move when the wall is resized. furniture. 10 On the Window menu. The changes made to the lamp. 8 Select the wall as shown in the following illustration. Creating New Views to Add to Sheets. select Floor Plan: Level 1 Furniture. enter 5200 mm. chair. and the wall position in Sheet A102 are reflected in the Level 1 Furniture plan view. and notice that Moves with Nearby Elements is selected in the Options Bar. 9 Click the temporary dimension value of the distance between the wall and the centerline of the exterior horizontal wall. and press ENTER. click Modify. 7 On the Design Bar.6 Select one of the furniture components. 11 Select the same wall you selected in step 8 to view the change in dimension. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 325 .

326 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . callout. click Modify. click Callout. and section views of the building model and add them to a single drawing sheet.Creating New Views to Add to Sheets In this exercise. and select the dashed callout view border. you learn how to create new elevation. 5 Select the blue border grip adjacent to the view tag. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 4 On the Design Bar. m_Drawing_Exercise. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1 Furniture. A callout tag is placed inside the walls of the building model. 3 Draw a rectangle around the room in the lower left corner of the drawing to define the boundaries of the room. Create a callout view 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and move it to the position shown in the following illustration.

11 In the Views dialog box.6 On the Design Bar. 12 Move the cursor to the upper left corner of the sheet. click the scale value. select Floor Plan: Callout of Level 1 Furniture. TIP You can also drag the Floor Plan: Callout of Level 1 Furniture view from the Project Browser to place it on the sheet. and add the callout view to a new sheet 7 On the View Control Bar. select A0 Metric. position the view.Unnamed. is displayed under Sheets (all) in the Project Browser. 10 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Add View to Sheet. 8 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 327 . click Sheet. The new sheet. and click OK. A103 . and double-click the callout tag to display the callout view. and click to place the view. and select 1:20. Change the callout view scale. 9 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. click Add View. click Modify.

click Modify.13 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 18 On the Design Bar. 17 Move the cursor to the lower left room. 14 Zoom in around the view tag of the callout. and zoom out to view the elevation extents. double-click Level 1 Furniture. Create a new elevation view. The elevation extents do not display when you select the body of the elevation symbol. An elevation symbol displays at the end of the cursor in the drawing area. As you move the cursor. and place it on the sheet 15 Adjust your zoom to display the lower left corner of the view. 328 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . 16 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The tag now displays the drawing sheet and detail number. and click to place the elevation symbol. the elevation symbol points to the closest wall. select the elevation symbol arrow. center it in the room so that it points north. click Elevation.

c. The symbol is displayed as in the following illustration. and click Add View to Sheet. and notice that two new elevation views display: Elevation 1 . double-click A103 . 21 In the Project Browser under Views (all). 25 Click to place the elevation next to the callout view on the drawing sheet.a and Elevation 1 .19 Select the body of the elevation symbol. select Elevation: Elevation 1 . 20 Select the box under the elevation symbol to create a new elevation view 180 degrees from the first elevation view you created when you placed the elevation symbol. Add the new elevation views to sheet A103 22 In the Project Browser under Sheets (all). click Add View. 24 In the Views dialog box.Unnamed. 23 On the View tab of the Design Bar. expand Elevations.a. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 329 .

28 Zoom in on the elevation tag in the lower left room. double-click Level 1 Furniture. Create a section view. double-click A102 . 30 Zoom in on the right side of the building. and add it to the sheet 29 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. The sheet (drawing) number and detail IDs of the views are displayed in the symbol.26 Add Elevation 1 . 330 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings .c to the sheet either with the Add View command or by dragging it from the Project Browser onto the sheet. under Sheets (all). 27 In the Project Browser.Furniture Plan Level 1.

Move the cursor down and click outside of the south exterior wall of the building to place the section tail and complete the section line.31 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 32 In the Options Bar. click Section. 33 Add a section line that cuts through the right side of the building: ■ Click outside the north exterior wall of the building to place the start point of the section line and the section head (section tag). Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 331 . select 1:50 for Scale. ■ 34 Click the arrows at the head of the section line to flip the section so it points to the west.

332 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings .35 In the Project Browser under Sheets (all). 37 In the Views dialog box. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Custom for View Scale. 39 Right-click on the view. on the File menu. 38 Right-click on the viewport. modify the building model from your sheets. 45 Close the exercise file. and to create new views of your building model. 44 If you want to save your changes. 40 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click Deactivate View. click Add View. The drawing sheet is now complete. and sections. double-click A103 . and click Add View to Sheet. you learned how to create new drawing sheets. and click View Properties. 36 On the View tab of the Design Bar. such as callouts. and click OK. select Section: Section 1. 41 Enter 25 for Scale Value. By completing the exercises in this lesson. click Save As. add views to your sheets. 42 Right-click on the view. and click Activate View. elevations. under Graphics. 43 Place the section view on the drawing sheet as shown in the following illustration.Unnamed.

and click OK. enter Symbol Legend for Name.rvt located in the Metric folder. and click Rename.Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Building building model. Create a legend view 1 On the View menu. and door frames. On construction documents. 2 In the Project Browser. expand Legends. click the Training Files icon. 6 Add the following symbols to the legend view. doors. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. Annotation legends are made up of components such as section markers and door tags that are paired with text that identifies them. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or noteblock.Filled Level Head . and so on). The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. click Symbol. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ M_Section Head . click Open. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown. Add symbols to the legend 5 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click New ➤ Legend. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it using a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. windows. door frame schedule. 3 Right-click Legend 1. 4 In the Rename View dialog box. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. Finally. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. Open m_Legends. On construction documents.Upgrade : 6 mm M_Wall Tag : 12mm Door Tag metric Window Tag metric Using Legends | 333 . you add the completed symbol legend to a cover sheet for the construction documents.

verify that Text : 3mm is selected. click Duplicate. click Modify to end the command. click Edit/New. 9 On the Options bar. 334 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . select Text : 6mm. expand Sheets (all). 14 Enter Detail Callout (detail #/sheet #) for the text note. and click to place it. you create a text type with the necessary size. and click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Text. 15 Working from the top down. 13 In the Type Selector. enter 3mm for Name. enter 3mm for Text Size. enter the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Marker (Level name/Elevation in mm) Wall Tag (Wall Type #) Door Tag (Door #) Window Tag (Window Type #) Place the symbol legend on a sheet 16 In the Project Browser. click Symbol Legend. 18 On the Design Bar. 17 In the Project Browser. click . 8 In the Type Selector.Cover Sheet to open it in the drawing area. and click OK. You do this by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. On the Design Bar.Create a text type 7 Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. drag it to the lower-right corner of the cover sheet. and click OK twice. and double-click A100 . 12 Under Text.

20 Navigate to your preferred directory. and click OK. click Save As. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model.The symbol legend is added to the project cover sheet. enter Wall Type Legend for Name.rvt. 3 Right-click Legend 1. name the file m_Legends_in progress. Creating a Wall Type Legend In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Legend Component. 2 In the Project Browser. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. 4 In the Rename View dialog box. and click Rename. 19 On the File menu. 7 Select Section for View. m_Legends_in progress.rvt.Brick on CMU for Family. You then add the completed legend to a project cover sheet. Creating a Wall Type Legend. Using Legends | 335 . 21 Proceed to the next exercise. 9 Repeat the procedure to place a wall of type Interior . Add components to the legend 5 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 8 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. click New ➤ Legend. and click Save. expand Legends. 6 On the Options Bar. select Walls: Basic Wall: Exterior . Create a legend view 1 On the View menu.138mm Partition (1-hr) directly below the first wall.

verify that Text : 3mm is selected. 17 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. 15 Enter (1) Layer 16mm GWB. 11 In the Type Selector.Add text to the legend 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 13 Click in the far left portion of the Brick on CMU wall to specify the leader start point. The text note with leader is added to the legend. and click Modify on the Design Bar. 336 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . 14 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. click to add a single-segment leader. 12 On the Options bar. 16 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the remaining text annotations on the upper wall component. click Text.

click Save. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. 21 Click below the lower wall and enter Wall Type 2. Place the legend on a sheet 25 Using extension reference lines. select Text : 6mm. draw a detail line that extends as far as the longest component callout. Using a Legend View to Match Types In this exercise. 22 On the Design Bar. 24 Below the title text of the upper component. You capture the wall type properties in the tool. select Medium Lines. Using a Legend View to Match Types. add an identical detail line below the lower component. and click to place it above the symbol legend. you use the Match Type tool to convert a wall in the floor plan to the component type used in the Wall Type Legend.Add titles to the legend components 18 In the Type Selector. 29 On the File menu. 23 In the Type Selector. drag it onto the sheet. and enter Wall Type 1. 20 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. click Modify to end the command. 26 In the Project Browser.Cover Sheet to open it in the drawing area. double-click A100 . 19 On the Options Bar. 27 In the Project Browser. and then select the wall to which you want to apply the same properties. 28 On the Design Bar. Using Legends | 337 . The wall type legend is added to the project cover sheet. click Detail Lines. click Wall Type Legend. click to add text without a leader.

The open drawings are both visible. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. Match a component type 3 On the Tools toolbar. indicating that it captured the wall type properties. so that you are zoomed in to the walls. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. m_Legends_in_progress. 4 In the Wall Type Legend view.rvt. enter ZR to zoom to a specific region. 8 On the View Control Bar. 5 In the floor plan view. 7 Click on the wall at the top of the view. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. click Tile. 6 Draw a rectangle around the upper-left corner of the floor plan. select Medium for Detail Level. 2 On the Window menu. Tile views in the drawing window 1 Close all project view drawings except Floor Plan: Level 1 and Wall Type Legend.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click . select the wall type 1 component. 338 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings .

Using Revision Tracking | 339 . unanticipated changes in construction conditions. For example. In this exercise. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. you use the Revisions command to open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. contractor inquiries. Using Revision Tracking. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. the revision is locked and issued to the field. When Issued is selected. if the active revision is number 1.The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 1 from the Wall Type Legend. 9 On the File menu. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. and enter Moved window and added second window to Living Room. 2 In the Revisions dialog box. Open m_Revisions. or changes in building material availability. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. click Open. 10 Proceed to the next lesson. click Close. 4 Click on the value for Description. Using Revision Tracking Revit Building provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. click the Training Files icon. Specify a revision numbering method 1 On the Settings menu. 6 Verify that Visible is selected. Click Yes when prompted to save the drawing. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. In general. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. If you select By Sheet. Using the table. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. Add a revision to the project 3 Click on the value for Release Date. 5 Verify that Issued is cleared. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog box. You can create a sequence of revisions. These changes can be due to owner requests. yet as concise as possible. click Revisions. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds.rvt located in the Metric folder. and enter a date. verify that By Project is selected for Numbering Method. When you use this option. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.

and click Save. and press ENTER.If Visible is not selected. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. The selected window is moved to the left 900 mm. In most instances. you make changes to the project floor plan.rvt. 340 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . select the window. m_Revisions-in progress. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. including revision number and revision date. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. click Save As. 8 On the File menu. 2 Double-click Level 1 to open it in the drawing area. Modify a window 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. 9 Navigate to your preferred directory. Sketching Revision Clouds. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. name the file m_Revisions-in progress. and expand Floor Plans. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. 4 Select the dimension value to the left of the window. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Revision clouds have read-only properties. 3 In the small empty room. enter 1200 mm. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. 7 Click OK. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. expand Views.

and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. click Save. 11 In the drawing area. 9 On the Design Bar. Using Revision Tracking | 341 . Revit Building is now in sketch mode. 7 Move the cursor to the right until the distance from the midpoint is 1800 mm. Add a revision cloud 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click near the windows you have changed. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 13 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. click Finish Sketch. click Modify to end the command.Add a window 5 Verify that the modified window is still selected in the drawing area. click Revision Cloud. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. 15 On the File menu.rvt. on the Edit toolbar. m_Revisions-in progress. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. Tagging Revision Clouds. 14 On the Design Bar. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 8 Click to place the second window. You can change the appearance of the cloud from the Settings menu. you load a revision tag into the project. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified windows. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. 12 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. and click 6 Select the midpoint of the casement window as the start point.

click Save. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. Create a sheet view 1 On the View menu. the cloud is tagged as number 1. Tag a revision cloud 7 On the Options Bar. Working with Revisions. you create additional revisions in the revision table. click to place the floor plan.rfa. and click OK. 5 In the Open dialog box. 342 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . 10 On the File menu. 5 Enter ZR to zoom to a specific region. you need to add one. dialog box. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. click New ➤ Sheet. and because the revision is the first in the project. 6 Draw a rectangle around the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. If the cursor is just inside the cloud.rvt. 2 On the Options Bar. Because you chose to number by project. clear Leader. you create a sheet view in your project. In the Tags dialog box. Add a revised view to a sheet 3 In the Project Browser. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. browse to Annotations\M_Revision Tag. A new sheet view is created in the project. and click Open. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. 3 In the Tags dialog box. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. m_Revisions-in progress. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. on which you place a revised view. under Floor Plans. verify that A0 Metric is selected. 6 In the Tags. click Tag. scroll down to Revision Clouds.Load a revision tag 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click OK. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud. and drag it onto the sheet view. 8 In the drawing area. 4 Click Load. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. select Level 1. 4 In the drawing area. You then issue a revision. 9 Click to place the tag. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. Working with Revisions In this exercise. click Tags.

Create additional revisions 10 Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. you can no longer modify it. click Revisions. 11 In the Revisions dialog box. You can continue to add revisions. Click Yes when prompted to save the drawing. clear Visible for each issued revision. On the Settings menu. 15 On the File menu. click New. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. You do this by issuing the revision. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. under Add.The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. On the Settings menu. you prevent further changes to the revision. enter a name for Issued to. 13 If you want to hide issued revisions in the drawing. Using Revision Tracking | 343 . NOTE After you issue a revision. Issue a revision 7 After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. 12 Enter the appropriate information for this revision. 8 In the Revisions dialog box. click Close. 9 Select Issued. and click OK. click Revisions. 14 Click OK.

344 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings .

For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. like a standard detail that you want to add to a library. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. In this tutorial. and metal studs. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. 345 . using detail components to represent materials like lumber. you also learn how to change the detail component display order and visibility settings in a detail to create depth and show varying levels of detail. you learn how to create details in Autodesk Revit Building.Detailing 12 In this tutorial. These components scale with the building model. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. plywood.

you detail the foundation sill of a small house. The callout view is a larger view of the area that you define in the section view with the callout. you create a callout view that references the foundation sill of the house. In order to detail from the building model. Modify the section view 1 In the Project Browser. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view.rvt located in the Metric folder. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes.Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. The callout defines the extents of the callout view. 346 | Chapter 12 Detailing . you trace over the building model geometry. Creating a Callout View In this exercise. You create the callout view by adding a callout to the section view. click the Training Files icon. add detail components. and double-click First Floor. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. Open m_Cape_House. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Open. The section line that you see in the floor plan indicates that a section view has been added to the project. In the callout view.

4 Select and move the blue grips of the interior end points of the section line so the section line is displayed as in the following illustration. click Modify and select the section line. 3 Click the break symbol to create a gap in the section line. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 347 . Blue grips and a break symbol display on the section line.2 On the Design Bar.

right-click in the Design Bar. and select the callout border. 7 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Add a callout to the section view to specify the callout view 5 On the Design Bar. and click the tab in the context menu. 6 Double-click the head of the section line to display the section view. 348 | Chapter 12 Detailing . 11 Select the grip near the callout head and move it to the bottom left side of the view as shown in the following illustration. select 1:5 for Scale. click Callout. click Modify. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. click Modify. ■ Reposition the callout head 10 On the Design Bar. 9 Add the callout by drawing a rectangle around the left side of the foundation: ■ Click in the section view where the upper left corner of the callout rectangle displays in the following illustration. The callout border and tag highlight and display blue grips. Click in the section view where the lower right corner displays. 8 On the Options Bar.

13 On the View menu. click Modify and double-click the callout head. 16 In the view.Display and modify the callout view 12 On the Design Bar. The callout view is displayed. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 349 . change the following instance parameters: ■ ■ Enter Section Detail @ Foundation Sill for View Name. Select Hidden Line for Model Graphics Style. select the First Floor level line. click View Properties. 14 In the Element Properties dialog box. Notice that the alignment of the level is locked to the site level. 15 Click OK.

They are also view specific. sub-flooring. siding. 350 | Chapter 12 Detailing . Detailing the View. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. and an anchor bolt. region objects. click Filled Region. Detailing the View In this exercise. m_Cape_House. TIP If you do not see the Filled Region command. Notice that the Design Bar is now in Sketch mode and the model geometry is grayed out. 3 In the Type Selector. you detail the view of the foundation sill. turn off the display of some of the Design Bar tabs. and insulation objects. 5 Trace the region representing the sloped grade using the following illustration for reference. Create a filled region that represents the sloped grade outside the foundation wall 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select Wide Lines. You start by adding a filled region that represents the sloped grade outside of the foundation wall.rvt. 2 On the Design Bar. click Lines.17 Proceed to the next exercise. which means that any detail components. TIP Enter SO on your keyboard to turn off snapping as you sketch. as well as detail lines. 4 On the Options Bar. select Chain and click . that you add to the view are visible only in this view. and then add detail components to the detail that represent lumber. Exact dimensions are not important.

9 In the Name dialog box. NOTE You may have to zoom out to view the earth fill pattern in the filled region. select EARTH. under Name and Pattern. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 351 . 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. 15 On the Design Bar. click in the Fill Pattern type parameter Value field. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. The earth fill pattern is displayed in the filled region.6 On the Design Bar. select <Invisible lines>. 13 On the Design Bar. click Modify and select the two lines shown in the following illustration. the pattern does not display. 12 Click OK three times. 11 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. enter Earth for Name. click Finish Sketch to complete the filled region. click Edit/New. If you are zoomed in too far. click Duplicate. click Region Properties. and click OK. 14 In the Type Selector.

TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the lumber.Add lumber detail components 16 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Type Selector.rfa. click Detail Component. 17 On the Options Bar. 19 At the bottom of the dialog box. select M_Dimension Lumber-Section 38X235. 352 | Chapter 12 Detailing . click . navigate to Detail Components\Structural\Wood in the Metric Library. select the following lumber components: ■ ■ ■ 38X140 38X235 38X286 20 Click Open. 22 Press the Spacebar to rotate the Lumber Section counter-clockwise. 18 In the Open dialog box. 23 Place the 38X235 Lumber component in the detail view as shown in the following illustration. select M_Dimension Lumber-Section.

24 Place a 38X235 lumber component as shown in the following illustration. 25 In the Type Selector. and place it in the detail view.Section: 38x140. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 353 . select M_Dimension Lumber.

Add a plywood detail component to represent the sub-flooring 26 On the Design Bar. 27 In the Type Selector. 28 Place the plywood component above the last 38X235 that you added as shown in the following illustration. 354 | Chapter 12 Detailing . click Detail Component. select M_Plywood : 25mm. Add a plywood detail component to the exterior wall face 29 Place another plywood component on the exterior face of the wall as shown in the following illustration. TIP You may need to use the Align tool to place the plywood component.

select m_anchorbolt and place it in the detail view as shown in the following illustration. ■ ■ 40 Click OK twice. and click to place the lap siding.30 On the Design Bar. Verify Detail Rotation is set to None. until enough lap siding displays to cover it. 36 In the Element Properties dialog box. select the plywood on the exterior face of the wall. Add an anchor bolt detail component 32 On the Design Bar. click Repeating Detail. 37 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Detail Component. and click OK. and click OK. Move the cursor up along the plywood component. click Edit/New. Select Inside. click Modify. When you place the repeating detail component. and click 31 In the Element Properties dialog box. 38 In the Name dialog box. . enter Lap Siding for Name. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 355 . 41 Add the lap siding to the plywood on the exterior face: ■ ■ Select the lower left corner of the plywood detail component. 35 On the Options Bar. 33 In the Type Selector. 39 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Duplicate. click . enter 19 mm for Thickness. change the following type parameters: ■ ■ Select m_lap siding for Detail. Verify Fill Available Space is selected for Layout. this parameter determines the appropriate spacing between the repeated components so that they fill the space that you select evenly. Add a lap siding to the exterior wall as a repeating detail component 34 On the Design Bar.

42 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Adding Detail Lines. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. meaning they display only in this view. 2 In the Type Selector. you add lines to your detail. they are view specific.rvt. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. If you need to make modifications to the lap siding after you place it. 3 Sketch detail lines to enclose the bottom end of the lap siding as shown in the following illustration. click Detail Lines. Like detail components. click Wide Lines. m_Cape_House. Select and move the blue grips on the repeating detail line to shorten or lengthen the lap siding. The lap siding is displayed along the plywood. click Modify and select the repeating lap siding detail component. on the Design Bar.NOTE You may need to move your cursor above the crop region of the detail view to place the lap siding along the entire length of the plywood. 356 | Chapter 12 Detailing .

and click OK. 9 Add two more detail lines as shown in the following illustration. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 357 . 7 In the Type Selector. 11 In the Type Selector. select Chain. Create a filled region that represents the15 mm gypsum board 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select As underlay for the Display Model instance parameter. select . select Medium Lines. 6 On the Design Bar. 8 Using the underlay inside wall face and floor as references. select Medium lines. click Filled Region. The model geometry that displays underneath the detail components and lines is grayed out. sketch a 20 x 100 mm baseboard. click View Properties. 12 On the Options Bar.4 On the View menu. click Detail Lines. 5 In the Element Properties dialog box. 13 Trace over the interior wall face as shown in the following illustration. and click .

click Finish Sketch to view the gypsum board. 17 In the Name dialog box. 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Region Properties. and click OK. 16 In the Type Properties dialog box. 18 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Duplicate. under Name and Pattern. 21 On the Design Bar.14 On the Design Bar. 20 Click OK three times. enter Plasterboard for Name. click Edit/New. 358 | Chapter 12 Detailing . click in the Fill pattern type parameter value field. 19 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. select Gypsum-Plaster.

you turn off the display of the model geometry. click Line Styles. select Medium Lines. 27 In the Element Properties dialog box. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Filled Region. 3 In the New Subcategory dialog box. 31 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. Near the end of this lesson. and click OK.Create a filled region that represents the foundation wall 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Concrete. click Finish Sketch to view the concrete filled region. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 359 . the region would be blank. you add a vapor barrier and insulation to the detail. 25 Trace a rectangle over the foundation wall. Add a vapor barrier 1 On the Settings menu. 26 On the Design Bar. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 In the Line Styles dialog box. click Duplicate. select . under Name and Pattern. Adding a Vapor Barrier and Insulation. 32 Click OK three times.rvt. under Modify Subcategories. 24 On the Options Bar. click Region Properties. 33 On the Design Bar. and click OK. m_Cape_House. enter Vapor Barrier for Name. enter Concrete for Name. If there were no filled region to represent the foundation walls. click in the Fill pattern type parameter value field. click New. click Edit/New. Adding a Vapor Barrier and Insulation In this exercise. 23 In the Type Selector. 28 In the Type Properties dialog box. 30 In the Type Properties dialog box. 29 In the Name dialog box.

Select Black for Line Color. 7 In the Type Selector. select Vapor Barrier. make the following changes to Vapor Barrier: ■ ■ ■ Select 3 for Line Weight/Projection. 11 On the Options Bar. 9 Click the right face of the interior wall to create a line as shown in the following illustration. 8 On the Options Bar. 360 | Chapter 12 Detailing . 12 Sketch the insulation: ■ ■ Click at the top and to the right of the exterior wall face underlay of the wall to specify the start point.4 Under Lines Styles. Add insulation 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 5 Click OK to complete the new line style. you add break lines to the detail. Adding Break Lines In this exercise. Select Dash for Line Pattern. enter 120 mm for Width and 65 mm for Offset to center. click and enter 28mm for Offset. click Detail Lines. Adding Break Lines. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. click Insulation. Move your cursor down to the top of the 38x140 and click to specify the endpoint.

click Detail Component. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 361 .rvt. 8 Place the break line approximately in the center of the floor as shown in the following illustration. 7 In the Type Selector. select M_Break Line.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. m_Cape_House. Add a break line to the top of the wall section 1 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Detail Component. Add a break line to the floor 6 On the Design Bar. 5 Select and move the crop boundary grips until the view displays as in the following illustration. 4 On the Design Bar. 2 In the Type Selector. 3 Place the break line at the top of the wall section as shown in the following image. and select the crop boundary of the detail view. verify that M_Break Line is selected.

select Do not display for Display model. click View Properties. When you turn the display model off. and click OK. NOTE You may need to drag the shape handles of the break line to resize it to the illustration. click and rotate the break line until it displays as shown in the following illustration. 10 On the Tools toolbar. and select the break line. 12 In the Element Properties dialog box. as shown in the following illustration. click Modify.9 On the Design Bar. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. 362 | Chapter 12 Detailing . Turn off the visibility of model components to view detail components only 11 On the View menu. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added previously.

click Text. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. m_Cape_House. 6 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. on the File menu. click to create a leader with two segments. Click again to set the location of the text box.13 Proceed to the next exercise. Enter the text. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. 2 On the Type Selector. you add text notes to complete the detail. Adding Text Notes. click Save As. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select 4 mm text for Text size. 4 Add the leaders and notes shown in the following illustration: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the detail to set the location of the arrow. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 363 . 3 On the Options Bar. 5 If you want to save your changes. Click again to set the elbow position of the leader.rvt.

Open the detail view 1 In the Project Browser. The section line that you see in the top right corner of the floor plan indicates that a section view that cuts through the kitchen sink and cabinet has been added to the project. or can display in front of or in back of specific components. A detail component can display in front or in back of all other components. click the Training Files icon. such as walls and windows. Changing Detail Component Order in a Detail View In this exercise. click Open.Changing Component Order and Visibility Settings in Detail Views In this lesson. you can set only doors in a detail view to display in fine detail. you learn to modify the display of detail components in your detail views. and double-click Basement. 364 | Chapter 12 Detailing . you change the order in which detail components in a detail view of a kitchen sink and cabinet display. For example. You also learn how to override line styles and detail level settings for each model element. Open c_Office_Building. display in coarse detail.rvt located in the Common folder. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you can arrange the order in which detail components display. expand Floor Plans. The filled regions in the detail section view do not overlap properly. expand Views (all). 2 Double-click the section line head to display the section view. Within a detail view. while other model elements. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.

behind the cabinet. 4 With the sink selected. on the Options Bar. and when it highlights. Changing Component Order and Visibility Settings in Detail Views | 365 . select it. on the Options Bar. click . The sink now displays as if it was in front of the cabinet detail component. click .Display the sink in front of the cabinet 3 Move your cursor over the kitchen sink detail component. The sink is now sent to the back of the drawing. Display the sink behind the cabinet 5 Select the sink and.

3 On the View menu. 2 On the Window menu. select Tile. double-click Level 1. Display the furniture in the basement view in halftone 4 On the View menu. you change the visibility settings of several views by overriding line styles. a cabinet. select Zoom ➤ Zoom In Region. Select the base cabinet and try the various depth options on the Options Bar. 6 Proceed to the next exercise. 5 Click in the window containing the Floor Plan: Basement view and draw a zoom box around the furniture as shown in the following illustration. 366 | Chapter 12 Detailing . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Changing Visibility Settings in a Detail View.There are three stacked detail components in this detail: a sink. select Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. Changing Visibility Settings in a Detail View In this exercise. and overriding detail level settings. using halftone. c_Office_Building. Open four different views 1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans.rvt. and a simple fill pattern.

click the Annotation Categories tab. 15 Clear the Visibility for Door tags. expand Floor Plans. 7 On the View menu. click the Model Categories tab. select Visibility/Graphics. Turn off door tags in the Level 1 Floor Plan 11 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. Changing Component Order and Visibility Settings in Detail Views | 367 . The furniture within this view is displayed in halftone. 12 On the View menu. select Visibility/Graphics.6 Maximize the window containing the Floor Plan: Basement view. 14 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box. and double-click Level 1. expand Views (all). and click Apply. The door tags are not displayed. scroll down to Furniture. 10 Click OK. select Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 13 On the View menu. 9 Under Visibility. and select Halftone. 16 Move the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box so you can view the floor plan.

and click Apply. Select Black for Line Color. All the walls in this view are displayed as coarse regardless of the settings in the View Properties dialog box. Select Solid for Line Pattern. 18 For Walls. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Override. click the Model Categories tab. 21 Click OK twice. The walls in this view display in a coarse level of detail while the rest of the floor plan is displayed in a fine level of detail. 368 | Chapter 12 Detailing .Display walls in coarse detail in the Level 1 Floor Plan 17 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box. click Override under Line Style Cut for Walls. select Coarse for Detail Level. Change the cut line style for walls in the view 19 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box. 20 In the Select Line Style dialog box. Select 8 for Line Weight. The cut line style of the walls is now significantly heavier.

2 In the New Drafting View dialog box. Creating a Detail in the Drafting View In this exercise. and expand Drafting Views. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. 4 In the Project Browser. you create a door detail in the new drafting view. named Door Detail. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Building or by importing details from an existing detail library. Select 1:5 for Scale. click Save As. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. enter the following: ■ ■ Enter Door Detail for Name. click the Training Files icon. is displayed in the Project Browser. 23 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. Creating a Detail in the Drafting View. The new drafting view. Creating a Drafting View In this exercise. click New ➤ Drafting View. and save the exercise file with a unique name. on the File menu. Open m_Drafting_views. click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 5 Proceed to the next exercise. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. The building model is no longer displayed in the drawing window because you have created a drafting view that is not associated with the building model. you create a door detail in this new drafting view. you create a drafting view that is not associated with a building model. Creating a Drafted Detail | 369 . Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. These details do not update with changes to the building model. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. After you create a drafting view.rvt located in the Metric folder. you learn how to create a drafted detail. expand Views (all). In the next exercise. 3 Click OK to create the new drafting view. Create the new drafting view 1 On View menu.22 If you want to save your changes.

TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. 5 Permanently dimension the door jamb sketch so that the dimension values match those in the following illustration.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select Wide Lines. m_Drafting_views. click Dimension. 4 On the Design Bar.rvt. When the dimension value displays in blue. Create a drafted door detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Detail Lines. right-click in the Design Bar. you can change its value by clicking Modify on the Design Bar and selecting one of the lines the dimension references. 370 | Chapter 12 Detailing . 3 Sketch the door jamb shown in the following illustration. You can also use the Rectangles sketching tool to create the basic shapes. 2 In the Type Selector. you can change it. TIP You may want to use the Chain option when you sketch the door jamb. and click the tab in the context menu. and then use the Split and Trim tools to complete the sketch. After you create a dimension.

click . 13 In the Type Properties dialog box. under Name. and click OK. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Drafted Detail | 371 . click Edit/New. click Snaps. enter Sand. 9 Turn off automatic snapping to facilitate sketching in close detail: ■ ■ On the Settings menu. click Lines. 17 Under Pattern Type. 16 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. On the Design Bar. 14 In the Name dialog box. 11 On the Design Bar.Create filled regions 6 You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. clear Length dimension snap increments. click for the Fill pattern type parameter. click Duplicate. and click OK 3 times. The detail with filled regions (the gypsum wall board with the sand drafting pattern) is displayed. click Finish Sketch. 12 In the Element Properties dialog box. verify Drafting is selected. 8 On the Options Bar. click Filled Region. Under Dimension Snaps. 20 In the Type Selector. 10 Sketch two 15 mm thick rectangles as shown. select Sand. 18 On the Design Bar. click Region Properties. click Detail Lines. 19 On the Design Bar. select Wide Lines. and click OK. 21 Sketch the 50 mm x 15 mm door trim as shown. 15 In the Type Properties dialog box.

click Dimension. Adjust witness lines 23 Select each door jamb dimension. 372 | Chapter 12 Detailing . 24 Drag the door jamb dimension controls to pull the dimensions away from the detail. and add 2 dimensions to the door trim. 25 Add an overall dimension of the door jamb.22 On the Design Bar.

28 Draw lines that represent the door as shown. 36 Press the Spacebar to rotate the Lumber counter-clockwise. 33 In the Type Properties dialog box. Select the desired dimensions. click . Creating a Drafted Detail | 373 . 34 In the Name dialog box. click Edit/New. click Detail Component. 35 In the Type Properties dialog box.Sketch a door 26 On the Design Bar. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the lumber. click Detail Lines. select M_Dimension Lumber 38X140. and click OK. enter 38 x 125. enter 125 for the Width type parameter. TIP You may find it helpful to temporarily hide the dimensions in the view when sketching the door. and on the View Control Bar. 31 On the Options Bar. 30 In the Type Selector. 37 Place the lumber component in the detail. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Duplicate. Add the dimensional lumber for the header 29 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click Hide Object from the context menu. select Medium Lines. 27 In the Type Selector. and click OK twice. click the Hide/Isolate command.

41 Add two break lines as shown. 374 | Chapter 12 Detailing . 40 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component.38 Stack another 38 x 125 directly above the one that you placed in the previous step to complete the header. select Break Line. TIP Rotate and move the bottom break line to adjust its masking element. Add two break lines 39 On the Design Bar.

click Modify to end the command. click to create a leader with two segments. 44 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. Creating a Drafted Detail | 375 . and click OK. Place the drafting view on a new sheet 45 On the View menu. verify that A0 metric is selected. expand Views. and expand Drafting Views. 47 In the Project Browser. click New ➤ Sheet. 48 Select Door Detail. 43 In the Options Bar. 49 Click to specify an insertion point. click Text. 50 On the Design Bar.Add text notes to complete the detail 42 On the Design Bar. and drag it onto the sheet. 46 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box.

enter the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Rail Detail for Name. under Layer/Level Colors. 6 At the bottom of the Import/Link dialog box. and then click Open. After you explode it.dwg from the Metric folder in the Training Files. click Import/Link ➤ DWG. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the detail. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog box. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. DGN. The detail is imported as an import symbol.rvt. Enter 5 for the Scale value. select New ➤ Drafting View.51 Proceed to the next exercise. Create a new drafting view 1 On the View menu. the DWG entities are converted into Revit Building elements. In order to modify it. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. Import a complete detail in DWG format 4 On the File menu. 5 In the Import/Link dialog box. you must explode it. 3 Click OK. Select Custom for Scale. DXF. 7 On the View menu. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View. 376 | Chapter 12 Detailing . select m_Rail_detail. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. m_Drafting_views. select Preserve colors. The detail that you import is in DWG format.

14 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Edit/New. press and hold CTRL. 10 If an error dialog box displays. click Modify. Creating a Drafted Detail | 377 . click Modify. 15 In the Color dialog box. and the text within the detail is converted to Revit Building text.Explode the imported detail 8 On the Design Bar. Change the text color to black and add text leaders 11 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Options Bar. click Delete Element(s). The lines of the detail are converted to detail lines. and then select the detail. and click Full Explode. click the button in the Color type parameter Value field. 9 Right-click. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. select black. and select all of the text blocks in the detail. click . The text is displayed as black after you click in the drawing area. The text retains the DWG layer color. and click OK 3 times.

Add leaders to the text notes 16 On the Design Bar. 18 Select and move the leader grips to position the leader as shown. 378 | Chapter 12 Detailing . Creating a Reference Callout. click Modify. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. 19 Add leaders to the remaining text notes to complete the detail as shown. 17 On the Options Bar. and select the bottom text note. MET STUD FRAMING. click . A leader is added to the text note.

The callout head displays the detail and sheet information (1/A101) because the referenced drafting view is already placed on this sheet. m_Drafting_views. click Modify. 3 On the Options Bar. it appears in the Reference other view list with the detail number and sheet number displayed after the view name. and select Drafting View: Door Detail (1/A101). 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 5 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble over the upper left door corner. expand Sections. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the door detail that you previously created. NOTE When a view has been placed on a sheet view. click Callout. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. and double-click the callout. The section view is displayed. and double-click Section 1. 4 Zoom in on the Level 1 doors.rvt. select Reference other view. Creating a Drafted Detail | 379 . 6 Select the callout. expand Views (all). and use the callout grips to move the callout head. Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. The door detail that you drafted previously is displayed. Display the reference view 7 On the Design Bar.

8 If you want to save your changes. close the exercise file without saving your changes. on the File menu. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Otherwise. click Save As. 380 | Chapter 12 Detailing .

Scheduling 13 In this tutorial. you learn how to create different types of schedules in your Autodesk Revit Building projects. 381 .

You begin by creating an instance schedule.Creating Type and Instance Schedules In this lesson. or you can group components of the same type into a single line item. you learn how to create type and instance schedules. creating an instance schedule. creating a type schedule. You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model. you create a window schedule for the building model shown below. or a schedule that lists every window in the building. When you schedule building components in Revit Building. 382 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . Creating a Window Schedule In this exercise. you can list each component as a separate line item.

5 Using the same process. 4 Under Available fields.Next. and click View. Creating Type and Instance Schedules | 383 . Open m_Schedules. you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. Finally. you change the window instance schedule to a window type schedule. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. select Comments and click Add. A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model. click the Training Files icon. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. under Category. click the Fields tab. Create a new window schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. or a schedule that lists the windows by window type. add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Height Level Type Mark Width 6 Under Scheduled fields. 2 In the New Schedule dialog box. right-click in the Design Bar. and click OK. click Open.rvt located in the Metric folder. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. select Windows. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. 7 Click OK. click Schedule/Quantities. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.

in large building models with many views. 384 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . click Close. 10 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog box. and double-click Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. expand Schedules/Quantities. However. click the Sorting/Grouping tab.Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 8 Select any cell in the first row of the window schedule and. 15 Select Type Mark for Sort by. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping. under Other. The window schedule is displayed. sorted by type mark. this can be a time-consuming process. 16 Click OK twice. on the Options Bar. 14 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 12 Right-click on the schedule. and click View Properties. 9 In the warning dialog box that is displayed. The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model. NOTE By clicking Show. 11 In the Project Browser. you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. click OK to search through relevant views of the building model. click Show.

Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 17 Right-click on the schedule. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule. on the File menu. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 385 . 19 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. you learn to add schedules and schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. you create a room schedule from the floor plan of a large building model. click Edit for the Sorting/Grouping instance parameter. The window type schedule is displayed. Creating a Room Schedule In this exercise. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams In this lesson. clear Itemize every instance. and click View Properties. click Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 20 Click OK twice. 21 If you want to save your changes. 22 Close the exercise file.

Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. Several rooms and room tags exist in the floor plan. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). 5 Under Available fields. click the Fields tab. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser. right-click in the Design Bar. select Number and click Add. select Rooms. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 3 In the New Schedule dialog box.rvt located in the Metric folder. Open m_Schedules. click the Training Files icon. 386 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . click Open. expand Floor Plans. click Schedule/Quantities. under Category. and click View. and click OK. and double-click flr 3 to make it the active view.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.

order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. click New. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 387 . The room Number is 1. 9 To the right of Header text. 10 Click OK. Next. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Tagged. you define the font for the schedule headers. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. next to Rows:. 8 Click the Appearance tab. add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Name Level Area 7 Under Scheduled fields. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet.6 Using the same process. select Bold to display the schedule headers in bold font. Add new rooms to the schedule 11 On the Options Bar. because the room is not tagged with a room tag.

None of the rooms have tags placed on them. and enter 30. double-click flr 3. 388 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . The second room is displayed at the bottom of the list and is numbered sequentially. add a second room. and enter Conference to change the room name.12 Using the same process. 15 Select 1 in the Number column for Room 1. and select Conference from the list. 14 Select Room in the Name column for Room 1. 13 Select Room in the Name column for Room 29. Add two room tags to the floor plan 16 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 17 Zoom in on the right side of the building.

select 29 Conference for Room. 19 On the Options Bar. and click to place the room tag. 23 In the Project Browser. The boundaries of the room highlight before you place the room tag. and click Drafting. select 30 Conference for Room. 22 Place the room tag in the small room across from the large conference room. and double-click Room Schedule to view the updated room rows. expand Schedules/Quantities.18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. right-click in the Design Bar. 20 Move your cursor into the large room in the upper right corner of the floor plan. TIP If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not active. click Room Tag. and verify that Horizontal is selected. 21 On the Options Bar. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 389 .

28 In the Project Browser. 25 On the Design Bar. click Room Tag. double-click flr 3. select Auto for Room. under Schedules/Quantities. 390 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . double-click Room Schedule to view the 11 rooms that you added to the schedule. 26 On the Options Bar. 27 Place the room tags as shown in the following illustration.Add eleven additional room tags 24 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans.

and click OK. under Identity Data. click Modify. press and hold CTRL. select Services for Name. The name in the room tag is now Circulation. 32 With the room tags selected. and select Circulation for Name. locate the room with an area of 92. double-click flr 3. and select the seven room tags shown in the following illustration. click . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 391 . and select the tags in the three remaining rooms named Room.11 square meters. select Office for Name. press and hold CTRL. 33 In the Element Properties dialog box. 31 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click . and zoom in on the room.Modify room tags 29 In the schedule. 34 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 36 In the Element Properties dialog box. 30 In the Project Browser. 35 With the room tags selected. and click OK.

and Wall Finish. select Rooms. 41 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. 46 Add information to the rows so that the schedule displays as shown in the following illustration. 38 In the New Schedule dialog box. Floor Finish. Enter Paint for Wall Finish. click the Key Name field. press and hold CTRL. click New to add a row to the schedule. Enter Carpet 1 for Floor Finish. click New twice to add two rows to the schedule. 39 Select Schedule keys. select Base Finish. 44 Using the same process. under Category. Define three new room styles 42 On the Options Bar. 43 In the new row. 40 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. and enter Std Office. under Available fields. click Schedule/Quantities. 45 On the Options Bar. and click OK.Add a schedule key 37 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Add. 392 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . enter the following information in the row: ■ ■ ■ Enter Vinyl for Base Finish.

and click OK. under Other. click Edit for Fields. under Schedules/Quantities. 50 In the Element Properties dialog box. double-click Room Schedule. click . and click OK. 53 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . and select the room tag in the large conference room (29) in the upper right corner of the floor plan. click Modify.Apply the new room styles to the room schedule 47 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 51 On the Design Bar. click Modify. under Available fields. View the room schedule 54 In the Project Browser. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 393 . and click Add. under Other. and select the room tags in the three offices (37. 39) in the lower right corner of the floor plan. 59 Click OK twice to update the schedule. 55 On the View menu. press and hold CTRL. 58 Change the order of the schedule as shown in the dialog box below. double-click flr 3. 57 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 48 On the Design Bar. select Room Style. select Exec Offices for Room Style. select Exec Offices for Room Style. 52 On the Options Bar. 56 Under Other. 38. click View Properties. 49 On the Options Bar.

select Services from the list in the Room Style column. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. Creating a Room Color Diagram. 394 | Chapter 13 Scheduling .60 For the rooms in the schedule that are named Services. 61 Proceed to the next exercise. you create a room color diagram based on the names of the rooms in the floor plan.

The rooms in the floor plan automatically change color. 4 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. click Edit Color Scheme. and click the color green. and select the color legend. Change the fill colors that are applied to the conference rooms 6 On the Design Bar.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and double-click flr 3. 7 On the Options Bar. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 395 . 2 Zoom out so you can view the entire building model. m_schedules. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the alert dialog box. 10 In the PANTONE® Color Picker. A legend displays at the tip of your cursor. click Color Fill. 9 In the Color dialog box. expand Floor Plans. click OK. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog box. 11 Click OK three times. The fill color in the rooms named Conference are displayed as green. Create a room color diagram 1 In the Project Browser. click the color button for Conference. under Views (all). click PANTONE. click Modify.rvt. scroll all the way to the left.

right-click in the Design Bar. 15 If you want to save your changes. You also learn how to create a furniture schedule that includes room name. The color diagram and legend reflect the changes that you made. 2 In the New Schedules dialog box. you learn how to schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Building components.Change the name of the single room named Room 12 In the Project Browser. and click View. click the Fields tab. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. graphics are displayed with imperial values. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 4 Under Available fields. select Walls. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click the Training Files icon. and click OK. double-click flr 3. click Schedule/Quantities. select Services for Room (10) in the Name column. Open c_Schedules_2.rvt located in the Common folder. select the following fields and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. double-click Room Schedule. select Project Units from the Settings menu and change the appropriate formats to metric. under Categories. and level. 14 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 13 In the Room Schedule. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. Room no longer displays in the key/legend. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. click Save As. number. NOTE Because the next two lessons use common files. Create a new wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. on the File menu. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. 396 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . To display graphics with metric values. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. 16 Close the exercise file. under Schedules/Quantities. click Open.

expand Schedules/Quantities. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes | 397 . add Assembly Code and Assembly Description to the schedule. click Edit for Fields.Schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes 6 In the Project Browser. under Other. 10 Click OK twice. The Assembly Code and Assembly Description fields display in the schedule. 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. 9 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. and click Properties to view the element properties of the wall schedule that you created. 7 Right-click Wall Schedule.

under Views (all).Interior Construction. and select C1010115 . expand C1010 . expand C .Brick Veneer w/ Stud.Partitions. 398 | Chapter 13 Scheduling .Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project within the schedule 11 In the wall schedule. 12 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog box.Partitions . All of the walls of this wall type are updated. 14 Click OK in the dialog box that explains that the change will be applied to all elements of the chosen type. 13 Click OK. and then click in the schedule. expand C1010100 . click in the Assembly code column in the first row of the schedule. Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project from the building model 15 In the Project Browser.Interiors. expand C10 . and double-click Level 1. expand Floor Plans.Fixed Partitions. and click .

click Edit/New. click in the Assembly Code field. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. and then click . Schedule building model components by level and room 23 In the Project Browser. and select C1010145 . 21 Click OK three times. under Schedules/Quantities.Drywall w/ Metal Stud. 17 On the Options Bar.16 Select one of the Interior . double-click Wall Schedule. 22 In the Project Browser. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes | 399 . expand C. double-click Furniture Schedule.5 1/2" Partition (1hr) walls. click . expand C1010100. expand C1010. under Identity Data. under Schedules/Quantities.Partitions . 20 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog box. expand C10. 19 In the Type Properties dialog box.

Change the appearance of the schedule 33 Zoom in on the schedule on the sheet.24 In the Project Browser. 32 Drag the furniture schedule from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 25 In the Element Properties dialog box. 34 Adjust the row length in the schedule by selecting and moving the blue grips that are displayed on the top of the schedule. 400 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . 31 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. select Room for Select available fields from. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : 30 x 42 Horizontal. click Sheet. Place the Furniture Schedule on a new drawing sheet 30 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Properties. 29 Click OK twice. right-click Furniture Schedule. 28 Select Furniture for Select available fields from. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 27 Add Room: Name and Room: Number to the schedule. and then add Level and Manufacturer to the schedule. click Edit for Fields. and click OK. under Other. and click to place it.

38 Close the exercise file. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 401 . on the File menu. These shared parameters can be added to any family. Creating a Multi-Category Schedule In this exercise. 37 If you want to save your changes.35 Split the schedule into multiple segments by clicking the blue break line that is displayed on the right border of the schedule. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Building multi-category schedules. 36 Select the blue crosses that are displayed in the center of each schedule segment to reposition the schedule segments as shown. and are defined and stored in an external file. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. The following exercise demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in pre-defined instance and type parameters either within family components or within the project template. and save the exercise file with a unique name. regardless of category. you create a multi-category schedule. ensuring consistency across families and projects. and creating a multi-category schedule. The new schedule segments are automatically placed to the right of the original schedule and are top aligned. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. adding the shared parameters to a family. click Save As.

and then generate the multi-category schedule. You store all of your hardware-related parameters within this group for use in the project. and assign Text for Type.You create shared parameters. Create a shared parameter file 1 On the File menu. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. click OK. click Shared Parameters. and click OK. click Create. The shared parameter file (TXT) is created. Click OK if the alert box indicates that the shared parameter file does not exist. click New. click New. verify that Hardware is selected for Parameter group. ID. make sure you save your shared parameter files in a location where other users can access it. 5 In the New Parameter Group dialog box. select Text for Type. 10 After you add the parameters. If you are working on a network. and click OK. enter a file name. Create a new parameter group to store individual parameters 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog box. Hinge. enter Closure for Name. 9 Add three additional parameters. and click Save. Shared parameters are saved to an external file. 402 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . under Groups. create a multi-category tag that you use to tag a simple floor plan. Create parameters in the Hardware group 6 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog box. add them to a door family. 2 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog box. 7 Under Parameters. enter Hardware. and Lock Set. 3 In the Save As dialog box.

select Instance. The parameters are displayed in the Family Types dialog box. select Shared parameter. click Family Types. click the Training Files icon. Enter Chrome for Hinge. ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Yale for Lock Set. 14 On the Design Bar. under Parameters. 21 Click OK. Enter 1 for ID. 17 In the Shared Parameters dialog box. 13 Open c_ Door. click Open. click Add. 23 On the File menu. and click OK. select ID. 12 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. You are now working in the Family Editor. 20 Assign the new parameters the following values by entering them in the corresponding Value field. The Family Types dialog box displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. 15 In the Family Types dialog box. 18 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. under Parameters. so that you can use it later in this exercise. and click OK.rfa located in the Common folder.Add the shared parameters to a family 11 On the File menu. Enter N/A for Closure. setting them as Type parameters. 19 Repeat the steps for the other parameters. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 403 . and click Select. 16 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 22 Save the file as NewDoor in an appropriate location. click Close to close the file.

31 Under Parameters. 36 On the Options Bar. the tag cannot attach to any component. select Filter parameter.rft in the Annotations folder. click Label. select Hardware. click . 28 In the Select Parameter dialog box. Use the multi-category tag in a project 40 On the File menu. 37 Draw a rectangle around the tag. click Close to close the file. click Add. 39 On the File menu. 35 On the Design Bar.e. 25 In the New dialog box. ID). click Select. Open.. 27 Click at the intersection of the reference planes in the drawing window to display the Select Parameter dialog box. select ID. 33 Click OK. 29 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. and click Open. under Parameter Group.Create a multi-category tag 24 On the File menu. 38 Save the file as HardwareTag in an appropriate location. click Lines. as shown. and click OK twice. NOTE If you do not specify a filter parameter for the tag. This option ensures that this tag attaches only to a component with that same filter parameter (i. 404 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. 34 Zoom in to the tag at the intersection of the reference planes.rvt located in the Common folder. select c_Hardware_Plan. 26 On Design Bar. 41 In the Open dialog box. and click Open. 32 In the Select Parameter dialog box. A multi-category tag must have at least one label with an external parameter set as a filter parameter. select Multi-Category Tag. 30 In the Shared Parameters dialog box.

add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ID Mark Type Family Closure Lock Set NOTE Do not be concerned with duplicate ID and Lock Set fields. Create a multi-category schedule 50 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 47 Click to place the tag. 44 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 48 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Multi-Category Tags for Category. Notice that the HardwareTag is reading the shared parameter that you created earlier and attached to the Door family. click Tag. 51 In the New Schedule dialog box. 43 Replace any existing doors by selecting them and changing their type to the NewDoor type that you just loaded. select Multi-Category from the list. Notice that you can highlight only those components that have the filter parameter that you set earlier to ID. 52 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. and load into the project the multi-category tag files HardwareTag. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 49 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box.rfa that you just created. click Schedule/Quantities. click Tag All Not Tagged to quickly tag all the components with the filter parameter. 46 Move your cursor into the drawing window.42 On the File menu. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 405 . and click OK. select the multi-category HardwareTag that you just loaded.rfa and NewDoor. 45 In the Type Selector. and click OK. 53 Click OK.

There are 11 doors of the following types on this level of the building model: ■ ■ ■ 5 . you create two schedules. 54 If you want to save your changes. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Creating a Level-Based Door Schedule with a Filter In this exercise.M_Single-Flush Vision: 915 x 2134 mm 3 . However.rvt located in the Metric folder. The floor plan is displayed. You use both filters and a formula to create the second schedule. all of the doors in the project would be scheduled. Using Formulas and Filters in Schedules In this lesson. click the Training Files icon. 406 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Save As. 55 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. expand Floor Plans. Create a new door schedule for level flr 3 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The second schedule that you create is a wall schedule that calculates the cost of the walls in the project. and double-click Level 3. click Schedule/Quantities.The multi-category schedule is displayed. expand Views (all).UK_Single-Flush: SO 1010 x 2410 mm If you created a standard door schedule. View the third floor of the building 1 In the Project Browser. The first schedule that you create is a level-based door schedule that uses a filter to exclude all of the doors that are not on floor three of the building model. you want to filter out all doors that are not on level 3 to include only the 11 doors listed above. on the File menu. click Open. Open m_First_Project-West_Wing. you create a level based door schedule.M_Single-Flush Vision: 864 x 2032 mm 3 . In the left pane of the Open dialog box. based on wall area.

5 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. click the Filter tab. Clear Itemize every instance to group the like door types into one row. 4 Click OK. 11 Under Field formatting. select Level. select the following fields. click the Fields tab. and specify the following values for Filter by: ■ ■ ■ Select Level in the first menu. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Sill Height Head Height Width Level 7 Click the Filter tab. 14 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. and it causes the schedule to include only the doors on Level 3. This filter checks each door in the project to see which level it is associated with. select Doors. 10 Under Fields. 6 Under Available fields.3 In the New Schedule dialog box. click Edit for Filter. Verify Schedule building components is selected. and click OK. enter Doors .Level 3. The schedule includes the count and type for only doors on floor 3. under Other. Verify New Construction is selected for Phase. 15 Click OK twice. and click View Properties. and select (none) for Filter. 12 Right-click the schedule. Hide the Level field in the schedule so it is used only to filter the doors that are not on level 3 and not included as a column in the schedule 9 Click the Formatting tab. Using Formulas and Filters in Schedules | 407 . 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. Under Name. Select Level 3 in the third menu. select Hidden Field. Select equals in the second menu. and specify the following options: ■ ■ Select Family and Type for Sort by. 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. The counts for the door types represent the door schedule for the entire model. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category.

Creating a Wall Schedule with Filters and a Formula In this exercise. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. 14 Since no cost has been assigned to these wall types. 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. click once so the schedule represents only the doors on Flr 3. click the Fields tab. 8 Clear Itemize every instance to group the like wall types into one row. select Area. Use the cost values in the following illustration. 13 Click OK. 3 Click OK. enter Cost/Sq. select Walls. 7 Select Family and Type for Sort by.rvt. 10 Under Fields. and then under Field Formatting. Verify New Construction is selected under Phase. m to more accurately represent the data. m_First_Project-West_Wing. Creating a Wall Schedule with Filters and a Formula. select the following fields. select Calculate totals so that the total area of the each type is calculated. Verify Schedule building components is selected. click Schedule/Quantities. 2 In the New Schedule dialog box. 11 Under Heading. Create a new schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The schedule is displayed. 9 Click the Formatting tab.16 On the Standard toolbar. 408 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . 5 Under Available fields. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Cost Area 6 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 12 Under Fields. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. enter a cost value for each type in the schedule. The wall type information for each wall is updated when you enter this data. you create a wall schedule that provides a total cost of all of the walls in the project based on the total square footage of each wall type. select Cost.

Scheduling Project Parameters | 409 . 23 Click Field Format. and click View Properties. you learn how to schedule project parameters. without the value it would have a unit of area. click Save As. 27 Select Grand totals to have the schedule display the sum of any row for which you selected Calculate totals on the Formatting tab. select Total Cost. 21 Under Fields. unlike shared parameters. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 25 Click OK. 22 Under Field formatting. and click OK twice. select Calculate totals to ensure that a total of all the walls is returned. you cannot use them to tag objects. Enter Area * Cost/(1 m^2) for Formula. click the Sorting/Grouping tab. under Other. 28 If you want to save your changes. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog box. The schedule is displayed. Select 2 decimal places for Rounding. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Total Cost for Name. Scheduling Project Parameters In this lesson. 16 In the Element Properties dialog box. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. m column. 20 Click the Formatting tab. This is because you did not select to calculate the totals for that field. on the File menu. click Edit for Fields. NOTE The /(1 m^2) in the formula is required to make the resulting value unitless. Project parameters are instance or type parameters that you can use to schedule information specific to the project that you are working with. They cannot be shared with other projects and. Verify that Number is selected for Type. Select Fixed for Units. 17 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 24 In the Format dialog box. 19 Click OK. click Calculated Value.Determine the total cost for each wall type by multiplying the total area of the wall by the cost per square foot 15 Right-click the schedule. Notice that there is no grand total displayed for the Cost/Sq. 29 Close the exercise file.

TIP If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not active. Occupant. click the Training Files icon. select Rooms to associate the Occupant parameter with the Room category. you create a room schedule for the following office floor plan that includes the project parameter. 7 Tag the rooms as shown in the following illustration.Creating a Room Schedule with Project Parameters In this exercise. or by entering it in the properties of the room tag. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Create a project parameter 1 On the Settings menu. 410 | Chapter 13 Scheduling .rvt located in the Metric folder. click Add to create the new parameter. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Room Tag. After you create the schedule. either by entering it directly. 5 Click OK. click Open. and click Drafting. click Project Parameters. right-click in the Design Bar. The new project parameter Occupant is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Project Parameter. Assign the new Occupant parameter to the project and create the room schedule 6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. you can add information to the Occupant column in the schedule. Open m_Office_2. 4 Click OK. Under Categories. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog box. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. You begin by adding the Occupant parameter to the project and creating the room schedule to include the Occupant parameter as a column in the schedule. Enter Occupant for Name.

select the following fields. and save the exercise file with a unique name. select Rooms to create a room schedule. 10 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. The Occupant field is displayed in the schedule. and click OK. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. Exporting Project Information with ODBC | 411 . Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. click Schedule/Quantities. 14 If you want to save your changes. under Categories. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Area Department Occupant 12 Click OK to generate the schedule. 13 Add names to the occupant field by entering them directly in the schedule or by entering them in the room tag properties. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. click the Fields tab. 11 Under Available fields. on the File menu. 9 In the New Schedule dialog box. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. 15 Close the exercise file. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database.8 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Save As.

One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. and some instance tables include a “RoomId” column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. click OK. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog box. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog box. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Building exports. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. 6 Click Finish. and open the database in Microsoft Access. 12 Click OK in the remaining dialog boxes. For example. Additionally. 1 On the File menu. click the Training Files icon. under Database Name. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 412 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . These parameters are exported as well and contain the ID of the key element. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. enter Revit_Project. 13 Close the exercise file. and click Next. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. 10 When the confirmation displays. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. and click OK to create the database. click Open. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. click OK in the dialog box. select the Microsoft Access driver (*mdb). Open c_Schedules_2. instance tables include a “TypeId” column containing the ID of the instance’s type. under Database. 3 Click New. 11 In the OBDC Microsoft Access Setup dialog box. Revit Building creates two tables for the following categories of elements: one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project (see below). Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. select a location for the database file. click the File Data Source tab. so that each table of elements includes an “Id” column. click Create. 5 Enter RevitDSN for the name of the DSN. 9 Under Directories. and click Next. in addition to the Id column. used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements.mdb for Database Name. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. 8 In the New Database dialog box.rvt located in the Common folder. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog box. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project.

Annotating and Dimensioning 14 In this tutorial. 413 . and how to annotate and dimension your Autodesk Revit Building projects. you learn how to change the base elevation of a project.

while Level 2 reads 4 m.rvt located in the Metric folder. Setting the Base Elevation of a House In this exercise. You accomplish this in Revit Building by defining levels as either project or shared levels. you can relocate the project at a base elevation of 1500 m and define the levels as shared so that Level 1 reads 1500 m. Shared levels report an elevation value relative to an origin that you establish when you relocate the project. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. if a project is built on a plateau at 1500 meters and Level 2 is 4 meters above the base elevation. For example. After you define the levels as shared and relocate the project. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. click Open. click the Training Files icon. if a project is built on a plateau at 1500 m and Level 2 is 4 m above the base elevation. 414 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . the elevation value of the second level of the house (4000 mm above Level 1) reports an elevation of 14000 mm. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. and not 1504 m. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at sea level.Setting the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. and not 4 m. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you relocate the base elevation of a small house from 0 m to 10000 m. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. Open m_simple_house. expand Elevations. and double-click South. expand Views (all). For example. Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser. Project levels report elevation as it relates to other levels in the project. Level 1 reads 1500 m. and Level 2 reads 1504 m. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it.

8 Click OK twice. enter 10000 mm.Shared. to better demonstrate how shared levels work. 3 On the Options Bar. By selecting the Level 1 line. 14 In the Type Selector. By entering 10000 mm in this step. 6 In the Name dialog box. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. enter Level . click Duplicate. you specify the new location of the project.2 Select the Level 1 line. The south elevation is displayed. 10 Select the Level 1 line. you specify the point from which you want to relocate the project. and you must create a new level type. and click OK. However. you would change the parameter for all the levels in the Project. you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. 5 In the Type Properties dialog box. 12 On the View menu. click Edit/New. If you did that now. click . 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. The elevation of the other levels remains the same. under Constraints. select Level : Level . and press ENTER. click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. 11 Move the cursor above the elevation line. only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time.Shared. The reported value of Level 2 changes to take the value of the global elevation into consideration. Setting the Base Elevation of a Project | 415 . Relocate the project 9 On the Tools menu. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box. 13 Select the Level 2 line. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. select Shared for Elevation Base. In order for Level 1 to report the global elevation after the project is relocated.

In this case. Dimensioning In this lesson. permanent dimensions are created automatically. as well as other views of the building model. there are two types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. under Elevations. and save the exercise file with a unique name. define the roof level as shared. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view. 16 Using the same method. click Save As. 416 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . although you must turn on their visibility to view them. In Revit Building.15 In the Project Browser. double-click North. so it reports an elevation of 18000 mm. on the File menu. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. except when you sketch profiles to create families. 17 If you want to save your changes. 18 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your designs.

Creating Dimensions In this exercise. and angular dimensions. Open m_Dimensions. Dimensioning | 417 . Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. move the cursor over the top straight wall on the floor plan. 4 Move the cursor over the wall at the very bottom of the view. select it. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. The different types of dimensions that you can add include aligned. multi-segmented. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Open. and when the centerline of the wall highlights. you learn how to create and modify different types of permanent dimensions. click the Training Files icon. linear. click Dimension. that you can add to your drawings.rvt located in the Metric folder. By default. 3 When the centerline of the wall highlights. Create permanent dimensions 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. radial. 2 Without making any changes on the Options Bar. dimensions are aligned and snap to wall centerlines. select it.

and click to set the location of the dimension. click Dimension. The dimension displays in the drawing.5 Move the cursor to the left. and click to place the dimension. 8 Dimension the four vertical walls: ■ ■ Select the four vertical wall segments sequentially. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way. Move the cursor below the lowest horizontal wall. The lock displays as locked. 6 Click the lock. Create multi-segmented dimensions 7 On the Design Bar. indicating that the dimension segments are not equal in length. In addition. indicating that you cannot change the distance between the referenced walls without first unlocking the dimension. an equal symbol with a slash through it is displayed. An unlocked lock symbol displays next to each dimension segment. outside of the wall. 418 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . A lock symbol that is unlocked displays next to it. indicating that the dimension can be modified.

9 Click the equal symbol to make all dimension segment lengths equal. Select the curved corner wall to display the radial dimension. click Dimension. indicating that the segments are now equal. Create a radial dimension 10 On the Design Bar. and the are dimensions permanent and constrained to each other. The slash no longer displays through the equal symbol. Move the cursor to the inside of the curved wall. click 12 Dimension the curved wall: ■ ■ . 11 On the Options Bar. Dimensioning | 419 . and click to place the dimension.

and place the dimension as shown in the following illustration. 420 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . 17 Dimension the curved wall again: ■ ■ Move your cursor over the inside face of the wall until it highlights. 18 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing window. click Modify. 14 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Design Bar. 16 On the Options Bar. select the dimension line of the radial dimension. Select the inside face of the wall. and zoom in around the curved wall. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. the default dimension option. The dimension is snapped to the wall center. click and select Wall faces for Prefer. click Dimension. and press DELETE.13 On the View menu.

and depends on the cursor tracking behavior. and then select the bottom point of the exterior face.You can now view the radial dimension within the floor plan. 22 Dimension the vertical wall at the top right in the floor plan: ■ ■ Select the top point on the exterior face of the wall. click . and click to place the dimension. click and verify that Wall faces is selected for Prefer. The dimension is always constrained to either the horizontal or vertical axis. Dimensioning | 421 . Create a linear dimension 21 On the Options Bar. 20 Dimension the slanted wall at the top right in the floor plan: ■ ■ Select the inside face of the slanted wall. Move your cursor to the right. Move your cursor to the left to size the dimension arc. Create an angular dimension 19 On the Options Bar. Notice that the Prefer and Pick options are no longer available on the Options Bar. You can override the cursor tracking by toggling with the spacebar. and then select the inside face of the vertical wall above it. The linear dimension tool has a more restricted selection filter so that you can select only points. and click to place the dimension. as shown in the following illustration.

you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall. 3 Move the cursor over the bottom wall. Controlling Witness Line Location. However. you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. 4 Alternate the cursor position over the inner and outer bottom wall face. Notice that only the wall faces highlight when you move the cursor over them. including the wall centerline. but do not select anything. m_Dimensions. For example. 24 Proceed to the next exercise. and press TAB repeatedly. click Modify. 2 On the Options Bar. a different wall selection choice highlights. Each time you press TAB. delete. When you place dimensions. 422 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning .23 On the Design Bar. verify that Wall faces is selected for Prefer. select it. Override dimension defaults 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you learn to add. and change the origin of dimension witness lines. 6 When the outside face of the wall highlights. you specify their origin on the Options Bar. where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. click Dimension. in some cases. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. for a multi-segmented dimension.rvt. Controlling Witness Line Location In this exercise. because the Prefer wall face option is selected instead of the Prefer wall centerline option. 5 Hover the cursor near the center of the bottom wall.

The dimension highlights and control boxes display on each witness line. 11 Select the dimension line shown in the following illustration. press TAB until the wall centerline highlights.7 Move the cursor over the middle horizontal wall. 8 Move the cursor to the top horizontal wall and select the exterior face. and select it. click Modify. Dimensioning | 423 . Edit dimension witness lines 10 On the Design Bar. 9 Place the dimension as shown in the following illustration.

The witness line moves to the inside wall face.12 Click once on the control box on the lowest witness line. 14 Move the cursor to the control box on the witness line at the top wall. 13 Click the control box again. but do not select it. The witness line moves to the wall centerline. 424 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning .

If you right-click the control box. m_Dimensions. The witness line is deleted. Modifying Dimension Properties In this exercise. a shortcut menu with different options is displayed. Change the type parameters of the floor plan dimensions 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. click in the drawing area away from the floor plan. you learn to modify the type parameters of dimensions. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and click Delete Witness Line.15 Right-click the control box. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. The full dimension string is displayed again. click Modify and select the dimension that you modified in the previous exercise. Modifying Dimension Properties. IMPORTANT Be careful to right-click the witness line and not the control box on the witness line. Dimensioning | 425 . 18 To end the editing command. 16 Right-click the remaining dimension line and click Edit Witness Lines. 17 Select the outside face of the top wall.

change the following type parameter values: ■ ■ Under Text. For example. on the File menu. 426 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . you learn to align components and lock their alignment to better work with them in your drawings. 6 On the Design Bar. when sketching walls. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. if two or more walls are colinear. click Modify. 4 In the Type Properties dialog box. enter 5 mm for the Text Size. allowing you to lock the alignment of the walls. A locked alignment is a constraint that is maintained if any of the components is moved or modified. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Working with Alignments and Constraints. alignments can be made and locked with minimal effort. or close the exercise file without saving your changes.2 On the Options Bar. click . Aligning components is similar to dimensioning components with a value of zero. then Up for Read Convention. 7 If you want to save your changes. click Save As. select Right. Under Text. As you create components. 5 Click OK twice. The dimensions update as shown in the following illustration. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box. Working with Alignments and Constraints In this exercise. a lock symbol immediately displays. click Edit/New.

click . Open m_Alignment. while the second component moves to complete the alignment. 3 Click the lock. The short horizontal wall on the left moves to align with the upper horizontal wall. Select the exterior face of the uppermost horizontal wall. indicating that the Align command is active.rvt located in the Metric folder. When you align two components. indicating that the alignment of the two walls is now locked. The cursor displays two arrows at its tip. 5 On the Options Bar. Align the three short horizontal walls below the two walls that you aligned 4 On the Tools toolbar. select Multiple Alignment. click the Training Files icon.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. and select Wall centerlines for Prefer. 6 Select the lower center wall to define it as the fixed wall to which the other walls will align. Dimensioning | 427 . The lock symbol displays as unlocked. the first component that you select remains fixed in position. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click 2 Align the walls: ■ ■ . Select the exterior face of the short horizontal wall on the left. The symbol changes to a closed lock. Align the two uppermost horizontal walls in the floor plan 1 On the Tools toolbar. click Open. indicating the two walls are not constrained to each other.

click Modify. 428 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . Do not lock this segment of the alignment. The wall on the left moves with the middle wall when you drag it. 8 Click the lock to lock the alignment of the walls.7 Select the short wall to the left. 10 On the Design Bar. 11 Select the middle wall and drag it downward. 9 Select the short horizontal wall on the right. but the wall on the right does not because the alignment between the two walls is not constrained (locked).

click . NOTE Because you are not aligning walls. click once to undo the move. 15 On the Options bar. Dimensioning | 429 . select Multiple Alignment. and then click the lock to align the wall with the middle wall.12 On the toolbar. Move the walls to verify the alignment. 13 Click the right wall. the Prefer wall faces or centerline option on the Options Bar does not apply to the doors. 16 Select the centerline of Door 4 on the upper right side of the model. Align doors in the floor plan 14 On the Tools toolbar.

20 Select Door 1 and lock it to constrain it to the other doors. click Modify and select one of the aligned doors.17 Select the centerline of Door 3 to the left. Door 3 aligns with Door 4. 21 On the Design Bar. 18 Click the lock to constrain the movement of the doors. 430 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . 19 Select Door 2 and lock it to constrain it Doors 3 and 4. 22 Slide the door up or down the wall and notice how the other doors move with it.

31 On the Tools toolbar. click Modify. indicating the constraint.Align the windows in the floor plan 23 On the Tools toolbar. on the Design Bar. clear Multiple Alignment. 24 On the Options Bar. A lock is displayed. 30 Click the lock to unlock it. 29 To view the constraint.28 to align the windows. The two windows align. 25 Select the window in the upper horizontal wall on the left side of the floor plan. The second window does not align because it is already constrained by a locked dimension. Dimensioning | 431 . 26 Select the window on the far left in the lower wall. 27 Select the far right window in the bottom wall. click . 28 Select the far right window in the top wall. and select the dimension between the second window and the right wall. click and repeat steps 27 .

m_Alignment. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. 432 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you learn how to automatically dimension a linear wall with openings (windows) by selecting the wall. You want to dimension the wall so that the width of each window displays in the dimension string. instead of selecting the wall and all the openings as dimension references. as shown in the following illustration.rvt.32 Align the remaining windows. 1 View the lower horizontal wall and notice that it includes five windows. Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions.

Select Entire Walls for Pick. 3 On the Options Bar. on the File menu. 5 Click OK. click Dimension. select Openings. 7 Move your cursor below the lower horizontal wall and click to add the dimension.2 On the Design Bar. 8 If you want to save your changes. Dimensioning | 433 . and then Widths. indicating the start and end of the dimension string. the windows). 4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog box. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings (in this case. and that the window widths are referenced in the overall dimension string. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click . 6 Select the lower horizontal wall. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Click Options. click Save As. Verify Wall centerlines is selected for Prefer. The two vertical walls highlight.

click the Training Files icon. Open c_Area. click Open. expand Floor Plans. click . click Dimension. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. tag doors and windows. You learn how to create angular dimensions and how to use an equality constraint to space the windows equally. Create angular dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. You learn how to: ■ ■ ■ ■ create angular dimensions.rvt located in the Common folder. rotate tags with building components. 434 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . you dimension the three windows on a floor plan. sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 4 Dimension the three windows near the east entrance by selecting the centerline of each window and placing the dimensions as shown in the following illustration. you how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Building.Annotating In this lesson. expand Views (all). Creating Angular Dimensions In this exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. and double-click Level 1.

2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.5 Click the equal sign associated with the angular dimension string to equally space the windows. Sequentially Tagging Rooms. Tag rooms sequentially 1 On the View menu. The enclosed area that represents the room highlights to indicate that it will be tagged. Sequentially Tagging Rooms In this exercise. you sequentially tag the rooms on the floor plan. Annotating | 435 .rvt. 6 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. and click to place the room tag. click Room Tag. c_Area. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

6 Place another room tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and select the room tag. Move the cursor into the room below the one previously tagged. enter 101. Click to place the new tag.4 On the Design Bar. ■ The second tag that you place displays the sequential number 102. 5 Zoom in on the tag number. indicating that it can be edited. click Room tag. 436 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . click Modify. The room tag number displays in blue. Sequential letters are also supported. 7 Continue to place room tags. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. and press ENTER. click it.

Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. Place a door with a door tag and leader 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. You learn how to add a door to the floor plan that includes a tag. to add a tag with a leader. click Door.8 Proceed to the next exercise. Annotating | 437 . 2 In the Type Selector. you learn how to place door and window tags. Add a door and tag 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. and to tag doors and windows that are not tagged. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and clear Leader. as shown in the following illustration. verify that Tag on placement is selected. and select Leader. Tagging Doors and Windows. select Tag on Placement to add a tag when you place the door in the floor plan. 6 On the Options Bar. click Door. 4 Place the door with the tag in the room at the bottom left. select a door type that you want to add to the floor plan. c_Area. 7 Place the door as shown in the following illustration.

15 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box.Place a door without a tag 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Tag All Not Tagged. 12 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. Tag the windows in the floor plan 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The door is tagged with a tag and leader. under Category. 16 Under Leader. Tag a door after placing it 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. clear Tag on placement. and then click OK. click Door. 438 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . All of the windows that were not tagged are now tagged. select Window Tags. select Create. click Tag All Not Tagged. 10 Place the door below Door 6. Notice that the door is placed without a tag. clear Create. 9 On the Options Bar. 13 Under Leader. verify that Door Tags is selected for Category. and click OK.

and save the exercise file with a unique name.17 If you want to save your changes. or close the exercise file without saving your changes. on the File menu. click Save As. Annotating | 439 .

440 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning .

441 . More specifically. how to control fill pattern colors. and how to use plan regions within floor plans and reflected ceiling plans. you learn to create and customize views of building information models.Viewing 15 In this tutorial. you learn how to change the visibility of detail components. You learn how to access and create building model views and how to change the visibility of building components and annotation within views.

you learn how to access different views of the building model. sections.Viewing a Building Model In this lesson. Both hidden lines and window tags display in the east elevation view. The Project Browser is displayed by default between the Design Bar and the drawing area. expand Views (all). In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Open.rvt located in the Metric folder. click . You create elevations. and learn how to control the visibility of building components and annotation within them. 442 | Chapter 15 Viewing . TIP If the Project Browser does not display. and three-dimensional (3D) views. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. including elevation and three-dimensional views. The current file name is displayed in the Project Browser title bar. expand Elevations. A new view displays a wireframe view of the east elevation view of the building model. scroll down and click the Training Files icon. you learn to create and customize user-defined views of a building information model. and double-click East. Open m_Viewing_Exercise. on the Standard toolbar. Open an elevation view of the building model 1 On the left side of the drawing area. 2 In the Project Browser. Exploring the Building Model In this exercise. You also learn how to control the visibility of different building components and annotation within building model views. locate the Project Browser.

This change is applied only in this elevation view. 6 Select Include categories from all disciplines in the list above. scroll down and clear Window Tags. This change is applied only to the active view. click Visibility/Graphics. Viewing a Building Model | 443 . This hides the lines that show through to the exterior of the elevation view. The 3D view is displayed in a new viewing window. The east elevation view displays with hidden lines. click Model Graphics Style. and click Hidden Line. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides for Elevation: East dialog box. 8 Click OK. Create a 3D view of the building model 9 On the View toolbar.Display the elevation view with hidden lines 3 On the View Control Bar. 7 Under Visibility. click . The window tags are no longer displayed in this view. Notice that window tags continue to display in the view. click the Annotation Categories tab. the east elevation. The default name of the view is {3D}. Turn off the display of window tags in the elevation view 4 On the View menu.

13 Press and hold CTRL. and expand 3D Views. click to reorient the view. double-click My 3D View. click X to close the view. The view follows the movement of the cursor. expand Views (all). 14 View the Dynamic View dialog box in the lower left corner of the screen. 16 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. 444 | Chapter 15 Viewing . under 3D Views. 19 In the Project Browser. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. 11 Move the cursor to the drawing window and notice that it now displays as a hand This means you are in pan mode. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. you can enable zoom mode by rolling the middle wheel. Notice that the view continues to display with hidden lines and no window tags. 18 In the upper right corner of the viewing window. and notice that the cursor displays as a magnifying glass This indicates that you are in zoom mode. Notice that the view name is updated in the title bar of the viewing window and in the Project Browser. and spin the building model by clicking the appropriate button in this dialog box. 12 Pan the view by clicking and dragging the cursor in the drawing area. . Save the current 3D view 15 In the Project Browser. right-click {3D}. you can enable pan mode by pressing and holding the middle wheel button while moving the mouse. and click OK.10 On the View toolbar. You can pan. and click Rename. enter My 3D View. 17 In the Rename View dialog box. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera. . zoom.

expand Views (all). After you specify the second point (the view target). and click View. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt.Creating a Perspective View with a Camera In this exercise. eye height. m_Viewing_Exercise. outside of the dimension lines. and double-click Level 1. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. the new view named 3D View 1 is displayed by default in a perspective view. Specify the second point in one of the rooms in the building. right-click in the Design Bar. and distance from the target. click Camera. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. you create a perspective view of the building model with a camera. Create the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. Cameras define the eye point. expand Floor Plans. as shown in the following illustration. Viewing a Building Model | 445 . 3 Add the camera to the view by specifying two points: one for the camera position and the other for the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point in the top right corner of the drawing.

Change the camera projection settings 6 On the View menu.4 Select the blue grips that display on the crop region of the view and move them to resize the view so the view includes the entire building model. Move the cursor up. click the Walkthrough tab located at the bottom of the dialog box. down. Press and hold the left mouse button. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. 9 To move the camera forward and backward in the view: ■ ■ ■ Click Forward/Back and move the cursor into the perspective view. 5 On the View menu. Press and hold the left mouse button. 446 | Chapter 15 Viewing . and sideways to see how the view changes. 8 To move the camera eye position higher or lower: ■ ■ ■ Click Dolly and move the cursor into the perspective view. Move the cursor up and down in the view to move the cursor forward and backward. click Dynamically Modify View. You can use the walkthrough controls in this dialog box to move the camera position and change the view. 7 In the Dynamic View dialog box.

and target 12 On the Window menu. click Tile. Move the cursor side to side in the view to rotate the view. You may need to reposition the view with the other controls. 11 Adjust the view as shown in the following illustration. Four views of the model display in the drawing area.10 To rotate the camera around the target: ■ ■ ■ Click Turn and move the cursor into the perspective view. 13 On the View menu. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. Change the camera position. height. Press and hold the left mouse button. Viewing a Building Model | 447 .

and move it to another location. under Floor Plans. 448 | Chapter 15 Viewing . select the camera target point (the magenta grip). click 3D View 1. 15 In the Project Browser. The border of the window that contains the Level 1 view highlights. under 3D Views. The camera and the view direction of the camera are displayed in the appropriate views. and click Show Camera. 16 Right-click.14 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. 17 In My 3D View.

under Camera. In the Element Properties dialog box.3D View 1 should update immediately after you move the target point of the camera. click to create a new 3D view. ■ 3D View 1 immediately updates to show the change. and click Shading. 20 On the View Control Bar. 21 Rotate the view as shown in the following illustration. 18 Change the target and eye elevation of the camera by modifying its properties: ■ ■ Select the camera in My 3D View. right-click. click Model Graphics Style. enter 15000 for Eye Elevation and 1700 for Target Elevation. Click OK. Use a section box to clip the model 19 On the View toolbar. Viewing a Building Model | 449 . TIP The updated view depends on the location of the camera before you change the elevation values. and click Properties.

select Section Box. as shown in the following illustration. under Extents. 24 Click the section box. 25 Select and move the lower right grip on the section box closer to the model. A section box is displayed around the model.22 On the View menu. 23 In the Element Properties dialog box. A rotation tool is also displayed. 450 | Chapter 15 Viewing . click View Properties. and click OK. The section box highlights and grips are displayed on its faces.

expand Floor Plans. Sketch a section line in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. Viewing a Building Model | 451 . m_Viewing_Exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Creating a Section View In this exercise. and maximize this view. 27 Proceed to the next exercise.26 Click and hold the rotation tool and rotate the section box around the model. double-click Level 1. Creating a Section View. you create a section view by sketching a section line in a plan view.

expand Sections (Callout 1). 6 Select the section view. double-click the section head. 7 In the Go To View dialog box. 4 On the Design Bar. right-click. View the section 5 To view the section. 8 Select the section line. and drag the section depth grip below the middle horizontal wall as shown in the following illustration. 3 Click to the left of the left wall of the building model. and click Open View. and double-click Section 1. The box represents the extents of the section view as well as the viewing direction of the section. or in the Project Browser.2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. NOTE Fill pattern is dependent on the zoom ratio. click Section. 452 | Chapter 15 Viewing . You may need to zoom closer to the walls in order to see the fill pattern. select Floor Plan: Level 1. and then click to the right of the lower right wall to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. and click Find Referring Views. Notice a dashed green box with blue grips is displayed on the section line. click Modify.

you learn to create an elevation view in a project by adding an elevation symbol to a plan view. double-click Level 1. m_Viewing_Exercise.9 On the Design Bar. 14 On the Design Bar. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Notice the change in the view direction. Add an elevation symbol 1 In the Project Browser. Control arrows are displayed near the section tag. Viewing a Building Model | 453 .rvt. and select and move the section depth grip under the lower wall. double-click Level 1. click Modify. An elevation symbol displays at the end of the cursor. Creating Elevation Views In this exercise. click Modify. 10 Double-click the section head to display the section view. Notice the change in section depth. 13 Click the control arrows to flip the section view. Change the view direction of the section 11 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. 15 Double-click the section head to display the section view. 12 Select the section line. click Elevation. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating Elevation Views.

Notice that the elevation symbol arrow points to the nearest wall as you move through the building model.b. The check mark in the right box indicates the current elevation view. The elevation is named Elevation 1 . The elevation symbol is displayed with four check boxes. 7 In the Project Browser. 8 Select the center of the elevation symbol. double-click Elevation 1 . under Floor Plans. 5 On the Design Bar. under Elevations. Make sure the elevation symbol is pointing towards the lobby doors. 9 Select the box shown in the following illustration to add a new elevation view.a. move the cursor around the building model.a by default. and click. double-click Level 1. click Modify. View the elevation 6 To view the new elevation. place the cursor inside the building facing the lobby entrance. You may need to adjust your zoom settings to see the elevation symbol. Elevation 1 . Do not select the arrow. 4 To create an elevation view of the building lobby. Elevation 1 . 10 In the Project Browser. indicating the possible elevation views that you can create.3 Without clicking in the drawing area. 454 | Chapter 15 Viewing .b. double-click the elevation symbol arrow.

Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material In this exercise. you learn to control the fill pattern color of a material and set the coarse scale fill pattern color of a wall type. You change the color of the cut and surface patterns in the brick material assigned to the exterior wall in the building model. and the insulation color to pink. This includes walls. such as the one below. a shade of gray. In addition. and applies to phasing override materials as well. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Save As. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors | 455 . 12 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. on the File menu. such as Brick on CMU. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors In this lesson.11 If you want to save your changes. This means that in views with a coarse level of detail. you can choose the wall fill color for a wall type. you can set the color of the coarse scale fill pattern for wall types. and other families. you can set the fill pattern color for the brick to red. where each layer is assigned a different material. You can control the fill pattern color of the cut and surface patterns for objects that obtain their fill pattern definition from materials. roofs. For example. you learn to control the fill pattern colors of a material. floors. in a compound wall. in this case.

5 In the Color dialog box. 3 In the Materials dialog box. Open c_Showroom. Each layer is designated by the material settings of the layer. and double-click Wall/Floor Join . expand Sections (Section Head . select red. click Color. click Open. The surface pattern of the brick is black.Brick for Name. and double-click 3D.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 2 On the Settings menu.rvt located in the Common folder. View the surface pattern of the exterior brick walls 6 In the Project Browser under Views. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. A color is assigned to both the Surface Pattern and Cut Pattern options in the dialog box. 456 | Chapter 15 Viewing . select Masonry .Level 3.Filled). Change the color of the brick cut pattern for the exterior walls 1 In the Project Browser. click Materials. scroll down and click the Training Files icon. 7 Zoom in on the brick pattern of the exterior walls. 4 Under Cut Pattern. Notice the different fill patterns assigned to each layer within the floor and wall structure. The brick cut pattern is displayed as red. and click OK twice. expand Views (all). expand 3D Views.

10 Under Surface Pattern. You change the coarse scale fill pattern from the default color of black to a shade of gray for a wall type. expand Views (all). select white. The walls in the floor plan that you work with are displayed with a gray fill pattern when displayed in a view with a coarse level of detail. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and click OK twice. click Color. c_Showroom. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 11 In the Color dialog box. and double-click Level 1. select Masonry . View the detail level setting of the view 1 In the Project Browser. Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type In this exercise. Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type. click Materials. expand Floor Plans. 9 In the Materials dialog box.Change the brick surface pattern from black to white 8 On the Settings menu.Brick for Name. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors | 457 . you learn to set the coarse scale fill pattern color for a wall type. The surface pattern of the brick is now white.rvt. The floor plan in the view is displayed in the Coarse level of detail as indicated by the Detail Level icon on the View Control Bar.

4 In the Type Properties dialog box. 7 In the Fill Patterns dialog box under Name. select a shade of gray. and click . and save the exercise file with a unique name. on the File menu. right-click. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box. including the current view. 5 In the Color dialog box. By default. 11 Zoom in on the arced wall. select Solid fill. The wall type is displayed as solid gray within any view where the Detail Level is set to Coarse. View the arced wall in fine detail 9 In the Project Browser. click Save As. under Graphics. 10 On the View Control Bar. 13 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and click OK three times. under Graphics. click Modify. and click Properties. and click Fine.Change coarse scale fill pattern color of the arced wall 2 Select the south arced wall. the Coarse Scale Fill Color parameter (under Graphics) is set to black and the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern is set to none. click Detail Level. 8 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. click in the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern parameter value field. Notice that the surface pattern and color of the brick wall are not applied because the detail level is set to Fine. 458 | Chapter 15 Viewing . click Edit/New. 12 If you want to save your changes. double-click Level 2. and click OK. click the button in the Coarse Scale Fill Color value field.

the plan regions cannot overlap each other. If you create more than one plan region in a file. Because the stepped portion of the walls in the building model is above the cut plane height in the Level 1 floor plan view.Creating a View Plan Region In this lesson. although they may have coincident edges. line type. refer to the online Help for more information. you work with a split-level building model that requires a different view range than the rest of the view. and you cannot control their visibility. you create a plan region in the Level 1 floor plan of the following building model. Creating a View Plan Region | 459 . Plan regions are closed sketches that you can create in floor plan and reflected ceiling plan (RCP) views only. you can display the stepped portion of the walls in the Level 1 floor plan. it does not display in the Level 1 floor plan. or pattern. If you are not familiar with view ranges in Revit Building. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan In this exercise. By creating a plan region in the view with a different cut plane height. Plan regions do not work with linked Revit Building files. line color.

Open m_Plan_Region. View the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. Add a plan region to view the stepped portion of the model 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. so you can view the height of the walls and windows. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. the south elevation is also displayed. right-click in the Design Bar. click Open. and double-click Level 1. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.rvt located in the Metric folder. scroll down and click the Training Files icon.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. expand Floor Plans. The cut plane height of the view range for this view is 1200 mm. expand Views (all). In the following illustration. 460 | Chapter 15 Viewing . and click View. The stepped portion of the project walls and windows are not displayed because the cut plane does not intersect any of the model geometry above this height. click Plan Region.

select Parent View’s Level (Level 1) for Cut plane. click Finish Sketch. Press ESC to end the command. 5 Select the red dashed line. and the view depth plane. As the cursor moves across it. right-click. the top and bottom clip planes. On the Options Bar. 9 Click Apply. view range. click Lines. 4 Move the cursor across the area where you sketched the plan region. and then click OK twice. The Level 1 floor plan should display as shown in the following illustration. 8 Because the top clip plane value cannot be set lower than the cut plane.Plan regions have a single property. The plan region is no longer visible. This means that the plan region view is going to cut all geometry at 2800 mm above Level 1. click Modify. ■ ■ ■ Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the top left. click Edit for View Range. 10 On the Design Bar. the plan region is displayed as a red dashed rectangle. sketch the plan region using the blue tick marks for guidance: ■ On the Design Bar. enter 4000 for the Top Offset. ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and enter 2800 for the Cut plane Offset. Creating a View Plan Region | 461 . under Extents. you specify that the level used to define each plane (cut plane. as it is displayed with hidden lines in this view. By selecting Parent View’s Level. 7 In the View Range dialog box. You use the view range property to control cut plane. and click Properties. top and bottom clip planes. Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the bottom right. click . and view depth) in the view range is the same as the level used to define the corresponding plane in the parent view. 3 In the Level 1 view. 6 In the Element Properties dialog box. that is similar to the view range for plan views.

on the File menu. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 12 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 11 If you want to save your changes. 462 | Chapter 15 Viewing .The following illustration demonstrates how the level 1 floor plan view is being viewed with the plan region. click Save As.

463 . billboards. and to create walkthroughs of your building information model. you learn to use the AccuRender® Radiosity and Raytrace features in Autodesk Revit Building to create rendered interior and exterior views of your building information model. and posters. to place and render decals to create signs.Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs 16 In this tutorial. AccuRender is the rendering engine incorporated into Revit Building that is used to produce rendered views.

you: ■ ■ ■ change the texture of the brick material applied to the exterior walls of the building. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model In this exercise. change the material of the front terrace of the building from the default material to asphalt. and then raytrace the view to produce the final rendered exterior view. and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes. You work with a building model that already has material applied to it. define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions on the front curtain wall. When you complete these changes. You learn to create and apply materials to a building model. you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a building model and render it with the AccuRender Raytrace feature. In this exercise. add realistic three-dimensional trees to the building site. 464 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . you select a scene that defines the model environment. You also learn to create a new material and apply it to a building component. you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. you raytrace a region of the building that includes the exterior wall. After you create the perspective view. the floor. and create the perspective view that you want to render.Rendering an Exterior View In this lesson.

Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 3 On the Options Bar. View the finish material of the exterior walls 1 Verify that the 3D view of the townhouse building model is displayed. under Construction. and click Edit/New. right-click in the Design Bar. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 6 Click Cancel three times to return to the 3D view of the building model without making any changes to the exterior finish at this time. click Edit for Structure. Verify that the material defined for the exterior finish layer (Layer 1) of the building model is Masonry . and click the tab in the context menu. click . 4 In the Element Properties dialog box.Heavyweight block is displayed for Type. Open m_Cohouse.Cavity Wall . click Wall. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. verify that Co-house . TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar.Brick.rvt located in the Metric folder. Rendering an Exterior View | 465 . 5 In the Type Properties dialog box. click the Training Files icon. click Open.

TIP If you do not select the curtain wall mullion on the first selection. click Materials. 10 In the left pane of the Material Library dialog box. 19 Click OK four times. click next to Texture to display the Material Library. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. click next to Texture to display the Material Library. click Materials.Asphalt. under Name. select Carib. click Edit/New. expand Metals. 21 In the Materials dialog box. and click Aluminum.Running. 8 In the Materials dialog box. 28 Select one of the curtain wall mullions on the exterior face of the building. and click 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. verify that Floor : Floor 1 displays in the Type Selector. 11 Under Name. click Modify. and click . enter Aluminum. 466 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . select the curtain wall mullion again. 16 In the Type Properties dialog box. under _accurender. 24 In the Material Library. 14 On the Options Bar. under _accurender. click Edit for Structure. You can view the new brick texture when you raytrace a region of the building in a later step. A preview of the brick texture that is currently assigned to the walls is displayed in the right pane of the Material Library. 18 In the Materials dialog box. under Name. select Masonry .Brick. expand Masonry and click Brick. Polished and click OK. click Duplicate. 9 Under AccuRender. 27 On the Design Bar. select Polished.Plain.Change the brick texture of the exterior wall finish material 7 On the Settings menu.200mm. under Construction. for Layer 2. 22 In the New Material dialog box. 12 Click OK twice. 26 Click OK twice. click in the Material field that contains Default Floor. 25 Under Name. Change the material of the terrace from the default material to asphalt 13 On the Design Bar. select Site . press TAB to cycle your selection through different building model components. 23 Under AccuRender. click Modify and select the terrace in front of the building. under Name. . When Curtain Wall Mullions: Rectangular Mullion displays in the Status Bar at the bottom of the screen. Define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions 20 On the Settings menu.

and curtain wall mullions to which you made material changes. producing a photorealistic effect. verify that New is selected. Raytrace a region of the building to view the material changes that you made 34 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. click . floor. floor. 36 In the Scene Selection dialog box. and then click 32 In the Materials dialog box. 35 Move the cursor over the building model. Polished. This completes the changes in materials and textures that you make for the building model. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Region Raytrace. select Aluminum. click in the Material field. click No. under Materials and Finishes. and click OK. and draw the rectangular region shown in the following illustration. . The portion of the building that you selected is raytraced and the materials that you changed and applied to the exterior walls.29 On the Options Bar. Make sure the region includes the exterior walls. click Edit/New. select Exterior under Type. Rendering an Exterior View | 467 . 33 Click OK three times. and curtain wall mullions are rendered (this takes a few moments). 37 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene. under Name. 31 In the Type Properties dialog box.

Add red maple trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click 1st Flr. 468 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 39 Proceed to the next exercise. In a later exercise. Adding Trees to the Site. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. the leaves of the trees display as indicated by the season and location specified in the render scene settings. you place two different types of trees on the building site. when you render an exterior view of the model.rvt. expand Views (all). m_Cohouse. click Display Model to end the Region Raytrace command and redisplay the building model in hidden line wireframe. Cnst. expand Floor Plans.38 On the Design Bar. Adding Trees to the Site In this exercise.

select M_Tree . 4 In the Type Selector. Available tree types are listed in the Type Selector by their Latin names. click Site Component. and click to place a tree. right-click in the Design Bar.9 Meters. 5 Move the cursor to a location on the building site. and click Site.Deciduous : Acer Rubrum .2 Zoom out so you can easily view the area surrounding the building model. Rendering an Exterior View | 469 . 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. The tree that you selected in this step is a red maple. Continue to place trees until you have added several red maples to the building site as shown in the following illustration. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed.

17 Press ESC to end tree placement. click Edit/New. enter Black Oak. 14 In the Type Properties dialog box. under accurender. 13 Under Name. 10 In the Name dialog box. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. m_Cohouse. and place two black oak trees. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. 12 In the Plant Library. select Black Oak for Type Comments. under Identity Data. 15 Under Other. Black. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. 16 Move the cursor to the building site. and click OK. and add it to the site 6 On the Design Bar. select any of the deciduous trees. click in the Value field for Plant Name. The black oak is shorter than the red maple trees that you added to the site.rvt. select Oak.Create a new type of tree. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 7 In the Type Selector. 470 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. click Modify. as shown in the following illustration. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. Creating a Perspective View. and click OK twice. and click Deciduous. click Duplicate. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. and then click display the Plant Library. and click Site Component. enter 7000mm for Plant Height. and click OK. under Other. to . expand Trees and Shrubs.

3 Select and move the crop boundary grips until the perspective view displays as in the following illustration.Place a camera in the first floor view 1 With the 1st Flr. Specify the second point in front of the building facade to define the target point of the camera. The new perspective view is displayed. Rendering an Exterior View | 471 . Cnst. click Camera. on the View tab of the Design Bar. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point on the site facing the building to position the camera. view open.

right-click 3D View 1 (the default perspective view name).Modify the camera position and back clipping plane in the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under Views (all). 6 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration. The red triangle represents the FOV (field of vision) angle and the back clipping plane of the view. The camera position is displayed in the 1st Flr. 5 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. double-click 1st Flr. expand 3D Views. Cnst. view. Cnst. 472 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click Show Camera.

and click Rename. and environment settings that you use to render the view. double-click Exterior. you select a scene and specify time. m_Cohouse.7 In the Project Browser.rvt. place. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View In this exercise. Rendering an Exterior View | 473 . date. You must define a scene because this is the first time settings are being applied to this view. lighting. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. under 3D Views. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and click OK. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. enter Exterior. right-click 3D View 1. 8 In the Rename View dialog box.

enter 10 (October) for Month and 5 for Day. 6 Select By Date. 474 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Time. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. click OK to accept the existing scene (Scene 1).Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. click Settings. under Scene Settings. 7 Under Date. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to adjust the minutes precisely. 4 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. 8 Under Time. 5 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog box. and drag the slider to set the time to 2:30 PM. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog box. and click Sun. click the Solar Angles tab.

26 On the Design Bar. and select Boston. Rendering an Exterior View | 475 . under Scene Settings. Rye. under Scene Settings. click Raytrace. click Image Size. 21 Click OK twice.00 (many clouds. 16 In the Environment dialog box.9 Click the Place tab. click . 28 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene. MA. under Background Color. 23 Under Raytrace Settings. and click OK. The Ground Plane tab displays. 25 Enter 150 for Resolution. 17 Under Advanced. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. 12 Click the Settings Tab. Dark. 20 In the Name list. click No. and enter bo. This setting produces a level of cloudiness in the sky that ranges from 0 (no clouds) to 1. 18 Click Material. select Autumn for Plant Season. 19 In the Material Library. USA. 15 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. 27 On the Options Bar. 13 Enter .) 14 Click OK. click Environment. select Ground Plane. under _accurender. Render the perspective view 24 On the Design Bar. The rendered exterior perspective view is displayed.20 for Cloudiness. and click OK. 22 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. select Grass. select Good for Quality. 11 Scroll down. 10 Click in the Cities list. click Site.

and double-click Exterior to display the rendered view of the townhouse that you saved. and finally. use both Radiosity and Raytracing to render the view. 476 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 33 Proceed to the next lesson. The rendered view is saved in the project and can be accessed from the Project Browser. define the view and render scene settings. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Redisplay the rendered view 31 In the Project Browser under Views (all). on the File menu.Save the rendered view 29 On the Design Bar. you add two RPC people to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. Adding RPC People In this exercise. Rendering an Interior View. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. you add ArchVision realpeople (RPC people) to the floor plan of the second floor. 30 On the Design Bar. click Save As. 32 If you want to save this exercise. you render an interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. click Capture Rendering. RPC people are represented by a circle in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. click Display Model to end rendering and redisplay the wireframe perspective view of the building model. expand Renderings. To create the rendered scene.

3 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. and then move the cursor to rotate her so she is facing up and to the right (northeast). Open second floor plan to display the interior scene that you will render 1 In the Project Browser under Views (all). select Rotate after placement.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Component. m_Cohouse. select M_RPC Female: Cathy. Cnst.6 to select and place M_RPC Male: Alex to the right of Cathy and facing up and to the left (northwest). 4 In the Type Selector. Rendering an Interior View | 477 . expand Floor Plans.rvt. 6 Click to place Cathy to the right of the sofa and below the table. 2 Zoom in on the left side of the living room as shown. 5 On the Options Bar. and double-click 2nd Flr. 7 Repeat steps 4 .

rvt. click Camera. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point on the floor plan facing the table and RPC people to place the camera. Creating the Interior Perspective View. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. 478 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Specify the target point of the camera in front of the corner of the table. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar.8 Proceed to the next exercise.

double-click 2nd Flr. 4 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration. 3 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 5 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. but you must adjust the field of vision and far clipping plane to display more of the view.The interior perspective is displayed. Rendering an Interior View | 479 . double-click 3D View 1 to redisplay the interior perspective view. Cnst.

and click Rename. 480 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click OK. and click OK. under Extents. 8 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. 7 In the Crop Region Size dialog box. and click OK. 14 On the Design Bar. Grips are displayed on the section box. and select the section box. right-click 3D View 1. click Modify. enter Interior. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 10 On the View toolbar. click to display the 3D view of the building model. click View Properties. click the dimensions for Size. select Section Box. enter 178 mm for Height.Resize the perspective view 6 On the Options Bar. 9 In the Rename View dialog box. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. A section box is displayed around the building model. under Size. 11 On the View menu. enter 229 mm for Width. 12 On the View menu. click Shading to view the effects of the section box when you add it.

rvt. you reduce the rendering time. By limiting the geometry. under 3D Views. Display the interior perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. This process allows you to limit the geometry that will be rendered when you create a rendering of your interior view. Creating a New Render Scene In this exercise. and environment settings used to render the view. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click Interior to display the interior perspective view. place. Rendering an Interior View | 481 . Creating a New Render Scene. you create a render scene to specify the time. date.15 Select and move the section box grips until only the room that you added RPC people to and that you want to render is visible. m_Cohouse.

3 In the Scene Selection dialog box. select {3D}. 6 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog box. and click OK. USA.Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. click Environment. 482 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . select Ground Plane. and click Sun. The Ground Plane tab displays. and click OK. 16 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. and enter Interior Scene for Name. 5 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box.rvt. Rye. 4 Under Type. When you define daylights for the curtain wall panels. 10 Click the Place tab. such as windows and doors. select Interior. click Settings. you define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall and render the view. select Grass. and click Save. you allow sunlight to pass through the panels when you render the view. 22 Click OK twice. under Scene Settings. Time. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View In this exercise. 13 Click the Settings tab. Define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall 1 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. m_Cohouse. You can select families with transparent materials. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. under Scene Settings. and select Boston. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. 19 Click Material. under Background Color. 14 Click Save. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. click OK. Dark. under accurender. enter 6 (June) for Month and 6 for Day. 8 Under Date. MA. as daylight sources. 9 Under Time. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. under Use View’s Section Box. and enter bo. 11 Click in the Cities list. click Site. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. 7 Select By Date. 18 Under Advanced. and drag the slider to set the time to 8:30 PM. 24 Under Scene Settings. 21 In the Name list. 23 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to precisely adjust the minutes. 12 Scroll down. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 17 In the Environment dialog box. click the Solar Angles tab. The 3D view of the building model with the section box is displayed. 20 In the Material Library. specify a file location and name for the scene settings. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. select Summer for Plant Season. 15 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog box. double-click {3D}. on the Main tab. select New.

which can take several minutes. begins. and click The raytraced perspective view is displayed and now includes the RPC people. 5 On the Design Bar. Light bounce is calculated for each individual light. click OK. Render the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. select Medium (150 dpi) for Resolution. click Daylights. The RPC people do not display in the view until you raytrace them in the next steps. click Raytrace. Rendering an Interior View | 483 . Curtain Wall 1). When radiate completes. 8 On the Options Bar. The radiosity process.2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. . the following rendered view is displayed. 6 In the Radiosity Information dialog box. 3 Select the curtain wall on the second floor (Walls: Curtain Wall. click Radiate. double-click Interior. 7 On the Design Bar.

you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building model in Autodesk Revit Building. You learned to use both the Radiosity and Raytracing features included in the AccuRender render engine. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shaded or Shaded with Edges AccuRender (Raytrace) IMPORTANT If you record your walkthrough AVI with the AccuRender display option. 484 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. you must select or define a scene. on the File menu. you can record the walkthrough by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player independent of your Revit Building software. Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. The walkthrough path is a spline. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. elevation. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. 10 Close the exercise file. you rendered an exterior and an interior view.9 If you want to save your changes. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. but you can also define it in a 3D. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. or section view. Usually you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. click Save As. which is the path that a camera will follow through your building model. In a plan view. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough.

expand Views (all). Open c_Townhouse. click Walkthrough. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and change unit formats as desired. click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. proceeds through the dining room. expand Floor Plans. 3 On the Options Bar. or the first key frame. If you prefer to use Metric values. and double-click 1st Floor. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 485 . and click to specify the start point. NOTE Some Imperial values are used by default in this exercise. click Settings ➤ Project Units. click the Training Files icon. and ends in the far corner of the living room. of the walkthrough. verify that Perspective is selected to create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. and click the tab in the context menu. 5 Specify four additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown in the following illustration. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. The floor plan of the first floor of the townhouse is displayed.rvt located in the Common folder. right-click in the Design Bar.You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse.

and select the crop boundary. 11 Under Change. 9 On the Options Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog box. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser under Views (all). 8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. If it is not. enter 16" for Width and 9" for Height. 486 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and double-click Walkthrough 1. click the dimensions for Size to change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. 12 On the View menu. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size.6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. select the crop boundary. The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. expand Walkthroughs. on the Options Bar. click . verify Field of view is selected. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown in the following illustration. and click OK.

enter 1 for Frame. 17 Click . and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). proceed to the next exercise. 14 Click . press ESC. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. The walkthrough plays. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 16 On the Options Bar. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position.rvt. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of 300 frames in the walkthrough. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 487 . The current display is wireframe with hidden lines.13 On the Options Bar. click Edit Walkthrough. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. c_Townhouse. 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog box. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. and click OK.

and click OK. select Path for Controls. 2 On the Options Bar. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. clear Far Clip Active. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box. 6 On the Options Bar. click .Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. under Extents. You can move any camera target or key frame position. 5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). 488 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . double-click 1st Floor. click Edit Walkthrough. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown in the following illustration. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room.

click Export ➤ AVI. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system for Compressor. reducing the size of the image. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. double-click Walkthrough 1. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walk-through from the location that you specified in step 3. shaded with edges. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. The AVI is recorded. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. to play the walkthrough. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 In the Save As dialog box. Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Video Compression dialog box. click Edit Walkthrough. and click OK. under Walkthroughs. shaded. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. and click Save. 8 If you want to save this exercise. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI.rvt. c_Townhouse. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. without opening Autodesk Revit Building.7 Click the third key frame position. 3 Under Output Length. select <Shading> for Display mode. perhaps to 6” wide x 4” height. specify 10 for Frames per Second. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. When you export the walkthrough. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Save As. and drag it to the location shown in the following illustration. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. or with AccuRender raytracing. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 489 . Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. If you are unsure of what option to use. hidden line. specifying the number of frames. 9 On the Options Bar. 1 On the File menu. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. on the File menu. 4 Under Format. Recording the Walkthrough.

490 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

length. and Section Boxes." In Revit Building. For the realistic approach. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. an outside reviewer. Using the pre-built building model. 491 . To express texture beyond material specifics. There remain many options in the software that do not quantify specific dimensions so much as they explain the subjective complexity of the work. In this tutorial. the Linework Tool. Co-house. and details. A majority of tools in Autodesk Revit Building are intended to describe number. and line quality without the measurement of its thickness is to transcend "building" and to recognize the "architecture. you learn various methods of effectively communicating your design intent to your audience by creating presentation views. there are several options for expressing the architecture. In this series of exercises. you learn several graphic techniques using these above mentioned tools to create an "analytique." The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. or the client. you explore the stylistic approach. They include the Accurender® Plug-in for Rendering. elevations. Whether the audience is the general contractor. you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views. tutorials on the Accurender features of Revit Building can be found under Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs. There are two directions you can choose when organizing presentation graphics: realism and stylistics.Presentation Views 17 In this tutorial. a consultant. type. The architect's primary goal in documentation is to communicate the intent of the design. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. Advanced Model Graphics. and other quantifiable elements within the context of contract documents. sections.

In the left pane of the Open dialog box. expand Views (all). change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation. and place the plan on a dark background for contrast. Open m_Cohouse. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. you create a copy of the plan. In order for the floor plan to fit into the analytique. click Open. Cnst. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. 492 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views .rvt located in the Metric folder. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. and click Duplicate. you create a presentation floor plan.Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. expand Floor Plans. right-click 2nd Flr. click the Training Files icon.

rvt. UP Text. dimensions. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Modify visibility/graphics 4 On the View menu. 3 In the Rename View dialog box.2 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. click the Scale control and select 1: 100. click Visibility/Graphics. this represents the view getting smaller. click Save As. elevations. Down Arrow. and click Save. 8 Click OK. Modify view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the frame. Notice that no annotations display in this view. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. and Up Arrow. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique | 493 . 7 Under Visibility. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. This turns off the visibility of all tags. navigate to the folder of your choice. and click Rename. expand the Stairs category. 11 In the Save As directory. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. and click OK. 10 On the File menu. and clear DOWN Text. sections. and so on in this view. 5 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box. Using Advanced Model Graphics. click the Annotation Categories tab. Cnst.

Within a Project. The higher the number.rvt. modify. 7 Select Boston. 494 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Time and Place. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. click . 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. MA. Under Shadows Properties. you can specify one place where the project resides within the world. select Cast Shadows. you can create. select By Date. and click OK. 2 On the View Control Bar. double-click it in the Project Browser. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. The Shadow intensity dictates the darkness of the shadow display. USA for City. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. and delete multiple locations in order to analyze a single prototype. The Sun and Shadows Settings are shared with Accurender and can also be used when rendering. specify the following: ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. click for Place. click the Place tab. At that place. 5 Under Sunlight Settings. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box are applied only to the active view. ■ ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. under Sunlight Settings. NOTE Shadows can be cast in all view styles except Wireframe. and click Advanced Model Graphics. specify 35 for Shadow.Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. Under Intensity. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. the darker the shadows. 6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog box.

Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet. 15 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. under Sun and Shadows Settings.NOTE For this step. 10 Click OK. and click OK. Cnst. you can enter any city you wish. click OK. . Turn off the ground plane shadows 12 On the View Control Bar. 11 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. select Ground Plane and select 1st Flr. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique | 495 . most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen depending on the settings that you choose. Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. for At Level. clear Ground Plane. 14 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. under Sunlight Settings. specify 10/27/2004 for Date and 1:00:00 PM for Time. click OK. and click Advanced Model Graphics. click Save. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. 9 Under Sunlight Settings. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. be aware that if you enter a different city. 16 On the File menu. click This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. 13 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. however.

4 In the Views dialog box. and click View. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. Notice the blank sheet is portrait oriented. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. right-click the Design Bar. click Sheet. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown.Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Arch Portrait. and click Add View to Sheet. and click to place it. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. The viewport displays at the tip of the cursor. click Modify. and click OK. 6 On the Design Bar. 496 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . 7 Zoom in around the viewport. and notice a view title displays. click Add View. TIP If the View tab is not available.

and click OK. 14 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Edit/New.Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique | 497 . 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. To accomplish this. click OK. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. 9 On the Options Bar. under Graphics. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. click Duplicate. enter Presentation. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. click . 13 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK. Notice the viewport no longer displays a view title. For this analytique. select No for Show Title. 12 In the Name dialog box.

click Filled Region. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 17 In the Type Selector. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. 18 On the Options Bar. If necessary. 19 On the Options Bar. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. fill properties. 20 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. and click Activate View. This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. and the boundary of the region. and draw a rectangle around the view as shown. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. click . select Invisible Lines. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. click . 498 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views .Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. and select Chain.

and click OK. click OK. select Solid Fill. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Edit/New. click the Fill Pattern value and the arrow that displays within it. select the entire chain (use TAB ) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. and click OK. you create an elevation and add it to the Presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. 28 In the Element Properties dialog box. 33 On the File menu. enter Solid Black. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click Properties. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. and click Deactivate View. 29 On the Design Bar. click Region Properties. and click OK.TIP If you have difficulty sketching using invisible lines. enter Presentation for Sheet Name. Name the sheet 31 Right-click the edge of the sheet. under Identity Data. 24 In the Name dialog box. click Duplicate. 34 Proceed with the next lesson. When you are finished drawing the chain. 25 In the Type Properties dialog box. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique. 26 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. under Graphics. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. 21 On the Design Bar. click Save. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique | 499 . 23 In the Type Properties dialog box. 27 In the Type Properties dialog box. under Name. and click OK. click Finish Sketch. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. 30 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. scroll down.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. right-click South. 500 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . and click Duplicate.rvt.Preparing the Elevation View for the Analytique In this exercise. expand Elevations. under Views (all). A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser.

5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. 8 Click OK. specify 35 for Shadow. under Elevations. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. By changing the angle of the sun. click Duplicate. and click Rename. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. 12 Under Intensity. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. and click OK. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. scroll down. 11 Under Shadow Properties. 6 Under Visibility. Apply advanced model graphics 9 On the View Control Bar. 14 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. expand the Doors category. on the Model Categories tab. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. specify 2:30:00 PM for Time. right-click Copy of South. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique | 501 . scroll up. verify that Hidden Line is the selected Style.2 In the Project Browser. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box are applied only to the active view. 3 In the Rename View dialog box. and click OK. under Visibility. click . 15 In the Name dialog box. expand the Walls category. 7 Click the Annotation Categories tab. click Visibility/Graphics. under Sunlight Settings. enter Presentation South Elevation. click OK. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 On the View menu. 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. and click OK. and clear Elevation Swing. select Cast Shadows. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. 13 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. and click Advanced Model Graphics. and clear Surface Pattern.

click Save. and double-click A105 . under Views (all).Presentation.rvt. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 502 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . Add view to sheet 1 In the Project Browser. expand Sheets. Adding a Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet. you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. 19 Proceed with the next exercise. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane.18 On the File menu. 3 In the Views dialog box. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. Adding a Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. click Add View. and click Add View to Sheet. 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown.

Notice the view title no longer displays. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique | 503 . 5 In the Type Selector.Notice the viewport displays a view title. select Viewport: Presentation.

504 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . click Modify. you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique. You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. Adding Section Views to the Analytique. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. 9 Proceed with the next lesson. click Save. 7 On the Design Bar.6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. 8 On the File menu.

The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). Adjust the controls to modify the extents. under Floor Plans.Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. 4 Add the section shown below. click Section. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. Cnst. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. double-click 1st Flr.rvt. select 1: 100 for Scale. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 505 . TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. and use the flip arrows if necessary. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.

To accomplish this. Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. you will create a callout around the building model components within the section view. select 1: 100 for Scale. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Section 2 is added to the building model. expand Sections (Callout 1). 7 On the Options Bar. 8 Draw a callout around all the building model components within the section view as shown. this view needs to be rotated 180 degrees. click Callout. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so it is readily identifiable. and double-click Section 2. To fit correctly in the analytique. 506 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views .

click Visibility/Graphics. under Sections (Callout 1). click Modify. enter Presentation Section 2. right-click Callout of Section 2. 16 Under Visibility. click the Model Categories tab. double-click Presentation Section 2. scroll up. 10 In the Project Browser. expand the Walls category. TIP You can also open the callout in the Project Browser by double-clicking Callout of Section 2 under Sections (Callout 1). expand the Doors category. 12 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. under Sections (Callout 1). Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 507 . 11 In the Rename View dialog box. and click OK. scroll down. and clear Surface Pattern. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box.Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. 15 Under Visibility. and clear Elevation Swing. Modify Visibility/Graphic Overrides 13 On the View menu.

clear Crop Region Visible. Hide the crop boundary 20 Select the crop boundary. 23 On the File menu. and click OK. click . under Extents.17 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Ceilings Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 18 Click the Annotation Categories tab. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Save. 24 Proceed with the next exercise. Notice the crop region no longer displays. 508 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . 19 Click OK. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. 21 On the Options Bar. and clear Show annotation categories in this view.

Under Intensity. under Sections (Callout 1). specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. In the steps that follow.rvt. select Relative to View. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. Under Shadows Properties. and click Advanced Model Graphics. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. 5 In the Name dialog box. you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. select Directly. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. and click OK. and click OK. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. Notice that the shadows displayed do not offer much contrast. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 509 . double-click Presentation Section 2. open the Project Browser and. select Cast Shadows. you create a new Sun and Shadow setting in order to make a presentation view with more contrast. Notice the shadows on the view provide more contrast and a sense of depth. Click Apply.Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. TIP You may need to move the dialog box off to the side in order to see the view. specify an Altitude of 70 degrees. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings. under Sunlight Settings. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. click Apply. In addition. specify 35 for Shadow. 2 On the View Control Bar. click Duplicate. click . m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.

Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180 degrees. 11 Proceed with the next exercise. select Override Silhouettes. Notice application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. You can modify this line style by selecting Line Styles from the Settings menu. was added to this dataset for training purposes.TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. NOTE The line style. Apply silhouette edges 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. and click OK. under Silhouette Edges. Silhouette Edges. 9 Under Silhouette Edges. click Save. 10 On the File menu. TIP You can also use the linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. 510 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views .

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 6 On the Design Bar. 3 In the Views dialog box. and click Add View to Sheet.Presentation. click Modify. and click to place the selected view. 5 In the Type Selector. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt. The view title no longer displays. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. double-click A105 . under Sheets (all). Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 511 . 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown. select Section: Presentation Section 2. Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. select Viewport: Presentation. click Add View.

and either enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. 9 On the Edit toolbar. click . 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. To rotate an object. you accomplish this by rotating the callout within the section view. Using a clock as a reference.Notice the section needs to be rotated 180 degrees. and enter 180 to specify the number of degrees of rotation. you click to specify the start radius. Rotate the callout view 7 In the Project Browser. move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. 512 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . double-click Section 2. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. In the steps that follow. under Sections (Callout 1). 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. and press ENTER.

the callout rotates 180 degrees. Notice that the extents need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 513 . under Sheets (all).Presentation. double-click A105 . Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser.After you enter the rotation value and press Enter. 12 Drag the callout extents until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown. Notice the Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180 degrees and now needs to be repositioned.

After applying the view template to a new section view. click Modify. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. 15 On the Design Bar.14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. 514 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . 16 On the File menu. Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. and drag it up and to the left as shown. click Save. Working with a Presentation View Template. you create a view template for presentation views in order to reduce repetitive work while creating subsequent views.

3 In the New View Template dialog box. and click Duplicate. and click OK. double-click Presentation Section 2. 2 On the View menu. right-click Section 1. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 515 . and click Rename. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. enter Presentation. right-click Copy of Section 1. enter Presentation Section 1. Now. Apply presentation view template 8 On the View menu. 6 In the Project Browser. click Apply View Template. under Sections (Type 1). under Sections (Callout 1). under Sections (Type 1). 4 In the View Templates dialog box. click Save as View Template.rvt. click OK. you can simply apply the presentation view template. 7 In the Rename View dialog box.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. and click OK. Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser.

under Graphics. 15 Right-click the viewport. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. 18 Right-click the viewport. 516 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . and click Activate View. select Viewport: Presentation. 12 In the Views dialog box. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 17 In the Element Properties dialog box. double-click A105 . under Sheets (all). and click Add View to Sheet. 16 On the View menu. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. select 90 degrees Counterclockwise for View Rotation on Sheet.Presentation. Notice the furniture. click Add View. and click OK. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. and click Deactivate View. and click OK. annotations. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. 14 In the Type Selector.9 In the Select View Template dialog box. select Presentation. click View Properties. select Section: Presentation Section 1. and elevation swings no longer display. lighting fixtures. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet.

Working in a Callout Analytique. such as a tracery window or column capital. In this exercise. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 517 . Working in a Callout Analytique Traditional analytiques typically contain a detail.20 On the File menu. click Save. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. 21 Proceed with the next exercise.

under Sections (Type 1). under Sections (Callout 1). and click OK. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. and modify the extents and the callout head location as shown. double-click Section 1. 518 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . enter Presentation Callout. click Modify. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. and click Rename. 5 In the Rename View dialog box. click Callout. right-click Callout of Section 1.rvt. After you add the callout. 4 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select the callout.

Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 519 . under Sections (Callout 1). 7 Select the crop boundary and adjust the bottom so that there is a small gap as shown. 8 Right-click. under Extents. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. and click OK.6 In the Project Browser. and click View Properties. clear Crop Region Visible. double-click Presentation Callout. 9 In the Element Properties dialog box.

double-click A105 . click View Properties. specify a value of 22 for Scale Value 1.Add callout to presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. 520 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views .Presentation. 19 Right-click the callout presentation view. and click OK. and click Deactivate View. select Viewport: Presentation. click Modify. Modify presentation callout on sheet 16 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. select Section: Presentation Callout. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 12 In the Views dialog box. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. under Sheets (all). 17 On the View menu. 14 In the Type Selector. click Add View. and click Activate View. and move it into the position shown below. select Custom for View Scale. and click Add View to Sheet. 15 On the Design Bar.

click Region Properties. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. and click OK. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. When finished. 24 In the Element Properties dialog box. In the steps that follow. 25 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as it is a stylized representation of the architectural forms. and make adjustments as necessary. under Sections (Callout 1). You do not have to replicate the image exactly. select Solid Black for Type. double-click Presentation Callout. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog box. activate the viewport. 23 On the Design Bar. Although there are several methods you could use to create these areas of contrast. Click Finish Sketch on the Design Bar when you are finished. click Filled Region. Apply filled regions to presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser.NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. You can sketch all of them at once or one filled region at a time. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 521 .

Presentation. 522 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . click Filled Region. and sketch the rectangle shown below. double-click A105 . Add poche region 27 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. 28 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click Activate View. under Sheets (all).26 On the Project Browser. 29 On the Options Bar. click .

33 Select the crop region. under Extents. Notice the entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region. click Finish Sketch. select Crop Region Visible. and click OK. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. and drag the left and bottom extent until the entire poche region displays. click View Properties. 31 On the View menu. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 523 .30 On the Design Bar.

and click OK. 37 On the File menu. click View Properties. under Extents. 35 In the Element Properties dialog box. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows.34 On the View menu. and click Deactivate View. 36 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes. 38 Proceed with the next lesson. clear Crop Region Visible. 524 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . click Save. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson.

click Orient ➤ Southwest. You then add each view to the presentation sheet. double-click Isometric. you create three similar isometric views with different cutaway. under 3D Views. click the Scale control. and click 1: 200. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 525 . Create southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. 3 On the View Control Bar. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt. 2 On the View menu.Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise.s and apply shadows to the views. and click Advanced Model Graphics. click the Advanced Model Graphics control.

5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. right-click Isometric. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. 9 Click OK. select Override Silhouettes. Select Relative to View. click . under Silhouette Edges. Notice the section box that displays around the building model. Specify an Altitude of 45 degrees. 526 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . specify 35 for Shadow. under Sunlight Settings. right-click Isometric 1. 18 On the View menu. 15 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. Select Ground Plane. Select 1st Flr. 13 In the Rename View dialog box. double-click Isometric 2. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. under Extents. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. Cnst. for At Level. Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 11 Under Silhouette Edges. Add a section box to Isometric 2 17 In the Project Browser. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. enter Isometric 2. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Directly. and click OK. enter Isometric 1. Specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. under 3D Views. and click Rename. Rename and duplicate isometric views 12 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 16 In the Rename View dialog box. select Section Box. and click OK. and click OK. Under Intensity. select Cast Shadows. click Duplicate. and click Rename. and click Duplicate. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. Under Shadows Properties. under 3D Views. 19 In the Element Properties dialog box. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. and click OK. 14 In the Project Browser. click View Properties. 7 In the Name dialog box.

When you are finished. TIP Notice there is also a rotation symbol. Notice the grips that display on each face of the section box. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the second floor as shown. 21 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box.20 Select the section box. These allow you to modify the extents of the section box. You can use this to rotate the section box. click Modify on the Design Bar. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 527 .

25 In the Project Browser. 24 In the Rename View dialog box. under 3D Views. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 28 In the Project Browser. make a copy of the view. click View Properties. enter Isometric 3. When you are finished. under 3D Views. 23 In the Project Browser. under Extents. under Extents. the stairs and railings may display. double-click Isometric 2. either adjust the plane location. In such a case. double-click Isometric 3. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. 27 In the Element Properties dialog box. 31 On the View menu. and click Duplicate. clear Crop Region Visible. select Crop Region. 528 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . select Crop Region. clear Crop Region Visible. 29 Select the section box. and click OK. click Modify on the Design Bar. and click OK. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. click View Properties.Before turning off the visibility of the section box. 26 On the View menu. Notice the section box no longer displays. and click OK. and click Rename. right-click Isometric 2. 30 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. 22 In the Project Browser. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. right-click Copy of Isometric 2.

double-click A105 . You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. 34 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views.Next. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 33 In the Project Browser. select Viewport: Presentation. Notice the filled region partially covers the view. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 529 . under Sheets (all). select Viewport: Presentation. 36 In the Project Browser. drag Isometric 1 underneath Isometric 2 as shown and. you stack the three isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. drag Isometric 3 underneath the left section view as shown and. under 3D Views. in the Type Selector. under 3D Views. 35 In the Project Browser. in the Type Selector. select Viewport: Presentation.Presentation. in the Type Selector. drag Isometric 2 underneath Isometric 3 as shown and.

41 In the Type Properties dialog box. 530 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views .Modify filled region boundaries 37 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. The image below shows the lines redrawn. and click Activate View. click Region Properties. This will make it easier to draw lines. You may need to use the split tools and trim tools to modify lines along the way. 38 Select the poche filled region. 39 On the Design Bar. 40 In the Element Properties dialog box. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. select Transparent for Background. and on the Options Bar. 42 Click OK twice. 44 Using the drawing tools. 43 On the Design Bar. under Graphics. select Concrete for Type. and then click Edit/New. click Edit. You change this back to solid fill when you are done. click Lines.

46 In the Element Properties dialog box.45 On the Design Bar. click Save. 47 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout view. select Solid Black for Type. you create the final view for the analytique. and click OK. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 531 . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views. 50 Proceed with the next exercise. you add it to the presentation sheet. and click Deactivate View. 49 On the File menu. click Region Properties. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. a cutaway perspective view. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view.

click Camera.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. double-click 1st Flr. under Floor Plans. The view opens immediately. then you specify the eye direction and range. Adding a camera is a two-click process: first you specify the eye location. 532 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown.rvt. Cnst.

Under Intensity. select Override Silhouettes. specify 35 for Shadow. and click OK.4 Adjust the crop boundary so the entire building model fits within it. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric for Name. Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 533 . and click OK. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. 5 On the View Control Bar. Under Shadows Properties. select Cast Shadows. and click Advanced Model Graphics. under Silhouette Edges. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. 9 Under Silhouette Edges. 6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. 7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. click .

A section box now cuts through the building model. 534 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views .Add a section box 10 On the View menu. click View Properties. 12 Select the section box. and click OK. 13 Use the section controls to modify the location of each respective plane until your view resembles the following image. under Extents. You may need to adjust the location of the crop boundary as well. Notice the controls that display on each plane. select Section Box. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box.

enter 165 mm for Width. under 3D Views.14 Select the crop boundary. clear Crop Region Visible. select Scale (locked proportions). click View Properties. under Sheets (all). 17 Under Size. and click OK. 19 In the Element Properties dialog box. double-click A105 . and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. 21 In the Project Browser. you must specify the actual size of the image. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog box. and click OK. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 535 . under Change. After placing it. under Extents. Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 On the Project Browser. 18 On the View menu. go to the Type Selector and select Viewport: Presentation. drag 3D View 2 onto the presentation sheet.Presentation. 15 On the Options Bar. Because scale does not apply to perspective views. click Size.

click Duplicate.22 On the File menu. 5 In the Name dialog box. and click OK. Annotating the Analytique. click Text. click Duplicate. and click OK. 4 In the Type Properties dialog box. select the same font as the title. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. under Text. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 536 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. specify a text size of 6 mm. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. select Title. enter Description. select a font. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. enter Title. 9 In the Name dialog box. click Save. and click OK. 2 On the Options Bar. 13 Add a title to the analytique as shown. specify a text size of 40 mm. under Text. click OK. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . click Edit/New. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Edit/New. Create new text types 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rvt. and click OK. Add a title and description 12 In the Type Selector.

17 On the Design Bar.14 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. 16 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 537 . 15 In the Type Selector. 18 On the File menu. select Description. click Save. This completes the Presentation Views tutorial. click Modify.

538 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views .

material set. or other parameter variables as designed by the family creator. you learn about the various types of families and the Family Editor. Changes to a family type definition ripple through the project and are automatically reflected in every instance of that family or type within the project. shape.About Families and the Family Editor 18 All elements in Autodesk Revit Building are “family based. 539 .” The term family describes a powerful concept used throughout Revit Building to help you manage your data and make changes easily. thus the term family. This keeps everything coordinated and saves you the time and effort of manually keeping components and schedules up to date. they are still related and come from a single source. Each family element can have multiple types defined within it. each with a different size. Even though various types within a family can look completely different. In this tutorial.

and when and how to use it. you create a family within predefined templates that contain the intelligent objects needed to create the particular family type. You also learn about the Family Editor. and roofs. such as a dome roof. you learn about the three types of families and how they are used within a project and how they are created. there is another type of family that allows you create any shape or form required for a particular project and have Revit Building recognize it as a particular component type. exterior. NOTE You can use “Transfer Project Standards” to copy system families from one project to another. The following illustration shows different types within the basic walls family. while many more are stored in component libraries. You work with the Family Editor to create and modify components. For example. the types would all be saved as one file which can then be loaded into any project. floors. because there is only one file to track. You can duplicate and modify existing system families. All different types that you create are stored with the master family file. exceptions to this rule. Some family types are pre-defined within Revit Building and cannot be created or modified outside of the project environment. The basic walls system family. Using the Family Editor. has wall types that define interior. Revit Building has three types of families: ■ ■ ■ System Standard Component In-place System Families System families are pre-defined within Revit Building and comprise principle building components such as walls. You can either duplicate and modify an existing component family or create a new component family based on a variety of family templates. Standard Component Families Standard component families are loaded by default in project templates. Introduction to Families Most families are created in the Family Editor and saved as separate files with an . for example. but you cannot create new system families. Walls. You provide the information necessary to uniquely describe the family geometry. There are. In addition. In this lesson. foundation. 540 | Chapter 18 About Families and the Family Editor . generic. and roofs are examples of these types of families. however.rfa extension. floors. if you create a family called "double-hung window" that includes types with several sizes. The following dialog box shows how you can select a specific family template to start your family design project. and partition wall styles. This makes file management much easier.Using Families and the Family Editor One of the many advantages of using Revit Building is the ability to create your own families of components without having to learn a complex programming language.

You can load them into projects. Standalone families include columns. Family templates assist you in creating and manipulating component families. and the category that you use determines the component’s appearance and display control within the project. You create in-place families only within the current project. The following illustration shows a building model of the Pantheon without a roof and with an in-place roof family. Standard component families can exist outside of the project environment and have an . Using Families and the Family Editor | 541 . The following illustration shows host-based window and door family components in a wall. You have a choice of categories when you create in-place families. custom wall treatments. An example is a door family hosted by a wall family. and furniture. Host-based families have components that require hosts. and also a standalone furniture family component.rfa extension. trees. for example. transfer them from one project to another. and save them from a project file to your library if needed. so they are useful for objects unique to that project. In-place Families In-place families are either model or annotation components in a particular project.Family templates are either host-based or standalone.

Adding a family to a project 1 Open or start a project. you can search the component library loaded on your local hard drive. or you can load it using the Load From Library. you should then try to find the component that most closely resembles it. how to access it. In this case. if you change the original family. There is a logical thought process that you should follow: 1 Is there a component of this type already loaded into this project? If so. and click Open. elevation. and when to use it. Introduction to the Family Editor You can use the Family Editor to create both real-life building components and graphical/annotation components. If you find a close match. you can double-click any file with an . Also consider any internal family libraries that may exist on the network. 2 On the File menu. This will be apparent because the only Design Bar tab available is Family. you learned about the different types of Revit Building families and when to use them. how to access it. 4 Select the family file name and click Open. 3 Next. After the family has been loaded in the project. you learn when to use the Family Editor. When to use the Family Editor During the design process. click Load From Library ➤ Load Family. modify it as needed. and then load it into the project. presume it is a bay window that you require. consider checking the web library and other web resources. you learn about the Family Editor. It is far easier to modify an existing component within the Family Editor than to create it from scratch. To add a family to your project. you need to reload the family in the project to see the updated family. 2 If there isn’t a component family loaded in the project.rfa extension and it will open Revit Building in the Family Editor. Load Family command on the File menu. When the family opens. you can drag it into the document window. You can have a project open and the Family Editor open simultaneously. or 3D. it is saved with the project. select the appropriate template. Within the Windows® environment. and click Open. However. Families store all of the necessary geometry to display the two-dimensional (2D) and three-dimensional (3D) versions of particular objects. 542 | Chapter 18 About Families and the Family Editor . such as newsgroups. In this section. navigate to a family file. if you have exhausted your external resources. 5 Finally. as well as the level of detail associated with that view. it opens within the Family Editor. 3 Navigate to the library or location of the family. In this exercise. open it in the Family Editor. and the general procedure for creating a standard component family. To start a new family. Families are listed in the Project Browser under their respective component category. such as plan. click File ➤ New ➤ Family. you should create a new component family using one of the family templates as a starting point. How to use the Family Editor You can access the Family Editor in several ways. In the final exercise. you will inevitably come to a point where you need a specific component for your design. You do not have to carry the original family file along with the project. Family element visibility can be dependent of your viewing direction. you can click File ➤ Open. With Revit Building open. it should be available within the Type Selector. 4 If you can’t find the component you require.

4 Add dimensions to specify parametric component geometry. 7 Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with sub-category and entity visibility settings. 3 Lay out reference planes to aid in drawing component geometry. 6 Flex the new model to verify correct component behavior. and then load it into a new project and see how it performs.General procedure for creating a standard component family 1 Select the appropriate family template. 8 Define family type variations by specifying different parameters. 5 Add label dimensions to create type or instance parameters. 2 Define sub-categories for the family to aid in controlling visibility of the object. Using Families and the Family Editor | 543 . 9 Save the newly-defined family.

544 | Chapter 18 About Families and the Family Editor .

you learn how to create specific Autodesk Revit Building families. When you create an in-place family. you create it within the project file. In addition. This allows you to create the family in the context of the current project. a lighting fixture. not within the Family Editor.Creating Components in the Family Editor 19 In this tutorial. you start with a simple door family and then move onto a window family. Using the installed templates. you create an in-place family. In each lesson. You create a furniture family. and several annotation families. you learn how to create a different type of component. 545 .

and thickness. you draw the plan view components for the new door family. The door type has a variable height and width. you create a custom door family based on the definition of a flush exterior door.Creating a Door Family In this lesson. You also learn how to constrain the door design by adding labelled dimensions to specify values for the door width. height. After you create the door leaf as an extrusion. 546 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Drawing the Door Plan View Components In this exercise. you create new door types based on size and assign parameters respectively.

The reference planes that display are part of the default door template. Floor Plan: Ref. 2 On the File menu. 4 On the View menu. Level. 7 Enter ZF. 6 Maximize the window.rft. are also displayed. Creating a Door Family | 547 . this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. Labelled dimensions. click Symbolic Lines. click Tile. The door opening is aligned and locked to the reference planes.Create a new family based on the default door template 1 Close any open projects or families. 9 In the Type Selector. Select Metric Door. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. Draw the door panel plan view representation 8 On the Design Bar. sketch a 1000 mm x 50 mm rectangle for the door leaf as shown. select Training Files and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. 11 Starting at the door hinge point on the lower left corner of the door opening. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. click New ➤ Family. and represent the door opening profile. 5 On the Window menu. part of the door properties. select Doors [projection]. click . 10 On the Options Bar. and click Open. Notice the four tiled views.

Dimension the door panel 12 On the Design Bar. 548 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 13 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the door panel as shown. click Dimension. 14 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the door panel to the bottom edge as shown.

NOTE This same label is applied to the dimension referencing the door opening. Because labelled dimensions are parameters.Add dimension labels to the door leaf 15 On the Design Bar. 17 On the Options Bar. select Thickness for Label. Creating a Door Family | 549 . a user can change the value of the Width parameter and all dimensions labelled with it change accordingly. 19 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 16 Select the vertical dimension that controls the door width. select Width for Label. 18 Select the horizontal dimension that references the door thickness.

When drawing an arc from center and end points. so it doesn’t visually interfere with the door swing location. along with the witness line controls.Draw the door opening plan view arc 20 Select the dimension with the two EQ symbols and move it. click . 26 Select the upper left corner of the door leaf for the arc endpoint. and select the command from the menu. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. you first specify the arc center. then you specify each end point. and select the intersection at the upper left corner of the door opening for the arc center point. 24 Enter SI. click the down arrow button. 550 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . TIP If the Arc from Center and End Points command is not visible on the Options Bar. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry. In the image below. as shown. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry In this exercise. 21 On the Design Bar. select Plan Swing [cut]. 23 On the Options Bar. the arc is selected so you can see the arc center and each end point. 25 Select the upper right corner of the door opening for the arc start point. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click Symbolic Lines. 22 In the Type selector. you create the solid geometry of the door leaf with an extrusion.

double-click Left. 8 On the Design Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. 2 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 9 In the Project Browser under Elevations. and click .1 In the Project Browser. and then select the lower right corner of the door opening for the second corner of the rectangle. click Set Work Plane. 7 Select the upper left corner of the door opening for the first corner of the rectangle. 3 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 4 In the Work Plane dialog box. double-click Exterior. select Reference Plane: Exterior for Name. Creating a Door Family | 551 . 6 On the Options Bar. enter 50 mm for Depth. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click Finish Sketch. 5 On the Design Bar. under Elevations.

14 In the Project Browser. TIP When you add the witness line to the exterior face of the extrusion. then click to specify the dimension witness line. click Modify. click Modify and select the dimension. under Floor Plans.10 On the Design Bar. Specify the visibility of the door leaf in plan view 15 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. double-click Ref. click Dimension. Level. 11 Add a horizontal dimension from the exterior face of the door extrusion to the interior face of the door extrusion. 552 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . use the TAB key to toggle to the extrusion reference. select Thickness for Label.

and When cut in Plan/RCP. Creating a Door Family | 553 . click . 6 Click OK. and Fine are selected. Assign the Oak Door material to the door leaf 8 Select the door leaf extrusion. click Materials.No Gloss. 7 In the Materials dialog box. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. Assigning Materials to the Door Components. Create a new material based on the existing red oak material 1 On the Settings menu. under View Specific Display. and click OK. Assign the Oak Door material to the door frame 14 Select the interior door frame extrusion. click 11 In the Materials dialog box. click . click Visibility. select Front/Back. The solid geometry of the door is now complete. Assigning Materials to the Door Components In this exercise. you assign a material to the door leaf.Dark. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Oak. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Left/Right. It also defines its appearance when rendered. under Name. click OK.Red/Stained. click Duplicate. The door leaf is assigned the new Oak Door material. Medium. and click OK. select Panel for Subcategory.16 Select the door leaf extrusion. 19 Under Detail Levels. for Material. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. 9 On the Options Bar. 2 In the Materials dialog box. 18 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. click OK. 20 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. under AccuRender. under Materials and Finishes. 4 In the Materials dialog box. 17 On the Options Bar. 3 In the New Material dialog box. and clear Plan/RCP. enter Oak Door for Name. select Oak Door. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. verify that Coarse. click for Texture. click Modify. and click OK. This material designation controls how it displays in shaded and hidden line views. 12 In the Element Properties dialog box. 5 In the Material Library dialog box.

18 In the Element Properties dialog box. 22 Zoom in on a door corner. click . View the new door 20 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). 16 In the Element Properties dialog box. The door frame is assigned the new Oak Door material. and select Shading with Edges. 21 On the View Control Bar. select Oak Door for Name. click OK. click 17 In the Materials dialog box.15 On the Options Bar. double-click View 1. for Material. click the Model Graphics Style control. 19 Repeat the previous five steps for the exterior frame extrusion. 554 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click OK. under 3D Views.

do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Notice the door geometry adapts to the new dimension values. Click Apply. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. By flexing the new component. you ensure it adjusts to the changes it may encounter once loaded into a project. In the Family Types dialog box. 27 Click OK. Enter 1000 mm for Width. enter 125 mm for Frame Width. Flexing the new family is an important part of the design process. Defining New Door Types Creating a Door Family | 555 . Click Apply. click Family Types. 25 In the Family Types dialog box. Under Other. 26 Return the door parameters to their original values. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Try to move the dialog box off to the side so you can still see the door family next to it. Flex the door model 23 Zoom out to view the entire door. enter 75 mm for Frame Width. 24 On the Design Bar. enter 2500 mm for Height. Under Other. enter 2000 mm for Height. This allows you to apply changes made in the dialog box and see how the new door reacts.The Oak Door material is now assigned to the door leaf and door frame. Enter 1500 mm for Width.

and click OK. enter 2100 mm for Height. click Load. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. enter 2134 mm for Height. select Project. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. You now have three new door types defined within your door family. 556 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .rte is the Template file. Training Door. click New. 13 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new door family with the name. you define new door types based on the door model that you have created.Defining New Door Types In this exercise. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. and click Open. click Door. click New. 3 In the Name dialog box. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Click Apply. under Family Types. Enter 925 mm for Width. Define the second new door type. Training Door. and click OK. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. enter 1220 x 2134mm for Name. 20 Draw a wall segment 8000mm long. click Save. 15 In the New Project dialog box. Under Create new. 10 In the Family Types dialog box. 12 On the File menu. Define new door types with various heights and widths 1 On the Design Bar. verify that DefaultMetric. enter 2000 mm for Height.rfa. Load the new door family into a new project 14 On the File menu. 6 In the Name dialog box. 11 Click OK. 17 On the Options Bar. 9 In the Name dialog box. click Family Types. under Template file. 8 Under Family Types. enter 750 x 2100mm for Name. 4 In the Family Types dialog box. Click Apply. navigate to the location where you saved the door family. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 2 In the Family Types dialog box. and click OK. click Wall. Enter 1220 mm for Width. Define the third new door type. and click OK. select it. 5 Under Family Types. Place new door types in the project 19 On the Design Bar. click New. Click Apply. Enter 750 mm for Width. Use the default wall selection in the Type Selector.rfa. enter 925 x 2000mm for Name. 18 In the Open dialog box. click New ➤ Project.

22 On the View Control Bar. click Door. 24 In the Type Selector. Creating a Door Family | 557 . click the Model Graphics Style control. click . select Training Door : 925 x 2000mm. and select Shading with Edges.21 On the View toolbar. 25 Add the door to the left side of the wall as shown. select Training Door : 750 x 2100mm. 23 On the Design Bar. 27 Add this door to the center of the wall as shown. 26 In the Type Selector.

This completes the lesson. Finally. select Training Door : 1220 x 2134mm. You then assign parameters to the window family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the nine-light prototype.28 In the Type Selector. you assign new dimension values to the window to create new types within the window family. and specify values for the window width. 30 You can close all files without saving. Creating a Door Family. You now have three new flush exterior doors based on the new door family prototype. you create a custom window family based on the definition of a fixed rectangular window with nine lights. glazing and mullions as extrusions. height. and mullion offset. Creating a Window Family In this lesson. You create the window frame. 29 Add the third door type to the right side of the wall as shown. and create the window sash as a sweep. default sill height. 558 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

Creating a Window Family | 559 . 4 On the Window menu. The reference planes that display are part of the default window template and represent the window opening profile. Select Metric Window. are also displayed. select Training Files and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. The window type has a variable height and width. click New ➤ Family 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. Labelled dimensions.rft. click Tile. and click Open. and the height of the top and bottom row of lights is adjustable. this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. 7 Enter ZF. you specify the parameters for the new window family. 2 On the File menu. 5 On the View menu. part of the window properties. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. 6 Maximize the exterior elevation view.Specifying the New Window Parameters In this exercise. Four views are tiled on your display. The window opening is aligned and locked to the reference planes. equally spaced vertical mullions. Create a new family based on the default window template 1 Close any open projects or families.

Notice how the window opening adapts to the changing dimension values. 12 Click OK. these specific type parameters are adjustable once the window is part of a project. This process is called “flexing the model.” and it is done to avoid conflicts and to ensure that all model geometry adjusts to changes as designed. you create the solid geometry of the window frame with a sweep. This is the starting point for the new window. Move the dialog box off to the side so you can see the window opening. Change the height and width values again. 11 Enter 1000 mm for Height and 2000 mm for Width. The profile is swept along the path to create the solid geometry. The label name. 560 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter 1300 mm for Height.8 Two dimension strings display with their labels. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry In this exercise. When you add labels to dimensions. and click Apply. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 10 In the Family Types dialog box. Modify the new window type height and width parameters 9 On the Design Bar. Height and Default Sill Height. also one of the window properties. Enter 1800 mm for Width. and click Apply. Creating sweep geometry requires first sketching the sweep path. Click Apply. then sketching the sweep profile. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. is one of the type parameters. click Family Types.

click Finish Path. Creating a Window Family | 561 . 4 On the Options Bar. click Sketch 2D Path. Add a reference plane for the sweep profile 7 On the Design Bar. select Elevation: Right. click . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep.Create a sweep path for the window frame solid geometry 1 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. click Lines. and specify an offset of 50 mm. 5 Sketch a rectangle to represent the sweep path starting at the upper left corner of the opening and ending at the lower right corner. Snap the cursor to each corner. 10 Zoom in on the red dot in the middle of the wall. and select 1:10. 9 On the View Control Bar. 3 On the Design Bar. The red dot indicates the intersection of the sweep path and the profile plane. 6 On the Design Bar. 13 Pick the exterior wall face so that a reference line is offset 50 mm to the left of the exterior wall face as shown. 2 On the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. click Sketch Profile. click . 8 In the Go To View dialog box. and click Open View. 12 On the Options Bar. click the Scale control.

select Chain and click . click Lines. sketch the frame profile approximately as shown. select Prefer: Wall faces. enter Sash for the Name. click Modify. 23 On the Options Bar. 19 On the Design Bar.14 On the Design Bar. and select the dimension. 17 On the Design Bar. Sketch the window frame profile 22 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. and select the reference plane. click . 18 Drag the value control off to the side as shown. 20 On the Options Bar. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Modify. 562 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click OK. 24 Below the red dot. 15 On the Options Bar. under Identity Data. 16 Add a dimension between the exterior wall face and the new reference plane.

NOTE When you sketch the frame profile. When the lock displays. click it to constrain the left edge of the frame to the interior face. and drag it to the interior face of the wall. Precise dimensions are assigned to the frame profile in subsequent steps. When the lock displays. the frame profile should extend beyond the edges of the wall. click Modify. the exact dimensions are not critical. and drag it to the exterior face of the wall. 25 On the Design Bar. 27 Select the left edge of the frame section. 26 Select the right edge of the frame section. click it to constrain the frame to the exterior wall face. However. Creating a Window Family | 563 .

When the lock displays. 29 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 564 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and specify the dimension value. click it to lock the line to the reference plane. 30 Add a vertical dimension of 40 mm to the left side of the frame and another vertical dimension of 20 mm to the right side of the frame. select the line you want to move. click Dimension. TIP After adding the dimension. as shown.28 Select the short line parallel and to the right of the Sash reference plane. Drag it to the left and align it with the Sash reference plane.

click Finish Profile. click the lock to constrain the present value. 37 In the Project Browser.Modify each dimension if necessary. click the lock to constrain the present value. and double-click View 1. Next. select the top horizontal line of the frame profile. Creating a Window Family | 565 . spin the model so you can see the interior of the frame. 34 Select the horizontal reference plane that intersects the red dot. Lock the alignment when the lock icon displays. TIP If you don’t see the lock icon. zoom out until it displays. 35 On the Design Bar. this is the top of the window opening. The window frame profile is swept around the window opening. If necessary. When the lock displays. 36 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sweep. click . Align the new profile to the window opening edge 31 Select the 40 mm dimension. 33 On the Tools toolbar. expand 3D Views. under Views (all). 32 Select the 20 mm dimension. When the lock displays.

39 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 On the Design Bar. click Set Work Plane.45 mm for Depth. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Chain of walls or lines. under Elevations. click Lines. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 5 On the Options Bar. and select Lock.38 In the Project Browser. press TAB to cycle through the selection options. double-click Exterior. 2 On the Design Bar. Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry In this exercise. select Reference Plane: Sash for Name. click . Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry. you create the solid geometry of the window sash with an extrusion. Specify the window sash extrusion parameters 1 On the Design Bar. and enter . and click OK. under Specify a new Work Plane. and select the option. 566 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Pick the sash profile lines 6 Place the cursor over the left side of the frame. 3 In the Work Plane dialog box.

Draw offset extrusion lines 7 On the Options Bar. You specify a negative offset value to indicate an extrusion direction inside of the window frame.The entire sash outline is selected. and then specify the lower right inside corner for the second corner of the rectangle. 8 Specify the upper left inside corner of the window frame for the first corner of the rectangle. Creating a Window Family | 567 . set the following options: ■ ■ Click . Enter . and lock icons display on each line.50 mm for Offset. ■ Click .

9 On the Design Bar. double-click Right. double-click View 1. 10 In the Project Browser. 568 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . under 3D Views. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry. under Elevations. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 11 In the Project Browser. Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles. Notice the sash is aligned with the Sash reference plane. The window sash extrusion is now complete. click Finish Sketch.

as shown. 3 On the Options Bar. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. under Elevations. click . and enter 30 mm for Offset. click Ref Plane. 4 Select the left edge of the sash so that a vertical reference plane is added 30 mm to the right.Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry In this exercise. Creating a Window Family | 569 . Add a reference plane to specify the glass work plane 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Right. 2 On the Design Bar. you create the solid geometry of the window glass with an extrusion.

click Dimension. 570 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 6 Add a horizontal dimension of 30 mm between the left edge of the sash and the reference plane.5 On the Design Bar.

11 In the Project Browser. and select Lock. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. press TAB until the chain of lines is preselected. under Elevations. and click OK. under Identity Data. 16 On the Options Bar. double-click Exterior. click Lines. click . 14 In the Work Plane dialog box. 15 On the Design Bar. click . enter Glazing for the Name instance parameter. click Modify. and click to create the glass boundary. 17 Place the cursor on one of the sash extrusion lines.7 On the Design Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. click Set Work Plane. 13 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. Pick lines to define the glass extrusion 12 On the Design Bar. enter 12 mm for Depth. 8 Select the reference plane. and click OK. select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. Creating a Window Family | 571 . 10 In the Element Properties dialog box.

23 On the Design Bar. After the family is loaded into a project. 24 In the Project Browser. 572 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Finish Sketch. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles. double-click Right. 20 Select the glass extrusion. under 3D Views. you can control subcategory visual style using the Objects Styles dialog box. View the window model with frame. 21 On the Options Bar.18 On the Design Bar. under Elevations. and click OK. click . under Identity Data. and glass 19 In the Project Browser. specify Glass for the Subcategory instance parameter. double-click View 1. sash. NOTE Assigning subcategories to model elements is important. click Modify.

NOTE After flexing the model. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry. enter 1500 mm for Height. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters.Flex the window model 25 On the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. For example. it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. Move the Family Types dialog box off to the side so you can see the window model. Enter 2000 mm for Width. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. Under Other. Under Other. enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height. Enter 1500 mm for Width. 26 In the Family Types dialog box. make sure the window frame stretched with the opening and that the glass extrusion remains attached to the interior edge of the sash. Click Apply. Creating a Window Family | 573 . Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. enter 1000 mm for Height. Click Apply. click Family Types. return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Click OK. 27 In the Family Types dialog box. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. 28 Proceed to the next exercise.

Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry In this exercise. After adding the dimension. Add a multi-segmented dimension referencing all of the vertical reference planes except the center (Left/Right) as shown. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. under Elevations. 574 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 4 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Design Bar. the exact location is not critical. 3 Add two horizontal and two vertical reference planes inside of the window opening to approximate the mullion centerline locations as shown. NOTE When you draw each reference plane. click Dimension. click Ref Plane. you create the solid geometry of the window mullions based on reference planes and extrusions. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click the EQ symbol to make the dimension segments equal. double-click Exterior. Add reference planes to specify the location of the new window mullion centerlines 1 In the Project Browser.

. Add a mullion offset family parameter 7 On the Design Bar. select <Add parameter.> for Label. 6 Add a dimension between the bottom of the window opening (bottom reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane above it. 9 On the Options Bar. as shown. Do not be concerned with dimension values. click Modify.. 8 Select the dimension on the upper-right that references the top two horizontal reference planes. as shown.5 Add a dimension between the top of the window opening (top reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane below it. Creating a Window Family | 575 . Do not be concerned with dimension values.

Under Parameter Data. 14 Click the dimension value. 15 On the Design Bar. 16 Select the dimension on the lower-right. and click OK.10 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Notice the dimension value becomes editable. 576 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Family Types. Select Instance. 11 On the Design Bar. click Modify. enter 350 mm for Mullion Offset. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. and enter 350 mm as the new value. enter Mullion Offset for Name. select Dimensions. TIP Due to the length of the dimension label. under Dimensions. Click OK. you may want to drag the dimension value as shown. Under Group parameter under. select Family parameter. 12 In the Family Types dialog box. 13 Select the horizontal reference plane second from the bottom.

Creating a Window Family | 577 .17 On the Options Bar. Do not be concerned with precise dimensions. 24 Sketch a rectangle centered on the left vertical mullion reference plane approximately as shown. click Lines. After you complete the sketch. it is critical that the short horizontal lines align with the horizontal edges of the sash. 20 On the Design Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. 21 In the Work Plane dialog box. and click . click Modify. 23 On the Options Bar. move the dimension value as shown. 18 On the Design Bar. and click OK. Create the vertical mullion extrusions 19 On the Design Bar. 22 On the Design Bar. However. notice lock icons display on the interior horizontal edges of the sash. select Mullion Offset for Label. click Set Work Plane. 25 Click both of the locks so the mullion adapts to changes in window height. enter 14 mm for Depth. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Watch the Status Bar to be sure that the lines are snapping to the sash. select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. As you did before.

29 On the Design Bar. and select the dimension you added in the previous step. Move the dimension values as shown. 27 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane centered between the vertical mullion extrusion sketch lines. 30 On the Options Bar. select <Add parameter> for Label. 28 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the mullion extrusion. and place it above the dimension you placed in the previous steps. and to the right edge of the mullion extrusion. click Dimension. click Modify.26 On the Design Bar. Click the EQ symbol to make both horizontal dimensions equal. 578 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

Creating a Window Family | 579 . Click OK. enter Mullion Width for Name. select Dimensions. 32 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the right vertical reference plane as shown. This is changed in later steps. and on the Options Bar. Under Parameter Data. follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion on the left. Select the dimension. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. click Finish Sketch. Add a dimension between the left and right mullion edges. NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously.31 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. 33 On the Design Bar. Remember. select Mullion Width for Label. Select Type. ■ ■ ■ Do not be concerned with the value of the mullion width. select Family parameter. Move the Mullion Width value to the left as shown. Under Group parameter under.

and the mullions stretch with the new window height. NOTE After flexing the model. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and aligned with the sash edge. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected.Specify the mullion width parameter 34 On the Design Bar. Notice the mullions remain centered and equally spaced on the reference planes. In this case. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. 580 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . or undoing the same. enter 40 mm for Mullion Width. Under Other. 35 In the Family Types dialog box. you should pay close attention to the new mullions and make sure they remain centered. Flex the window model 36 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 1500 mm for Height. Move the dialog box off to the side so you can see the window in the drawing area. click Family Types. Click Apply. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. evenly spaced. and click Apply. Enter 1500 mm for Width.

Enter 2000 mm for Width. 46 On the Design Bar. and click OK. Do not be concerned with the dimension value. enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height. Click OK. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Sketch the horizontal mullion extrusions 38 On the Design Bar. 42 On the Options Bar. Under Other. and then to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion. click Set Work Plane. enter 1000 mm for Height. 41 On the Design Bar. 47 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion. Click the EQ symbol to make both vertical dimensions equal. 40 In the Work Plane dialog box. click Lines. as shown. Notice the Depth value on the Options Bar remains at the previously specified value. 39 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. 43 Sketch a rectangle centered on the upper horizontal mullion reference plane approximately as shown. under Specify a new Work Plane. click . 44 On the Design Bar. and move the EQ values off to each side as shown. 45 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane at the center of the mullion. return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Click Apply. Creating a Window Family | 581 . click Dimension. and then click the lock icons to lock the left and right edges to the edge of the sash.37 In the Family Types dialog box. select Reference Plane : Glazing for Name.

582 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion you just completed. Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint.48 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 49 On the Options Bar. Remember. NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously. ■ ■ ■ 51 On the Design Bar. 50 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the lower horizontal reference plane as shown. Select the dimension. and on the Options Bar. select Mullion Width for Label. Add a dimension between the upper and lower mullion edges. and select the dimension you added in the previous step. Move the dimension value as shown. click Modify. select Mullion Width for Label.

double-click View 1. spin the model to get a good view of the mullions. 53 Select the horizontal mullions. you can still see the window. Notice the mullion extrusions are joined. Join the mullion geometry 52 On the Tools menu.The horizontal mullion extrusions are now complete. click Family Types. Flex the window model 55 Adjust the location of the window model within the drawing area. click Join Geometry. If necessary. 54 In the Project Browser. Creating a Window Family | 583 . so when you open the Family Types dialog box. under 3D Views. and select the vertical mullions. 56 On the Design Bar.

Click Apply. you assign materials to the frame. 58 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 1500 mm for Height. enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height. Under Other. Enter 2000 mm for Width.57 In the Family Types dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. sash. and mullions that you want to display in renderings of the new window. return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Assigning Materials to the Window Components. Enter 1500 mm for Width. 584 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 59 Proceed to the next exercise. Under Other. Click Apply. Click OK. enter 1000 mm for Height. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters and the mullions stretch with the new window height. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. Assigning Materials to the Window Components In this exercise.

Yellow/. double-click Exterior. and click OK. and mullions 7 In the Project Browser. Create a new material based on the existing yellow pine material 1 On the Settings menu. TIP Hold the CTRL key down as you select the sweep and various extrusions. 6 In the Materials dialog box. and select Shading with Edges. 8 On the View Control Bar. click for Texture. select Stained. the sash. under Elevations. and click OK. enter Pine Frame for Name. 2 In the Materials dialog box. 9 Select the window frame sweep. Dark. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Pine. click Duplicate. click the Model Graphics Style control. and the mullions. No Gloss. click Materials. click OK. 5 In the Material Library dialog box. sash. 3 In the New Material dialog box. 4 In the Materials dialog box.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Assign the Pine Frame material to the frame. Creating a Window Family | 585 . under AccuRender.

select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). under View Specific Display. and click OK.10 On the Options Bar. 21 On the Options Bar. 17 In the Element Properties dialog box. double-click Right. 12 Under Materials and Finishes. and Fine are selected. under View Specific Display. clear the other view options. under 3D Views. click . 18 On the Design Bar. select Pine Frame for Name. Medium. Medium. 16 Under Detail Levels. double-click View 1. and Fine are selected. 13 In the Materials dialog box. click Visibility. 15 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. Modify the glass visibility 19 In the Project Browser under Elevations. select Frame/Mullion for Subcategory. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. click Modify. 14 In the Element Properties dialog box. 20 Select the glass extrusion. verify that Coarse. click OK. under Graphics. under Identity Data. 23 Under Detail Levels. select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). 24 In the Project Browser. click for Material. and click OK. verify that Coarse. and click OK. 586 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . The window frame is assigned the new Pine Frame material. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Edit for Visibility.

and glass display their assigned materials. Creating a Window Family | 587 . mullions. Defining New Window Types In this exercise. The window frame. 26 Proceed to the next exercise.25 Zoom in on a window corner. you define new window types based on the window model that you just created. You then create multiple window types that will be available to the user after the family is loaded into a project. Defining New Window Types. You begin by adding a formula to the mullion offset parameter to specify horizontal divisions of one third the overall height of the window. sash.

In the Family Types dialog box. enter Height/3 in the Formula column for Mullion Offset. Flex the window model 4 In addition to flexing the model after the addition or modification of model geometry. and click OK. Add a mullion offset formula to the family type 1 Zoom to fit and move the window model off the side of the drawing area so it will be visible after you open the Family Types dialog box. it is also a good idea to flex the model after a new formula is applied. 3 In the Family Types dialog box. click Family Types. 2 On the Design Bar. The horizontal mullions are now spaced apart at one third the height of the window. 588 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. enter 2000 mm for Height. and click Apply.

click New. 9 Under Family Types. Click Apply. 5 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 1000 mm for Height. 10 In the Name dialog box. and click OK. but the one third height spacing is maintained in the horizontal mullions. 8 In the Family Types dialog box. under Family Types. enter 2500 w x 1250mm h for Name. Define new window types with various heights and widths 6 In the Family Types dialog box. Creating a Window Family | 589 . enter 2600 w x 1300mm h for Name. click New. and click Apply.The window height is doubled. Enter 1250 mm for Height. and click OK. 7 In the Name dialog box. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2500 mm for Width.

Click OK. click Window. Define the final window type 12 Under Family Types. 27 In the Type Selector. 33 Zoom in on the center window. Click Apply. click Wall. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 22 Draw a generic wall segment 12000 mm long. enter 1800 w x 1500mm h for Name and click OK. Enter 1300 mm for Height. 25 In the Type Selector. Notice the detail that displays. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2600 mm for Width. click Load. click Modify. Place new window types in the project 21 On the Design Bar.11 In the Family Types dialog box. 13 In the Name dialog box. Training Window. 28 Add this window to the center of the wall. 26 Add the window to the left side of the wall. 590 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . clear Tag on Placement. select Training Window : 2500 w x 1250mm h. 30 Add the third window to the right side of the wall. select it.rfa. click to start a new project based on your default template. 16 Navigate to the location of your choice and save the new window family with the name. click Window. click Thin Lines. navigate to the location of your Training Window. This is because you set the visibility values to display when cut in plan/RCP. 24 On the Options Bar. 29 In the Type Selector. and click Open. 19 On the Options Bar. 32 On the View menu. select Training Window :2600 w x 1300mm h. 15 On the File menu.rfa file. Enter 1500 mm for Height. click Save. select Training Window : 1800 w x 1500mm h. Load the new window family into a new project 17 On the Standard toolbar. 23 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Family Types dialog box. click New. 31 On the Design Bar. Click Apply. You now have three new window types defined within your window family. 20 In the Open dialog box. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 1800 mm for Width.

rolltop. You have three new fixed nine-light windows based on a new window family prototype. Creating a Furniture Family | 591 . You begin by creating the desktop. click the Model Graphics Style control.34 On the View toolbar. you assign new dimension values to the furniture to create new types within the furniture family. 35 On the View Control Bar. click . Creating a Furniture Family In this lesson. This completes the Creating a Window Family lesson. and drawers as extrusions. Finally. and specify values for the furniture length and depth. you create a custom furniture family based on the definition of a rolltop desk. You then assign parameters to the furniture family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the prototype. drawer base. and select Shading with Edges.

Create a new family based on the default furniture template 1 Close all open projects or families. Select Metric Furniture. and click Open. 592 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . The reference planes that display are part of the default furniture template. 8 Draw two vertical reference planes. 4 Maximize the view. 9 On the Design Bar. 2 On the File menu.rft. select Training Files and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. 7 Draw two horizontal reference planes. they represent the furniture centerline axes. 5 On the View menu.Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters In this exercise. 6 On the Design Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. Floor Plan: Ref. NOTE When you draw the reference planes. their exact location is not critical. one to the left and one to the right of the existing vertical centerline reference plane as shown. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. you add reference planes and specify the parameters for the new rolltop desk furniture family. one above and one below the existing horizontal centerline reference plane as shown. click New ➤ Family. Level. click Dimension. click Ref Plane.

14 Change the horizontal dimension to 2000 mm.10 Near the bottom of the drawing area. 11 Add an overall horizontal dimension underneath the dimension you just added. It should reference the left reference plane and the right reference plane as shown. click Modify. 13 Select the left reference plane. add a horizontal dimension string beginning at the left reference plane. 12 On the Design Bar. Creating a Furniture Family | 593 . and ending at the right reference plane. proceeding to the centerline reference plane. as shown. Click the EQ icon to make the segments equal.

as shown. as shown. Click the EQ symbol to make both segments equal. add a vertical dimension string beginning at the upper reference plane. 17 To the right of the dimension you just created. 594 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Dimension. and ending at the lower reference plane. 16 On the right side of the drawing area. add an overall vertical dimension from the upper reference plane to the lower reference plane. proceeding to the centerline reference plane.15 On the Design Bar.

click Modify. 22 Clean up the extents of the reference planes and the dimension witness lines as shown. Creating a Furniture Family | 595 . 20 Change the vertical dimension to 1000 mm. TIP To do this. Afterwards. 19 Select the upper. select each reference plane and drag the extents to the new position. 21 On the Design Bar.18 On the Design Bar. select each dimension and drag the witness line controls as needed. click Modify. horizontal reference plane.

Select Type. Select Type. select Dimensions. 28 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. select Dimensions. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. enter Depth for Name..> for Label. select Family parameter. select <Add parameter. Under Parameter Data. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. enter Length for Name.23 Select the 2000 mm dimension... 27 On the Options Bar. 24 On the Options Bar. select <Add parameter. Click OK.> for Label. 25 In the Parameter Properties dialog box.. Under Parameter Data. 596 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . For Group parameter under. Click OK. 26 Select the 1000 mm dimension. select Family parameter. For Group parameter under.

Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry In this exercise.These reference planes will be the skeleton that you snap the solid geometry to. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. it will also adapt to the same changes. Click Apply. you can still see the model. you should flex the design now to ensure the reference planes and labelled dimensions adapt to changes as expected. Notice the reference planes adapt to the new dimension parameters. you create the solid geometry of the desktop with an extrusion. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click Family Types. Flex the design 29 Adjust the location of the reference planes within the drawing area. enter 2000 mm for Length. Click OK. When the solid geometry is snapped to the reference planes. Click Apply. 32 In the Family Types dialog box. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry. 30 On the Design Bar. so when you open the Family Types dialog box. Creating a Furniture Family | 597 . 31 In the Family Types dialog box. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. Therefore. enter 3000 mm for Length.

Create the desktop using an extrusion 1 On the Design Bar. 9 Move the cursor over one of the symbolic lines. 4 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Design Bar.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click . 2 On the Options Bar. Level for Name. click . 6 In the Work Plane dialog box. click Lines. press TAB until the chain of lines is offered as a selection option. select Level: Ref. under Elevations. double-click Front. and click to select all four symbolic lines. 11 In the Project Browser. 8 On the Options Bar. NOTE In the image below. 5 On the Design Bar. the symbolic line thickness was modified for training purposes. Your lines may have a lighter weight. click Finish Sketch. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click Set Work Plane. 598 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . under Specify a new Work Plane. 3 Select the upper left reference plane intersection for the first corner of the rectangle. click Symbolic Lines. 7 On the Design Bar. and click OK. and then select the lower right reference plane intersection for the second corner of the rectangle. and enter 100 mm for Depth.

21 Select the 750 mm dimension.The desktop extrusion extends 100 mm above the reference level. 19 Add a vertical dimension from the bottom of the desktop to the top edge. select <Add parameter. 13 Move the cursor over the top edge of the desktop. click Dimension. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar. as shown.> for Label. click Modify.. 12 On the Design Bar. and select the bottom edge. 22 On the Options Bar. click Modify. Creating a Furniture Family | 599 . 15 Move the cursor over the bottom edge of the desktop. 18 Add a vertical dimension from the reference level to the top edge of the desktop.. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar. and select the top edge. Add height and thickness dimensions 17 On the Design Bar. 16 Drag the bottom edge of the desktop up until the desktop is 100 mm thick. 14 Drag the top edge of the desktop upward until the temporary dimension value is 750 mm. Add height and thickness family parameters 20 On the Design Bar.

31 In the Family Types dialog box. 30 In the Family Types dialog box. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. Click OK. For Group parameter under.23 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. Notice the desk top adapts to the new dimension parameters. For Group parameter under. 600 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click Apply. click Modify. so when you open the Family Types dialog box. Under Parameter Data. 29 On the Design Bar..> for Label. 26 n the Parameter Properties dialog box. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. select Dimensions. enter Height for Name. Enter 750 mm for Height. Select Type. Flex the design 28 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area. 27 On the Design Bar. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry In this exercise. Click OK. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry. enter 4000 mm for Length. 24 Select the 100 mm dimension. Enter 1200 mm for Height. 25 On the Options Bar.. select Family parameter. and click Apply. enter Thickness for Name. enter 2000 mm for Length. Click Apply. click Family Types. you can still see the model. Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Under Parameter Data. select Dimensions. and click Apply. select Family parameter. you create the solid geometry of the desk drawer base. Select Type. select <Add parameter. Enter 150 mm for Thickness.

2 On the Design Bar. Creating a Furniture Family | 601 . Level. 7 Add a dimension referencing the left vertical reference plane and the offset plane you added. and click to locate a new horizontal reference plane offset 100 mm below it. Click the lock icon as shown. click Ref Plane. and enter 100 mm for Offset. click . and click to locate a new vertical reference plane offset 100 mm to the right. click Dimension. 4 Move the cursor over the left vertical reference plane. 5 Move the cursor over the upper horizontal reference plane. 3 On the Options Bar. Offset two reference planes to locate the first drawer base corner 1 In the Project Browser. 6 On the Design Bar. double-click Ref.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. under Floor Plans.

click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 10 On the Design Bar. and click OK. Level for Name. click Lines.8 Add a dimension to the top horizontal reference plane and the offset plane below it. 13 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. click Set Work Plane. select Level: Ref. as shown. 11 In the Work Plane dialog box. Lock the dimension as shown. Sketch the left drawer base 9 On the Design Bar. and then specify a point 300 mm to the right and 800 mm down for the second corner of the rectangle. 14 Select the intersection of the new offset reference planes for the first corner of the rectangle. under Specify a new Work Plane. click . 602 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

15 Click both of the lock icons to lock the edges of the extrusion to the reference planes. 16 On the Design Bar. 17 Add a vertical dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base. Creating a Furniture Family | 603 . two lock icons display. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. click Dimension.After you complete the rectangle.

20 On the Tools toolbar. click Modify. . 23 For the align-to reference. as shown below at the cursor. A duplicate of the left drawer base is mirrored to create the right drawer base. 21 Select the vertical centerline reference plane as the mirror axis. 604 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click the Mirror tool. TIP You can select multiple elements by holding the CTRL key down. You can also highlight the entire line chain. select the horizontal reference plane second from the top. click . 19 Select the four sketched lines.18 On the Design Bar. 22 On the Tools toolbar. using the TAB key.

26 On the Design Bar. 25 Click the lock icon to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane.24 Select the top horizontal line of the right drawer extrusion as shown. A lock icon displays. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. Add a dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base. click Dimension. 27 Add and lock the following two dimensions to the right drawer extrusion: ■ Add a dimension from the right vertical reference plane to the right edge of the drawer base. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. ■ Creating a Furniture Family | 605 .

enter Drawer Base Width for Name. select Dimensions. 33 On the Options Bar. as shown.28 Add two final dimensions. Under Parameter Data. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. Click OK. Select Type. 29 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the left extrusion. select <Add parameter. one on each extrusion that references the width of the drawer base. 32 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the right extrusion.> for Label. select Drawer Base Width for Label. 30 On the Options Bar... 34 On the Design Bar. For Group parameter under. select Family parameter. click Modify. 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 606 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

37 On the Tools toolbar. double-click Front. Creating a Furniture Family | 607 . After the alignment. click . Extend the drawer base extrusions up to the desktop 36 In the Project Browser. 39 Select the upper edge of the drawer base.35 On the Design Bar. 38 Select the lower edge of the desktop as the align-to reference. click Finish Sketch. a lock icon displays. click it to lock the alignment. under Elevations.

The solid geometry for the desk drawer base is now complete. click . click Family Types. 42 On the View menu. 49 In the Family Types dialog box. However. Enter 750 mm for Height. enter 4000 mm for Length. Enter 1200 mm for Height. Notice the desk adapts to the new dimension parameters.40 On the Design Bar. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry. Click OK. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click Modify. 608 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter 2000 mm for Length. and click Apply. 47 On the Design Bar. and click Apply. Flex the design 46 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box. 41 On the View toolbar. click the Scale control and select 1:20. 45 On the View Control Bar. 50 Proceed to the next exercise. notice that annotations display in this view. click Visibility/Graphics. Click Apply. 43 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 44 Clear Show annotation categories in this view. and click Apply. you can still see the model. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 48 In the Family Types dialog box. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. and click OK.

2 On the Design Bar. select Reference Plane: Center (Left\Right) for Name. and click to specify the upper left corner. 7 Sketch the rectangle beginning at the intersection of the desktop and the right reference plane. under Elevations. 3 On the Design Bar. you create the solid geometry of the desk rolltop.Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry In this exercise. 5 On the Design Bar. Create the rolltop extrusion 1 In the Project Browser. click Lines. Creating a Furniture Family | 609 . under Specify a new Work Plane. click . as shown. then move the cursor up 300mm and to the left 400mm. 4 In the Work Plane dialog box. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 6 On the Options Bar. double-click Right. click Set Work Plane. and click OK. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion.

Add another dimension to both horizontal sketch lines. and lock it.8 On the Tools toolbar. 9 Select the desk top. 10 Select the right vertical edge of the desktop extrusion. 12 Add one dimension referring to both vertical sketch lines. 11 On the Design Bar. then the lower horizontal sketch line. click . 610 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and lock it. click Dimension. and click the lock icon to lock the alignment. then select the right parallel sketch line. and lock the alignment.

16 On the Design Bar. The rolltop extrusion outline is complete. the upper sketch line. 14 On the Options Bar. and then select the fillet arc tool from the menu. click Lines. . click Finish Sketch. click the Fillet arc tool. 15 Select the left vertical sketch line.13 On the Design Bar. and then move the cursor down and to the right until you create and arc similar to the image below. Do not be concerned with the precise dimension of the arc radius. Creating a Furniture Family | 611 . TIP You may need to click the down arrow button.

19 Select the left edge of the left drawer base. 20 Select the right edge of the right drawer base. 18 On the Tools toolbar. and click the lock icon. double-click Front. select the left edge of the rolltop. under Elevations. select the right edge of the rolltop. 612 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Align the left and right edges of the rolltop with the drawer bases 17 In the Project Browser. and click the lock icon. click .

Enter 1500 mm for Depth. enter 4000 mm for Length. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. you can still see the model. Enter 200 mm for Thickness. 23 On the Design Bar. If not. and click Apply. The solid geometry of the rolltop is now complete. You can also use dimension constraints. and click Apply. Enter 1500 mm for Height. you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. and click Apply. click Family Types. click . Flex the design 22 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box.21 On the View toolbar. Creating a Furniture Family | 613 . The desk should adapt to all the changes. 24 In the Family Types dialog box. and click Apply.

25 In the Family Types dialog box, return the parameters to their original values:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Dimensions, enter 2000 mm for Length. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. Enter 750 mm for Height. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. Click Apply. Click OK.

26 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry.

Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry
In this exercise, you create the solid geometry of the drawers and apply material to the desk.

Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.

Create the desk drawer extrusions
1 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 2 On the Design Bar, click Set Work Plane. 3 In the Work Plane dialog box, under Specify a new Work Plane, select Pick a Plane, and click OK. 4 Select the front plane of the right drawer base.

5 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front. 6 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 7 On the Options Bar, click .

8 Sketch six drawers similar to the image below.

614 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

NOTE The exact configuration of the rectangles representing the drawer fronts is not critical. 9 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 10 Add a dimension between the vertical edges of the drawer base and the vertical lines of each bottom drawer. Lock each dimension as you add it. There should be four dimensions as shown.

NOTE Adding and locking these dimensions is very important. If you modify the desk length or the drawer base width, these locked dimension assure that the drawers flex as expected. If you cannot see the locks on the dimensions, zoom the view until you do.

11 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

12 On the Options Bar, select Multiple Alignment. 13 To constrain the four upper drawers, select the left vertical line on the left lowest drawer first, and then select the corresponding left vertical lines of the two drawers above it. After selecting the line of an upper drawer, click the lock that displays to lock the alignment. 14 On the Tools toolbar, click set on the left. 15 On the Tools toolbar, click , and repeat the previous step by selecting the right vertical lines of the drawer

, and repeat the previous two steps on the right set of drawers.

These steps ensure the top drawers remain aligned and flex with the constrained bottom drawer. 16 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 17 On the Design Bar, click Extrusion Properties. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Constraints, enter 20mm for Extrusion End, and click OK. 19 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 20 On the View toolbar, click .

Creating a Furniture Family | 615

Apply material to the desk
21 Draw a pick box around the entire desk to select all the extrusions. 22 On the Options Bar, click . for Material.

23 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Materials and Finishes, click 24 In the Materials dialog box, click Duplicate. 25 In the New Material dialog box, enter Desk - Wood, Cherry, and click OK. 26 In the Materials dialog box, under AccuRender, click for Texture.

27 In the Material Library dialog box, navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Cherry and select Stained, Dark, Polished. 28 Click OK. 29 In the Materials dialog box, click OK. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 31 On the View Control Bar, click the Model Graphics Style control, and select Shading with Edges.

Flex the design
32 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box, you can still see the model. 33 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.

616 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

34 In the Family Types dialog box, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Dimensions, enter 4000 mm for Length, and click Apply. Enter 1500 mm for Depth, and click Apply. Enter 200 mm for Thickness, and click Apply.

The desk should adapt to all the changes. If not, you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. You can also use dimension constraints. 35 In the Family Types dialog box, return the parameters to their original values:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Dimensions, enter 2000 mm for Length. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. Enter 750 mm for Height. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. Click Apply. Click OK.

36 Proceed with the final exercise in this lesson, Defining New Furniture Types.

Defining New Furniture Types
In this exercise, you define new furniture types based on the rolltop desk model that you just created.

Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.

Creating a Furniture Family | 617

Define new furniture types with various widths and depths
1 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 2 In the Family Types dialog box, under Family Types, click New. 3 In the Name dialog box, enter Rolltop Desk 2000 x 1000mm for Name, and click OK. 4 In the Family Types dialog box, verify that Length is 2000 mm and Depth is 1000 mm, and click Apply. 5 Under Family Types, click New. 6 In the Name dialog box, enter Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm for Name, and click OK. 7 In the Family Types dialog box, enter 2100 mm for Length and 1100 mm for Depth, and click Apply. 8 Under Family Types, click New. 9 In the Name dialog box, enter Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm for Name, and click OK. 10 In the Family Types dialog box, enter 2250 mm for Length and 1250 mm for Depth, click Apply, and click OK. You now have three new furniture types defined within your furniture family. 11 On the File menu, click Save. 12 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new furniture family project with the name, Training Furniture.rfa.

Load the new window family into a new project

13 On the Standard toolbar, click 14 On the View toolbar, click .

to start a new project based on your default template.

15 On the View Control Bar, click the Model Graphics Style control and select Shading with Edges. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Component. 17 On the Options Bar, click Load. 18 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of your Training Furniture.rfa file, select it, and click Open. 19 In the Type Selector, select Rolltop Desk 200 x 100mm. 20 Specify a point in the drawing area to add the first desk.

21 In the Type Selector, select Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm. 22 Specify a point to the right of the first desk, and add the second desk.

618 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

23 In the Type Selector, select Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm. 24 Specify a point in the drawing area to the right of the previous two desks, and click to add the third desk.

You now have three new rolltop desks based on the new rolltop desk furniture family prototype. This completes the Creating a Furniture Family lesson.

Creating a Baluster Family
In this lesson, you create a custom baluster and apply it to a set of stair railings. Balusters are simply profile extrusions with an assigned height family parameter.

Drawing a Baluster
In this exercise, you draw a baluster with an extrusion.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. Select Metric Baluster.rft, and click Open.

Create a new family based on the default profile template
1 Expand the left elevation view. 2 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit.

Creating a Baluster Family | 619

The reference planes that display are part of the default baluster template. The bottom of the baluster is at the reference level and the baluster has an assigned default height of 750mm. Top and bottom cut angles for the baluster are also displayed.

Draw the baluster plan profile
3 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Ref. Level.

4 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form  ➤  Solid Extrusion. 5 On the Design Bar, click Set Work Plane. 6 In the Work Plane dialog box, select Ref. Level for Name, and click OK. 7 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, the baluster profile should be centered on the vertical and horizontal reference planes. Draw your profile approximately 30mm wide by 60mm deep. 8 Draw the closed baluster plan profile as shown.

9 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 10 In the Project Browser under Elevations, double-click Front.

620 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

By default, the extrusion has a height of 250mm. 11 On the Design Bar, click Modify and select the extrusion. 12 On the Options Bar, click .

13 Select the top reference plane and select the top edge of the extrusion. 14 Click the lock icon.

15 Save the new baluster family with the name Training Baluster.rfa. The new custom baluster is now complete.

Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run
In this exercise, you assign the new baluster that you just created to a stair run.

Load the new baluster family into a new project
1 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project. 2 In the New Project dialog box, click Browse, and in the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files. Navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. Select the DefaultMetric.rtefile, and click Open. In the New Project Dialog box, click OK.

Draw a straight stair run
3 On the Design Bar, click the Modelling tab. 4 On the Design Bar, click Stairs. 5 Draw a straight stair run as shown.

Creating a Baluster Family | 621

6 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 7 On the File menu, click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 8 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of your Training Baluster.rfa file, select it, and click Open. 9 On the View toolbar, click .

10 On the View menu, click Orient ➤ Southwest. 11 On the View menu, click Shading with Edges.

Apply the custom baluster to the stair run
12 On the Design Bar, click Modify and select the existing railing. 13 On the Options Bar, click .

14 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 15 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Edit for Baluster Placement. 16 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box, under Baluster Family, select Training Baluster : Training Baluster for the Regular baluster.

17 Clear Use Balusters Per Tread on Stairs. 18 Specify Start and End posts as Training Baluster. 19 Click OK. 20 In the Type Properties dialog box, click OK. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 22 Zoom in on the new balusters.

622 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

The stair run is now assigned the new baluster that you created. This completes the Creating a Baluster Family lesson.

Creating Profile Families
A profile is a series of closed two-dimensional lines and arcs. Use profiles to define object cross sections such as railings, balusters, soffits, cornices, and other sweep-defined objects. Create profiles to define frequently used shapes in your details. In this lesson, you create five different profiles: a sweep, a railing, a stair nosing, a reveal, and a host sweep. You then create an in-place sweep based on a 2D path and apply the host sweep to a wall.

Drawing a Sweep Profile
In this exercise, you draw a sweep profile.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile.rft, and click Open.

Create a new family based on the default profile template
1 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, the sweep profile should begin at the reference plane intersection. 2 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the sweep profile with line and arc segments as shown.

3 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Sweep.rfa. The new sweep profile is now complete.

Creating Profile Families | 623

Drawing a Rail Profile
In this exercise, you create a rail profile.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile-Rail.rft, and click Open.

Create a new family based on the default rail profile template
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, verify that Ref. Level is open. The reference planes that display are part of the default rail profile template, with the vertical reference plane labeled as the rail centerline and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the rail top. The rail height is measured from the floor elevation to the rail top.

Draw the rail profile
2 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, the top of the rail profile should coincide with the rail top reference plane. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the rail profile with line segments as shown.

4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Rail.rfa. The new rail profile is now complete.

Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile
In this exercise, you create a stair nosing profile.

624 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile-Stair Nosing.rft, and click Open.

Create a new family based on the default stair nosing profile template
1 Notice the existing planes and text provided within the template. The reference planes that display are part of the default stair nosing profile template, with the vertical reference plane labeled as the riser face and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the tread surface. Additional text specifies the lower-left quadrant as the location for the stair nosing.

Draw the stair nosing profile
2 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, you must draw the stair nosing in the lower-left quadrant. In addition, the top of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the tread surface reference plane and the right edge of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the riser face reference plane. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the stair nosing profile with line and arc segments as shown.

4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Stair Nosing.rfa. The new stair nosing profile is now complete.

Drawing a Reveal Profile
In this exercise, you create a reveal profile. Reveal profiles are used with the Reveal tool in the project environment to define a wall cutout.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile-Reveal.rft, and click Open.

Creating Profile Families | 625

Create a new family based on the default reveal profile template
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, verify that Ref. Level is open. The reference planes that display are part of the default reveal profile template, with the vertical reference plane labeled as the wall face, and the wall body indicated to the right of the wall face reference plane. The horizontal reference plane represents the offset from floor level to the reveal.

Draw the reveal profile
2 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines, their exact location is not critical. However, the left edge of the reveal profile must coincide with wall face reference plane and the reveal must be drawn within the wall body (to the right of the wall face reference plane). 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the reveal profile with line segments as shown.

4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Reveal.rfa. The new reveal profile is now complete.

Drawing a Host Sweep Profile
In this exercise, you create a host sweep profile. Host Sweep profiles are similar to reveal profiles and are used with the Host Sweep tool in the project environment to define a shape to add to a host surface, which may be any vertical surface.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile-Hosted.rft, and click Open.

626 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

Create a new family based on the default host sweep profile template
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, verify that Ref. Level is open. The reference planes that display are part of the default host sweep profile template, with the vertical reference plane labeled as the host face and the host body indicated to the left of the host face reference plane. The reference plane intersection is the origin of the host sweep profile.

Draw the host sweep profile
2 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines, their exact location is not critical. However, the left edge of the host sweep profile must coincide with the host face reference plane, and the host sweep profile must be drawn outside of the host body (to the right of the host face reference plane). 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the reveal profile with line and arc segments as shown.

4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Host Sweep.rfa. The new host sweep profile is now complete.

Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path
In this exercise, you apply the sweep profile that you just created to a 2D path.

Create a new project
1 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project. 2 In the New Project dialog box, click Browse, and in the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select the DefaultMetric.rte file, and click Open. In the New Project Dialog box, click OK.

Creating Profile Families | 627

Specify the family category
3 On the Modelling menu, click Create. 4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box, select Generic Models for Family Category, and click OK. 5 In the Name dialog box, enter Sweep for Name, and click OK.

Sketch the 2D sweep path
6 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Solid Form  ➤  Solid Sweep. 7 On the Design Bar, click Sketch 2D Path. NOTE When you sketch the 2D path, the exact location of the path is not critical. 8 On the Design Bar, click Lines and sketch the 2D path approximately as shown.

9 On the Design Bar, click Finish Path.

Apply the sweep profile to the 2D path
10 On the Options Bar, click Load Profiles. 11 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of Profile - Sweep.rfa, select it, and click Open. 12 In the Type Selector, beside Load Profiles, select Profile - Sweep. 13 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sweep. 14 On the Design Bar, click Finish Family. 15 On the View toolbar, click .

Modify the sweep profile configuration
16 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations, and double-click South.

628 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

17 Zoom in on the right end of the sweep.

18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Ref Plane. 19 Draw a vertical reference plane coincident with the left edge of the profile as shown.

20 Select the sweep profile and, on the Options Bar, click Edit. 21 Select the sweep profile again and, on the Options Bar, click 22 In the Element Properties dialog box, do the following:
■ ■ ■

.

Under Constraints, enter 600 for Vertical Profile Offset. Enter 25 degrees for Angle. Under Other, select Profile Is Flipped.

23 Click OK. 24 On the Design Bar, click Finish Family.

25 On the View toolbar, click

.

The sweep profile application is now complete.

Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls
In this exercise, you apply the host sweep profile that you created to a group of walls.

Create a new project
1 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project.

Creating Profile Families | 629

2 In the New Project dialog box, click Browse, and in the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select the DefaultMetric.rte file, and click Open. In the New Project Dialog box, click OK.

Draw a wall group
3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. NOTE When you draw the walls, their exact location is not critical. 4 Draw four walls as shown.

5 On the View toolbar, click

.

6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Host Sweep ➤ Wall Sweep. 7 On the Options Bar, verify that Horizontal is selected. 8 Select a point on the left wall for the wall sweep.

9 Select a point on the right wall for the next wall sweep.

630 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

10 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Replace the default wall sweep with the new host wall sweep
11 On the File menu, click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 12 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of Profile - Host Sweep.rfa, select it, and click Open. 13 Select the wall sweep and, on the Options Bar, click 14 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 15 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select Profile - Host Sweep : Profile - Host Sweep for Profile, and click OK. 16 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 17 On the View toolbar, click . .

18 In the Dynamic View dialog box, click Spin [Shift]. 19 Move the cursor to rotate your viewpoint to view the host sweep from underneath.

The default wall sweep is replaced with your host sweep profile. This completes the Creating Profile Families lesson.

Creating a Room Tag
In this lesson, you create a room tag which displays room name, floor and ceiling finish, and area with labels added to extract project data.

Specifying Room Tag Parameters
In this exercise, you specify the room tag parameters.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files, and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. Select M_Room Tag.rft, and click Open.

Creating a Room Tag | 631

Create a new tag based on the default room tag template
1 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit.

The reference planes that display are part of the default room tag template.

Edit the 3mm label
2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Label. 3 On the Options Bar, click .

4 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 5 In the Type Properties dialog box, select Underline, and click OK.

Add a 2mm label
6 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 7 In the Type properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 8 In the Name dialog box, enter 2mm for Name, and click OK. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box, enter 2 for the Text Size parameter, clear Underline, and click OK. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK.

Combine labels into a room tag
11 On the Design Bar, click Label. 12 In the Type Selector, verify that Label : 3mm is displayed. 13 On the Options Bar, verify that Center and Middle are selected for Text Alignment. 14 Specify the location for the first label as shown.

15 In the Select Parameter dialog box, select Name, and click OK. 16 Zoom in on the label.

The name label is displayed with the text underlined. 17 In the Type Selector, select Label : 2mm. 18 Specify a point below the Name label for the next label location. 19 In the Select Parameter dialog box, select Floor Finish, and click OK.

632 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

rfa. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol with a circle and lines. and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Generic Annotation. 24 Save the new room tag with the name Finish Area Tag.rft. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. Creating an Annotation Symbol In this lesson. Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol In this exercise. select Ceiling Finish. select Area. select Training Files. 21 In the Select Parameter dialog box. This completes the Creating a Room Tag lesson. and click Open. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. and click OK. Creating an Annotation Symbol | 633 . and click OK. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol and place it in a new project. notice that there is only one view available. The Area label has a predefined value of 150 SF. 23 In the Select Parameter dialog box. Notes included with the template specify annotation parameters. The new room tag is now ready for use. The reference planes that display are part of the default generic annotation template. In the left pane of the New dialog box. 22 Specify a point below the Ceiling Finish label for the last label location. Create a new annotation symbol based on the default generic annotation template 1 In the Project Browser.20 Specify a point below the Floor Finish label for the next label location.

click . 6 On the Options Bar. click Lines.Sketch a north arrow symbol 2 On the Design Bar. 7 Draw a horizontal line from the left side to the right side of the circle through the center point. 4 Specify the reference plane intersection for the circle center point. click . 634 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 8 Draw a vertical line from the top to the center point of the circle. 3 On the Options Bar. 5 Drag the cursor and specify a radius of 8mm.

and click OK. verify that Generic Annotations is selected for Subcategory of. under Modify Subcategories. 14 In the Object Styles dialog box. enter North Line for Name. The new north arrow annotation symbol is ready to edit. click Object Styles. click Modify. click New.9 Draw a vertical line from the center point to the bottom of the circle. Add an annotation objects subcategory 11 On the Settings menu. 17 On the Design Bar. 13 In the New Subcategory dialog box. and click OK. 12 In the Object Styles dialog box. click Modify. 16 In the Type Selector. and select the upper vertical line. select North Line. click Modify. 10 On the Design Bar. Creating an Annotation Symbol | 635 . Apply the new line weight to the upper vertical line 15 On the Design Bar. in the North Line row. select 3 for Line Weight.

Load the new north arrow into a new project 1 On the File menu. click Sheet. select A1 metric. and click Open. click Browse. 636 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Training North Arrow. 5 Click OK. select it. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 19 Save the new north arrow with the name. 12 On the Design Bar. Adding the New North Arrow to a Project In this exercise. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Select the DefaultMetric. In the New Project Dialog box. 6 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. navigate to the location of Training North Arrow.18 Select the template notes and press DELETE. Training North Arrow. and click Open. Creating a Titleblock Family In this lesson. 10 In the Type Selector. click OK. 8 In the Open dialog box. 7 On the File menu. you add the new north arrow annotation symbol that you created to a project. and in the left pane of the New dialog box. you create a custom titleblock sheet based on the A0 metric titleblock template. 11 Specify a point in the lower right corner of the sheet to place the symbol.rfa. select Training Files. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. click New ➤ Project. This completes the Creating an Annotation Symbol lesson.rte file. click Symbol. 2 In the New Project dialog box. The north arrow annotation symbol is now complete.rfa. 4 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box.

graphics. select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. click Lines. and enter -25 for Offset. click . Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet In this exercise.rft. and your project data. 3 On the Options Bar.The titleblock has linework. In the left pane of the New dialog box. Sketch the inside border 2 On the Design Bar. and click Open. text. 4 Specify the upper left corner of the sheet for the first rectangle corner. Creating a Titleblock Family | 637 . You customize the titleblock with a new text style. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. and then specify the lower right corner of the sheet for the second corner of the rectangle. and labels. you draw all of the linework necessary to create a custom A0-size sheet. Create a new family based on the default titleblock template 1 The default titleblock template consists of 4 border lines. click New ➤ Titleblock. Select A0 metric.

6 Move the cursor over the right inside border line. and click to draw a new vertical line. 10 Draw a horizontal line 120mm below the last horizontal line as shown. 638 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . . 7 On the Options Bar. 9 Draw a horizontal line 140mm below the upper inside border as shown. click . and enter 140 for Offset. and click . click 8 Enter 0 for Offset.Add vertical and horizontal lines 5 On the Options Bar. 11 Draw a horizontal line 120mm above the lower inside border as shown.

21 On the Options Bar. select Title Blocks. and select the second and third horizontal lines. click . 17 On the Options Bar. Creating a Titleblock Family | 639 . 15 On the Design Bar. 24 Move the cursor over the eighth horizontal line. 14 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. 19 Move the cursor over the fourth horizontal line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. 13 In the Type Selector. 18 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. 22 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. press CTRL. enter 30 for Offset. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. 23 Move the cursor over the seventh horizontal line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. select Wide Lines. and enter 20 for Offset. 20 Move the cursor over the fifth horizontal line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. 16 In the Type Selector. click Modify. click Lines.12 On the Design Bar. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line.

select Company Logo. and click Open. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock In this exercise. 2 In the Open dialog box. and labels to your titleblock. Add a company logo 1 On the File menu. The titleblock linework is now complete.jpg. 3 Place the image in the upper right corner of the sheet as shown. 640 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 26 Zoom out to view the entire sheet. click Import/Link ➤ Image. you add a company logo. click Modify. navigate to Training Files/Common. text notes.25 On the Design Bar.

click Duplicate. in the text box. 9 In the Name dialog box. under Text. click Text. click Edit/New. enter 10 for Text Size. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. 14 Click outside of the text box to complete the text. 11 Click OK twice. Add company name text 12 Draw a text box under the first horizontal line as shown. 13 Enter Arch Design Inc. and select Bold. Creating a Titleblock Family | 641 . 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. Create a new 10mm text style 5 On the Design Bar. enter 10mm Bold for Name.4 Zoom in on the logo. and click OK. 6 On the Options Bar. click .

and phone number text 20 On the Design Bar. and add an address and phone number as shown. 19 Click outside the text box to complete the modification. 21 Draw a text box below the second horizontal line. Add consultant name.Add company address and phone number text 15 In the Type Selector. 16 Draw a text box below the initial text. Press ENTER to add each new line of text and click outside of the text box to complete the text. address. select Text : 8mm. and enter the following text: ■ ■ ■ ■ Consultant: Address: Address: Telephone: 642 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Modify. 17 On the Design Bar. 18 Select the drag handle. and drag the text note down as shown. and select the last text note. click Text.

23 On the Edit toolbar. click Modify. click . and select the consultant text note. 26 Move the cursor down 120mm and click to specify the first copied text note position. select Constrain and Multiple. Creating a Titleblock Family | 643 . 25 Click inside the Consultant text group. 24 On the Options Bar.22 On the Design Bar.

644 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .27 Move the cursor down another 120mm and click to specify the second copied text note location.

and click to specify the label location. select Project Issue Date.Create a new 5mm text style 28 On the Design Bar. enter 5 for Text Size. Creating a Titleblock Family | 645 . enter 5mm for Name. click Duplicate. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. The label displays a default value wrapped to 3 lines. click . 39 Draw a text box in the next space up. 37 Draw a text box in the next space up. 29 On the Options Bar. 42 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Date field. 43 In the Select Parameter dialog box. Add drawing data labels 40 On the Design Bar. and enter Date:. select Text : 5mm. under Text. and enter Sheet Number:. 31 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Label. 38 Draw a text box in the next space up. and enter Checked By:. select Right and Bottom for Text Alignment. click Text. and click OK. 32 In the Name dialog box. 34 Click OK twice. 41 On the Options Bar. 36 Draw a text box in the lower right space of the titleblock. and click OK. 33 In the Type Properties dialog box. and enter Drawn By:. click Edit/New. Add drawing data text 35 In the Type Selector.

and click to specify the label location. 48 In the Select Parameter dialog box. and click OK. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. 47 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Checked By field. 45 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Drawn By field. and click to specify the label location. 646 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 46 In the Select Parameter dialog box. select Drawn By.44 Select the left drag handle on the label. select Checked By and click OK.

click Center and Middle. Create a new 15mm label style 49 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 57 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Sheet Number field. select Sheet Number. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. click Edit/New. 50 On the Options Bar. and click to specify the label location. enter 15mm Label for Name. 52 In the Type Properties dialog box. click . 61 In the Select Parameter dialog box. under Text. click Duplicate. 62 Select the left drag handle on the label. and click to specify the label location. select Label : 15mm Label. select Project Number. 54 In the Type Properties dialog box. 55 Click OK twice. click Label. and click OK. Add sheet number and project data labels 56 In the Type Selector. 53 In the Name dialog box. 51 In the Element Properties dialog box. 59 On the Options Bar.NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. enter 15 for Text Size. and click OK. 58 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 60 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Date field. Creating a Titleblock Family | 647 .

click . Create a 4mm label style 69 On the Design Bar. under Text. and click OK. click Duplicate. 70 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 67 In the Select Parameter dialog box. select Client Name.63 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Number field. 68 Select the left drag handle on the label. 648 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Label. click Edit/New. 71 In the Element Properties dialog box. 73 In the Name dialog box. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 65 Select the left drag handle on the label. 72 In the Type Properties dialog box. enter 4 for Text Size. enter 4mm Label. 64 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 74 In the Type Properties dialog box. 75 Click OK twice. and click OK. select Project Name. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. and click to specify the label location. and click to specify the label location. 66 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Name field.

click Left and Middle. The titleblock graphics. and click Open. click New ➤ Project. select it. select Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. click Modify.rfa. click Sheet. 79 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 5 In the Open dialog box. 81 Save the new titleblock family with the name Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. click OK. you add the titleblock that you created to a new project. 78 Place the cursor in the border area below the left side of the Sheet Number field. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder.rfa file. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project In this exercise. select Training Files. and click to specify the label location. 77 On the Options Bar. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. click Browse. click Load.rte file.Add Project Path label 76 In the Type Selector. 7 Click OK. text. and then adjust the width of the File Path field so that it is approximately equal to the width of the Sheet Number field. In the New Project Dialog box. and click Open. Load the new titleblock family into a new project 1 On the File menu. select File Path. 4 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. Select the DefaultMetric. select 4mm Label. and labels are now complete. and click OK. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and in the left pane of the New dialog box. 2 In the New Project dialog box. Creating a Titleblock Family | 649 . 80 On the Design Bar. navigate to the location of Training A0Horizontal Titleblock.

11 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. Enter Office Building for Project Name. 14 Click OK. click . In-place families interact with the building model according to their assigned family category. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter January 1. Enter 2005-01 for Project Number. Enter Jane Smith for Client Name. click Project Information. 650 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Modify titleblock properties 8 On the Design Bar. and click OK. and add a dome roof and a concave floor with revolved forms as in-place families. enter Name for Drawn By. 2005 for Project Issue Date. click Modify and select the titleblock. You create an in-place family in your current project rather than in the Family Editor. Creating In-Place Families In this lesson. under Other. 9 On the Options Bar. 13 In the Type Properties dialog box. 12 On the Settings menu. This completes the Creating a Titleblock Family lesson. you start with an incomplete building information model of the Pantheon. Enter In Progress for Project Status.

you add a dome roof with oculus (circular opening) to the Pantheon building model. click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. select Training Files and navigate to the Common folder. you create the dome roof with a revolved form. Next. on the Settings menu. and double-click South. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family In this exercise. and set the suffix to None. Select c_Pantheon. expand Elevations. and click Open. set the Area to Square meters. expand Views (all).NOTE This project was created using an imperial template and components. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. format the Area to use 2 decimal places. Creating In-Place Families | 651 . Open the existing Pantheon building model 1 On the View menu. To change the units of measurement to meters.rvt. click Project Units. 2 In the Project Browser. Set the Length units to millimeters. click Orient ➤ Southeast. Sketch the roof cross-section with a closed profile in an elevation view.

click . and click Open View. and click OK. click Solid Form  ➤  Solid Revolve. 12 On the Options Bar. and click OK. select Section: Wall Section . Specify the dome roof revolved form parameters 6 On the Design Bar. click Create. click Set Work Plane. and click OK.Center. select Roofs for Family Category. 5 In the Name dialog box. 7 On the Design Bar. 13 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis.Specify the Roofs family category 3 On the Modelling menu. 10 In the Go To View dialog box. 8 In the Work Plane dialog box. Draw the axis of rotation for the dome roof revolved form 11 On the Design Bar. 9 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. enter Dome for Name. and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis. 4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box. click Axis. The center wall section view is displayed. 652 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Pick a Plane.

click Lines. click . 17 Move the cursor out. 16 Specify the intersection of the Upper Cornice horizontal reference plane and vertical axis as the circle center point. 15 On the Options Bar. Creating In-Place Families | 653 . until it creates an intersection with the level 1 reference plane.Draw the lower face of the dome roof 14 On the Design Bar.

654 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 21 Snap to reference plane intersections. Draw the oculus rim profile 18 Zoom in on the top of the circle. The reference planes that display are guides for drawing the oculus rim profile. 19 On the Options Bar.The circle is tangent to the interior wall face and the level 1 reference plane at the floor line. and draw the five rim profile line segments in the shape of a reverse C as shown. click . and select Chain. 20 Specify the reference plane intersection for the start point of the rim profile as shown.

Draw the upper face of the dome roof 26 On the Design Bar. click Lines. The circle is trimmed between the rim profile and the first split point. 23 On the Options Bar. select Delete Inner Segment.Split the circle 22 On the Tools toolbar. click . 25 Select the intersection of the circle and the lower left vertical line of the profile as shown. 24 Select a point on the circle to the right of the rim profile. 27 On the Options Bar. Creating In-Place Families | 655 . click . 28 Specify the endpoint of the upper left rim profile line segment as the arc start point.

click Lines. 30 Specify a point on the arc approximately as shown. 656 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and then draw a vertical line down the interior wall face to the lower dome roof face tangent point. click and select Chain.29 Specify the top of the stairs in the wall section as the arc endpoint. 32 On the Options Bar. Draw two lines to close the dome roof profile 31 On the Design Bar. 33 Draw a horizontal line from the arc endpoint to the interior edge of the wall.

The dome roof in-place family is now complete. under Materials and Finishes. The dome roof closed profile is now complete.Trim the arc below the tangent point 34 On the Tools toolbar. click . 38 In the Materials dialog box.Cast-in-Place Lightweight Concrete for Name. Specify lightweight concrete for the dome roof material 36 On the Design Bar. click . 42 On the View toolbar. 41 On the Design Bar. select Concrete . and then select a point on the arc above the tangent point as the segment to keep. click Revolution Properties. click Finish Sketch. 40 On the Design Bar. click OK. 35 Select the interior face of the wall. Creating In-Place Families | 657 . 37 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. click Finish Family. click for Material. 39 In the Element Properties dialog box.

and click OK. you create the concave floor slab for the Pantheon building model. click Set Work Plane. enter Concave Floor for Name. 5 On the Design Bar. 8 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. 11 On the Options Bar. click Axis. 658 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Draw the axis of rotation for the floor revolved form 10 On the Design Bar. and click OK. double-click South. and click OK. 6 On the Design Bar.Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family In this exercise. click Create. select Section: Wall Section . select Floors for Family Category. click . and click Open View. 4 In the Project Browser under Elevations. click Solid Form  ➤  Solid Revolve. 2 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box. Specify the concave floor revolved form parameters 1 On the Modelling menu. 3 In the Name dialog box. 7 In the Work Plane dialog box. 9 In the Go To View dialog box.Center. select Pick a Plane.

14 On the Options Bar. 15 Specify the intersection of the T. 16 Drag the cursor up 800 mm. NOTE You may need to zoom in closer to the intersection to select the first point. Draw the concave floor profile 13 On the Design Bar.12 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. and specify the next point for the floor profile as shown. and select Chain. for the start point of the floor profile as shown. Creating In-Place Families | 659 . click .O. 17 Specify the intersection of the level 1 reference plane and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile as shown. and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis. click Lines. Footing level line and the axis.

The concave floor closed profile is now complete. select Cobblestone for Name. 660 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 21 In the Element Properties dialog box.O. 25 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch.O. 23 In the Element Properties dialog box. 24 On the Design Bar. click Revolution Properties. and click OK. Specify cobblestone for the concave floor material 20 On the Design Bar. 22 In the Materials dialog box. 19 Specify the intersection of the of the T. Footing level line and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile. 26 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. click for Material. double-click 3D Section View. click OK. click Finish Family.18 Specify the intersection of the T. Footing level line and the axis for the last point of the floor profile. This completes the Creating In-Place Families lesson.

formula-based parameters. not specifically how to make a floor truss. you learn the process and methodology of creating a new family. you will understand the process. In this case. In exercises that become increasingly complex. the length of the trimmable truss determines the size and grade of the truss chords. This type of component uses a broad spectrum of design techniques within the Family Editor. and the specific techniques for creating a parametric component. and detail level controls. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you the proper approach to parametric component creation.Parametric Component Design Techniques 20 In this tutorial. At the end of this tutorial. During this tutorial. assigned subcatecories. you create a new parametric component within the Family Editor. The truss also has multiple types. methodology. you learn specific techniques and best practices that you can apply broadly when creating other families in Autodesk Revit Building. The parametric component that you design in this tutorial is an open-joist wood floor truss. In the center of the truss is a mechanical service clearance to accommodate HVAC systems. 661 .

beams. imagine that your firm specializes in light commercial and residential design. planning ahead is one of the most important steps. In addition. you should avoid over-designing the component. NOTE When creating a new family. you accomplish two main tasks: you determine the component needs and select the family template that is suited to those needs. 2 What additional design requirements affect the design plan for this beam family? ■ ■ ■ The truss should automatically adjust depth as the length changes. and structural walls. then you should design only what is needed to satisfy the requirements. In this lesson. Knowing why you are creating a particular family and what you need it to do will drive the specific design process. It should also be an available option within a beam system. Using the new family within a project 3 How will you use the family within a project? 662 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Your assignment is to create a truss that adapts parametrically to changes in the building design. the beam design must be advanced in order to have the flexibility that the specs require. A rectangular mechanical clearance opening must be centered within the beam. For training purposes. the component should use the point-to-point insertion method with the joist web members adjusting parametrically. The design requirements dictate how simple or complex a family must be. there is a computing performance cost that must be paid within the project. This decision dictates which family template you begin with. In the next exercise. Although this solution is possible. In this case. and also works intuitively with them. Two types should be created. you select the best available template with which to begin the new structural beam family. Determining Component Needs In this exercise. a 2x3 truss and a 2x4 truss. the design spec requires that the floor truss snaps to columns. a generic floor-based component might work. For every complexity added to a family. Because this component has to interact closely with other structural components.Planning a Parametric Component Family Creating a new parametric component family is no different than any other design process. this must be a structural beam component. it is not the best solution. Decide component type and design requirements 1 What type of component are you designing? In this case. it is an open-joist wood floor truss. you determine the requirements of the new component. In this case. Take this into consideration during your design planning. If the design requirements can be met with a simple design. If the component did not have to interact so closely with other structural components.

How will the component need to be scheduled? This is an important question. Planning a Parametric Component Family | 663 .■ What materials need the most control? These materials. In addition. you determine which family template provides the best starting point for the new beam family. would require Instance or Type parameters. In the previous exercise. What materials remain constant throughout a project? The chord and web material will always be wood. especially if you are going to be nesting subcomponents that may require separate scheduling. you determined that the component type is a structural beam. 4 Continue with the next exercise. What types are most commonly used? In this training case. the means in which to gather the information you require within the schedule needs to be built into the component. Selecting the Family Template. This critical decision reduces the quantity of template options. ■ ■ ■ You have completed the planning stage for the new family. These materiails can be applied using Object Styles. the planning stage and questions may differ. Selecting the Family Template In this exercise. such as wood type. only the 2x3 and 2x4 trusses with wood web members are required. Depending on the family you are designing.

this template resides within the training folders and should be opened from there. 5 In the New dialog box. These planes are designed specifically to accommodate point-to-point beam insertion and the special snapping and display requirements of beam components. notice the preview. 664 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques .Complex and Trusses. and notice the preview. ■ Metric Structural Framing .Beams and Braces. Like most generic family templates. 3 In the New dialog box. The New dialog box opens to the templates folder that is specified in your Settings ➤ Options dialog box.rft and notice the preview. navigate to it.rft. This template is the best starting point for the new family. Select it so that the preview displays. spacing. select Metric Generic Model floor based. 4 In the New dialog box. In addition.rft. 6 Select Metric Structural Framing . For training purposes. You should be in the Metric Templates folder.rft This template is design specifically to accommodate point-to-point insertion and the specific snapping. Although the template name suggests this is the appropriate template. If you are not in this folder.Beams and Braces. It provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back). There are two structural framing templates provided. NOTE Do not double-click the template or open it. Because of its simplicity. it is not designed to create a component capable of point-to-point insertion. Notice that most of the template names include the component type. do not open this template. NOTE Although this is the template you use to start the tutorial. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. it provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back). it is not the best starting point for the beam family. scroll through the various template options. and display functions required by structural beams. scroll to the structural framing templates.Review the template options 1 Close any open projects or families. ■ Metric Structural Framing . 7 Select Metric Structural Framing . On the right side of the New dialog box.Complex and Trusses.rft This template is designed for complex framing components and trusses. the template name often includes information how the component would be used with a project. for example: wall based or floor based. Notice this template offers three horizontal planes on each side of the center (left/right) reference plane.

When a beam family based on this template is added to a project. Level In this view.Open the family template 8 In the left pane of the New dialog box. using reference planes and lines is considered more reliable and is therefore a best practice. double-click Front. As you add solid geometry later in the tutorial. double-click View 1. 10 Maximize the view. 11 In the Project Browser. you can see the rectangular beam extrusion and a symbolic line. 9 Open Metric Structural Framing . Level. and dimensions that provide a skeleton for the solid geometry. creating a skeleton to build upon is the foundation of a new component family. Creating the Component Skeleton | 665 . Creating the Component Skeleton In this lesson. Creating the Component Skeleton. under Elevations. the geometry supplied can be used or discarded as needed. lines. Floor Plan: Ref. This beam extrusion is supplied within the template as a starting point.Beams and Braces. however. NOTE When creating or modifying a family. Notice that the beam extrusion is centered on the level line. you add the reference planes. 12 In the Project Browser. Dimensioning the solid geometry directly also works. 13 Proceed to the next lesson. Floor Plan: Ref. Like many templates. under 3D Views. Therefore. you snap and lock the solid geometry to these reference planes and lines. the top of the beam extrusion is aligned to the associated level of the plan view. click the Training Files icon.rft located in the Metric  ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates ➤  folder. it is not necessary to create a skeleton of reference planes or lines and then align and lock the solid geometry to it.

The six reference planes shown in the project below were added as a training reference. Reference planes that display within a family file do not display within a project. 666 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . they do not display when the family is loaded into a project. notice the location of the beam extents. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you started in the previous exercise. The two arrows point to the snap points that the left and right reference planes refer to. TIP The name also displays on the Status Bar. you add reference planes to the beam design. In the project plan view image below. Reference Plane: Left. NOTE The reference planes shown in the project image below were added as a training reference.Adding Reference Planes In this exercise. 3 Repeat this step for the other two vertical planes on the left side. The reference planes in this template are designed to accommodate the point-to-point insertion of a beam component. double-click Ref. In the image below. Level. 2 Place the cursor over the leftmost vertical reference plane until the tooltip displays the name of the plane. ■ Member Left and Member Right: These two planes refer to the left and right extent of the beam solid geometry when displayed in a medium or fine display view of a project. These reference planes act as part of the skeleton to which the solid geometry will align and lock. Review existing reference planes 1 In the Project Browser. ■ Left and Right: These two planes mark the points where the beam intersects with other columns. The reference planes and their respective explanations are listed below. two steel columns and a steel beam have been added to a project. under Floor Plans.

Add new reference planes 6 On the Design Bar. Creating the Component Skeleton | 667 . click . click Ref Plane. it is important to be familiar with the template so you do not create duplicate or conflicting planes. 7 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm above the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back). In a later exercise. 5 On the Edit Toolbar. Each family template has a different set of reference planes established within it. Delete existing solid geometry 4 Select the rectangular beam extrusion.■ Stick Symbol Left and Stick Symbol Right: These two planes refer to the extents of the stick symbol when it is loaded into a project and the plan view display setting is coarse. NOTE Be careful not to select the symbolic line. you add the solid geometry for the truss as a sweep. Before adding new reference planes.

under Elevations. Level as the mirror axis. and select the Level: Ref. click on the Edit toolbar.8 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm below the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back). To do this. 10 On the Design Bar. Level. TIP You can also use the mirror tool to accomplish this task. 12 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm above the Level: Ref. planes to control beam depth 9 In the Project Browser. Add ref. Level. select the lower horizontal reference plane. double-click Front. You will use these two reference planes to control the beam width and keep it centered on the reference plane: Center (Front/Back). 11 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm below the Level: Ref. 668 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . click Ref Plane.

click to place it as shown. and specify an Offset of 38 mm. click to place it. 13 On the Design Bar. 17 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Left. This beam requires additional reference planes to complete the truss skeleton. Creating the Component Skeleton | 669 .These two reference planes mark the top and bottom extents of the beam. TIP You can control the direction of the offset by moving the cursor slightly to either side of the line you intend to pick. 15 Place the cursor over the top horizontal reference plane. 14 On the Options Bar. click . and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it. When a copy of the reference plane displays below it. click to place it as shown. 16 Place the cursor over the lower horizontal reference plane and when a copy of the reference plane displays above it. click to place it as shown. The next four reference planes that you add mark the thickness of the truss chords. 18 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Right. click Ref Plane. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it.

click to place it as shown. under Floor Plans. 24 In the Project Browser. 19 On the Options Bar. 22 On the Options Bar. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it. cleaning up some of the extents would make the view easier. specify an Offset of 200 mm. Level. 20 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). which you do in the next exercise. double-click Ref. you must add four additional reference planes to accommodate the center chase. 21 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). specify an Offset of 238 mm. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it. 670 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 23 Use the Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right) to add reference planes to the left and right of it as shown below. Although there is nothing technically incorrect regarding the reference planes in this view. click to place it as shown.You have completed the reference planes that make up the skeleton of the chords. Notice the reference planes that you added in the elevation view. Before you move on to the next exercise.

that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. you add some of the dimensions and constraints that control how the open web floor truss adapts to changes in its geometry. navigate to the folder of your choice. It allows you to dimension between parallel lines. After adding the dimension. 27 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating the Component Skeleton | 671 . By applying dimensions and constraints directly to the skeleton of the family. Adding Dimensions and Constraints. Dimension chord width 1 On the Design Bar. you can make sure the new family adapts to changes in geometry as expected before adding solid geometry to it. Make sure you remember where you saved it. click . This tool is the aligned dimension tool. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings during this procedure. NOTE You use this family for the remainder of this tutorial. click Dimension. separate the overriding values by dragging the value controls as shown. 3 Select each of the horizontal reference planes and place the dimension to the left as shown.25 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Options Bar. 28 In the Save As dialog box. and click Save. Adding Dimensions and Constraints In this exercise. Wood Floor Truss. click Modify. enter Wood Floor Truss for File name.rfa. Dataset Continue to use the dataset.

You may need to use the TAB key to toggle the selection to the reference plane. NOTE The center horizontal reference plane overlaps the level line: Ref. Add the depth dimension and equality constraint 8 In the Project Browser. 10 Select the upper horizontal reference plane. click Modify. and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint.4 On the Design Bar. place the dimension to the left as shown. and click the EQ symbol when it displays. 5 Select the dimension you added in the previous step. click Dimension. and the lower horizontal reference plane. double-click Front. 6 On the Design Bar. 7 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane. 9 On the Design Bar. This ensures that changes to the chord width are distributed equally across the center reference plane. Level. under Elevations. 672 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . click Dimension. the Center reference plane. Place the dimension as shown.

These dimensions refer to the chord thickness. Dimension chord thickness 14 On the right side of the model. place the dimension under the lines as shown and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint. add two dimensions as shown. 13 Add a dimension referring to the reference planes to the left and right of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. and place it below the dimension you added previously. Creating the Component Skeleton | 673 .11 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane and move it to the left of the equality constrained dimension you added previously. Dimension and constrain the center chase width 12 Add a dimension referring to the three vertical reference planes in the center of the model.

674 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . under Floor Plans. consider making it a type parameter. There are many types of parameters and various ways to create them. Wood Floor Truss. Throughout the tutorial. In the next exercise. If the component is something that is cut or otherwise extremely flexible. consider making the material parameter an instance parameter. and constraints as needed. dimensions. ■ ■ Dataset Continue to use the dataset. In addition. they allow you to “flex” the model in order to test your design. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. consider making it an instance parameter.rfa. double-click Ref. These dimensions refer to the chord thickness of the vertical members and the members that border the center chase. you label the dimensions that you added in the previous exercise. When you label a dimension in the Family Editor. You choose whether to make it an instance or type parameter. you create new length parameters that control the basic dimensions of the floor truss. When you design a new family. Create the chord width parameter 1 In the Project Browser. it is important to decide how much control over the component will be required after the component is loaded into a project. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. Things to consider when deciding “instance” or “type:” ■ ■ If the component comes in standard sizes that must be maintained. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. You should lean towards simplicity whenever possible. If the component has material that varies per component. you label the dimensions to create instance and type parameters. You have finished adding the dimensions and constraints that control how the truss skeleton adapts to changes. Level. The parameters that you create when designing a family are the same parameters used within a project to control the instance and type parameters of that family. you will add additional reference planes. Creating New Length Parameters. Creating New Length Parameters In this exercise. If the parameter controls something that usually remains constant by its nature.15 Add four dimensions as shown. consider making it a type parameter. In this exercise. it becomes a parameter. These parameters are the key to providing flexibility within a project.

select Add parameter for Label. 6 Select the dimension on the left that refers to the depth of the truss. select Add parameter for Label. enter Depth for Name.2 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the chord as shown. 7 On the Options Bar. Under Parameter Data. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. ■ Create truss depth parameter 5 In the Project Browser. select Family parameter. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Creating the Component Skeleton | 675 . Select Type. 3 On the Options Bar. Under Parameter Data. This indicates whether the parameter is a type or instance parameter. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. Select Type. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Click OK. under Elevations. double-click Front. enter Chord Width for Name. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. select Family parameter. Click OK.

enter Center Chase Width for Name. Under Parameter Data. 10 On the Options Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. enter Chord Thickness for Name. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. select Add parameter for Label. select Family parameter. Create chord thickness parameter 12 On the right side of the model. 11 In the Parameter Properties dialog box.Create center chase width parameter 9 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the center chase interior. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Click OK. select Add parameter for Label. select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the lower horizontal truss chord as shown. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. Under Parameter Data. Click OK. Select Type. 13 On the Options Bar. Select Type. 676 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . select Family parameter. 14 In the Parameter Properties dialog box.

TIP You may need to drag the text label downward as shown. 17 Apply the Chord Thickness label to the vertical chords and the vertical members on the left and right side of the center chase as shown. select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the upper horizontal truss chord. 16 On the Options Bar. Creating the Component Skeleton | 677 . Apply chord thickness label to other dimensions 15 On the right side of the model. select Chord Thickness for Label.

you should always do it from the Family Types dialog box. When you open the Family Types dialog. this is the most accurate way of testing how the family will behave within a project. or Reduce the Revit window and keep the model centered in the drawing area. Even though you have yet to add any model geometry to the family. Flexing the Component Model.18 On the Design Bar. you should also test it to make sure it works as expected.rfa. thus forcing the model to adapt to the changes. When you flex a family. 19 Click Cancel. Flexing the Component Model One of the most important steps in the process of creating a new parametric component is the flexing of the model. Adding or modifying a parameter. click Save. Wood Floor Truss. you can drag it off the Revit window as shown. ■ 678 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . click Family Types. 20 On the File menu. After you verify this. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Preparing the family for flexing 1 When flexing the model. Nesting a component. these parameters will be available within the Type Properties dialog box for the beam. When you load this family into a project. Dimensions. rather than by manually stretching or manipulating the objects within the family. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding a new constraint. In this exercise. it is important to verify that the reference lines adjust to changes as constraints are maintained. notice the labelled dimensions display under the list of parameters and under the group. Flexing the model means to change parameter values. You should flex a new family after: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Adding or modifying an element. When you change a parameter value and apply the change. When you open the Family Types dialog box. You should flex the model after any major change to the design. you can drag it to the opposing corner. If you add a new material parameter. In the Family Types dialog box. This is not limited to length parameters. you flex the model to test the various length parameters that you added in the previous exercise. you can add the model geometry to the skeleton and be relatively certain that it will also flex as expected. Adding or modifying a parameter formula. you need to be able to see the model within the drawing area and also apply new values within the Family Types dialog box: ■ Maximize the Revit window and adjust the zoom settings so the model is in one corner of the drawing area.

and click Apply. Flex the truss depth 3 In the Family Types dialog box.Adjust your display using one of the two methods before opening the Family Types dialog box. Level. and drag the dialog box so that you can view the model. 800 mm for Center Chase Width. Creating the Component Skeleton | 679 . 2 On the Design Bar. click Family Types. and click Apply. 4 Enter 450 mm for Depth. Notice that the model adapts to all of the changes. notice that the reference planes marking the chord thickness adapted to the change in depth while maintaining their specified value. In addition. Also notice the equality constraint spreads the additional depth evenly above and below the Ref. enter 600 mm for Depth. Notice the depth of the truss adapts to the change in dimension value. under Dimensions. 80 mm for Chord Thickness. Verifying that the entire model adapts to changes and making sure nothing “breaks” is the essence of flexing.

you align and lock their position. Adding Solid Geometry.Reset parameters 5 In the Family Types dialog box. you create the top and bottom chords of the truss.rfa. click Save. you load the truss into a project to verify that it works as designed. After flexing the design. you should always flex the design after you add new elements or modify the existing design in any way. When working within the Family Editor. After creating the extrusions. Add chord extrusions 1 In the Project Browser. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. you add the solid geometry using extrusions for the chords and trimmable plywood ends. 7 Proceed to the next lesson. Enter 400 mm for Center Chase Width. double-click Left. Click OK. Adding Solid Geometry In this lesson. 6 On the File menu. Enter 38 mm for Chord Thickness. After adding the chords. 680 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . you constrain them using a combination of locked alignments and labelled dimensions. Creating Solid Extrusions In this exercise. 2 Zoom in around the center of the truss design. Wood Floor Truss. reset the parameters back to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 300 mm for Depth. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. Click Apply. under Elevations.

click the part of the line you want to keep. Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes. click Lines. 4 In the Work Plane dialog box. 10 On the Design Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. 12 Select the four reference planes that border the bottom chord as shown. click Lines. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click Name. click . 11 On the Options Bar. and verify that Lock is selected. the lines will no longer overlap. 8 On the Tools toolbar. You can ignore this warning because after you finish trimming. click .3 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 7 Select the four reference planes that border the top chord as shown. click . and select Lock. 9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the top chord sketch as shown. select Reference Plane: Member Left. When using the Trim tool. NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. Adding Solid Geometry | 681 . 6 On the Options Bar.

2 Enter SD. Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry In this exercise. 682 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . you add constraints to the chord extrusions and then flex the family to verify that it works as designed. double-click Front. 17 On the File menu. under Elevations. click Save. Notice the chord extrusions and the symbolic line. 16 In the Project Browser. this is the keyboard shortcut for Shading with Edges.13 On the Tools toolbar. click .rfa. 15 On the Design Bar. 3 Select the chord extrusions. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. 14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the bottom chord sketch as shown. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Finish Sketch. double-click View 1. This makes the chord extrusions more visible within the view. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. Wood Floor Truss. under 3D Views. Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry. Constrain the extrusion ends 1 In the Project Browser. The chords need to be aligned and locked to the correct reference planes in order for them to flex with changes in the geometry.

not the member right or member left reference planes. Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane. and click OK. and click Apply. Adding Solid Geometry | 683 . Add a new dimension and constraint 9 On the Design Bar. Notice that the extrusions did not move or change their length. Click the lock symbol to lock the dimension value. click Apply.4 Drag the right arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Right. This is because the length dimension references the extreme left and right reference planes. click Family Types. You’ll want to set up your screen so you can see the model truss while the Family Types dialog box is open. you must add a new constraint before flexing the length. Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane. On the Design Bar. Flex the design 6 Prepare the view for flexing in the same way you did during the flexing exercise. click Dimension. 8 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 6000 for Length. as shown. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. as shown. enter 3000 for Length. Therefore. 10 Add a dimension between the reference plane: Left and the reference plane: Member Left as shown. 5 Drag the left arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Left.

you load this family into a project to test how it works within a project environment. you need a truss long enough to add web arrays and do not need to return the truss back to its original length value. use the Align tool and add the constraint. 684 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . double-click View 1. Notice that the extrusions adjusted to the change in length. click Family Types. you add the web members. Afterwards. 14 Click OK. enter 6000 for Length.11 Add a dimension between the reference plane: Right and the reference plane: Member Right as shown. Flex the chord width. In a later exercise. 13 In the Family Types dialog box. In this particular case. TIP If one of the extrusion ends did not adjust as expected. flex the model once again to make sure the fix works as expected. This tells you that the constraints on the extrusion ends are working. Therefore. and thickness 15 In the Project Browser. adding this constraint to the model has no impact on how it works within a project. and click Apply. depth. This is a two-point placement beam family that uses the member left and member right reference planes as the determining extents of this component. Click the lock symbol to lock the dimension value. Later in this lesson. under 3D Views. Flex the length 12 On the Design Bar.

Wood Floor Truss. that allows you to easily return to the original values. Click Apply.16 Enter SD for Shading with Edges. ■ The chords should adjust to each of the new values. and click OK. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. it is important to remember the original values so you can reset them afterwards. click Family Types. Therefore. try picking a method. 19 Specify the beam values shown below: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth. you add the extrusions for the truss ends and the center chase. Adding Solid Geometry | 685 . 17 On the Design Bar. Enter 89mm for Chord Width. click Save. such as doubling. Enter 76mm for Chord Thickness. Click Apply. Enter 200mm for Chord Width. Creating Additional Solid Geometry In this exercise. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter 600mm for Depth. TIP When flexing. Creating Additional Solid Geometry.rfa. Enter 38mm for Chord Thickness. 18 In the Family Types dialog box. 20 On the File menu.

click Lines. click . 686 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . and verify that Lock is selected. 11 On the Options Bar.Add the center chase extrusions 1 In the Project Browser. 12 Select the four reference planes that border the right. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. This will make it easier to sketch the center chase extrusions. 9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the left. 8 On the Tools toolbar. click the Hide/Isolate control. vertical member of the center chase as shown. 10 On the Design Bar. Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes. vertical member of the center chase as shown. under Floor Plans. 14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the center chase sketch as shown. and verify that Lock is selected. You can ignore this warning because after you finish trimming. click . the lines will no longer overlap. double-click Ref. 5 On the Design Bar. click . 7 Select the four reference planes that border the left. 4 On the Design Bar. Level. 2 Zoom in on the center of the truss and select the model line that represents the beam stick symbol. 6 On the Options Bar. 3 On the View Control Bar. 13 On the Tools toolbar. and click Hide Object. vertical member of the center chase sketch as shown. click . click Lines.

20 Click the bottom edge of one of the chase extrusions. You may need to press TAB to toggle the selection options. Adding Solid Geometry | 687 . 19 For the align-to reference.15 On the Design Bar. This next process is very important. double-click Front. Align and lock the new extrusions 18 On the Tools menu. it is considered a best practice to align and lock to reference planes. select the reference line on the top of the lower chord as shown. 21 Align the top edge of the chase extrusions with the reference line coincident with the lower edge of the upper chord. 17 Zoom in on the center chase. and lock the alignment as shown. click Align. click the lock symbol to lock the alignment. under Elevations. click Finish Sketch. The ends of the chase extrusions must be aligned and locked to the horizontal reference planes coincident with the interior edges of the chords. 16 In the Project Browser. and after the alignment. Although you can align and lock extrusion to extrusion.

Clean up the view 26 Zoom to Fit.22 On the Design Bar. This will make subsequent work much easier. click Family Types. 29 On the Options Bar. Click Apply. 27 Clean up the view by moving the dimensions off to the side as shown. click Modify. Enter 800mm for Center Chase Width. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter 486mm for Depth. and click OK. Flex the center chase 23 On the Design Bar. 688 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Click Apply. Add the truss end extrusions 28 Select the Chord Thickness dimension in the lower-left corner as shown. select Add Parameter for Label. If it does not. The truss should adapt to all the changes. reset the values as follows: ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth. redo any problematic alignments and constraints. Enter 400mm for Center Chase Width. 25 In the Family Types dialog box. 24 In the Family Types dialog box.

34 In the Family Types dialog box. select the upper horizontal reference plane. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. 32 On the Options Bar. Adding Solid Geometry | 689 . 42 On the Options Bar. 43 Select the Center (Front/Back) reference plane twice to add a sketch line to each side as shown. on the lower chord. 41 On the upper chord. 36 Zoom around the truss elements. click Family Types. 40 On the Options Bar. 33 On the Design Bar.30 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. and click OK. click . double-click Right. under Elevations. select the lower horizontal reference plane. Click OK. select Reference Plane: Member Right for Name. 31 Select the Chord Thickness dimension in the lower-right corner of the view. Select Instance. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 38 In the Work Plane dialog box. select Trimmable End Length for Label. These two lines represent the upper and lower boundary of the sketch. click Lines. 37 On the Design Bar. 39 On the Design Bar. enter 300mm for Trimmable End Length. Sketch the right end extrusion 35 In the Project Browser. click Apply. under Parameter Data. and click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Trimmable End Length for Name. enter19mm for Offset. under Dimensions. and verify that Lock is selected.

verify that 300mm is specified for the Extrusion End value. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and click OK. 50 Zoom around the truss elements. on the lower chord. 47 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . and verify that Lock is selected. select Reference Plane: Member Left for Name. 53 On the Design Bar. 52 In the Work Plane dialog box. under Constraints. 45 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the end sketch as shown. 54 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. These two lines represent the upper and lower boundary of the sketch. click Extrusion Properties. 57 Select the Center (Front/Back) reference plane twice to add a sketch line to each side as shown. 48 On the Design Bar. select the upper horizontal reference plane. under Elevations. Sketch the left end extrusion 49 In the Project Browser. click Lines. 46 On the Design Bar.44 On the Tools toolbar. 55 On the upper chord. double-click Left. select the lower horizontal reference plane. enter 19mm for Offset. 690 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . click . 51 On the Design Bar. 56 On the Options Bar. and click OK.

66 Select the Member Left reference plane as the align-to point. Adding Solid Geometry | 691 . Although the truss ends line up with the reference planes controlling the length of the trimmable ends. NOTE This extrusion value must be negative in order to push the extrusion towards the center of the truss. 64 Zoom in on the left end of the truss. 62 On the Design Bar. they are not aligned and locked to those reference planes and would not pass a flex test. under Constraints. specify -300mm for the Extrusion End value. 61 In the Element Properties dialog box. double-click Front.58 On the Tools toolbar. 59 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the end sketch as shown. click Finish Sketch. Add alignment constraints 63 In the Project Browser. 60 On the Design Bar. click Align. and click OK. click Extrusion Properties. under Elevations. 65 On the Tools menu. click .

if you select the end extrusion. double-click View 1. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter 486mm for Depth. Click Apply. Make adjustments to account for the right side. 692 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . reset the values as follows: ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth. 68 Select the reference plane coincident with the right edge of the left end extrusion. 71 On the Design Bar. Enter 600mm for Trimmable End Length. fix any problematic alignments and constraints.67 Select the left edge of the left end extrusion. a lock displays on each side indicating the constraints to the reference planes. 69 Select the right edge of the left end extrusion. and click OK. 75 In the Project Browser. click Family Types. and lock the alignment. Flex the design 72 On the Design Bar. Enter 300mm for Trimmable End Length. The truss should adapt to all the changes. Click Apply. and lock the alignment. 70 Repeat the previous five steps for the right end of the truss. 73 In the Family Types dialog box. under 3D Views. If it does not. this is the align-to point. click Modify. 74 In the Family Types dialog box. TIP When you finish the alignments.

77 Proceed to the next lesson. Testing the Family in a Project | 693 .76 Save the Family. Testing the Family in a Project In this lesson. Datasets Open the truss family ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you should close the file and begin with a fresh dataset. A new dataset is provided for you beginning with the next lesson. click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you load the truss family into a project that consists of foundation walls. NOTE Close any open families or projects. a sill.rfa file located in the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families folder. you load the family into a project to test it in a real-world environment. you can continue using it in the next lesson. Loading a Family into a Project In this exercise. Open the m_Wood Floor Truss_1. it is recommended that you use the new family in order to ensure consistency. If you are comfortable with your design. Although you could continue using the previous family. If you have experienced any errors or have deviated from the exercises in any way. Testing the Family in a Project. you add several beam instances and then modify the shape of the foundation to see how the beams adapt. It is identical to the truss you have been designing. After you load it into the project. and a rim joist. click the Training Files icon. The truss family that you use in this lesson is identical to the truss you have created in the previous exercises.

Open the project file ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. a dialog box would have displayed asking for you to specify which projects you wanted to load the family into. click Load into Projects. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click m_Wood Floor Truss_1. click the Training Files icon. you add several instances of the truss family to the project.rfa. Testing a Family Instance in a Project In this exercise. 3 In the Project Browser. click Open. Open the m_WWF1. 694 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . The truss family is loaded directly into the only other open file. 2 On the Design Bar. and then modify the project to see how the beams adapt. 4 Proceed to the next exercise. and notice that the Wood Floor Truss_1 family has been loaded. expand Families. If you had multiple projects or families open. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you used in the previous exercise. Load the truss family into the project 1 On the Window menu. Testing a Family Instance in a Project.rvt file located in the Metric folder. expand Structural Framing. Notice that the project file is now active.

a slab.Add beams to project 1 In the Project Browser.Southeast Isometric. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 6 In the Project Browser. select m_Wood Floor Truss_1. This project consists of foundation walls. therefore. under 3D Views. and double-click 3D . the truss family you loaded will interact with it as one beam does to another. Testing the Family in a Project | 695 . under Floor Plans. add three vertical beams that snap to the rim joist at each end. click Beam. expand 3D Views. The rim joist was added as a beam. 5 Using point-to-point insertion. Try to make them approximately equidistant as shown.Southeast Isometric. and a wood rim joist. a wood sill. double-click 3D . double-click Level 1. 4 In the Type Selector. NOTE Do not be concerned with the exact location of the three beams. expand Views. 2 In the Project Browser.

under 3D Views.Southeast Isometric. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. 9 In the Project Browser. double-click 3D . You do not need to be precise.Notice the wood truss sits on top of the sill and attaches to the rim joist as expected. 7 In the Project Browser. you are merely testing the new floor truss to verify that it adapts to the changes. 8 Select Grid 2 and drag it downward until the walls form an approximate square. 696 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . not the wall or rim joist. NOTE Make sure you drag the grid line.

Working with Nested Subcomponents In this lesson. and create a formula controlled array to fill in the truss. Because the family is already open. 16 Proceed to the next lesson. click Undo Drag. you nest wood web members into the floor truss. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 697 . Working with Nested Subcomponents. the wood floor truss family becomes the active view. click Edit Family. you nest the web components into the truss and create an array that adapts to changes in length. This should return the project to its original dimension. IMPORTANT Do not change the name of the family. 15 When prompted to open the truss family for editing. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the project with its existing name. 11 On the File menu. In the next lesson. 10 On the Edit menu. 12 In the Save as dialog box. The center chase remained the same width while remaining centered. click Save as. click Yes. ■ ■ The truss ends remained constant and adapted to the new beam length.Notice the wood truss adjusted to the changes. The project and family need to interact based on a consistent file name. 14 On the Options Bar. Edit a family from within a project 13 Select one of the wooden truss components.

Level. Add two wood web components 6 On the Design Bar. This will aid in the placement of the wood web. and click Hide Object. 7 In the Type Selector. Open the m_Wood_Web. click the Training Files icon.rfa is the active file. Leave a slight gap between the chase and the web.rfa file located in the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families folder. 2 In the Project Browser. 4 On the View Control Bar. You then align and lock the web extents before applying a formula-controlled array. This will make aligning the wood web easier. click Component.Adding a Nested Component In this exercise. The extrusion is aligned and locked to invisible model lines that make it easier to array within the truss. Place one wood web on each side of the center chase. 3 Select the symbolic line in the center of the truss. click Hide/Isolate. The geometry is driven by formula-based parameters that link to the host family. verify that m_Wood_Web: Wood Web is selected. 698 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Prepare the view for nesting 1 Make sure that m_Wood Floor Truss_1. 5 On the File menu. IMPORTANT Make sure you snap the center line of the web components to the center reference line of the truss. This family is a single extrusion as shown. Snap the center line of the web to the center reference plane of the truss. Dataset Continue to use the datasets from the previous exercise. ■ ■ In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. under Floor Plans. you nest two wooden web members into the truss. double-click Ref. 8 Add two instances of the wood web component as shown.

under Elevations. select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the left center chase extrusion. this is the keyboard shortcut for Align. You will align the left web component first. 13 For the align-to point. Also notice that the depth of the web members needs to be changed. IMPORTANT Do not lock the alignment 15 Repeat the previous two steps to align the left edge of the right web component to the right edge of the center chase as shown. This will be accomplished in the next exercise when you link the nested parameter with the host parameter. Notice the model lines that surround the web component. 10 In the Project Browser. Do not select it. 14 Select the right vertical model line of the left web component as shown. click Modify. they are visible only when you place the cursor over the component. double-click Front. In the following steps. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 699 .9 On the Design Bar. Align the nested web components 12 Enter . you align the web panel using these lines rather than the extrusion edges. 11 Place the cursor over the left wood web.

Add reference planes for array anchors 17 On the Design Bar. 18 Add two reference planes as shown. click Align. 21 Select the reference plane that you added to the left of the web components center as shown. you align the reference planes to the center of the web components. 16 On the Design Bar. NOTE You do not have to align the top or bottom the web components because the height of the web members will adapt to the truss height after you create and link the parameters in the next exercise. 700 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 20 Select the center of the left web component as the align-to point. it is important to note that you should avoid adding unnecessary constraints. In the steps that follow. The reference plane you added in the previous step represents half the web width. click Modify. 19 On the Tools menu. click Ref Plane. Place each reference plane just to the outside of the center of the web components. 22 Click the lock to lock the reference plane to the centerline of the web component.Each of these web components represents the starting point of the web arrays that you add later in this lesson. In addition.

click Dimension. Place the dimension as shown. ■ ■ ■ Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the right web component. Select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the right web component and the outside edge of the center chase. 25 Add the following two dimensions: ■ ■ Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the left web component. Place the dimension as shown. Select the reference plane that is coincident with the right edge of the left web component and the outside edge of the center chase. ■ Working with Nested Subcomponents | 701 .23 Repeat the previous two steps to align and lock the right web component and the reference plane as shown. Dimension and label array anchors 24 On the Design Bar.

Creating Formula-controlled Parameters In this exercise. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. 5 Click OK. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. under Parameters. 4 In the Family Types dialog box. under Other. 12 On the Design Bar. click Modify. enter Depth . under Constraints. When you refer to another parameter within a formula. and click Properties. 702 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . click Family Types. click Edit/New. Click OK. 28 In the Save As dialog box.In the next exercise. 2 In the Family Types dialog box. This formula ensures that the web depth will account for any changes in the chord thickness or truss depth. click OK. under Parameter Data. click Add. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Save As. or the width of the center chase. 26 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. Creating Formula-controlled Parameters. Create a new parameter for web depth 1 On the Design Bar.(Chord Thickness * 2) for the WebDepth Formula. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. In the Type Parameter dialog box. notice that “= “displays within the WebHeight button. length. TIP You can expand the width of the Family Types dialog box to facilitate typing within the formula field. Select Common for Discipline. and click OK. You then link the nested web parameters to the new host parameters. You also add a formula to the parameter in order to maintain the web position as the truss changes depth. 9 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog box. you add new parameters to control the web components. 27 On the File menu. click OK. click the button to the right of the WebHeight value. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter WebDepth for Name. Select Length for Type. Link the nested component to the new parameter 6 Right-click the left web component. you label these dimensions. NOTE Formulas are case sensitive. select WebDepth. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. Select Type. click Modify. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. ensure you enter it exactly as it is named. navigate to the same directory in which you saved the project file and save this family there with its current name.

which must remain at least 150mm long. Select Instance. Select Length for Type. Select Common for Discipline. Create WebArrayNum formula-controlled parameter 20 In the Family Types dialog box. click Add. under Parameter Data. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. Select Instance. In addition. It will use a formula to add the center chase width and the thickness of the two bordering chords.Notice the web members are resized to fit more precisely between the chords. do the following: ■ Enter CC for Name. under Parameter Data. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Click OK. Click OK. This formula subtracts the length of the center chase and its two bordering chords plus an additional 300mm before dividing it in two to specify the length of each array. under Parameters. This parameter is primarily for convenience. enter (Length . 16 Under Other. The additional 300mm is to account for the ends. Create new formula-controlled parameter for center chase 13 On the Design Bar. enter Center Chase Width + (2*Chord Thickness) for CC Formula. click Add. under Parameters.(CC+300))/2 for WebArrayLength Formula. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Other for Group parameter under. click Family Types. 19 Under Constraints. 18 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Create WebArrayLength formula-controlled parameter 17 In the Family Types dialog box. After you enter the formula. Select Common for Discipline. click Add. under Parameters. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter WebArrayLength for Name. Select Length for Type. notice the center of each nested web component is locked to the reference plane that bisects it. the resulting value is displayed as an inactive field. 14 In the Family Types dialog box. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 703 .

Select Constraints for Group parameter under. Select Instance. 23 Click OK. click Family Types. Select Common for Discipline. Notice the location of the web components has adapted to the formula. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. Click OK. 32 Click OK. 28 On the Options Bar. 25 On the Options Bar. 704 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 27 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the right web. 22 Under Constraints. Click OK. Select Integer for Type. 29 On the Design Bar. under Parameter Data. select Webhalflength for Label. click Modify. select Add parameter for Label. 31 Under Constraints. Add parameter to anchor web array 24 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the left web as shown. enter WebArrayLength/(2*WebDepth) for WebArrayNum Formula. 26 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. enter (WebArrayLength/WebArrayNum)/2 for Webhalflength Formula. under Parameter Data. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter WebArrayNum for Name. Select Instance.21 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Webhalflength for Name. Add formula for Webhalflength 30 On the Design Bar.

click Edit/New. and click Properties. Flex the design 41 Adjust the view so you can flex the truss while in the Family Types dialog box. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 705 . Enter 76mm for Chord Thickness. 42 On the Design Bar. The truss should adapt to all the changes. 38 In the Element Properties dialog box.Associate web component parameters 33 Right-click the left web component. fix any problematic alignments and constraints. click Family Types. under 3D Views. 39 On the Design Bar. it is very important that you flex the model to ensure the nested components and the formulas that controls them work as expected. 36 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog box. 35 In the Type Properties dialog box. Because you have added and constrained new components. click Modify. click the button to the right of the WebArrayLength value. In the Type Properties dialog box. under Other. click OK. double-click View 1. It is especially important to flex the model before arraying the truss so that you don’t multiply any existing problems. select WebArrayLength. 40 In the Project Browser. and click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter 686mm for Depth. Click Apply. click OK. If it does not. 43 In the Family Types dialog box. the button next to the WebArrayLength value should have an equals sign within it. 34 In the Element Properties dialog box. 37 In the Type Properties dialog box.

reset the values as follows: ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth. 3 On the Edit menu. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. 2 Select the nested web component left of the center chase. You must use precision when arraying because any error is multiplied as the array grows. click Array. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. Select Constrain. Arraying Nested Subcomponents. then you specify the move end point. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Group and Associate is selected. Array the left web component 1 In the Project Browser. When picking the corner. 706 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . under Elevations.44 In the Family Types dialog box. Enter 3 for Number. Select 2nd for Move to. you array the nested web components. 5 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point. Arraying Nested Subcomponents In this exercise. click Save. First. Creating an array requires two basic steps. and link the arrays to the WebArrayNum parameter. 4 On the Options Bar. Enter 38mm for Chord Thickness. use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. you specify the move start point. and click OK. add alignment constraints. Click Apply. double-click Front. 45 On the File menu.

place the cursor over the boundary between the two left web components until the reference highlights. Enter 3 for Number. 12 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point. click Modify. 8 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Design Bar. 18 On the Tools menu. use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 707 . 19 In the left array. 13 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point. When picking the corner. use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. 14 Press ENTER to complete the array. When picking the corner. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Group and Associate is selected. 16 Zoom out to view the truss. 10 On the Edit menu.6 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point. Align and lock the arrays 17 Zoom in on the left array of web components. click Modify. Select 2nd for Move to. 11 On the Options Bar. Select Constrain. click Array. Array the right nested web component 9 Select the nested web component right of the center chase. 7 Press ENTER to complete the array. When picking the corner. click Align. then select the line twice. use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.

align and lock the two right web components. 28 On the Options Bar. 30 Zoom out until you can see the entire truss. 22 Within the right array. If you do not lock the edges of the array.Because there are two overlapping lines at this location. align and lock the two boundaries between the three web components. 27 Select the array line over the web components on the right. 29 On the Design Bar. NOTE This step is very important. select WebArrayNum for Label. you are aligning the two bordering web components to each other. 20 Click the lock symbol to keep the web components locked at their edges. click Modify. select WebArrayNum for Label. 708 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Use the same techniques as you did in the previous three steps. 25 On the Options Bar. 24 Notice the array line displays above the components with the array value. 21 Within the left array. NOTE Do not select the array value. 26 Select the middle web component of the right array. the web components overlap each other when you change the depth of the truss. Place the cursor over the array line as shown and select it. Label the arrays 23 Select the middle web component of the left array.

click Align. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 709 . 33 Delete the dimension.Notice the arrays appear to be too long. Member Left. Left. 31 Zoom around the left side of the truss. Notice the end of the array still overlaps the trimmable end. 32 Select the dimension between reference plane Left and Member Left as shown. The primary reason for this was to allow for flexing the length. as the align-to point. 34 On the Tools menu. 35 Select the reference plane. and lock the alignment as shown. you added a dimension to lock the Member Left and Member Right reference plane to the outer Left and Right reference planes. You will fix this in later steps by changing the parameter value. This is because earlier in the tutorial. 36 Select the reference plane.

Therefore. Change trimmable end length value 42 On the Design Bar. The truss should adapt to all the changes. 38 Zoom in around the right side of the truss. enter 150mm for Trimmable End Length. and click OK. 39 Delete the dimension between reference plane Right and Member Right. If it does not. click Modify. fix any problematic alignments and constraints.NOTE With most beam families. 46 On the Design Bar. and prepare the view for flexing. Click Apply. 43 In the Family Types dialog box. 40 Align and lock reference plane Right and Member Right. click Family Types. under Dimensions. this solution has little. significant impact. 44 Click Apply. however. Enter 900mm for Center Chase Width. click Family Types. if any. in this case. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 686mm for Depth. Flex the design 45 In the Project Browser. 37 On the Design Bar. the wood floor truss normally sits on a sill bordering a rim joist. you would not want to align and lock these two reference planes. 47 In the Family Types dialog box. 710 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 41 Zoom out until you can see the entire truss. Enter 12000mm for Length. Notice the web arrays fit within the truss without overlapping the ends. under 3D Views. double-click View 1.

48 In the Family Types dialog box. In addition to the truss family. these steps have been reduced. Enter 6000mm for Length. click Save. You then increase the distance between the foundation walls to see how the truss adapts to the changes in length. 1 Verify that the truss family is active and the 3D View. Click Apply. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 711 . 50 Proceed to the next exercise. you should flex the model in as many ways as possible to verify it is working correctly. for training and time purposes. View 1. the project. 2 On the Design Bar. click Load into Projects.TIP When flexing a complex model such as this. Reload the truss into the project. reset the values as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth. Notice the project file becomes active and the beam has updated with the latest changes. Enter 400mm for Center Chase Width. however. and click Yes. should be open. displays. Reloading a Family into a Project In this exercise. and click OK. Reloading a Family into a Project. select Override parameter values of existing types. m_WWF1. 3 In the Reload Family dialog box. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. you reload the truss family into the project. 49 On the File menu.rvt. You have completed the design of the primary components of the truss.

You then create a parameter to specifically control material application. 6 In the Project Browser. 8 Save and close the project file and the family file.Southeast Isometric. under Floor Plans.4 In the Project Browser. you begin with a new dataset which is identical to both of these files. double-click 3D . Applying Subcategories. 712 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . and Parameters. Applying Subcategories. double-click Level 1. Notice the truss has adapted to the changes. In the next lesson. 5 Drag Grid 2 downward until the shape of the building footprint is almost square. Materials. under 3D Views. you create and apply subcategories and materials. Materials. 7 On the Edit menu. and Parameters In this lesson. 9 Proceed to the next lesson. click Undo Drag.

click Open. Datasets ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. You then reload the family into the project and apply a material to the subcategory. In this dataset.rvt file located in the Metric folder. Within the family. four instances of the floor truss were added to the other end of the structure. Open the m_WWF2. In addition. the truss was added to a beam system that occupies approximately half the building footprint. the material values were set to By Category by default. Apply Object Styles 1 Zoom in around beam system. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.Creating and Applying Subcategories In this exercise. Applying Subcategories. and Parameters | 713 . you create new subcategories within the truss family. click the Training Files icon. Materials. Notice no material has been applied to the truss.

click Edit Family. all subcomponents of that category are assigned that material. 14 In the New Subcategory dialog box.2 On the Settings menu. and click OK. enter Wood Floor Truss for Name. click Object Styles. under Modify Subcategories.Timber for Name. notice that the subcategories do not apply to the wood floor truss that you have designed. In addition. Notice the Wood . click Wood . click Undo Object Styles. and click OK. 8 On the Edit menu. When you apply a material to the Structural Framing category. If there was a metal beam in this building model. Notice that the Structural Framing category and all of the subcategories have no material value defined. 11 Click Yes to open the family for editing. click New. Create subcategories within the truss family 9 Select a truss that is not part of the beam system. 10 On the Options Bar. 6 In the Materials dialog box. 3 In the Object Styles dialog box. and expand the category Structural Framing. 12 On the Settings menu. 7 In the Object Styles dialog box. click Object Styles. 5 Click the button that displays in the Structural Framing Material field. click in the material field until the button displays as shown. verify that the Model Objects tab is selected. 714 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 13 In the Object Styles dialog box. you have more control over component visibility within a project. it would also have the wood material applied to it.Timber material has been applied to all Structural Framing components. click OK. 4 On the Structural Framing category line. If you create subcategories as you design in the Family Editor.

17 In the New Material dialog box. and click OK. and click OK. The web component family opens in a 3D view. 30 Click Yes to open the family for editing. 18 In the Materials dialog box. 20 In the Materials dialog box. Apply the subcategory to the truss components 22 Draw a pick box around the entire truss. click Modify. 19 In the Material Library dialog box. 29 On the Options Bar. select Wood Floor Truss for Subcategory. under AccuRender. and click OK. Apply a subcategory to the nested web components 28 Place the cursor over one of the arrayed web components. 21 In the Object Styles dialog box. press TAB to toggle to the web component and click to select it. and click the button to open the Materials dialog box. 27 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Duplicate. 24 In the Filter dialog box. select Natural. under Identity Data. click . 25 On the Options Bar. click . 26 In the Element Properties dialog box. 16 In the Materials dialog box.Apply material to subcategory 15 Click in the Material field for the Wood Floor Truss subcategory. click Check None. select Other. enter Wood Floor Truss. Notice the chords and end extrusions remain selected. Yellow. click OK. Applying Subcategories.No Gloss for Name. click . navigate to _accurender\Wood\Pine. click Edit Family. click OK. and Parameters | 715 . Materials. 23 On the Options Bar.

rvt. navigate to _accurender\Wood\Pine. under Modify Subcategories. 45 In the Load into Projects dialog box. and click OK. under Identity Data. 38 In the Material Library dialog box. enter Wood Floor Truss . Reload web component into truss family 44 On the Design Bar. 716 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . you can apply a different material to all web components when using this truss within a project.Webs subcategory.31 On the Settings menu. 43 In the Element Properties dialog box.Webs for Name. 36 In the New Material dialog box. enter Wood Floor Truss . Reload truss into project 47 On the Design Bar. 35 In the Materials dialog box. 46 In the Reload Family dialog box. click New. click Object Styles. 42 On the Options Bar. click . 48 In the Load into Projects dialog box. 33 In the New Subcategory dialog box. and click OK. Yellow. under AccuRender. and click OK. and click OK.Webs. select Natural. and click the button to open the Materials dialog box. click Duplicate. 41 Select the web extrusion. and click OK. select m_WWF2. and click OK. 37 In the Materials dialog box. 39 In the Materials dialog box. click .Webs for Subcategory. 40 In the Object Styles dialog box. click OK. 34 Click in the Material field for the Wood Floor Truss . select Wood Floor Truss . click OK. 32 In the Object Styles dialog box. select Override parameter values of existing types. click Load into Projects. select m_Wood Floor Truss_1. and click Yes. By creating a separate subcategory for the web components. click Load into Projects.rfa.No Gloss for Name.

under Categories. 52 Click OK. Dataset Continue to use the dataset that you saved in the previous exercise. clear Wood Floor Truss Webs. click Edit Family. however. 54 In the Visibility Graphics dialog box. Notice the web extrusions not longer display. 55 On the Edit menu. 57 In the Save as dialog box.49 In the Reload Family dialog box. You can change the style of only the wood truss components without impacting other structural framing components. and click Yes. expand Structural Framing. and Parameters | 717 . click Visibility/Graphics. Creating Material Parameters. 53 On the View menu. Open truss family for editing 1 Select a truss that is not part of the beam system. under Visibility. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing. Creating Material Parameters In this exercise. and click OK. the stick symbols continue to display. Notice the new object subcategory styles are applied to the truss components. Materials. select Override parameter values of existing types. 50 On the Settings menu. Notice the two new subcategories are listed. Applying Subcategories. expand Structural Framing. click Object Styles. 56 On the File menu. 51 In the Object Styles dialog box. 58 Proceed to the next exercise. you add a new material parameter that allows you to specify a material for each truss instance. click Save As. 2 On the Options Bar. navigate to a folder of your preference and save the project with the current name. click Undo Visibility/Graphics.

21 Click OK twice. 8 Click OK.Create material parameter 4 On the Design Bar. select Override parameter values of existing types. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Parameters. Notice the chords and end extrusions remain selected. and click OK. click Family Types. click the button to the right of the Material value field. under Parameter Data. and click OK. and click Yes. 26 Select a floor truss that is not part of the beam system. notice the default material is By Category. 28 In the Element Properties dialog box. 718 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . this component will continue to use the material assigned to the subcategory by default. do not assign a material to the parameter. 19 In the Type Properties dialog box. 12 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 5 In the Family Types dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Floor Truss Material for Name. and click OK.rvt. When reloaded into a project. select Structural Framing (Wood Floor Truss). 20 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog box. 29 In the Materials dialog box. click Load into Projects. click OK. Select Material for Type. click . 14 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog box. 6 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. and click OK. click Edit/New. click . click . click the Floor Truss Material field and click the button that displays. under Other. 22 On the Design Bar.Steel for Name. 17 On the Options Bar. press TAB. click OK. select Floor Truss Material. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. click Add. select m_WWF2. and select the component. Notice the appearance of the floor trusses has not changed. 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . 10 On the Options Bar. 27 On the Options Bar. under Materials and Finishes. Reload truss into project 23 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. This material parameter allows you to assign a material on an instance parameter. Click OK. Link truss extrusions to material parameter 9 Draw a pick box around the entire truss. click Modify. Select Common for Discipline. under Materials and Finishes. 16 Place the cursor over one of the web components. select Metal . 24 In the Load into Projects dialog box. click the button to the right of the WebMaterial value field. Select Materials and Finishes for Group parameter under. Select Instance. click Check None. 11 In the Filter dialog box. select Floor Truss Material. 25 In the Reload Family dialog box. In this case.

click Close. click the Training Files icon. click Save. click Modify. because you have yet to assign a detail level to each of the elements within the truss family. Change detail levels 1 On the View Control Bar. click Open. a new dataset is supplied. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Open the m_WWF3. Assigning Detail Level and View Controls In this exercise. In the next lesson.31 On the Design Bar.rvt file located in the Metric folder. and click Coarse. However. 32 On the File menu. Currently within the truss. You can save the open files if you wish. notice the floor truss has not changed appearance. Notice the rim joist no longer displays. all elements display at all times in all views. Datasets ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Controlling Component Visibility In this lesson. you add controls to specify the views in which each element displays and at what detail level. 33 On the File menu. 35 Proceed to the next lesson. Controlling Component Visibility. 34 Close any open files. Notice the material is applied only to the selected beam. click Detail Level. Controlling Component Visibility | 719 . you designate the display of elements in specific views and at specific detail levels.

Notice the appearance of the floor trusses has not changed. Clear Left/Right. clear Coarse. 4 Click Yes to open the family for editing. Assign detail level to truss ends 17 Select the end extrusions. 9 On the Options Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. 720 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques .2 Select a floor truss. Clear Left/Right. 3 On the Options Bar. click Load into Projects. Apply detail level controls to web components 5 Select a web component. Under Detail Levels. and click Yes. 12 In the Load into Projects dialog box. click Visibility. click Visibility. Assign detail level to center chase extrusions 14 Select the center chase extrusions. and click OK. Click OK. clear Plan/RCP. clear Plan/RCP. Under Detail Levels. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. click Edit Family. 8 Select the web extrusion. 7 Click Yes to open the family for editing. Click OK. 10 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. 18 On the Options Bar. select m_Wood Floor Truss_1. 11 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. 16 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. select Override parameter values of existing types. clear Plan/RCP. 19 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. click Visibility. clear Coarse. Click OK.rfa. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. 13 In the Reload Family dialog box. Under Detail Levels. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. click Edit Family. clear Coarse.

and click OK. select m_WWF3. click Detail Level. Controlling Component Visibility | 721 . Notice that the floor truss solid geometry is not displayed. Click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ Under Detail Levels. Reload truss into project 23 On the Design Bar. click Detail Level. click Visibility.Assign detail level to truss chords 20 Select the truss chords. 27 In the Project Browser. click Load into Projects. 28 On the View Control Bar. Notice the symbolic representation of the beams. 24 In the Load into Projects dialog box. 21 On the Options Bar. and click Coarse. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. and click Medium. 25 In the Reload Family dialog box. 26 On the View Control Bar.rvt. and click Yes. select Override parameter values of existing types. under Floor Plans. clear Coarse. double-click Level 1. Notice the floor truss solid geometry is displayed.

The truss returns to its original designed value. under Family Types. enter 64mm for Chord Width. Creating Component Types. create types for those most frequently used in your projects. Creating Component Types In this lesson. creating predefined types can speed up the design process. click Edit Family. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. navigate to your preferred location and save the project with the current name. NOTE When creating new components. 2 On the Options Bar. you create a conditional formula that adjusts the truss depth based on the truss length. Creating Multiple Component Types In this exercise. under Dimensions. 30 In the Save As dialog box. under Family Types. click Save As. 6 In the New dialog box. TIP You can also use new types to flex the model. Notice the chord changes width.29 On the File menu. 10 Select 89x38 for Name. and click OK. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing. and click OK. 11 Click OK. enter 89x38 for Name. you create multiple types for a 89x38 truss and a 64x38 truss. Open the truss family for editing 1 Select a floor truss. and click Apply. In the final exercise. Create new types 4 On the Design Bar. and click Apply. 5 In the Family Types dialog box. click New. click New. enter 64x38 for Name. 9 In the Family Types dialog box. click Family Types. 31 Proceed to the next lesson. 8 In the New dialog box. 722 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . you create multiple floor truss types to speed up the design process when working in a project. Although you can change the parameters of a truss within a project.

350. <result-if-false>) 5 In the Family Types dialog box. enter the follow formula for Depth: if(Length < 6600. 16 In the Type Selector. 13 In the Load into Projects dialog box. if(Length < 9000.rvt. 22 On the File menu. 286. 400. click Load into Projects. Notice the truss depth increases. 18 In the Type Selector. select Override parameter values of existing types. 17 Add a beam in the center of the open space. and click Apply. You are going to enter a conditional formula that follows this basic rule: IF ( <condition>. click Edit Family. Creating Conditional Formulas In this exercise.Load new types into the project 12 On the Design Bar. Flex the design 7 In the Family Types dialog box. select m_WWF3. double-click 3D . and click OK. Creating Component Types | 723 . and click OK. under 3D Views. Creating Conditional Formulas. 19 Add a beam next to the 64x38. enter 6000 for length. you create a conditional formula that changes the depth automatically as the truss increases in length. 8 In the Family Types dialog box. 14 In the Reload Family dialog box. under Dimensions. <result-if-true>. select 64x38. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing. if(Length < 7500. Notice the two beam types. click Apply. 23 Proceed to the final exercise. select 89x38. Open the truss for editing 1 Select a floor truss. and click Yes. 21 In the Project Browser. 400))) 6 Click Apply. click Beam. 15 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Adding a conditional formula 4 On the Design Bar. 20 On the Design Bar. click Family Types. click Save. click Modify.Southeast Isometric. 2 On the Options Bar. enter 8000 for length.

Regeneration time and overall performance can be affected by over-designed families. under 3D Views. 16 On the File menu. Test the conditional formula within a project 12 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. NOTE You would have to change the depth of the sill and rim joist to accommodate this change. 11 In the Reload Family dialog box. click Load into Projects. 13 Select Grid 2 and drag it downward until it is between 8000-9000mm from Grid 1. select m_WWF3. click Save. 724 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 15 Notice the change in floor truss depth. and click OK. select Override parameter values of existing types. and click Yes. 17 Close any open files.rvt. 10 In the Load into Projects dialog box.Load the truss into the project 9 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 1.Southeast Isometric. you probably noticed a change in the amount of time the view needed to regenerate. 14 In the Project Browser. IMPORTANT When you changed the width of the building footprint. You have completed this tutorial. double-click 3D .

you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes. You then create area plans for each scheme as needed. Finally. you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships. 725 . Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes.Area Analysis 21 In this tutorial.

4 In the Project Units dialog box. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. select Square meters. and click Area Analysis. Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu. Open the c_Area. Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. click Project Units. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. expand Floor Plans. For Unit Suffix. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise. You add and modify the area boundaries and apply area tags. These schemes define spatial relationships. 726 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis . you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. your values will be different. select Millimeters. In the final exercise. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. right-click in the Design Bar. select mm. it is not necessary in this exercise. In the Area Settings dialog box. click the Training Files icon.Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. click OK.rvt file located in the Common folder. Click OK. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. For Unit Suffix. click Area Settings. expand Views (all). For Rounding. View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser. under Length. TIP If the Area Settings tab is not visible. If you are using metric units. select m2 Click OK. click Open. there are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. 2 In the Project Units dialog box. select 2 decimal places. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 6 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. 3 Under Area. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Units. You add and modify the area boundaries and apply area tags.

you must manually add these boundary lines. 13 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. At Specified Height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated. If you select No. click Area Tag. you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. When you select Yes in this dialog box. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. ■ 8 Click Cancel. under Views (all). Using Area Analysis Tools | 727 . Create a gross building area plan 9 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. the system-computed height defaults to the level. Click OK.7 In the Area Setting dialog box. 10 In the New Area Plan dialog box. 12 In the Project Browser. NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. ■ At System Computed Height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level. or 0. click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. click Area Plan. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. forming a closed loop. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. click the Room Calculations tab. Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. 14 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. ■ 11 When the informational dialog box displays. notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building).

NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. click Area Plan. Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). 16 In the New Area Plan dialog box. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. 728 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis . Expand Area Plans (Rentable). Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. A room tag measures the area enclosed within the exterior face of room-defining walls. if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height. 18 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. Click OK. Create a rentable area scheme and plan 15 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. Add area boundary lines 19 On the Design Bar. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. you create a new area plan for rentable space. click Area Boundary. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass. common areas. and store area.NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. 17 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. Next.

20 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 23 In the upper left corner of the building model. click Area Tag. click . 24 On the Design Bar. When you pick the walls. 25 Select the area tag you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. you can either draw them or pick them. verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. When you add area boundary lines. click inside the middle of the room to place the tag. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. 21 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time. If you do not select this option. 22 On the Design Bar. the area boundary lines do not update automatically. 26 On the Options Bar. Using Area Analysis Tools | 729 .

click . 730 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis . Select Building Common Area for Area Type. 31 On the Options Bar. Select Office area for Area Type. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Tenant 1 for Name. 28 On the Design Bar. Click OK. 30 On the Design Bar.27 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Modify and select the tag. click Area Tag. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. Select Office area for Area Type. Click OK. In the Element Properties dialog box. add a tag in the common area to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. 29 Add the tag to the room on the lower left corner of the building model. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Tenant 2 for Name. 33 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. Click OK.

and select Store Area for Area Type. Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4. enter Core for Name. and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type. the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type. Using Area Analysis Tools | 731 .34 Add an area tag to the building model core. Tenant 3 should be in the upper right. 35 Add the last two area tags to the two areas on the right side of the building model. and Tenant 4 in the lower right. Notice that within the two store areas.

Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. name the project Area-in progress. click Save. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. 2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model.36 On the File menu. and click Save. 732 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis . you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. In this exercise. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise. 37 Navigate to your preferred directory. In the next exercise. and when the color legend displays. click Color Fill. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. click to place it.rvt. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces. Create a color fill plan 1 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar.

3 When the dialog box displays. click OK to make the required visibility setting changes. Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog box. Using Area Analysis Tools | 733 . select Area Type and click Add. under Category. select Areas (Rentable). 8 Add the fields Area and Name. 5 In the New Schedule dialog box. and click OK. click Schedule/Quantities. click the Fields tab. 7 Under Available fields.

The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog box are displayed as column headings within the schedule. 734 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis .9 Click OK.

and roofs. you then need to update the building face. In this tutorial. you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. 735 . floors. At any time. curtain systems. you can specify the view to display massing elements. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project.Massing 22 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model. Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. After you make building elements. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. building elements. If you modify a massing face. or both. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model.

click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 736 | Chapter 22 Massing . and floors. under Views (all). click the Training Files icon. the building model uses those element types to define the walls. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Adding a mass element 1 In the Project Browser. TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar. You assign the default wall. you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions.rvt file located in the Metric folder. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. and click Massing. floor. sweeps. roofs. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. click Create Mass. double-click Level 1. The Design Bar title changes to Mass. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. click Lines. 4 On the Design Bar.Using Massing Tools In this lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Open the m_Massing_Start. 5 On the Sketch Design Bar. and cutting geometry. and click 6 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. click Open. on the Options Bar. 3 Click OK in the Name dialog box to accept the default name Mass 1.

enter 25000 for Extrusion Start and 27500 for Extrusion End. Create next extrusion form 13 In the Project Browser.7 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). Using Massing Tools | 737 . and then click . and click OK. 9 In the Materials dialog box. 18 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. and then click . click Extrusion Properties. and click OK. select Mass (Transparent) for Name. Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Reference. click . double-click Level 1. 23 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. select Mass (Opaque) for Name. under Materials and Finishes. under Constraints. 11 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. on the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. click Finish Sketch. 12 On the View toolbar. 17 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. click the Value for Material. and click OK. under Constraints. 21 In the Materials dialog box. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor. and click 16 On the Options Bar. enter 25000 for Extrusion End. click Extrusion Properties. Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. under Materials and Finishes. enter 1550 mm for the Offset. 15 On the Sketch Design Bar. click the Value for Material. 14 On the Design Bar. 20 In the Element Properties dialog box. 19 On the Design Bar.

24 In the Project Browser. Continue creation of next massing form 25 In the Project Browser. press TAB to highlight the entire face. and click on the Options Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. click Lines. Sketch the blend base 31 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown. 28 In the drawing area. under Views (all). 738 | Chapter 22 Massing . and click OK. 27 In the Work Plane dialog box. 29 Click to select the face. 30 On the Sketch Design Bar. TIP If necessary. under Views (all). 26 On the Design Bar. double-click {3D} to see the results. select Pick a plane. The second form is on top of the first form. under Elevations (Building Elevation). highlight the larger form. double-click West.

click . 36 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line. 39 On the Edit toolbar.32 On the Options Bar. and delete the vertical construction line. click the arrow next to the drawing options. click Modify. Using Massing Tools | 739 . and click to select the line start point. 37 On the Design Bar. and click Arc passing through three points from the menu. 33 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown. you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc. The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. 35 On the Options Bar. click . Next. TIP If you do not see this option. click . 38 Select the arc and the horizontal line. 34 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown.

click 45 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. click Blend Properties. 740 | Chapter 22 Massing . under Views (all). on the Options Bar. click Edit Top. click 47 Create an arc as shown. click Finish Sketch. and click OK. 41 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown. verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected for Material and that -92000 is specified for Second End. Sketching the blend top 42 On the Design Bar. 48 On the Design Bar. 46 On the Options Bar. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 43 In the Project Browser. click Lines and.40 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown. double-click East. 49 In the Element Properties dialog box. 50 On the Design Bar. 51 On the View toolbar. 44 On the Design Bar. . click . .

7 Using the same technique. click Ref Plane. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model. 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. 1 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). place three more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right. under Floor Plans. click and enter 15000 for Offset. you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model. Using Massing Tools | 741 . you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise. 4 On the Options bar. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model. 6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane. select the mass.rvt. In this exercise.52 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click Level 1. m_Massing_Start. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise. and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right. 2 In the drawing area. Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. as shown. In the next exercise. you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created.

snap the corners to the intersections. and 0 for Extrusion Start. 9 On the Design Bar. 10 Enter SI for intersection snap. 15 Click OK. specify Mass (Transparent) for Material. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter 12000 for Extrusion End.rvt. 16 On the Design Bar. and then click Hidden Line.When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. 18 On the Mass Design Bar. 14 Under Constraints. In this exercise. under Materials and Finishes. you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise. When sketching each extrusion. 20 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete. click . click Finish Sketch. 17 On the View toolbar. on the Options Bar. click Void Form ➤  Void Extrusion. 11 Sketch two additional void extrusions as shown. click NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. 19 On the File menu. click Extrusion Properties. and sketch the first void extrusion as shown. 742 | Chapter 22 Massing . 12 On the Design Bar. These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids. click Lines and. click Finish Mass. click and select Chain. on the View Control Bar. click Save As.

10 On the File menu. click the Training Files icon. 12000 mm for Height. 11000 mm for Height. click Family Types. and 6000 mm for Depth. Dataset ■ ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 7 Click New and enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm for Name. you create new family types from a mass family file. 6 Enter 68000 mm for Width. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements. 11 Save the file as Box-Training. and click OK. 4 In the Family Types dialog box. 3 In the Name dialog box. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Massing folder. and click OK. You then load that mass family file and others into a project. Open Box.rfa. 2 In the Family Types dialog box. under Other. and 9000 mm for Depth. and click Apply. 8 Enter 46000 mm for Width. Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 743 .rfa. and click Apply. enter 15000 mm for Width. In this exercise. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it. and 18000 mm for Depth. 9 Click OK. 18000 mm for Height. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you opened a mass family file and created three new types of this family file. Creating three new family types 1 On the Design Bar. and click OK. enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm for Name. click Open.Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. Finally. You place several instances of the mass families into the project. 5 Click New and enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm for Name. and click Apply. click New. click Save As. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise.

Arc Dome. 3 On the View Control Bar. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 744 | Chapter 22 Massing . click the Training Files icon. 7 Open the Box-Training. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families. 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog box.rvt file located in the Metric folder. and Triangle. click the Training Files icon.rfa. 2 In the Project Browser. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.rfa family files. double-click Site. click Place Mass. you load and place the new family types that you created from the previous exercise. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. You also load other existing mass families and place them. 4 On the File menu. 9 In the Type Selector.rfa. under Views (all). click Open.rfa. under Floor Plans. 10 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family as shown.Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Open the m_Massing_In-place. select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. Semi Barrel Vault. click on the View toolbar to show the massing model. 1 If not already selected. 6 Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Massing folder.

21 In the Type Selector. 18 Press CTRL. and click . click Modify. click Modify. and click to place the mass.11 On the Design Bar. and click OK twice. and click . enter 90 for Angle. 26 In the drawing area. click Place Mass. and click OK twice. 23 Place the cursor in the drawing area. select Rotate after placement. 22 On the Options Bar. 16 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family as shown. 25 On the Design Bar. 19 Specify Mass (Opaque) for the Material instance parameter. select the 3 boxes. select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500. Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 745 . 20 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 15 In the Type Selector. and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. click Place Mass. select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. 24 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 14 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 13 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material instance parameter. 17 On the Design Bar. select the triangle. 12 Select the box.

33 Specify Mass (Opaque) for the Material instance parameter. click Place Mass. click Orient ➤ Northeast. and click OK twice. you join these mass elements. You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model. 34 On the View toolbar. 31 Place the box mass family as shown.27 Select the triangle. In this exercise. 35 On the View menu. 29 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and click . 28 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material instance parameter. click . Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed all overlap. and click OK twice. you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. 30 In the Type Selector. 32 Select the box and click . In the next exercise. 746 | Chapter 22 Massing .

click . Dataset ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place. 4 Select the triangle. NOTE When you join geometry. and then press ESC to see the result. the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element. you join and modify the mass elements you placed from the previous exercise. . Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 747 .rvt file. click 2 On the Tools toolbar. Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar. 3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown.Joining Mass Elements In this exercise.

10 Click to select the mirror axis start point. enter SM.Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown. 11 Drag the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection as shown. 748 | Chapter 22 Massing . under Floor Plans. TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. double-click Site. click for Axis. and snap to the midpoint of the edge. click 8 On the Options Bar. on the Edit toolbar. 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box. Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected.

and then select the triangle. .12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle. In this exercise. 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first. Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar. The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element. click . Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 749 . click 14 On the Tools toolbar. You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element. you joined mass elements together. 17 Press ESC to see the result.

You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design. under Views (all). Placing semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. enter 90 degrees for Angle. and select the triangle mass element. click Modify. 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown. click Place Mass. 8 On the Options Bar. you continue using the same file from the previous lesson. click . 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. select Sloped (primary). double-click Site. 1 On the Design Bar.Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson. 5 In the Project Browser. select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500. you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options. and then click OK. select Rotate after placement. 750 | Chapter 22 Massing . 12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. clear Curved. 10 On the Options Bar.rvt. 7 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model. 2 On the Window menu. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place. 4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog box. click Toolbar ➤ Design Options. You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design. 3 On the Design Options toolbar.

14 In the drawing area. Using Mass Elements with Design Options | 751 . 25 Move the three arc domes to the position shown. Placing arc dome mass elements 17 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. under Elevations. double-click North. and click Wireframe. 21 In the drawing area. click . and click Wireframe. 16 On the View Control Bar. select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H. and click OK twice. click Modify. click Modify. click . under Views (all). 24 On the View Control Bar. 18 In the Type Selector. select the three arc domes. and click . 15 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material property. click Place Mass. and click . and click OK twice. 22 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material property. select the 2 semi barrel vaults. 20 On the Design Bar. TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. 23 In the Project Browser.13 On the Design Bar. 19 Place 3 arc domes as shown.

rvt. 34 In the Design Options dialog box. and click OK. click Make Primary. 752 | Chapter 22 Massing . select Curved from the Design Option menu. 33 On the Design Options toolbar. under Option. double-click {3D}. clear Sloped. You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option. under Views (all). click the Design Options tab. 27 On the Design Options toolbar. click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. 32 Click the value for Design Option. and click OK. 28 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog box. select Curved and. click . click Visibility/Graphics. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. 36 On the File menu. you can make it the primary option. 29 In the Project Browser. 35 Click Close and close the warning that displays. you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces.Create a Design Option set 26 Select the three arc domes and the two semi barrel vaults. click . 30 On the View menu. you placed mass elements into Design Options. In this exercise. select Curved. Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes.

rvt file located in the Metric folder. select Basic Wall: Exterior . Creating walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 2 On the View toolbar. and select Wall Centerline for Loc Line. you pick massing faces to create walls. click to show the massing model.Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click the Training Files icon. 5 In the Type Selector. 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown. 3 On the View menu. click Open.Brick on CMU. click . double-click {3D}. click Wall by Face. 1 In the Project Browser. click Orient ➤ Southeast. under Views (all). Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 753 . The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Open the m_Massing_Building_Components. 6 On the Options Bar.

12 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Design Bar. ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. under Floor Plans. under Views (all). 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. under Floor Plans. under Views (all). double-click Level 5. 14 In the Project Browser. Click Wall by Face. 16 In the Type Selector. 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown. double-click Level 1. under Views (all). NOTE If a Warning dialog box is displayed. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 10 Select all the faces shown in red. click Wall by Face.8 In the Project Browser. click Wall by Face. under Floor Plans. alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. 11 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 3. 754 | Chapter 22 Massing .

you pick massing faces to create floors. double-click Level 9. click Wall by Face. under Floor Plans. 23 Open the 3D view to see the results. 21 On the Design Bar. you can select the overlapping curtain wall.18 Select all the faces shown in red. In this exercise. Creating Floors by Picking Faces In this exercise. You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 755 . under Views (all). You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. and click Wireframe. If desired. 19 In the Project Browser. you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. 22 Select all the faces shown in red. click . 20 On the View Control Bar.

6 On the Options Bar. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. click Floor Area Faces. clear Curtain Panels. under Views (all).Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. and click OK. and Walls. 7 In the Floor Area Faces dialog box. Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. 2 On the View menu. 3 On the Model Categories tab. 4 Click OK. double-click {3D}. select all levels. click Visibility/Graphics. Curtain Systems. 756 | Chapter 22 Massing .

and click OK. select Levels 1-4. and select the three 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown. 11 In the Floor Area Faces dialog box. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 757 . click Orient ➤ Northeast. 12 On the Options Bar. click Floor Area Faces. 10 On the Options Bar. 9 Press CTRL.8 On the View menu. clear Exclude Options.

select Level 1. click . 18 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 1. This shows you the gross floor area of each mass. 19 Drag a pick box over the entire model to select all the floor area faces. and select the semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown. click Floor Area Faces. under Views (all). verify that Select Multiple is selected. under Floor Plans. click Create Floors. click Floor by Face. 758 | Chapter 22 Massing . 17 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 22 In the Project Browser. 20 On the Options Bar. 15 In the Floor Area Faces dialog box. 21 On the View toolbar. under Schedules/Quantities. 14 On the Options Bar. 16 In the Project Browser. and click OK.13 Press CTRL. double-click Mass Schedule.

Creating roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. under Views (all).rvt.In this exercise. 3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown. double-click {3D}. you pick massing faces to create roofs. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise. click Roof by Face. you created floors by first creating floor area faces and then picking those faces to create floors. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 759 . You then viewed a massing schedule that listed the gross floor area of each mass in the model. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.

12 Click the Model Categories tab. 9 On the Options Bar. This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof. 7 With the Roof by Face command still selected.400mm. Curtain Systems. and Walls. select Basic Roof : Generic . 5 On the Options Bar. 10 Repeat these steps to create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element. select Sloped Glazing in the Type Selector. 11 On the View menu. 6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. 760 | Chapter 22 Massing .4 In the Type Selector. and then click OK. Your model should now look as shown. click Create Roof. click Create Roof. select Curtain Panels. NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family. 8 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element. and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements. click Visibility/Graphics. click Create Roof.

1 In the Project Browser. click Curtain System by Face. double-click {3D}. select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm. 4 On the Options Bar. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. you created roofs by picking faces of massing families. be sure that Select Multiple is selected. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 761 . and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.In this exercise.rvt. under Views (all). 3 In the Type Selector. 5 Press CTRL.

6 On the Options Bar. 762 | Chapter 22 Massing . 7 Repeat the same steps for the two other domes. click Create System.

In this exercise.8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected. click Create System. select the blended form on the in-place mass. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 763 . 9 On the Options Bar. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise. 10 Click Modify to exit the command. you created curtain systems on non-planar faces.

4 Select the box mass family as shown and click . click Duplicate. and click OK. 3 On the Model Categories tab. and Walls. and then click OK. Curtain Systems. Next. under Views (all). Roofs. enter 30000 for Width. 5 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Floor Plans. 764 | Chapter 22 Massing . 7 Enter Larger Size for Name. Floors. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK. you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. clear Curtain Panels. click OK.rvt. click Visibility/Graphics. click Edit/New. 1 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Element Properties dialog box. double-click Site. 2 On the View menu.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.

12 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family. 13 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown. 14 Open the 3D view to see the result. 11 On the Options Bar.10 On the Design Bar. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 765 . click Modify. clear Exclude Options.

click OK. Also. you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family. 18 In the Exclude Hosts dialog box. under Floor Plans. click . 766 | Chapter 22 Massing . In the next steps. click Remake. TIP To select the curtain wall. 17 On the Options Bar. remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. under Views (all). you want to select the smaller one. 15 In the Project Browser. 16 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the three walls shown. double-click Level 1.The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. 19 On the View toolbar. press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront.

TIP If you temporarily hide one of the resized walls. 21 On the Options Bar. you will notice that Revit Building resized the floors. click Remake. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 767 . 20 Select the roof as shown.

you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.rvt. You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family. 768 | Chapter 22 Massing . you changed the size of an existing mass family. 1 Open the 3D view. The 3D view now shows only the building shell. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise. Turn off massing 2 Click on the View toolbar to turn off massing. and click Remake. In this exercise.22 Select the arc dome curtain system.

You might create the model shown. 4 Rename the view 3D . 6 On the Model Categories tab. click Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. right-click on the 3D view. 7 Clear one of the check boxes. 8 Click None to clear the selection. This concludes the massing tutorial. If desired. you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model. to the building shell. and click Duplicate. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 769 . such as columns and an extruded roof. 5 On the View menu. click All to select all categories. 9 Select Mass. 3 In the Project Browser.Massing only.Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing. you can continue adding additional Revit modeling components. In this exercise.

770 | Chapter 22 Massing .

771 .Site 23 In this tutorial. you use the site tools in Autodesk Revit Building to add and modify site components within a project.

This project file was created using the default metric template. and double-click Site. click the Training Files icon. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas.Using Site Tools In this lesson. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. Using the first method. In the second part of this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. convert the data to a table. you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm. In the final exercises. You add property lines manually. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you add a building pad to the site. you create a toposurface using two different methods. islands. Open the m_First_Project. 3 On the Design Bar. and click Site. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface. right-click in the Design Bar. you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. and then modify the data. The exercises are sequential and must be done in order. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface. expand Views (all). and walkways. 5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point. 772 | Chapter 23 Site . Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. click Point.rvt file located in the Metric folder. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. expand Floor Plans. The scale of this view is 1 : 100. click Toposurface. click Open. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Options Bar.

The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide. Use the following illustration as a reference. TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points. A toposurface must have at least three elevation points. Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point. 7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration. Using Site Tools | 773 .6 Add two additional points to create a triangle. enter an absolute elevation of 6000 mm. 8 On the Options Bar. 9 Add a concentric circle of 6000 mm elevation points inside the 3000 mm contour.

enter 1500 mm. 12000 mm. Use the following illustration as a reference. 12 On the Settings menu. 14 On the View toolbar. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. under Increment.10 Repeat the previous step for 9000 mm. and click Shading with Edges. click Model Graphics Style. This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. click Site Settings. 11 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Finish Surface. 15000 mm. 774 | Chapter 23 Site . 13 In the Site Settings dialog box. under Additional Contours. and 18000 mm absolute elevations. 15 On the View Control Bar. click .

SAT. rename the level Base Site Elevation. and press ENTER. Until it is exploded. click Modify. under Floor Plans. double-click Site. select Preserve colors. click the Training Files icon. 24 In the Project Browser. 21 Click the Level 2 text. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. it is considered an import symbol. click Modify. click to delete it. rename the level Basement.16 On the View toolbar. click Import/Link ➤ DWG. 28 On the Design Bar. Using Site Tools | 775 . 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. 26 In the Import/Link dialog box: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 18 In the Project Browser. 19 On the Design Bar. 29 Select the imported topography. select Current view only and choose Select for Layers. enter 1000 mm. DGN. DXF. and click OK. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. and press ENTER. click Yes. click the elevation value. and double-click South. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). under Views (all). 23 Click the Level 1 text. 25 On the File menu. Under Layer/Level Colors. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog box. Click Open. and press ENTER. click and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Under Import or Link. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. Before importing the contour data. under Views (all). on the Standard toolbar. modify the level names and elevations. Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark.

776 | Chapter 23 Site . This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click the Annotations Categories tab. click Toposurface. click Visibility/Graphics.30 On the Edit menu. 36 On the Design Bar. and then click OK. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. click Pin Position. 34 Under Visibility. and click OK. click Modify. 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. When you select the import symbol. when the edges highlight. clear C_INDX. 32 On the View menu. 31 On the Design Bar. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog box. clear Elevations. select it. Notice the elevation symbols are displayed.

rvt. click Finish Surface. this project file is required in its current state. you add property lines using two methods. 43 On the File menu. click Save As. Adding Property Lines In this exercise. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. name the project Site-in progress. 40 On the View toolbar. Adding Property Lines. 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. click . 44 Navigate to your preferred folder. and click Save. Notice the change in this toposurface elevation is minor. you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 42 On the View toolbar.39 On the Design Bar. you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings. Using Site Tools | 777 . Using the second method. Using the first method. click and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles.

click Property Line. sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. 778 | Chapter 23 Site . click Lines. Although you can use your preferred sketching method. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser. add an arc line on the right. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog box. Select and delete the right vertical line. select Create property lines by sketching. and click OK. Click Modify.rvt. If you have not completed the previous exercise. 6 On the Design Bar. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. double-click Site.This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. 4 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Site-in progress. The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography. do so before continuing. you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first. On the Design Bar. Using the 3-point Arc tool. click Finish Sketch. click Lines.

when they highlight. click Property Line. click OK. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone. 10 In the Property Lines dialog box. to delete them. enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E Using Site Tools | 779 . select the lines. A warning dialog box is displayed. NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog box depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch.7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. click OK. 9 In the warning dialog box. and click OK. click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. on the Standard toolbar. select Edit Table. 15 Starting in Row #1. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog box. Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. click 12 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Property Lines dialog box. 8 On the Options Bar.

26 Under Visibility. 25 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off. 24 On the View menu. This means there is no gap in the property lines. The tags display more prominently in this view. 20 Click Load. 27 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Visibility/Graphics. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. 22 Select M_Property Line Tag. 30 Tag the three remaining property lines. If the gap is not closed. click Training Files. right-click in the Design Bar.rfa and click Open. clear Leader. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. and click OK. 16 Click OK. Before adding property line segment tags. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor. Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. 23 In the Tags dialog box. 31 On the View Control Bar. open the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Annotations folder. 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference.Notice that after you complete the last line. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor. 780 | Chapter 23 Site . Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. 19 In the Tags dialog box.dwg and click OK. and click Shading with Edges. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. and click Drafting. click the Imported Categories tab. click Tag. 28 On the Options Bar. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 29 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. the original DWG file remains visible in the view. and open the folder. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments. click to place it. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. click Model Graphics Style. click to place the property lines.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Save. In this exercise. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog box. verify that it is a subcategory of Topography. enter the name Working Contour. you loaded and tagged the property line segments. you created two sets of property lines. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. In the next exercise. In the final step. 33 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography. this project file is required in its current state. and click Wireframe. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. 2 On the Settings menu. you modify site settings and contour line visibility. You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. In the Object Styles dialog box. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography. click Model Graphics Style.32 On the File menu. and click OK. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. 4 Under Modify Subcategories. click New. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog box. Using Site Tools | 781 . Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Site-in progress. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings. click Object Styles.

specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1. click Close. under Contour Line Display. Under Line Color. select Dash dot. Under Subcategory. 10 Under Additional Contours. Under Range Type. enter 1000. click Site Settings. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu. Under Line Pattern. Creating Topographic Subregions. 12 On the File menu. specify an interval of 1000 mm passing through elevation 0. The object style subcategory.0 mm. displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified.6 In the Object Styles dialog box. 7 Click OK. The next exercise requires a new dataset. select Working Contour. In this exercise. 11 Click OK. Working Contour. you created a new object style subcategory for topography. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start. You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. select Single Value. 9 In the Site Settings dialog box. 782 | Chapter 23 Site . Click Yes when prompted to save changes. select a shade of Brown.

click Open. the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner. such as material. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. NOTE In the Metric dataset. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and islands.In the next exercise. click Lines.rvt file located in the Metric folder. parking areas. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces. Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. Although the exact dimensions are not important. try to replicate the location and proportion. you create subregions in order to define roads. 2 On the Design Bar. and islands. TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles. parking areas. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar. Using Site Tools | 783 . The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide. you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise. click the Training Files icon. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop. you create topographic subregions to define roads. click Subregion. Open the m_Site.

the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each. and then click the down arrow to open the Material dialog box. and click OK. under Identity Data. click Properties. click the Value for Material. 5 In the Element Properties dialog box. 784 | Chapter 23 Site . Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site .Tarmacadam. You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. the toposurface and its contour data remain one element.Tarmacadam for Name. and click OK. 6 In the Materials dialog box. click Shading with Edges. 9 On the View menu. and double-click Topography Schedule. under Materials and Finishes. enter Parking for Name. 8 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser.Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. click Finish Sketch. Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar. select Site . When you finish the sketch in a later step. expand Schedules/Quantities.

click Finish Sketch. 12 On the View Control Bar. under Floor Plans. 20 On the Design Bar. double-click Site. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces. In this training project. click Model Graphics Style. click Edit Boundary. 21 On the Design Bar. and click Shading with Edges. Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser. TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate. Within each subregion. As you create new subregions. and click Hidden Line. Notice that the project area has increased. additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area. click Lines. Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser. Precise dimensions are not important at this time. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration. 18 In the Project Browser. Delete overlapping lines. 16 On the Design Bar. under Schedules/Quantities. double-click Topography Schedule.NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch. 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps. under Floor Plans. you apply different materials such as grass and concrete. and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. 14 On the Options Bar. 22 In the upper-right parking area. use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. click Model Graphics Style. This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. click Subregion. they display within this schedule. 17 On the View Control Bar. double-click Site. Using Site Tools | 785 .

enter Island . click Properties. 29 In the Project Browser. 25 In the Materials dialog box. Name each region Island . Using the techniques learned in previous steps. under Schedules/Quantities. You must sketch each region separately.23 On the Design Bar.Grass for Name. and apply the material Site . under Identity Data. Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information. under Materials and Finishes. select Site . double-click Topography Schedule. and then click the down arrow to open the Material dialog box. click the Value for Material. 26 In the Element Properties dialog box. 27 On the Design Bar. 28 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.Grass. add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration. and click OK. 24 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Finish Sketch. double-click Site.Grass for Name. 786 | Chapter 23 Site .Grass. and click OK.

under Floor Plans. double-click Site. under Schedules/Quantities.walkway. Name the subregion Walkway. click Lines. 32 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. Add the concrete walkway 31 In the Project Browser. 34 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration. double-click Topography Schedule. 35 On the Design Bar. Notice that the schedule has been updated. click Subregion. and apply the material Concrete .Cast-in-Situ Concrete .30 In the Project Browser. Using Site Tools | 787 . so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm. WARNING Subregions cannot intersect. 33 On the Design Bar.

you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area. 38 Navigate to your preferred folder. the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points. If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion. Site tutorial-in progress. Grading the Toposurface In this exercise. Grading the Toposurface. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt. there is still only one toposurface. double-click Topography Schedule. under Schedules/Quantities. name the project Site tutorial-in progress. you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface. When you use the grading tool. 37 On the File menu. 788 | Chapter 23 Site .NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project. 36 In the Project Browser. 39 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. this project file is required in its current state. click Save As. Notice that the schedule has been updated. and click Save.

6 On the Design Bar. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. see the tutorial. double-click Site. Using Site Tools | 789 . select Existing for Phase Created. Notice that the toposurface displays differently. RELATED For more information regarding phasing. select Copy Internal Points. under Phasing. click . stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. under Floor Plans. A warning dialog box is displayed. click Graded Region.Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser. 8 Select the topographic surface. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. 3 On the Options Bar. 7 In the Graded Region dialog box. 2 Select the toposurface. click Modify. Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. and click Select and Edit. and click OK. 5 On the Design Bar. Using Phasing. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface.

790 | Chapter 23 Site . and new. demolished. The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area. Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing.Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. 10 Press DELETE. Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area.

15 On the Options Bar. 12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration. Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar. specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm. click Point. Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway. 16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration. 13 Press DELETE. and click Hidden Line.11 On the View Control Bar. Using Site Tools | 791 . click Model Graphics Style.

Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu. The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat. click Finish Surface. 19 On the View Control Bar. 18 On the View toolbar. 792 | Chapter 23 Site . click Model Graphics Style.17 On the Design Bar. click View Properties. 20 On the View toolbar. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. click . click . and click Shading with Edges.

23 Select the toposurface. and delete it. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project. under Phasing. specify Existing for Phase. 26 On the File menu. click Lines. you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad. nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify. specify New Construction for Phase. this project file is required in its current state. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area. Site tutorial-in progress. click View Properties. 24 On the View menu. sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration. you can delete it. only the original toposurface displays. because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. you create a building pad. Adding a Building Pad In this exercise. Only the graded topography displays. and click OK. click Pad. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Adding a Building Pad. NOTE By default. 25 In the Element Properties dialog box. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 4 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser. Using Site Tools | 793 . the Pick Walls command is active. 27 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. When you add a building pad. double-click Site. under Phasing. Therefore. If you have an existing building model. and click OK. 3 On the Design Bar. click Save.22 In the Element Properties dialog box. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element. under Floor Plans. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view.

click 8 On the View toolbar. and click Shading with Edges. . and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click Model Graphics Style. 7 On the View toolbar. . 6 On the View Control Bar. click Finish Sketch.5 On the Design Bar. Notice the new building 794 | Chapter 23 Site . click pad.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.90 deg. you add parking and planting components to the site surface. Site tutorial-in progress.rvt. click Save. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. this project file is required in its current state. NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad. 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 3 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. and select the parking space. click Modify. double-click Site. click Parking Component. Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Design Bar.9 On the File menu. Adding Site Components In this exercise. Using Site Tools | 795 . Adding Site Components. 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area. select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm .

7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space. click 9 On the View toolbar. click Site Component. 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Notice the new parking Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser. 12 In the Type Selector. TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task. double-click Site. and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below. . choose any tree type. click spaces. 796 | Chapter 23 Site . Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space. under Floor Plans. 8 On the View toolbar. .

15 On the View toolbar. Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface.13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below. click . Using Site Tools | 797 . 14 On the View toolbar. click . and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles.

798 | Chapter 23 Site .rvt. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. this project file is required in its current state. In the following illustration. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. and click OK. click Hidden Line. 16 On the File menu. and click Apply. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the View menu. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Tagging Site and Parking Components. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. Site tutorial-in progress. 3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed.NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. click Apply. the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered. click Save. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser. Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. double-click Site. click Tag All Not Tagged. you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. In the following exercise. under Floor Plans.

7 Under Fields. select Mark. 2 In the New Schedule dialog box. enter Space. If necessary. 8 Under Fields. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Type. Creating Parking Space Schedules. click Save. click the Fields tab. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. and click OK. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. click Schedule/Quantities. 5 Under Available fields. you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. select Mark. this project file is required in its current state. and click Add. 4 Under Available fields. enter Size. Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial.NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. select Type. 7 On the File menu. Using Site Tools | 799 . and click Add. The parking schedule is displayed. You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space. you create a parking schedule. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 6 Click the Formatting tab. Site tutorial-in progress. and under Heading.rvt. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. and click OK. and under Heading. select Parking for Category.

13 In the Parking Schedule. 11 On the Window menu. Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule. 12 In the Site plan. number the first three spaces consecutively. the selected space highlights in the Site plan. Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. under Views (all). zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. finish numbering the remaining spaces.9 On the Window menu. 14 In the Parking Schedule. 15 On the File menu. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. under Floor Plans. click Tile. 10 In the Project Browser. click Save. double-click Site. under Space. 800 | Chapter 23 Site . under Space. click Close Hidden Windows. This closes all the views except the parking schedule. This allows you to know which space you are numbering.

Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. all instances in the building model are updated. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. 801 . This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. you also simplify the modification process. and modify repetitive units. By grouping objects. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. or with those working on a different project. you create a model group for a typical hotel guest room. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. and then you create a group for a typical toilet room that is nested within the guest room group. For example.Grouping 24 Using the grouping functionality in Autodesk Revit Building. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. In this tutorial. You can also nest groups within other groups. place. you not only simplify their placement.

click the Training Files icon. and double-click Level 2. and click Rename. 9 On the File menu. 2 Enter ZR to zoom to a specific region. 10 Navigate to your preferred directory. and click Save. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. and select the bed. you create a model group for a typical hotel room. Open the m_Grouping.rvt. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 3 Draw a rectangle around the populated room. Specify a view 1 In the Project Browser. The view is zoomed in to the selected room. and expand Model. expand Floor Plans. click . and press ENTER. Create a group from drawing objects 4 Press and hold CTRL. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. Creating a Group In this exercise. Placing a Group. name the file Grouping-in progress. 8 Enter Typical guest room. After you create a model group. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. chair. The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include hotel rooms. 6 In the Project Browser. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. desk. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Save As. classrooms.rvt file located in the Metric folder. expand Views (all). 802 | Chapter 24 Grouping . You zoom in so that you can select objects in the room accurately. 7 Right-click Group 1. and typical office layouts.Creating Groups In this lesson. click Open. and two nightstands. expand Groups. 5 On the Edit toolbar.

select Typical guest room and drag it to the room below the original instance of the group. 2 Drag the group origin to the wall intersection directly below the entry door.rvt. You also mirror an existing instance of a group. using an adjacent wall as the axis of reflection. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. Grouping-in progress. 4 Snap the origin to the wall intersection below the entry door. select the group. click . A second instance of the group is added to the drawing. click Finish.Placing a Group In this exercise. Mirror a group 6 In the drawing area. Creating Groups | 803 . 7 On the Edit toolbar. select the original instance of the group. 8 Select the wall abutted by the desk and tub of the original instance as the axis of reflection. you use drag and drop functionality to place a new instance of a group in the floor plan. as shown. Drag a group into position 3 In the Project Browser. Modify the origin of a group 1 In the drawing area. 5 On the Options Bar.

Grouping-in progress. Modifying a Group. click Save.rvt. 2 On the Options Bar. 804 | Chapter 24 Grouping . select the mirrored instance of the Typical guest room group. 1 In the drawing area. When you finish the editing routine. as shown. 10 Proceed to the next exercise.You should now have three instances of the Typical guest room group in your model: two with the original orientation and one mirrored. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. Modifying a Group In this exercise. 9 On the File menu. click Edit Group. you make changes to a single instance of a group.

The new group is considered nested within the host group. 8 On the File menu. and select the desk and chair. 6 Click the exterior wall as the move end point. 3 Press and hold CTRL. 4 On the Edit toolbar. and is contained in every new instance of the host group that you place in the building model. 9 Proceed to the next lesson. 7 On the Design Bar. All instances of the Typical guest room are updated to reflect the change. the host group is also updated. you create a group that you add to a previously created group. Creating Nested Groups In this lesson. click . Creating Nested Groups. click Save. All other elements in the model are grayed out. Creating Nested Groups | 805 . When you make changes to a nested group. The edge of the desk is aligned with the exterior wall. 5 Click near the left edge of the desk as the move start point. This ensures that the modifications are propagated when each new instance of the host group is added to the building model and also when each stand-alone instance of the nested group is added. click Finish Group.The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style.

3 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Edit toolbar. 806 | Chapter 24 Grouping . When you nest the toilet room in the guest room. Change the origin of a group 5 Select the original instance of Typical guest room. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous lesson. and click Rename. expand Model. Create a group 1 In the original instance of the Typical guest room group. and press ENTER. 4 Enter Typical toilet room. 6 Drag the origin of the group to the intersection of the corridor wall and the guest room wall nearest the tub. and the wall separating the bathroom and closet. which acts as the host. make sure you also include both doors and their host walls. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. In the selection. right-click Group 1. you create a group for a toilet room that you add to the guest room group.Creating a Nested Group In this exercise. Grouping-in progress.rvt. expand Groups. click . The new group is then nested within the original group. select all the elements that make up the toilet room and closet.

verify that Multiple is clear. click Edit Group. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 In the Type Selector. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. The Typical toilet room group is nested in the Typical guest room group. Modifying a Nested Group In this exercise. you add a component to a single instance of the nested toilet room group. Modifying a Nested Group. Creating Nested Groups | 807 . select m_Pedestal_Sink-3D. Because the modified group is nested. the host group is also updated so that new instances of either group contain the new component. Grouping-in progress. 8 On the Design Bar. click Add To Group. click Save. 10 In the drawing area. and all instances are updated to include the nested group. Add a component to the model 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. everything else is available for selection. place the cursor over one of the toilet rooms and press the spacebar three times to rotate the sink to the orientation shown. click Component. select the Typical toilet room group.Create a nested group 7 On the Options Bar. When you edit the group to add the component. 12 On the File menu. click Finish Group. all instances of the nested group are updated in the building model. 3 In the drawing area. 9 On the Options Bar. The elements of the group are grayed out in every instance. 11 On the Design Bar.rvt.

9 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. click Edit Group. click Finish Group.4 Place the sink on the wall with the toilet in any instance of the Typical toilet room. click Modify. and select the nested toilet room group. 7 Press TAB. 10 In the drawing area. 808 | Chapter 24 Grouping . Edit a nested group 6 Move the cursor over the same instance of the toilet room group in which you placed the sink. click Add To Group. select the sink. 11 On the Design Bar.

In subsequent exercises. Working with Groups In this lesson. Grouping-in progress. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. You then place the new group in the building model. right-click Typical guest room. and click Duplicate. having created a group that represents a typical layout. click Save.All instances of the nested group are updated with the change. you draw an axis of reflection at the midpoint of the building model so that the group is mirrored from its location at the top of the building model to a location at the bottom. and then save the tags as an attached detail group. and customize it so that it fits in the available space and has the correct group nested within it. you add door tags to a group. You also create a detail group in the level 2 floor plan that you add to the building model in a different floor plan view. 13 Proceed to the next lesson. and press ENTER. but automatically create a new group as part of the process to fix the group. 2 Right-click Typical guest room 2. When you load the group from the library into a new project. Duplicating a Group In this exercise. 12 On the File menu. Working with Groups | 809 . A new group definition (Typical guest room 2) is displayed in the Project Browser. because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. you use the Duplicate command to create a group based on an existing group. 3 Enter Corner guest room. under Groups. You then customize the new group for use in the current building model. Lastly. you save it to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous lesson. You create a group based on an existing group by using the Duplicate command. After you finish the modified group.rvt. Use Project Browser to duplicate a group 1 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. You use functionality that allows you to not only fix inconsistencies among instances of a group. Working with Groups. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects.

9 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. click . This is because the corner room is smaller than the interior rooms. click Edit Group. Edit a duplicated group 8 In the drawing area. 6 On the Options Bar. and press DELETE. click Finish. where the corridor wall and the exterior wall intersect. Nest a group 17 In the Project Browser. select Corner toilet room. and select the desk and chair.Place a duplicated group 4 Drag Corner guest room from the Project Browser to the vacant room in the northwest corner of the building. 12 Move the desk and chair so that they are within the room. 10 Press and hold CTRL. click OK. 810 | Chapter 24 Grouping . click Remove From Group. select the Corner guest room group. to specify the group origin. click Finish Group. 16 Select the same toilet room group. Notice that the desk overlaps the exterior wall. 5 Click at the upper-right corner of the room. 15 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Edit toolbar. and drag it into the corner guest room. 14 Select the toilet room. 7 After a warning message displays.

21 On the Design Bar. TIP If a warning appears indicating that there are errors that cannot be ignored. select the Corner guest room group. click Add To Group. select the Corner toilet room group. 23 On the Design Bar. and click to specify the end point. TIP To help find the midpoint of the wall. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. 22 In the drawing area. click Finish to finish placing the group. 28 Drag the cursor to the left. staying perpendicular to the corridor wall. past the exterior wall. click Finish Group. A new instance of the Corner guest room group is added to the southwest corner of the building model. Working with Groups | 811 . click 26 On the Options Bar. 29 On the File menu.Use the inside corner of the exterior wall and the corridor wall as the origin of the group. click Unjoin Elements to resolve the errors. Mirror along a drawn axis of reflection 24 In the drawing area. 20 On the Options Bar. 27 Click the midpoint of the corridor wall as the start point of the axis of reflection as shown. Creating a Detail Group. select the Corner guest room group. enter SM on your keyboard to limit snaps to midpoints. 25 On the Edit toolbar. 19 In the drawing area. 18 On the Options Bar. click . click Save. for Axis. click Edit Group.

click to draw a rectangular region. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. and select a point on the interior of the vertical wall. click Text. click to add an arc leader. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. Draw a filled region 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 4 Move the cursor down and to the right. 7 On the Options Bar. Add a text note 6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 10 Enter Tile. 812 | Chapter 24 Grouping . 3 Click the lower-left endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. click Finish Sketch. 9 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. 2 On the Options Bar. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. click Filled Region. 5 On the Design Bar.rvt.Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. and click Modify on the Design Bar. Grouping-in progress. 8 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Because the detail group contains variables. expand Groups. double-click Level 2. 3 On the Options Bar. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. 12 On the Edit toolbar. Modify a group origin 16 In the drawing area. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group.rvt. 20 On the File menu. 19 Drag an instance of the Elevator lobby tile group from the Project Browser into the level 3 view. under Floor Plans. click Tag. and select the note and the filled region. you add door tags to the Typical toilet room group. and expand Detail. Working with Groups | 813 . 4 Place two door tags in the original instance of the Typical toilet room. Grouping-in progress. and press ENTER. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. double-click Level 3. Using Attached Detail Groups. clear Leader. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. 13 In the Project Browser. as shown. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. it cannot be added to a group in the same manner that a drawing component can be added. 15 Enter Elevator lobby tile. you must manually attach it to each instance of the Typical toilet room group.Create a detail group 11 Press and hold CTRL. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous lesson. as shown. click . 14 Right-click Group 1. click Save. Add a group instance to a different drawing view 18 In the Project Browser. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. and click Rename.

and press ENTER. A warning dialog box is displayed. 12 On the Options Bar. informing you that an attached detail group has been created for the Typical toilet room group. press and hold CTRL. press TAB. expand Attached Detail. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. (this group is just below the original instance of the Typical guest room group). 7 On the Edit toolbar. 13 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog box.5 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and select the nested Typical toilet room group. select Door tags. click . and click OK. and select the two door tags. 9 Right-click Group 1. and click Rename. click Place Detail. and expand Typical toilet room. 814 | Chapter 24 Grouping . The new instance of the attached detail group is added at the same relative position and orientation as in the original instance of the model group. 10 Enter Door tags. 8 In the Project Browser. expand Groups. Place a detail group in another group instance 11 Move the cursor over the Typical toilet room group.

and click Open. 3 Click Save.rvg. click to specify the start point of the square. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog box. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Groups. click Save to Library ➤ Save Group. click Load from Library ➤ Load Group. and expand Model. 14 On the File menu. 10 On the Options Bar. NOTE Groups containing nested groups cannot be saved. as shown. select Typical toilet room for Group To Save. click Wall. ■ ■ ■ In the New Project dialog box. Save a group to a library 1 On the File menu.rvt. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog box. therefore. drag it into the drawing area. and place it in the upper-right corner of the square. and then drag the cursor so that all the walls in the square are 6000 mm long. click Save. Grouping-in progress. Saving and Loading Groups. navigate to the directory where you saved the group. Working with Groups | 815 . 2 In the Save Group dialog box. Load the group in a new project 4 On the File menu. click to draw a square. Sketch walls 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rte file located in the Metric folder. click OK. 5 In the New Project dialog box. click Browse.NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. Select the m_Tutorial_Default. 13 Select Typical toilet room. click the Training Files icon. and click Open. 11 In the drawing area. under Template file. 6 On the File menu. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous lesson. 7 In the Load Group dialog box. select Typical toilet room. Place an instance of the loaded group 12 In the Project Browser. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. click New ➤ Project. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. click OK. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project.

Because one of the wall-hosted components in the group does not have a wall in the mirrored group. 816 | Chapter 24 Grouping . Loaded_Group. The toilet and the tub are wall-hosted components whose hosts are not part of the group. 15 On the File menu. Automatically Creating a Group In this exercise. select the instance of Typical toilet room. the software gives you the option of fixing the inconsistency by creating a new group. 1 In the drawing area. 16 Enter Loaded_Group for File name.IMPORTANT Be sure to line up the outline of the group with the exterior surface of the walls. so it is important to place the group accurately in order to use the walls you sketched. and click Save. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. 2 On the Edit toolbar. click Save. 14 On the Options Bar. Automatically Creating a Group. except for the wall-hosted component for which there is no wall. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. The new group is created automatically and contains the same components as the existing group. click . you mirror the instance of the Typical toilet room group you added to the new project in the previous exercise. The Typical toilet room model group is added to the new project. 3 Select the wall shared by the toilet and the sink as the axis of reflection. click Finish.

Click Yes when prompted to save the drawing. The tub component is not included in the new group because there is no wall to host it.Because there is no wall to host the tub in the mirrored instance. click Create new group types. and click OK. 6 On the Design Bar. 5 In the Fix Inconsistent Groups dialog box. Working with Groups | 817 . a warning dialog box is displayed. 7 On the File menu. click Close. The Typical toilet room model group is mirrored. click Fix Groups. and a new group (Typical toilet room 2) is created. click Modify. 4 In the warning dialog box.

818 | Chapter 24 Grouping .

819 . and beams to Level 1. you create framing elevations and add structural braces to the building model. You begin by adding the structural walls. you copy the entire structure and use the paste-align command to add the structure to the three levels above it.Structural 25 In this tutorial. In the final lesson. columns. After completing level 1. you use the structural tools in Autodesk Revit Building to create a building model skeleton.

you add structural walls to a project file where only the grid lines have been added. You use an imported DWG file as an underlay to trace the initial outline of the structural walls. you import a DWG file into the Level 2 floor plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.Adding Structural Walls In this lesson. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Importing a DWG for Use as an Underlay In this exercise. click the Training Files icon. You then sketch additional walls to which you add dimensions and constraints. click Open.rvt file located in the Metric folder. Open the m_Structural. 820 | Chapter 25 Structural . The DWG file contains walls that you trace in the next exercise to create the structural walls.

In this exercise. you use the linked DWG file to trace the initial set of structural walls. verify that the Level 2 floor plan is open. and add the remaining structural walls to the building model. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Link (instead of import). and select m_wall-import. 2 On the File menu. you imported a DWG file. Sketching Structural Walls In this exercise. and select Origin to origin. select Invert colors. If necessary.Import the DWG file 1 Before importing the DWG file. 9 Navigate to a folder of your choice and save the project as Structural_tutorial. The DWG file is displayed on the Level 2 floor plan.dwg from the Metric folder. under Import or Link. 7 Click Open. DXF. 8 On the File menu. This file is used in the next exercise. DGN. and double-click Level 2. This project file is required for all subsequent exercises in this tutorial. click Save As. Sketching Structural Walls. click the Training Files icon. 5 Under Layer/Level Colors. select Automatically place. expand Views (all). SAT. Select Current view only. to trace the initial set of structural walls.rvt. After you trace the walls. 4 In the Import/Link dialog box. click Import/Link ➤ DWG. 6 Under Positioning. you turn off the visibility of the DWG file. expand Floor Plans. Adding Structural Walls | 821 . go to the Project Browser. 3 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog box. Select All for Layers.

rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Right-click the Design Bar. In addition.Dataset This exercise requires the project file.200mm. 822 | Chapter 25 Structural . Sketch structural walls by tracing the DWG 2 On the View menu. 4 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. This requires the bottom of the primary view range to be set to the level below in order to see the walls as you sketch them. 3 Draw a zoom region around the upper set of lines. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. proceed to Step 2. Structural_tutorial. rather than the height. their Structural Usage parameter is automatically set to Bearing. Structural walls differ from non-structural walls in several ways. First. click Structural Wall. and click Structural. select Basic Wall: Generic . Display the Structural tab of the Design Bar 1 If the Structural tab already displays on the Design Bar. 5 In the Type Selector. you can add a structural wall by specifying the depth of the wall.

you sketch a chain of walls over the path highlighted in the following illustration. Click . and click the next line intersection. 7 Begin the first wall by selecting the intersection of the upper left corner of the line chain. specify the following: ■ ■ Select Depth. Adding Structural Walls | 823 . In the steps that follow. and click to specify the next wall endpoint. Select Finish Face: Exterior for Loc Line. Specify Level 1. 9 Move the cursor downward to the next line intersection. 8 Move the cursor over the top right intersection of the line.6 On the Options Bar. and click to specify the wall endpoint. 10 Move the cursor to the right. ■ ■ ■ Select Chain.

and click to complete the chain of walls. 13 On the View toolbar. you can spin the model in a 3D view by clicking the 3D view.11 Move the cursor to the top of the line chain until a reference plane displays indicating the cursor is on a parallel plane with the slanted wall on the left. expand Views (all). Use the tools to modify 14 In the Project Browser. click . expand Floor Plans. 15 Zoom around the second chain of lines. TIP If necessary. 12 On the Design Bar. in the View toolbar. 824 | Chapter 25 Structural . and double-click Level 2. click Modify to finish the sketch.

click Modify to end the wall chain.16 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. you may want to zoom in to ensure you select the intersection of the imported lines and grid C. sketch a chain of walls over the path highlighted in the following illustration. Adding Structural Walls | 825 . When you reach the endpoint on the lower right corner of the chain. ■ Begin the wall chain by clicking the lower left intersection where the end of the line chain adjoins grid C. Click each exterior line intersection in a clockwise direction. click Structural Wall. click . 17 Using the bulleted steps below. ■ ■ 18 On the Design Bar. 19 On the View toolbar. On the Options Bar. notice that the wall options you used previously are still selected.

■ ■ ■ Select the endpoint of the left vertical wall. This is the left extent of the arc. double-click Level 2. select Basic Wall: Generic . and click OK. 25 In the Type Selector. Move the cursor upward and specify an arc radius of 180 degrees. 22 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. Select the right endpoint of the horizontal wall. specify the following: ■ ■ Clear Chain. Sketch additional structural walls 24 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.200mm. Unselected categories are not visible in the referenced view. click Structural Wall. click . 21 On the View menu. 26 On the Options Bar. clear m_wall-import. click Visibility/Graphics. 28 On the Options Bar. Click to create a three-point arc.dwg. 826 | Chapter 25 Structural . Select Wall Centerline for Loc Line. ■ 27 Follow the sequence of steps in the illustration below to add a 180 degree three point arc. 23 Under Visibility. click the Imported Categories tab. This is the right extent of the arc.Turn off the DWG visibility 20 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans.

click the value. enter 1500. 31 Add a vertical wall between the two horizontal walls as shown. Adding Structural Walls | 827 . 30 Move the cursor to the right until it intersects with the slanted wall on the right.29 Add a horizontal wall beginning at the midpoint of the left vertical wall as shown. and press ENTER. 32 On the Design Bar. If it is not. click Modify. 33 Select the vertical wall you added in the previous step and make sure the temporary dimension between the wall and the centerline of the left vertical wall is equal to 1500 mm.

Both walls are 1200 mm long. you create the final structural walls for the project.34 Select the lower horizontal wall. Create the final structural walls 37 Begin the first wall on the endpoint shown in the illustration below. 35 Zoom around the upper set of walls as shown. click the temporary dimension value between it and grid C. clear Chain. click Structural Wall and on the Options Bar. 828 | Chapter 25 Structural . 36 On the Design Bar. enter 1500. and press ENTER. In the steps that follow.

39 Create an additional 1200 mm wall as shown. 40 On the Design Bar.38 Draw the 1200 mm wall parallel to the adjoining wall as shown. click . click Modify. Adding Structural Walls | 829 . 41 On the View toolbar. Begin the wall at the top of the right vertical wall and draw it inward so that it is parallel with the wall you sketched in the previous steps.

in its current state. 830 | Chapter 25 Structural . Dimensioning and Modifying Walls. you added the remaining structural walls required for this building model. you dimension the structural walls and add an equality constraint to the dimension to keep the walls equidistant. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. You also reposition the walls to see how they adapt to changes in the design. Add an aligned dimension 1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans.42 On the File menu. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. In the next exercise. you add dimensions and equality constraints to the walls. You then make minor modifications to their position. Structural_tutorial. double-click Level 2. 2 Zoom around the lower set of walls. Dimensioning and Modifying Walls In this exercise. click Dimension. click Save. This project file is required. you used the DWG file to trace the initial set of structural walls. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. After turning off the visibility of the linked DWG.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. In this exercise.

and when it highlights. and click to place the dimension as shown. select Intersecting Walls. After you select Entire Walls. click Options to specify the wall pick options. 8 Select the dimension you added in the previous steps. the Options button becomes available. Select Wall Centerlines for Prefer. select it. On the Options Bar. In the Auto Dimension Options dialog box. and click OK. Select Entire Walls for Pick.4 On the Options Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select . click Modify. 6 Move the cursor to the left. Create an equality constraint 7 On the Design Bar. ■ ■ 5 Move the cursor over the left vertical wall. Adding Structural Walls | 831 .

9 Click the EQ symbol to make each of the segments equal. 11 Click the temporary dimension value. Modify wall position 10 Select the upper horizontal wall as shown. and enter 4000 for the distance between the wall centerline and grid B. 832 | Chapter 25 Structural .

you add structural columns.Notice the horizontal walls remain equally spaced. joists. in its current state. This project file is required. Adding Structural Columns and Beams In this lesson. Adding Structural Columns and Beams. several different beam types. You also repositioned the walls and observed how they adapted to the change in the design. In this exercise. In the next lesson. 12 On the Edit menu. you add structural columns and different beam types to the building model. and purlins to complete the Level 1 structure. you added a dimension to the structural walls and used an equality constraint to keep the walls equidistant. 13 On the File menu. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 833 . click Undo Edit dimension length. click Save. to continue with the next lesson in this tutorial.

Dataset This exercise requires the project file. 6 Add a column to C1 as shown. you use several different methods to add structural columns: you manually select grid intersections. Structural_tutorial.Adding Structural Columns In this exercise. and you place a column outside of the grids. and Level 2. Add columns to grid intersections manually 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 1. 2 On the View menu. under Floor Plans. In addition. TIP When adding the column. select Height. you use the grid intersection tool. click Structural Column. select M_W-Wide Flange-Column: W250x80. if the column orientation is not similar to the callout shown below. 4 In the Type Selector. press the SPACEBAR to rotate the column. 834 | Chapter 25 Structural . If necessary.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. you rotate columns by pressing the SPACEBAR when necessary. zoom in to place the column. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit.

and C5. click Grid Intersection.7 Add similar columns to C2. specify a point under grid A and to the right of grid 5. This option allows you to place columns at the intersections of selected column grids. and drag your cursor up and to the left as shown below. and A. 9 Use a crossing selection. TIP To create the crossing selection. C3. and select grids 1-5. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 835 . Add columns using selected grid intersections 8 On the Options Bar.

13 Press the SPACEBAR until the columns return to their original position. 14 If necessary. All of the columns on grid A rotate until they are parallel with the vertical grids. This completes this set of columns. click Finish. zoom out until you can see all the grids. 15 On the Options Bar. 12 Press the SPACEBAR again. Columns A3-5 are shown below. Rotate the columns 11 Press the SPACEBAR.10 Notice columns are added to A1-5. Notice the columns rotate until they are parallel with grid A. 836 | Chapter 25 Structural .

and 6900 mm below the exterior face of the horizontal wall above it. That is why you finished the first set and then reentered the grid intersection mode to add columns B1-5. the columns on A1-5 do not rotate. 23 Add a M_W-Wide Flange-Column: W250x80 between B4 and C5. 20 On the Design Bar. 18 If the columns are not aligned as in the illustration below. click Modify. click Structural Column. The column should be 4200 mm to the left of grid 5. click Finish.Add columns B1-5 16 On the Options Bar. TIP Notice that as you rotate these columns using the SPACEBAR. click Grid Intersection. B3-5 are shown below. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 837 . you could not have rotated them independently of each other. 24 On the Design Bar. press the SPACEBAR to rotate them. Although you could have added columns B1-5 with the first set of columns. 17 Create a crossing selection that includes B1-5. click Modify. 21 Select column A5 and delete it. 19 On the Options Bar. Add a column outside of the grid 22 On the Design Bar.

3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 5 Zoom around the right side of the building model. you add structural beams to the building model. you used various methods to add structural columns.25 On the View toolbar. click . you add beams manually. you learn how to work with these varied conditions. To add a beam using point-to-point insertion. Start the beam at the column and move your cursor up until it connects with the wall. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. expand Floor Plans. 838 | Chapter 25 Structural . select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. Adding Structural Beams and Girders. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. you specify the start and endpoint of the beam. in its current state. Structural_tutorial. Different structural conditions exist within the building model that require specific beam conditions. and you rotate the columns using the SPACEBAR. click Beam. This project file is required. In the next exercise. click Save. expand Views (all).rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. As you use the beam tool. 26 On the File menu. double-click Level 2. 2 On the View menu. Adding Structural Beams and Girders In this exercise. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. 6 Add a beam between the column shown below and the horizontal wall above it. 4 In the Type Selector. and use the grid tools to add beams automatically. Add beams using point-to-point insertion 1 In the Project Browser. In this exercise.

select Girder for Usage. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x32. TIP Select the midpoint of the wall first. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 839 . 9 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 11 On the Options Bar. 8 Zoom around the upper set of walls as shown. click Beam. click Modify.7. 12 Add a beam between the midpoint of the structural wall shown and grid A.7 On the Design Bar. and then move the cursor up to grid A. 10 In the Type Selector.

840 | Chapter 25 Structural . select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. Column Brace Ho o tal riz n Bracing Other Girder Joist Purlin Other Column* Girder Horizontal Bracing Other Horizontal Bracing Girder Joist Purlin Other Brace Horizontal Brace Girder Joist Purlin Other Other Other Horizontal Bracing Joist Other Horizontal Bracing Joist Purlin Other Horizontal Bracing Purlin Purlin Purlin Other Other Other Other Other Other *Structural walls produce the same result as columns. the Structural Usage parameter is automatically set to Girder. 14 On the Options Bar. For example. When you use the grid tool to place beams. Use the following table for other conditions. the Structural Usage parameter of each beam is automatically specified depending on the join conditions. 15 Create a crossing selection that includes grids 1 and 2.Use the grid tool to add beams between columns 13 In the Type Selector. if a beam is joined column-to-column. click Grid.

click Finish. press and hold CTRL. and press ENTER. click Beam. 23 On the Options Bar. and select grid C.16 Notice that beams are added at the grids and connected to each column. Add beams to an intersecting structural wall 20 Select the structural wall that spans grids 3 and 4. enter 8200. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. 17 On the Options Bar. click Modify. click Grid. 19 Zoom in the upper-right quadrant of the building model. 18 On the Design Bar. 21 On the Design Bar. click the temporary dimension value. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 841 . 24 Select grid 3. 22 In the Type Selector.

notice that beams connect to the structural walls that intersect grids. select Chain. Add a chain of beams 26 On the Options Bar. refer to the following steps and illustration to add two beams to grid 5. 28 On the Options Bar. Click column B5 to add the first beam. select Girder for Usage. 842 | Chapter 25 Structural . 25 On the Options Bar.Notice beams are added between columns. Click the intersection of grid 5 and the structural wall as shown to add the final beam in the chain. 27 Using point-to-point insertion. click Finish. Press ESC to end the chain. In addition. and for Usage. ■ ■ ■ ■ Click column C5 to start the beam chain. select Girder.

NOTE When you begin the beam chain at C4.29 Add a beam between A4 and the structural wall that intersects grid 4 as shown. You may need to zoom in significantly to accomplish this. Press ESC to end the chain. 31 Add a chain of beams beginning with the end of the structural wall at C4. 33 Select grid A. and ending with the structural wall that intersects grid 4 as shown. 34 On the Options Bar. Press ESC to end the chain. make sure you select the intersection of the grid lines. You can also use the shortcut key. select Girder for Usage. click Finish. Add beams that intersect other beams 32 On the Options Bar. 30 On the Options Bar. SI. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 843 . click Grid. to snap only to intersections. connecting the column at B4. 35 Zoom around the beam between A3-4.

click .7 beam that intersects it perpendicularly.The W310x67 beam spanning A3-4 supports the W310x32. and the W310x67 beam spanning A3-4 would have been two separate beams. click Grid. 36 On the Options Bar. 38 On the Options Bar. If the W310x32. 844 | Chapter 25 Structural . 37 Select grid B. it would have become the supporting beam because it was placed first. 39 On the View toolbar.7 beam had crossed grid A. click Finish.

43 In the Type Selector. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 845 . 46 Move the cursor to the right. In the steps that follow. select Girder for Usage. and click the endpoint of the short wall segment adjacent to grid 5 as shown below. double-click Level 2. enter SE (shortcut key for endpoints). you use point-to-point insertion to add the beam between the two short wall segments that adjoin grids 4 and 5. click Beam. 44 On the Options Bar. 41 Zoom around the upper structural walls between A4-5. 45 Specify the beam start point at the centerline and endpoint of the short wall segment adjacent to grid 4 as shown below. 47 On the Design Bar. 48 On the View toolbar.Add a concrete beam 40 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 42 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. click . select M_Concrete-Rectangular Beam: 200 x 500mm. click Modify.

50 Zoom around the A1-B3 region. 53 On the Options Bar. click Beam. 51 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. and click when it intersects grid 2. 846 | Chapter 25 Structural . 54 Begin the beam chain by selecting the intersection of the wall centerline and grid 3. 52 In the Type Selector. for Usage. Add remaining girders 49 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. In the steps that follow. select Girder. you add two W310x67 beams parallel to the wall that intersects grid 3.Notice the concrete beam you added in the previous step. 55 Move the cursor to the left and parallel to the wall and grid A. and select Chain. double-click Level 2.

57 On the View toolbar. and click when it intersects grid 1. Press ESC twice to end the beam placement mode. click .56 Move the cursor to the left and parallel to the wall. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 847 .

and their display within the plan view adjusts accordingly. click Beam. M_W-Wide Flange. In this exercise. Do not worry about the exact placement at this time. You also add joists and purlins to the building model. double-click Level 2.7. 5 Add one beam between the A1-2 girder and the parallel girder below it. you replace some of the existing girders with trusses. you add joists. when you use the automatic beam tool to add beams between joists. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. you added beams and girders using the point-to-point insertion method. You begin by adding W-Wide Flange joists. click Save. For example. Structural_tutorial. 848 | Chapter 25 Structural . click W310x32. in its current state.B3 quadrants. Adding Joists and Purlins In this exercise. Add the beam a few feet to the right of grid 1. under Floor Plans. In the next exercise. Structural Framing. while allowing the automatic beam tool to assign the Structural Usage parameter value depending on the join conditions. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. You then create a joist array. You used the grid tool to add beams to selected grids and learned how varied structural conditions affect the outcome of the automatically placed beams. This project file is required. 2 Zoom around the A1 .rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Adding Joists and Purlins. and purlins to the building model.58 On the File menu. under Families. the structural usage of the beams is automatically set to purlin. 4 In the Project Browser. Add a W-Wide Flange joist 1 In the Project Browser.

the Automatic option was selected by default in the Options Bar. In addition. notice that the Structural Usage parameter value is Joist. click Modify. 9 In the Element Properties dialog box. The beam needs to be 1250 mm right of grid 1. Modify the temporary dimension value if necessary. click Array. This value was set automatically because when you created the beam. 7 Select the beam you added in the previous steps. 10 Click OK. according to the table shown at the beginning of this lesson. any beam added between two girders becomes a joist when the Automatic option is selected.6 On the Design Bar. 8 With the beam selected. click on the Options Bar. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 849 . Create a joist array 11 On the Edit menu.

specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click . 850 | Chapter 25 Structural . enter 1250 and press ENTER. 15 Move the cursor to the right and parallel to grid A. Enter 14 for Number.12 On the Options Bar. Clear Group and Associate. 14 Click the intersection of the upper extent of the joist and grid A as shown to specify the array start point. Select 2nd for Move to. This creates an array of 14 joists that are parallel to grid A. Make sure the cursor is over grid A. 13 Enter SI to snap only to intersections. Once the direction is set.

7 beam from the midpoint of the first joist to the right of grid 2 that stretches perpendicularly to the next joist on the right as shown. 18 Zoom in around the area surrounding the purlin. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 851 .Add purlins 16 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. click Beam. 17 Add a W310x32.

22 Click the endpoint of the left joist as shown. and click. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click . and color within the Object Styles dialog box. NOTE You can control the structural framing line weight. Their display in plan view is dependent on their Structural Usage value. and purlins. 20 On the Edit menu. 23 Move the cursor to the endpoint of the next joist on the right. This is the array start point. 19 Select the purlin you created in the previous steps. Clear Group and Associate. 21 On the Options Bar. style. 852 | Chapter 25 Structural .Notice the difference between the line weights and patterns of the girders. click Array. joists. Select 2nd for Move to. Enter 7 for Number.

Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 853 .The purlins array along the midpoints of the joists. click . and click OK. 25 On the Options Bar. click . clear all options except Structural Framing. and create a crossing selection that includes all the structural framing members in this portion of the view. Turn on connection symbol visibility 24 Zoom in around the structural framing below A1-2. 26 In the Filter dialog box. 27 On the Options Bar.

This project file is required. and notice the connection symbols display. 31 On the File menu. click Save. You then copy the entire structure that you have designed up to this point and use the paste-align command to create the structure on the upper levels. click . to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. 854 | Chapter 25 Structural . This technique saves significant design time and ensures consistency on each level. you create new levels.28 In the Element Properties dialog box. change the following instance parameters: ■ ■ ■ Select Moment Connection Last Select Moment Connection First Click OK. click Modify. in its current state. Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels In this lesson. and adjust the view until it resembles the image below. you added different joist types and allowed the automatic beam tool to assign the Structural Usage parameter value depending on the join conditions. In this exercise. 30 On the View toolbar. Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels. 29 On the Design Bar. you create new levels and copy the level one structure to the upper levels of the building model. In the next lesson.

Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels | 855 . Dataset This exercise requires the project file. Structural_tutorial. 5 On the Options Bar. under Views (all).rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. expand Elevations. 3 Drag the upper grid control up to move the grid heads out of the way of the new levels. select Make Plan View. you create several new levels. Click to add Level 3. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Building Elevation.Defining New Levels In this exercise. These levels are required in the next exercise where you copy the existing structural components to the new levels. click Level. Create three new levels 1 In the Project Browser. Move the cursor over the right extent of Level 2. 2 Select grid 1. You need at least 3 meters of space. 6 Sketch the new level line 3000 mm above Level 2 as shown below using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Click the level line starting point 3000 mm above the left extent of Level 2.

8 On the File menu. where you copy the structural elements and paste align them to the new levels. Copy the structural elements 1 On the View toolbar. 856 | Chapter 25 Structural . Duplicating the Existing Design. These levels that are required in the next exercise. This project file is required.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. you copy the structural elements and use the paste-align command to add them to the new levels. 7 Repeat the steps above to create Levels 4 and 5 as shown. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. This technique saves you significant time compared to manually recreating the design on each level. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. in its current state. click Save. Each level is 3000 mm high. In this exercise. you created three new levels. click . Structural_tutorial.In the Project Browser. Duplicating the Existing Design In this exercise. notice that the Level 3 floor plan is displayed.

2 Draw a selection box around the entire design. and select Levels 3 and 4. Make sure the entire building model is included. press and hold CTRL. 8 On the Design Bar. Paste the structural components on the new levels 4 On the Design Bar. 5 On the Edit menu. click Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 3 On the Edit menu. click OK. select Level 2. click Copy to Clipboard. Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels | 857 . 6 In the Select Levels dialog box. Although you can select and copy the components from any view. click Modify. click Modify. 7 In the Select Levels dialog box. it is often easier and more certain to copy from a 3D view if your intent is to select the entire building model.

Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. you create a framing elevation in order to provide a view in which to place structural bracing members. in its current state. you create a framing elevation. 10 On the File menu. you create a framing elevation in order to add structural braces. You use this elevation view in the next exercise to place structural braces. In the next lesson. This project file is required. Creating a Framing Elevation In this exercise. double-click Building Elevation. Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation In this lesson. You copied the Level 1 structure elements and use the paste-align command to create the structure on the upper levels.9 In the Project Browser under Elevations. click Save. In this exercise. You then add C-channel bracing to one level and array it to the remaining levels. 858 | Chapter 25 Structural .

rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. at the midpoint between grids 2 and 3. in the Project Browser. make sure Attach to Grid is selected.Dataset This exercise requires the project file. Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation | 859 . 3 On the Options Bar. 4 Place the cursor over grid C. double-click Level 2. Create a framing elevation 1 In the Project Browser. Elevation 1-a. 5 On the Design Bar. 6 Double-click the elevation head in order to open the view. click Modify. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. click Framing Elevation. under Floor Plans. Structural_tutorial. and click. You can now view the new elevation.

Structural_tutorial. 7 On the File menu. click Save.Notice the stick framing representation. This project file is required.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. You begin by adding a set of braces to level 4. in its current state. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. You then array the braces to the remaining levels. you add structural braces to the building model. you created an elevation view design specifically to add structural braces. In this exercise. Adding Structural Braces. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. In the next exercise. You are ready to add the structural braces. Also notice that grid 3 is identified within the view. 860 | Chapter 25 Structural . Adding Structural Braces In the final exercise of this tutorial. This is because the Detail Level of this view is automatically set to coarse. you add c-channel bracing to the building model.

select the view crop box. 3 In the Type Selector. SE: Snap only to endpoints of objects. and using the shape grips. 5 Enter SM and click the midpoint of the girder located on Level 5. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. drag the left and right extents until you can see the grid heads for 2 and 3 as shown.4.Expand the view extents 1 Before adding the braces. ■ ■ SM: Snap only to midpoints of objects. Because it is often necessary to make sure you snap to the endpoints and midpoints. NOTE If necessary. Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation | 861 . you use point-to-point insertion. 4 Enter SE and click the beam endpoint at the intersection of grid 2 and Level 4. select the grids and drag the grid heads above level 5. select M_C-Channel: C75x7. click Brace. you should use the following snap shortcut keys when applicable. When adding the braces.

9 Select both braces on Level 4. click Modify. 10 On the Edit menu.The brace displays. Select 2nd for Move to. 12 Click the intersection of Level 5 and grid 2 to specify the array start point. Clear Group and Associate. The second brace is displayed. Array the braces 8 On the Design Bar. 862 | Chapter 25 Structural . Enter 4 for Number. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click . Select Constrain. The braces are arrayed to Level 1. 13 Click the intersection of Level 4 and grid 2 to specify the array endpoint. 6 Enter SM and click the midpoint of the girder located on Level 5. click Array. 11 On the Options Bar. 7 Enter SE and click the beam endpoint at the intersection of grid 3 and Level 4.

click .14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Structural Framing Tags. click Tag All Not Tagged. Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation | 863 . 16 On the View toolbar. 15 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. and click OK.

click Save. 864 | Chapter 25 Structural . you added structural braces to the design and created a brace array. In this exercise.17 On the File menu.

stairs. however. In this tutorial. All other team members can view this workset. 865 . they cannot make changes to it. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. doors. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Autodesk Revit Building®. and so on. such as walls. You can enable Worksharing for any project. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. floors. Using Worksharing. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. called Worksharing. A workset is a collection of building elements.Sharing Projects 26 When working with large building projects.

This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. In the next exercise. Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. select the desired workset. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. In a multi-story structure. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. After the project is shared. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. you can select which worksets are open or closed. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. such as a tenant interior. you specify an active workset. go to the Worksets dialog box. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Building by opening only those worksets required for your work. use Element Borrowing. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. such as annotations and dimensions. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. Elements specific to a view. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. and click Editable. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. a dialog box displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. When you are working on a shared project. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. In the lessons and exercises that follow. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog box for that element. Working in a shared project In a shared project. The first time you activate worksets within a project. When setting up Worksharing. To make a workset editable. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. you must first enable Worksharing. 866 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . ■ Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets dialog box. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset.Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. Instead. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. After learning the fundamentals.

Therefore. Generally. Experience has shown that. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. if a workset named Interior was created. Shared Levels and Grids.■ Team size You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. On this tab. Regardless of the default setting. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. Step 2: Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. ■ Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. As new members create worksets for their own use. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. This allows Revit Building to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. with each assigned a specific functional task. designers work in teams. the file is saved as the central file. not including the Project Standards. Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. When you create a new workset. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. each team member has control over a portion of the design. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. and View worksets. When creating the new worksets. Using Worksharing in a Project | 867 . The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. for a typical project. For example. In most projects. ■ Team member roles Typically. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. You should have at least one workset for each person. Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be.

On the Options Bar.Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. you work no differently then you would in the office. you should use it only when: ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. When working remotely. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. and then save the local file. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. if you know who checked out the required workset. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. save to the central file. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. After saving to the central file. In this situation. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. This makes them available to other team members. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. In this instance. your changes are saved. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. your changes propagate to the entire team. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. When you save locally (to your local file). Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. As you work. or 868 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. however. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. When you save to the central file. you can select which workset is active. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. proceeds as usual. When finished or at regular intervals. This is called “Selective Open. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. However. you should then save to your local file. When you save to the central file. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. within the local file. you make that workset editable by you. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. make any required worksets editable. Step 9: Work on the project Work on the project. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you.

To do this. In this conceptual exercise. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely using AccuRender® is supported. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. A dialog box displays suggesting that any user new to Worksharing should complete this training. and make that workset editable. The Worksets dialog box is displayed. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. Alternatively. reload the latest changes from the central file. Open the c_Worksets. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. you should check out the Materials workset. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Building. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. for instance. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. In the next exercise. Using Worksharing in a Project | 869 . This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence.■ You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible." Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. using VPN. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to default worksets. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. click Worksets. click Open. click the Training Files icon.rvt file located in the Common folder. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.

Because the interior walls appear in many views. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. Therefore. In this simple training project. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. 4 In the Worksets dialog box. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. a small number of team members are working on the building model. 9 Click OK. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. Creating new worksets 7 In the Worksets dialog box. imagine four users including yourself. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. 6 Under Show. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. 12 In the Worksets dialog box. clear Visible by default in all views. Project Standards. and Views. under Show. 11 Enter Furniture Layout. Your username displays as the present owner. For training purposes. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. 13 Click Rename. and click OK. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 5 Scroll down the list of workset names. click New. Rather than create a new workset for these elements.3 Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. turn off Families. it is better to make them visible by default. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. In this case. another is assigned the interior layout. select Workset1. 10 Click New. and notice all are editable by you. currently named Workset1. 8 Enter the name Interior Layout. Only User-Created worksets should display. 870 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . you can rename the default workset. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu.

24 Select all of the interior elements. click OK. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. 18 On the Options Bar.14 In the Rename dialog box. Using Worksharing in a Project | 871 . furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. expand Views (all). click . 15 In the Worksets dialog box. 22 On the Options Bar. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. under Identity Data. When you initially activate Worksharing. including the interior doors. stairs. You do. and double-click Level 1. 17 In the drawing area. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. however. 19 In the Element Properties dialog box. The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. under Identity Data. Subdividing the project into worksets 16 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 20 Click OK. 21 Select one of the interior walls. type the name Exterior Shell. expand Floor Plans. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. click . and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. In this training file. select Interior Layout for Workset. and walls. 23 In the Element Properties dialog box. all building model elements are assigned to that workset.

36 On the Options Bar. 31 On the View menu. click . select all of the interior elements of the building model. click the Worksets tab. and click OK. 33 Select Interior Layout. 27 On the View menu. click Visibility/Graphics. click Visibility/Graphics. click . 30 Click OK. If any interior elements remain. 872 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . under Floor Plans. select Interior Layout for Workset. 32 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. Create the central file 38 On the File menu. The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. select Interior Layout for Workset. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. and click OK. double-click Level 2. under Views (all). and click OK.25 On the Options Bar. 26 In the Element Properties dialog box. 28 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. click Save As. 29 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. under Identity Data. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. 34 In the Project Browser. click the Worksets tab. 35 In the drawing area. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. under Identity Data. 37 In the Element Properties dialog box.

45 On the File menu. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. 3 Click Open. If you have not yet completed the exercise. and click Save. 43 On the right side of the dialog box. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. you create your local file. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets. You have created a local file which is for your use only. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. click Close. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. you enabled Worksharing on a project. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. Using Worksharing in a Project | 873 . Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 8 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive.Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. and click OK. Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. Checking out worksets 9 On the File menu. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. select all the User-Created worksets. 44 Click OK. select the central file and. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. 39 In the Save As dialog box. click Non Editable. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. 4 In the Opening Worksets dialog box. select Specify. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. In this exercise. click Save As. Next. please do so before continuing. click Worksets. make sure you remember the location of this central file. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. In addition. click Worksets. and click OK. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. Now that you have created the central file. 2 In the Open dialog box. check out worksets. make modifications to the building model. 6 In the Save As dialog box. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. 7 In the File Save Options dialog box. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. 40 Click Save. under Open Worksets. click Open. 42 In the Worksets dialog box. click Options. 5 On the File menu. Checking in the worksets 41 On the File menu. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises.

874 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . 10 In the Worksets dialog box. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. On the Options Bar. under Identity Data. select Interior Layout. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. 22 On the File menu. 13 On the Worksets toolbar. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 23 Click OK. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. 12 On the Window menu. 14 In the Project Browser. If it was owned by another user. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. and double-click Level 1. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. notice the Editable Only option. 17 On the Options Bar. select Interior Layout for Name. In the Worksets dialog box. If this is selected. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. click Modify. click Worksets. click . you can still edit this wall. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. 21 Click OK. In this case. 20 On the Options Bar. 19 Under Constraints.The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. In this case. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. 16 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. 11 Click OK. expand Floor Plans. Before working on the model. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. Because this element is not owned by another user. and select Yes for Editable. and click OK. expand Views (all). Revit Building borrows it for you and applies your changes. Verify that it is cleared. click . however. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area.

Modify the building model 24 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. 29 Using the following illustration as a guide. 26 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. 33 In the Type Selector. 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. select Basic Wall: Interior . 28 In the Type Selector. click Door. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.126mm Partition (2-hr). and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. click Modify. The precise location is not important. and modify the length so that the corridor is open. click Wall. 31 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. 30 On the Design Bar. 25 Delete the door. Using Worksharing in a Project | 875 .

34 Using the following illustration as a guide. a tooltip. 876 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . The Save to Central dialog box is displayed with the path to the central file automatically filled in. displays the workset as well as the element type. In addition. 36 In the Save to Central dialog box. please do so before continuing. save to central. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. By default. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. you should perform regular saves. two users access the central file through a network connection. If you have not yet completed these exercises. In this particular case. leave this file open in its current state. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). and reload the latest changes. In the following section of this exercise. checked out worksets. it is recommended. which matches the information in the Status Bar. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. click Save to Central. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. Saving your work 35 On the File menu. and proceed to Creating a local copy. and save locally immediately afterward. Whenever you save. you created your local file. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Building and setting the username to User 2. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. You modified the building model. skip the following section. In this exercise. When working in your local file. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. add two door openings into the rooms you created. make elements editable. Throughout the process. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully 37 Click OK. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. you should relinquish all worksets. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. If you place the cursor over any of the new elements. For training purposes. Borrowed Elements is selected. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. each user must check out worksets. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. At the end of a work session.

click Worksets. instructions are staggered. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. 13 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. 16 Click OK. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. 4 Click the General Tab and. You are now the owner of that workset. This file is for your use only. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. select all the User-Created worksets. enter User 2.rvt. 11 In the Save As dialog box. and click OK. Using Worksharing in a Project | 877 . click Options. and select Yes for Editable. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 3 On the Settings menu. For training purposes. click Open. This is a system setting. 9 In the Opening Worksets dialog box. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. consider that person to be User 1. 12 In the File Save Options dialog box. You now have a local copy of the project. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. 15 Select the Exterior Shell workset. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. and click Save. under Open Worksets. and click OK. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. and reset the Username to your computer login name. and click OK. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. 14 On the File menu.Using a second Revit Building session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Building window. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. 2 Start a new Revit Building session by double-clicking the Revit Building icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. click Save As. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. 7 In the Open dialog box. 10 On the File menu. click Options. return to the Settings dialog box. one user has already created a local file. User 2: Create a local file. In addition. select Specify. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. specifically sequenced. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. 8 Click Open. select the central file and. under Username.

and double-click Level 1. expand Floor Plans. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. If it is not open. expand Views (all). 23 In the Project Browser. open it now. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. 26 On the File menu.User 1: Check out worksets. expand Views (all). click Worksets. 27 In the Save to Central dialog box. expand Floor Plans. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. it becomes the active workset. If you only have one workset checked out. 878 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . and move it upward approximately 2 meters. 18 On the File menu. select the lower exterior wall. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. 25 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. 20 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog box. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. 24 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 29 In the Project Browser. 28 Click OK. and double-click Level 1. and select Yes for Editable. 22 Click OK. 19 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. and publish changes 17 User 1 should still have the local file open. click Save to Central. modify the building model. 21 Select the Interior Layout workset. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user.

click Modify. 33 In the Save to Central dialog box. and click OK. When you save to central. and check out additional worksets 39 On the File menu. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. Therefore. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. Click Yes. 38 Click OK. Using Worksharing in a Project | 879 . and click inside any room. you should create a furniture plan view. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. 37 In the Save to Central dialog box. Before adding any furniture. 36 On the File menu. 35 Using the following illustration as a guide. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. 42 On the Project Browser. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. 43 On the Project Browser. click Save to Central. click the Worksets tab. and click Duplicate. click Save to Central. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. The changes User 2 made are apparent. the Visible by default option was not selected. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. choose any desk. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. 44 In the Rename View dialog box. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. under Floor Plans. User 1: Reload latest worksets. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. click Visibility/Graphics. 31 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. click Component. 49 On the View menu. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. 47 In the Type Selector. under Views (all). 50 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. right-click Level 1. 41 Select Furniture Layout. click Reload Latest. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. 45 On the Project Browser. and click OK. select Yes for Editable. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. 32 On the File menu. and click Rename. click Worksets.A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. and click OK. 46 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. right-click Copy of Level 1. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. under Floor Plans. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. 51 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. However. 40 On the File menu. 34 Click OK. 48 On the Design Bar.

and save 68 On the File menu. click Save to Central. 66 In the Save to Central dialog box. and click Properties. 58 In the Type Properties dialog box. 63 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. and published their changes back to the central file. 54 Click OK. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. modified the building model. Checking out worksets. click Rename. click Reload Latest. 64 Click OK. select Save to Central. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. In the final exercise of this tutorial. 56 Right-click the upper exterior wall. 53 In the Save to Central dialog box. 60 Click OK twice. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. under Show. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully 67 Click OK. leave this file open in its current state. 65 On the File menu. 70 In the Save to Central dialog box. enter Exterior Wall . click Edit/New. 59 In the Rename dialog box. 61 On the File menu. 880 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . 62 In the Worksets dialog box. 57 In the Element Properties dialog box. leave this file open in its current state. select Reload Latest. and click OK. User 1: Reload latest.200mm. and click OK. click Worksets. click Save to Central. select Project Standards. 69 On the File menu. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 55 On the File menu. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. Each user checked out worksets. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. select the following. two users worked on the same building model using worksets.52 On the File menu. If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully In this exercise.

select Make this the Central location after save. and these problems are rectified. you save the dataset as a central file. click Options. click Open. 3 In the Save As dialog box. ■ ■ ■ Using Worksharing in a Project | 881 . 8 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. click Options. Open the c_Worksets Project-Central. click Save As. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Building and setting the username to User 2. you need to set up your central and local files.Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. User 2: Create local file 12 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. The central file should still be open. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. Only one user needs to open the dataset and save the central file to a network location. Each user must have network access to the central file. 7 On the File menu. On the Settings menu. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). 4 In the File Save Options dialog box. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. and click OK. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. This is the local file for User 1.rvt file located in the Common folder. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. 5 Click Save. This exercise requires two users and. In subsequent steps. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. 10 In the File Save Options dialog box. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. Click the General tab of the Options dialog box. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Building by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. There are specific instructions for each user. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. and click Save. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. 9 In the Save As dialog box. User 1: Create local file 6 For the sake of simplicity. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Options. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. throughout this training. click the Training Files icon. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. and click OK. NOTE When you open the training dataset for this tutorial. 11 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. click Save As. Save training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. At the appropriate point in this exercise. and still have your local files open. Set the Username to User 2. finished the previous workset exercises. As each of you work. and click OK.

select the second window from the top. and click Save. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. click Options. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 28 Under Active Workset. double-click Level 1. and select Yes for Editable. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work.This Revit Building session is now set up for User 2. 19 In the File Save Options dialog box. This is a system setting. select them. and reset the Username to your computer login name. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. 15 Click Open. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 29 On the Project Browser. You have created a local file which is for your use only. select the Interior Layout workset. and click OK. 24 Select the Exterior Shell workset. click Worksets. click Open. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. and click Open. 31 On the left exterior wall. verify that Editable Only is cleared. 18 In the Save As dialog box. click Save As. under Floor Plans. In addition. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. 13 On the File menu. 30 On the Options Bar. 14 In the Open dialog box. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. User 2: Check out worksets 26 On the File menu. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. 882 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . and select Yes for Editable. and then click OK. Next. You are now the owner of that workset. select the central file and under Open Worksets. User 1: Check out worksets 22 On the File menu. if any User-Created worksets are not open. 25 Under Active Workset. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. click Worksets. 27 In the Worksets dialog box. Checking out worksets 21 Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. select Interior Layout. You are now the owner of that workset. 17 On the File menu. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. and then click OK. Afterwards. select Specify. select Exterior Shell. and click OK. return to the Settings dialog box. 23 In the Worksets dialog box.

You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. After you submit the request. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 34 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. click the File menu. 32 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. 33 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. and click Editing Requests. 39 Click OK. 35 In the Editing Requests dialog box. Leave this dialog box open until User 1 grants permission. 36 Click Grant. 37 Click Close. At this point. select the request submitted by User 2. and notice the window is in the new location. click Check Now. Using Worksharing in a Project | 883 . A message informs you that your request has been granted. User 2: Check for editability grant 38 In the Check Editability Grants dialog box.A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1.

884 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . 41 In the Save to Central dialog box. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. you requested permission to edit the element. and close 40 On the File menu. In this case.User 1 and 2: Save to Central. and click OK. select Save to Central. In this multi-user exercise. and the other user granted it. click Close. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully 42 On the File menu. to Local. select the following.

you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model.Creating Multiple Design Options 27 When working with a building model. In this tutorial. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. Using design options. 885 .

the only available command is to create a new option set. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create.Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. In the second exercise. make your final design decision. The client has asked you to create various options. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. Open the m_Urban_House. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. you can edit it. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click New. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 75 mm round columns and 50 mm round bars. In the first exercise in this lesson. With the second option.rvt file located in the Metric folder. under Option Set. you set up multiple design option sets. you design each of the structural options. click Open. After you create a design option. click the Training Files icon. For example. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. In addition. 2 In the Design Options dialog box. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. At any time in the design process. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. The first time you open the Design Options dialog box within a project. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. and each option set can have multiple schemes. In this particular case. 886 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options . you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. In the final exercise of this lesson. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). and delete the unwanted options from the project. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. each with multiple design options. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. you can have multiple sets of design options. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. After you and the client agree on the final design. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.

and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. click Column. and click Close. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. expand Views (all). add three columns. By selecting Multiple. each is constructed for interchangeability. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. 11 On the Edit toolbar. 5 On the View menu. the roof and structure systems must work together. and the third column centered between the two. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. expand Floor Plans. click 12 On the Options Bar. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. select: ■ ■ ■ . and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. select Round Column: 75mm Diameter. therefore. click Modify. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project | 887 . the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. 3 Select Option 1 (primary). click Edit Selected. In the following illustration. 9 On the Design Bar. TIP To center the middle column. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. 4 In the Project Browser.TIP In this exercise. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. or add a dimension string between the columns. In this case. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. 7 In the Type Selector. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it.

16 Zoom in around the notch construction. 888 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options . they are difficult to see in this view. Because of the size of the columns. 17 Zoom out and.15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. A copy of the three selected columns is added. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. Notice the 12 columns that you added. When you are finished. click . add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. using the same technique. 18 On the View toolbar.

Adding a beam is a two-click process. under Floor Plans. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. Use the following illustration as a guide. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. click Modify. 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. click . you add the beams that span the columns.Next. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. In it. The first click specifies the beam start point. select Round Bar : 50mm. 23 On the Design Bar. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. The second click specifies the end of the beam. 21 In the Type Selector. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project | 889 . 19 In the Project Browser. click Beam. double-click TOP OF CORE. and click at its center to set the beam start point. Zoom in on the upper right column. 25 On the Edit toolbar.

move down to the next set of columns. 28 Zoom out. 30 On the View toolbar. select: ■ ■ ■ Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. click . This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. zoom into the left column. 890 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options . and click the center point.26 On the Options Bar. and select the center of the column to add a copy. 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns.

36 In the Rename dialog box. 34 In the Design Options dialog box. click New. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project | 891 . NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. 33 Click Finish Editing. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. click Rename. under Option Set.Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. 32 In the Design Options dialog box. under Option. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. click Rename. not a new option set. 38 In the Rename dialog box. 40 In the Rename dialog box. under Option. and click OK. enter Beam for New. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. 37 Select Option 2 and. and click OK. and click OK. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). click Rename. enter Structure for New. enter Brackets for New. under Option.

There should now be two roofing design options. select Option 2. select Beam. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. 50 In the Design Options dialog box. you create the second design option. and click OK. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. 43 In the Rename dialog box. it will resemble the following illustration. name the option Louvers. 45 Under Roofing. 892 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options . This allows you to more easily manage the project. Under Now Editing. click New.Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. name the option Sunscreen. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. click Rename. click Rename. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. select Option 1 (primary). 52 Click Close. and click OK. 46 Under Option. 41 Under Option Set. under Structure. under Option. click Rename. click New. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. 48 Under Option. under Option Set. 47 Under Roofing. When finished. enter Roofing for New. 51 Under Edit. select Edit Selected. and click OK.

The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to. Using the Align tool requires two clicks. Refer to the following illustration. under Floor Plans. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. double-click ROOF TERRACE. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. 56 In the Type Selector. select M_Roof Beam.53 In the Project Browser. 55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The second click represents the plane that is moved. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project | 893 . 58 On the Tools menu. click Align. click Component.

The first click sets the move start point. on the Edit toolbar.60 After aligning the beam. Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. The second click represents the move end point. 61 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown. 894 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options . Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. 62 Select the beam and. Click to indicate the end point of the move. 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ .

67 On the Tools menu. each with multipl